SLC™ 8000 Advanced Modular

Console Manager

ConsoleFlow™
FUTURE PROOF YOUR OUT-OF-BAND
MANAGEMENT SOLUTION WITH
SCALABILITY AND FLEXIBILITY

The Lantronix® SLC™ 8000 advanced console manager is the industry’s first modular console server that provides
secure remote access to IT equipment ensuring business continuity during unplanned network outages.
Centrally Manage, Monitor and Troubleshoot SLC 8000 Highlights
Designed for system administrators and test engineers, the SLC 8000 advanced • The industry’s only modular console server offering both
console manager provides easy and secure administration and management of RJ45 and USB connectivity with user swappable I/O
modules allowing for easy upgrades and scalability
IT equipment from anywhere and at any time. Users can access the SLC 8000 device ports
• Performance monitoring can be configured to
via Telnet/SSH, or a web browser-based console client without any proprietary software.
continuously monitor your network traffic
Any IT asset that provides console or serial port management services can be managed
• Anytime, anywhere secure access to IT equipment
remotely and locally. The SLC 8000 enables users to leverage the command line interface
• Integrated dual 1 Gb Ethernet or dual 1 Gb SFP interfaces
for reconfiguring, rebooting and reloading firmware from anywhere, anytime. This can be
done over an in-band network for both public and management networks, or via out-of-band • HTML5 based remote console access

connections including dial-up (optional) and cellular connectivity (via the Lantronix G520 LTE • High performance system with up to 15 users per port
and 396 concurrent sessions
Cellular Connectivity Kit, optional). Integrated automatic failover/failback mechanism allows
users to connect seamlessly to their equipment even when one network is too congested or • Increases testing productivity as a DUT aggregator for
automated tests and diagnostic data collection
unresponsive. The users can securely access and control a wide variety of network, server,
• Minimizes cable clutter with software-programmable
and power infrastructure in data centers and distributed sites. With network performance
device port pins (DTE/DCE) to support Cisco and other
monitoring, an SLC 8000 unit can be configured to monitor network traffic with a variety of leading OEMs
metrics continuously and reliably. • Integrates with the Lantronix® ConsoleFlow™ central
management solutions

Modular Design • FIPS 140-2 certified cryptographic encryption mode for

government and military applications
The modular design of the SLC 8000 console manager enables users to simply
add or swap modules to expand the number of device ports, upgrade from a • Built-in support for environmental sensors and dry
contact access control devices
single power supply to dual, and easily introduce new serial interfaces such as USB to
support a combination of existing and new IT equipment that are connected. This reduces • Optional G520 LTE Connectivity Kit with automatic fail-
over feature
the time required to develop and deploy new services, and this flexibility minimizes capital
• SFP Transceiver Ready
expenditures while offering easy scalability and upgrades.
• The optional 16-port Ethernet Field Replaceable Unit
(FRU) is used to make a direct dedicated Ethernet
Integrated Security connection between the SLC and managed devices,
Protecting IT resources is a top priority. The SLC 8000 provides security features providing layer 2 switching functionality.

such as SSL and SSH for data encryption in addition to remote authentication
for integration with other systems already in place. For added protection, the SLC 8000
also includes firewall features to reject connection attempts or block ports and has
NIST-certified AES encryption. The SLC 8000 also supports FIPS 140-2 certified mode for
government and military applications.
Lantronix SLC 8000 Advanced Modular
Console Manager

Features and Specifications Certifications____________________________________________________

• FIPS 140-2
Device Access___________________________________________________ • FCC, CE, VCCI, UL/CUL, RCM, CB Scheme, KC*, CCC*, IPv6 ready Certified
• In-Band (10/100/1000 Base – Ethernet) 2 GbE (10/100/1000BT) ports on RJ45 or 2 * KC and CCC for select models only. Ask your regional Lantronix sales associate for details.
SFP Fiber/Copper port
• Out-of-Band (Local terminal, internal modem, external gateway)

Security and Authentication_____________________________________ How to Order:

• Enterprise-grade security Kerberos, TACACS+, AD, NIS
• Secure Shell (v2 and public key) • Local username/password
• Secure Sockets Layer (TLS v1, v1.1, • NIST-certified implementation of AES 1. Pick a baseline configuration
v1.2, v1.3) (Advanced Encryption Standards) as
• Packet filtering (firewall) specified by FIPS-197 OR OR
• Per port user permissions • FIPS 140-2 compliant cryptography
• Configurable user/group rights (Certificate #2398) 8 Port RS-232 16 Port RS-232 16 Port USB
• Remote authentication: LDAP, RADIUS,

Serial Device Port Access________________________________________

• Software programmable device ports • Simultaneous access on the same port
2 2. Choose from Ethernet copper or SFP variants
• Telnet/SSH to SLC command line • No inadvertent “breaks” - Sun break-safe
• Telnet/SSH/RAW-TCP direct to IP • Customizable multi-level user menus
address and port number • USB modem access
• HTML5 support for Java-free web • Automatic port-initiated connections to
based WebSSH/WebTelnet remote network host or neighboring port
access to console ports • Enable terminal login on any device port 2 SFP Ports
• Multiple Telnet/SSH sessions • SD card and USB 2 Ethernet Ports (SFP Transceiver Sold Separately)

Data Capture and Notification____________________________________

• Port buffering—256 KB per port • System event logs
• Port logging to local files, syslog, USB • Console event notification via email 3. Add up to 2 modules (optional)
thumb drive, SD card, and NFS share • Event string recognition (RegExp)
files (simultaneous)

Management____________________________________________________
• Front panel keypad and LCD display for • Diagnostics and port status counters
network setup • Performance monitoring utility
• Quick setup and configuration web • Packet generation utility RJ45 Module USB Module Ethernet Module
interface (SSL) • Network trace utility
• CLI setup script • Configuration audit log
• CLI (Telnet, SSH, Web Telnet/SSH or • Active user list display, port monitoring
direct serial) and timeout 4. Choose power supply
• SNMP (MIB II) compatible—v1, v2, v3, • Local subnet search for other Lantronix
v3 over TLS, custom MIBs console solutions
• Integrates with the Lantronix SLPTM • Maximum of 396 concurrent sessions
remote power management tool and and maximum 15 users per device port
Server Technology PDU at 9600 baud rate (typical)
• Integrated support for Sensorsoft devices Single/Dual AC Dual DC Adapters

Additional Protocols Supported__________________________________

• DHCP and BOOTP for dynamic IP • SSH, SSL, Telnet and UDP, PPP
address assignment with PAP/CHAP, NFS and CIFS for 5. Select optional secondary dial up, Wi-Fi or Cellular
• NTP for time synchronization connections in and out of the SLC (LTE) Out-of-band options
• FTP, TFTP, SFTP, SCP client for file • IPsec/VPN
transfers • RIP and RIPv2
• DNS for text-to-IP address name • IPv6 Ready Certified
resolution

Interfaces_______________________________________________________
• Front Panel: USB Host port, SD/SDHC slot, POTS (RJ11) modem, RS-232 console
• Back Panel: Dual Gb Ethernet or Dual Gb fiber SFP ports; RS-232 (RJ45) 300 to Dial-Up Modem SGX 5150 G520 LTE Connectivity Kit
230400 bps or USB in 16, 32, 48 ports

Environmental Sensors Support_________________________________ 6. Protect your investment with various extended

• Plug and go connectivity support for sensors and accessories used to measure/
detect temperature, humidity, power availability and dry-contact closures warranty and service options
Power___________________________________________________________
• AC model input (single/dual): 100-240
VAC, 50 to 60 Hz
• DC model input (dual): -20 to –72 VDC
• Power consumption: Less than 30W
Contact Information
Americas Asia-Pacific
Central Management____________________________________________ americas_sales@lantronix.com asiapacific_sales@lantronix.com
• Compatible with the Lantronix ConsoleFlow™ central management software
www.lantronix.com
Environmental___________________________________________________ NASDAQ: LTRX
• Operating: 0 to 50˚ C (32 to 122˚ F), 30 to 90%RH, non-condensing
• Storage: -20 to 80˚ C (-4 to 176˚ F), 10 to 90%RH, non-condensing
• Heat flow rate: 68 BTU per hour
Europe
eu_sales@lantronix.com
Physical_________________________________________________________
• Front-mid-rear mounting brackets
• Dimensions (L x W x H): 30.5 x 43.8 x 4.4 cm (12 x 17.25 x 1.75 in), 1U
• Weight: 11.1 lbs. maximum, depending on option
• Shipping weight: 15.1 lbs. maximum, depending on option

Warranty________________________________________________________
• 3 year limited warranty (extended warranty and support options available)

© 2023 Lantronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Lantronix and PremierWave are registered trademarks of Lantronix, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. SLC, ConsoleFlow and SLP are trademarks of Lantronix, Inc. All
other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Specifications subject to change without notice. MPB-00009 Rev O
 SLC™ 8000
Advanced Console Manager
User Guide
Part Number 900-704-R
Revision G September 2017
Intellectual Property
© 2017 Lantronix, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this publication may be
transmitted or reproduced in any form or by any means without the written permission of Lantronix.
Lantronix and Lantronix Spider are registered trademarks of Lantronix, Inc. in the United States
and other countries. SLC, and vSLM are trademarks of Lantronix, Inc.
Patented: patents.lantronix.com; additional patents pending.
Windows and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Firefox is a
registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation. Chrome and iGoogle are trademarks of Google
Inc. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective holders.

Warranty
For details on the Lantronix warranty policy, please go to our web site at
http://www.lantronix.com/support/warranty.

Contacts
Lantronix Corporate Headquarters
7535 Irvine Center Drive
Suite100
Irvine, CA 92618, USA
Toll Free: 800-526-8766
Phone: 949-453-3990
Fax: 949-453-3995
Technical Support
Online: www.lantronix.com/support
Sales Offices
For a current list of our domestic and international sales offices, go to the Lantronix web site at
www.lantronix.com/about/contact.

Open Source Software

Some applications are Open Source software licensed under the Berkeley Software Distribution
(BSD) license or the GNU General Public License (GPL) as published by the Free Software
Foundation (FSF). Lantronix grants you no right to receive source code to the Open Source
software; however, in some cases, rights and access to source code for certain Open Source
software may be available directly from Lantronix’ licensors. Upon request, Lantronix will identify
the Open Source components and the licenses that apply to them. Your use of each Open Source
component or software is subject to the terms of the applicable license. The BSD license is
available at http://opensource.org/licenses. The GNU General Public License is available at
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/. Your use of each Open Source component or software is subject to
the terms of the applicable license.
OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE IS DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, INCLUDING ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
SEE THE APPLICATION LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 2

Disclaimer & Revisions
All information contained herein is provided “AS IS.” Lantronix undertakes no obligation to update
the information in this publication. Lantronix does not make, and specifically disclaims, all
warranties of any kind (express, implied or otherwise) regarding title, non-infringement, fitness,
quality, accuracy, completeness, usefulness, suitability or performance of the information provided
herein. Lantronix shall have no liability whatsoever to any user for any damages, losses and
causes of action (whether in contract or in tort or otherwise) in connection with the user’s access or
usage of any of the information or content contained herein. The information and specifications
contained in this document are subject to change without notice.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the
user, at his or her own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to
correct the interference.

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A digital
device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with this User Guide, may cause interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

User Information
Class A Equipment (Broadcasting and communication equipments for office work)
Seller and user shall be noticed that this equipment is suitable for electromagnetic equipments for
office work (Class A) and it can be used outside home.
Changes or modifications made to this device that are not explicitly approved by Lantronix will void
the user's authority to operate this device.

声明
此为 A 级产品，在生活环境中，该产品可能会造成无线电干扰。在这种情况下，
可能需要用户对其干扰采取切实可行的措施。

사용자안내문

기종별 사용자안내문
A 급 기기 이 기기는 업무용 (A 급 ) 전자파적합기기로서
( 업무용방송통신기자재 ) 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기
바라며 , 가정외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을
목적으로 합니다 .

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 3

Revision History
Date Rev. Comments
March 2014 A Preliminary release.
October 2014 B Initial document for firmware release 7.1.0.0.
June 2015 C Updated for firmware release 7.2.0.0.
Changes include new operating atmosphere information and warning language in
Chinese and Korean. Software changes include additions in Telnet, SSH and TCP
timeout directions, number of sessions message, idle timeout message, VBUS
enabling, assert DTR, run web server, added mounted column information for
NFS Mounts, masked CHAP secret and DOD CHAP secret fields, USB devices in
diagnostics and addition of SSH bit option. SSL settings were removed so the
SSLv2 protocol option is no longer available.
June 2016 D Updated for firmware release 7.3.0.0.
January 2017 E Updated power cord information.
June 2017 F Updated for firmware release 7.4.0.0 and for new dual SFP transceiver port or
dual Ethernet port capability options. Updated the following:
 IPv6 Neighbor Table, Ethernet Bonding Status links, and IPv6 Forward Flag
under Network Settings.
 IKE v2, x.509 Certificate, Certificate Authority/Certificate File fore Remote Peer,
Certificate Authority/Certificate File/Key File for Local Peer, SA Lifetime,
Remote and Dead Peer settings under Network VPN.
 Enable v1/v2c, Trap Version, Alarm Delay to SNMP, and Trap User Name,
Password and Passphrase under SNMP Services.
 Added ability change and reset BootCount, BootDelay and BootLimit.
September 2017 G Updated part number.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 4

Table of Contents

Intellectual Property ________________________________________________________ 2

Warranty _________________________________________________________________ 2
Contacts _________________________________________________________________ 2
Open Source Software ______________________________________________________ 2
Disclaimer & Revisions ______________________________________________________ 3
Revision History ___________________________________________________________ 4
List of Figures ____________________________________________________________ 14
List of Tables ____________________________________________________________ 18

1: About this Guide 19

Purpose and Audience _____________________________________________________ 19
Summary of Chapters ______________________________________________________ 19
Additional Documentation ___________________________________________________ 20

2: Introduction 21
Features ________________________________________________________________ 21
Console Management __________________________________________________ 21
Power _______________________________________________________________ 22
Hardware ________________________________________________________________ 22
System Features __________________________________________________________ 24
Protocols Supported ____________________________________________________ 25
Access Control ________________________________________________________ 25
Device Port Buffer _____________________________________________________ 25
Configuration Options ___________________________________________________ 25
Device Port and Console Port Interfaces ____________________________________ 26
Network Connections ___________________________________________________ 29
Front Panel USB Ports __________________________________________________ 30
Memory Card Port _____________________________________________________ 30
Internal Modem ________________________________________________________ 31

3: Installation 32
What's in the Box _________________________________________________________ 32
Product Label _________________________________________________________ 34
Technical Specifications ____________________________________________________ 34
Physical Installation ________________________________________________________ 36
Connecting to a Device Port ______________________________________________ 36
Modular Expansion for I/O Module Bays ____________________________________ 38
Connecting to Network Ports _____________________________________________ 39
Connecting Terminals ___________________________________________________ 39

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 5

 AC Input _____________________________________________________________ 40
Modem Installation _____________________________________________________ 41
Battery Replacement ___________________________________________________ 44

4: Quick Setup 48
Recommendations ________________________________________________________ 48
IP Address _______________________________________________________________ 48
Method #1 Using the Front Panel Display _______________________________________ 49
Front Panel LCD Display and Keypads _____________________________________ 49
Navigating ____________________________________________________________ 49
Entering the Settings ___________________________________________________ 51
Restoring Factory Defaults _______________________________________________52
Method #2 Quick Setup on the Web Page ______________________________________ 52
Network Settings ______________________________________________________ 54
Date & Time Settings ___________________________________________________ 54
Administrator Settings __________________________________________________ 54
Method #3 Quick Setup on the Command Line Interface ___________________________ 55
Next Step _______________________________________________________________ 58

5: Web and Command Line Interfaces 59

Web Manager ____________________________________________________________ 59
Logging in ____________________________________________________________ 61
Logging Out __________________________________________________________ 61
Web Page Help _______________________________________________________ 61
Command Line Interface ____________________________________________________ 62
Logging In ____________________________________________________________ 62
Logging Out __________________________________________________________ 62
Command Syntax ______________________________________________________ 62
Command Line Help ____________________________________________________ 63
Tips _________________________________________________________________ 63

6: Basic Parameters 66
Requirements ____________________________________________________________ 66
Network Port Settings ______________________________________________________ 67
Ethernet Interfaces (Eth1 and Eth2) ________________________________________ 69
Gateway _____________________________________________________________ 71
Hostname & Name Servers ______________________________________________ 71
DNS Servers __________________________________________________________ 71
DHCP-Acquired DNS Servers ____________________________________________ 71
TCP Keepalive Parameters ______________________________________________ 72
Ethernet Counters _____________________________________________________ 72
Network Commands ____________________________________________________ 72

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 6

 IP Filter _________________________________________________________________ 74
Viewing IP Filters ______________________________________________________ 74
Mapping Rulesets ______________________________________________________ 75
Enabling IP Filters _____________________________________________________ 75
Configuring IP Filters ___________________________________________________ 76
Rule Parameters _______________________________________________________ 77
Updating an IP Filter ____________________________________________________ 77
Deleting an IP Filter ____________________________________________________ 78
IP Filter Commands _______________________________________________________ 78
Routing _________________________________________________________________ 79
Dynamic Routing ______________________________________________________ 79
Static Routing _________________________________________________________ 79
Equivalent Routing Commands ___________________________________________ 80
VPN ____________________________________________________________________80
Configuring an IPsec VPN Tunnel through the CLI ________________________________ 85
Security _________________________________________________________________ 86

7: Services 89
System Logging and Other Services ___________________________________________ 89
SSH/Telnet/Logging _______________________________________________________ 90
System Logging _______________________________________________________ 90
Audit Log ____________________________________________________________ 91
SMTP _______________________________________________________________ 91
SSH ________________________________________________________________ 92
Telnet _______________________________________________________________ 92
Web SSH/Web Telnet Settings ___________________________________________ 92
Phone Home __________________________________________________________ 93
SNMP __________________________________________________________________ 94
v1/v2c Communities ____________________________________________________ 96
Version 3 ____________________________________________________________ 96
V3 User Read-Only ____________________________________________________ 96
V3 User Read-Write ____________________________________________________ 96
V3 User Trap _________________________________________________________ 96
SNMP, SSH, Telnet, and Logging Commands ________________________________ 97
NFS and SMB/CIFS _______________________________________________________ 98
SMB/CIFS Share _____________________________________________________ 100
NFS and SMB/CIFS Commands _________________________________________ 100
Secure Lantronix Network __________________________________________________ 101
Browser Issues _______________________________________________________ 105
Secure Lantronix Network Commands _____________________________________ 107
Date and Time ___________________________________________________________ 107
Date and Time Commands ______________________________________________109
Web Server _____________________________________________________________ 110

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 7

 Admin Web Commands ________________________________________________ 112
Services - Web Sessions _______________________________________________ 113
Services - SSL Certificate _______________________________________________ 113
iGoogle Gadgets _________________________________________________________ 116

8: Device Ports 118

Connection Methods ______________________________________________________ 118
Permissions _____________________________________________________________ 118
I/O Modules _____________________________________________________________ 119
Device Status ___________________________________________________________ 120
Device Ports ____________________________________________________________ 121
Telnet/SSH/TCP in Port Numbers ________________________________________ 122
Global Commands ____________________________________________________ 122
Device Ports - Settings ____________________________________________________ 123
Device Port Settings ___________________________________________________ 126
IP Settings __________________________________________________________ 127
Data Settings ________________________________________________________ 128
Hardware Signal Triggers _______________________________________________ 129
Modem Settings (Device Ports) __________________________________________ 130
Modem Settings: Text Mode _____________________________________________ 131
Modem Settings: PPP Mode ____________________________________________ 131
Port Status and Counters _______________________________________________ 133
Device Ports - Power Management _______________________________________ 133
Device Ports - RPMs - Add Device ________________________________________ 135
Device Port - Sensorsoft Device __________________________________________ 137
Device Port Commands ________________________________________________ 138
Device Commands ____________________________________________________ 140
Interacting with a Device Port _______________________________________________ 141
Device Ports - Logging and Events ___________________________________________ 142
Local Logging ________________________________________________________ 142
NFS File Logging _____________________________________________________ 142
USB and SD Card Logging ______________________________________________143
Token/Data Detection __________________________________________________ 143
Syslog Logging _______________________________________________________ 143
Token & Data Detection ________________________________________________ 144
Local Logging ________________________________________________________ 146
Log Viewing Attributes _________________________________________________ 146
NFS File Logging _____________________________________________________ 146
USB / SD Card Logging ________________________________________________ 146
Syslog Logging _______________________________________________________ 146
Logging Commands ___________________________________________________ 147
Console Port ____________________________________________________________ 148
Console Port Commands _______________________________________________ 149

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 8

 Internal Modem Settings ___________________________________________________ 150
Setting Up Internal Modem Storage _______________________________________ 150
Internal Modem Commands _____________________________________________ 154
Host Lists ______________________________________________________________ 155
Host Parameters ______________________________________________________ 156
Host Parameters ______________________________________________________ 157
Host List Commands __________________________________________________ 158
Scripts _________________________________________________________________ 159
Scripts ______________________________________________________________ 161
User Rights __________________________________________________________ 162
Set Script CLI Commands ______________________________________________163
Show Script CLI Commands ____________________________________________ 164
Batch Script Syntax ___________________________________________________ 165
Interface Script Syntax _________________________________________________ 165
Primary Commands ___________________________________________________ 166
Secondary Commands _________________________________________________ 168
Control Flow Commands _______________________________________________ 169
Sample Scripts _______________________________________________________ 170
Batch Script—SLC CLI _________________________________________________ 172
Sites __________________________________________________________________ 174
Modem Dialing States _____________________________________________________ 178
Dial In ______________________________________________________________ 178
Dial-back ____________________________________________________________ 179
Dial-on-demand ______________________________________________________ 180
Dial-in & Dial-on-demand _______________________________________________ 180
Dial-back & Dial-on-demand _____________________________________________ 181
CBCP Server and CBCP Client __________________________________________ 181
CBCP Server ________________________________________________________ 182
CBCP Client _________________________________________________________ 182
Key Sequences ______________________________________________________ 183

9: USB/SD Card Port 184

Set Up of USB/SD Card Storage ____________________________________________ 184
Data Settings ________________________________________________________ 188
Modem Settings ______________________________________________________ 188
Text Mode ___________________________________________________________ 189
PPP Mode __________________________________________________________ 190
IP Settings __________________________________________________________ 191
Manage Files ____________________________________________________________ 191
USB Commands _________________________________________________________ 192
SD Card Commands ______________________________________________________ 192

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 9

 10: Remote Power Managers 193
Devices - RPMs _________________________________________________________ 193
RPMs - Add Device ___________________________________________________ 196
RPMs - Manage Device ___________________________________________________ 199
RPMs - Outlets __________________________________________________________ 202
RPM Shutdown Procedure _________________________________________________ 203
Optimizing and Troubleshooting RPM Behavior _________________________________ 205
RPM Commands _________________________________________________________ 206

11: Connections 209

Typical Setup Scenarios for the SLC Unit ______________________________________ 209
Terminal Server ______________________________________________________ 209
Remote Access Server _________________________________________________ 210
Reverse Terminal Server _______________________________________________ 210
Multiport Device Server ________________________________________________ 211
Console Server _______________________________________________________ 211
Connection Configuration _______________________________________________ 212
Connection Commands ________________________________________________ 214

12: User Authentication 217

Authentication Commands ______________________________________________219
User Rights _____________________________________________________________ 220
Local and Remote User Settings ____________________________________________ 221
Adding, Editing or Deleting a User ________________________________________ 222
Shortcut ____________________________________________________________ 226
Local Users Commands ________________________________________________ 226
Local User Rights Commands ___________________________________________ 227
Remote User Commands _______________________________________________ 228
Parameters __________________________________________________________ 228
NIS ___________________________________________________________________229
NIS Commands ______________________________________________________ 232
LDAP __________________________________________________________________ 233
LDAP Commands _____________________________________________________ 238
RADIUS ________________________________________________________________ 239
RADIUS Commands ___________________________________________________ 242
User Attributes & Permissions from LDAP Schema or RADIUS VSA _____________ 243
Kerberos _______________________________________________________________ 245
Kerberos Commands __________________________________________________ 248
TACACS+ ______________________________________________________________ 249
TACACS+ Commands _________________________________________________ 252
Groups ________________________________________________________________ 253
Group Commands ____________________________________________________ 256

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 10

 SSH Keys ______________________________________________________________ 257
Imported Keys _______________________________________________________ 257
Exported Keys _______________________________________________________ 257
Imported Keys (SSH In) ________________________________________________ 259
Host & Login for Import _________________________________________________ 259
Exported Keys (SSH Out) _______________________________________________ 259
Host and Login for Export _______________________________________________ 260
SSH Commands ______________________________________________________ 262
Custom Menus __________________________________________________________ 264
Custom User Menu Commands __________________________________________ 267

13: Maintenance 271

Firmware & Configurations _________________________________________________ 271
Zero Touch Provisioning Configuration Restore ______________________________ 271
HTTPS Push Configuration Restore _______________________________________ 272
Internal Temperature __________________________________________________ 274
Site Information ______________________________________________________ 274
SLC Firmware ________________________________________________________ 274
Boot Banks __________________________________________________________ 275
Load Firmware Via Options _____________________________________________ 275
Configuration Management _____________________________________________ 276
Manage Files ________________________________________________________ 277
Administrative Commands ______________________________________________278
System Logs _________________________________________________________ 281
System Log Command _________________________________________________ 282
Audit Log _______________________________________________________________ 283
Email Log ______________________________________________________________ 284
Diagnostics _____________________________________________________________ 286
Diagnostic Commands _________________________________________________ 288
Status/Reports __________________________________________________________ 291
View Report _________________________________________________________ 291
Status Commands ____________________________________________________ 293
Emailing Logs and Reports _________________________________________________ 293
Events _________________________________________________________________ 296
Events Commands ____________________________________________________ 298
LCD/Keypad ____________________________________________________________ 299
LCD/Keypad Commands _______________________________________________ 300
Banners ________________________________________________________________ 301
Banner Commands ____________________________________________________ 302

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 11

 14: Application Examples 303
Telnet/SSH to a Remote Device _____________________________________________ 303
Dial-in (Text Mode) to a Remote Device _______________________________________ 305
Local Serial Connection to Network Device via Telnet ____________________________ 306

15: Command Reference 308

Introduction to Commands _________________________________________________ 308
Command Syntax _____________________________________________________ 308
Command Line Help ___________________________________________________ 309
Tips ________________________________________________________________ 309
Administrative Commands _________________________________________________ 310
Audit Log Commands _____________________________________________________ 323
Authentication Commands _________________________________________________ 324
Kerberos Commands _____________________________________________________ 325
LDAP Commands ________________________________________________________ 326
Local Users Commands ___________________________________________________ 327
NIS Commands __________________________________________________________ 331
RADIUS Commands ______________________________________________________ 332
TACACS+ Commands ____________________________________________________ 333
User Permissions Commands _______________________________________________ 334
Remote User Commands __________________________________________________ 336
CLI Commands __________________________________________________________ 337
Description __________________________________________________________ 338
Connection Commands ____________________________________________________ 339
Custom User Menu Commands _____________________________________________ 343
Date and Time Commands _________________________________________________ 345
Device Commands _______________________________________________________ 346
Device Port Commands ___________________________________________________ 347
Diagnostic Commands ____________________________________________________ 351
Events Commands _______________________________________________________ 355
Group Commands ________________________________________________________ 356
Host List Commands ______________________________________________________ 357
Internal Modem Commands ________________________________________________ 358
IP Filter Commands ______________________________________________________ 359
Logging Commands ______________________________________________________ 360
Network Commands ______________________________________________________ 363
NFS and SMB/CIFS Commands _____________________________________________ 366
Routing Commands ______________________________________________________ 368
RPM Commands _________________________________________________________ 368
SD Card Commands ______________________________________________________ 371
Security Commands ______________________________________________________ 371
Services Commands ______________________________________________________ 372

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 12

 SLC Network Commands __________________________________________________ 373
SSH Key Commands ____________________________________________________ 374
Status Commands ________________________________________________________ 377
System Log Commands ___________________________________________________ 378
USB Access Commands ___________________________________________________ 379
USB Device Commands ___________________________________________________ 379
USB Storage Commands __________________________________________________ 380
USB Modem Commands __________________________________________________ 382
VPN Commands _________________________________________________________ 383

Appendix A: Security Considerations 387

Security Practice _________________________________________________________ 387
Factors Affecting Security __________________________________________________ 387

Appendix B: Safety Information 388

Safety Precautions _______________________________________________________ 388
Fuse Caution Statement ________________________________________________ 388
Cover ______________________________________________________________ 388
Power Plug __________________________________________________________ 388
Input Supply _________________________________________________________ 389
Grounding ___________________________________________________________ 389
Rack _______________________________________________________________ 389
Port Connections _____________________________________________________ 389

Appendix C: Adapters and Pinouts 390

Appendix D: Protocol Glossary 393

Appendix E: Compliance Information 395

RoHS, REACH and WEEE Compliance Statement ______________________________ 396

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 13

List of Figures

Figure 2-1 SLC 8048 Unit (Front Side) - Part Number SLC 804812N-01-S ____________________ 23
Figure 2-2 SLC 8048 Unit Samples (Back Side) - Part Number SLC80482201S________________ 24
Figure 2-3 Three 16-Port USB I/O Modules Installed in Bays 1, 2, & 3 with Dual Ethernet Port ____ 27
Figure 2-4 One 16-Port USB I/O Module Installed in Bay 1 with Dual Ethernet Port _____________ 27
Figure 2-5 One 16 RJ-45 Serial Port I/O Module Installed
in Bay1 & Two 15 USB I/O Module Installed Bays 2 & 3 with Dual SFP Port _________________ 27
Figure 2-6 SFP Port LEDs _________________________________________________________ 28
Figure 2-8 Console Port (Front Side) _________________________________________________ 28
Figure 2-10 Dual Ethernet Network Connection _________________________________________ 29
Figure 2-11 Inserting SFP Transceiver Module into the SFP Por ____________________________ 29
Figure 2-12 Dual USB Ports ________________________________________________________ 30
Figure 2-13 Memory Card Port ______________________________________________________ 30
Figure 2-14 Internal Modem Location _________________________________________________ 31
Figure 3-3 Product Label___________________________________________________________ 34
Figure 3-7 Sample Device Port Connections (Back Side) _________________________________ 38
Figure 3-9 AC Power Input _________________________________________________________ 40
Figure 4-2 Front Panel LCD Display and Five Button Keypad (Enter, Up, Down, Left, Right) ______ 49
Figure 4-5 Quick Setup ____________________________________________________________ 53
Figure 4-6 Quick Setup Completed in Web Manager _____________________________________ 55
Figure 4-7 Home _________________________________________________________________ 55
Figure 4-8 Beginning of Quick Setup Script ____________________________________________ 56
Figure 4-9 Quick Setup Completed in CLI _____________________________________________ 57
Figure 5-1 Web Page Layout _______________________________________________________ 59
Figure 5-2 Sample Dashboards _____________________________________________________ 60
Figure 6-1 Network > Network Settings _______________________________________________68
Figure 6-2 Network Settings > SFP NIC Information & Diagnostics __________________________69
Figure 6-3 Network > IP Filter ______________________________________________________ 74
Figure 6-4 Network > IP Filter Ruleset (Adding/Editing Rulesets) ___________________________ 76
Figure 6-5 Network > Routing _______________________________________________________ 79
Figure 6-6 Network > VPN _________________________________________________________ 81
Figure 6-7 Network > Security ______________________________________________________ 87
Figure 7-1 Services > SSH/Telnet/Logging_____________________________________________ 90
Figure 7-2 Services > SNMP _______________________________________________________ 94
Figure 7-3 Services > NFS & SMB/CIFS ______________________________________________ 99
Figure 7-4 Services > Secure Lantronix Network _______________________________________ 102

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 14

 Figure 7-5 IP Address Login Page __________________________________________________ 103
Figure 7-6 SSH and Telnet Opening File Popups_______________________________________ 103
Figure 7-7 SSH or Telnet CLI Session _______________________________________________ 104
Figure 7-8 Disabled Port Number Popup Window ______________________________________ 105
Figure 7-9 Services > Secure Lantronix Network > Search Options_________________________106
Figure 7-10 Services > Date & Time ________________________________________________ 108
Figure 7-11 Services > Web Server ________________________________________________ 110
Figure 7-12 Web Sessions ________________________________________________________ 113
Figure 7-13 SSL Certificate________________________________________________________ 114
Figure 7-14 iGoogle Gadget Example________________________________________________ 117
Figure 8-2 Devices > Device Status _________________________________________________ 120
Figure 8-3 Devices > Device Ports __________________________________________________ 121
Figure 8-4 Device Ports > Settings __________________________________________________ 125
Figure 8-6 Device Ports - Power Management _________________________________________ 134
Figure 8-7 Device Ports > RPMs - Add Device _________________________________________ 136
Figure 8-8 Devices > Device Ports > Sensorsoft _______________________________________ 137
Figure 8-9 Sensorsoft Status ______________________________________________________ 138
Figure 8-10 Devices > Device Ports - Logging & Events _________________________________ 144
Figure 8-11 Devices > Console Port _________________________________________________ 148
Figure 8-12 Devices > Internal Modem_______________________________________________ 151
Figure 8-13 Devices > Host Lists ___________________________________________________ 155
Figure 8-14 View Host Lists _______________________________________________________ 157
Figure 8-15 Devices > Scripts______________________________________________________ 160
Figure 8-16 Adding or Editing New Scripts ____________________________________________ 161
Figure 8-21 Devices > Sites _______________________________________________________ 175
Figure 9-1 Devices > USB / SD Card ________________________________________________ 185
Figure 9-2 Devices > SD Card > Configure ___________________________________________ 185
Figure 9-3 Devices > USB > Configure_______________________________________________ 186
Figure 9-4 Devices > USB > Modem ________________________________________________ 187
Figure 9-5 Firmware and Configurations - Manage Files _________________________________ 191
Figure 10-1 Devices > RPMs ______________________________________________________ 193
Figure 10-2 RPM Shutdown Order __________________________________________________ 194
Figure 10-3 RPM Notifications _____________________________________________________ 195
Figure 10-4 RPM Raw Data Log ____________________________________________________ 195
Figure 10-5 RPM Logs ___________________________________________________________ 196
Figure 10-6 RPM Environmental Log ________________________________________________ 196
Figure 10-7 Device Ports > RPMs - Add Device________________________________________ 197
Figure 10-8 RPMs - Managed Device________________________________________________ 200

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 15

 Figure 10-9 RPMs - Outlets _______________________________________________________ 203
Figure 11-1 Terminal Server _______________________________________________________ 210
Figure 11-2 Remote Access Server _________________________________________________ 210
Figure 11-3 Reverse Terminal Server________________________________________________ 210
Figure 11-4 Multiport Device Server _________________________________________________ 211
Figure 11-5 Console Server _______________________________________________________ 211
Figure 11-6 Devices > Connections _________________________________________________ 212
Figure 11-7 Current Connections ___________________________________________________ 214
Figure 12-1 User Authentication > Authentication Methods _______________________________ 218
Figure 12-3 User Authentication > Local/Remote Users__________________________________ 221
Figure 12-4 User Authentication > Local/Remote User > Add/Edit User _____________________ 223
Figure 12-5 User Authentication > NIS _______________________________________________ 229
Figure 12-6 User Authentication > LDAP _____________________________________________ 234
Figure 12-7 User Authentication > RADIUS ___________________________________________ 240
Figure 12-8 User Authentication > Kerberos___________________________________________ 245
Figure 12-9 User Authentication > TACACS+__________________________________________ 249
Figure 12-10 User Authentication > Groups ___________________________________________ 254
Figure 12-11 User Authentication > SSH Keys_________________________________________ 258
Figure 12-12 Current Host Keys ____________________________________________________ 261
Figure 12-13 User Authentication > Custom Menus _____________________________________ 265
Figure 13-1 Maintenance > Firmware & Configurations __________________________________ 273
Figure 13-2 Network > Firmware/Config > Manage _____________________________________ 277
Figure 13-3 Maintenance > System Logs _____________________________________________ 281
Figure 13-4 System Logs _________________________________________________________ 282
Figure 13-5 Maintenance > Audit Log________________________________________________ 284
Figure 13-6 Maintenance > Email Log _______________________________________________ 285
Figure 13-7 Maintenance > Diagnostics ______________________________________________286
Figure 13-8 Maintenance > Diagnostics ______________________________________________288
Figure 13-9 Maintenance > Status/Reports ___________________________________________ 291
Figure 13-10 Generated Status/Reports ______________________________________________292
Figure 13-11 Emailed Log or Report_________________________________________________ 294
Figure 13-12 About SLC __________________________________________________________ 295
Figure 13-13 Maintenance > Events _________________________________________________ 296
Figure 13-14 Maintenance > LCD/Keypad ____________________________________________ 299
Figure 13-15 Maintenance > Banners________________________________________________ 301
Figure 14-1 SLC - Console Manager Configuration _____________________________________ 303
Figure 14-2 Remote User Connected to a SUN Server via the SLC unit _____________________ 303
Figure 14-3 Dial-in (Text Mode) to a Remote Device ____________________________________ 305

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 16

 Figure 14-4 Local Serial Connection to Network Device via Telnet _________________________306
Figure C-1 RJ45. Receptacle to DB25M DCE Adapter for the SLC unit (PN 200.2066A) ________ 390
Figure C-2 RJ45 Receptacle to DB25F DCE Adapter for the SLC unit (PN 200.2067A) _________ 391
Figure C-3 RJ45 Receptacle to DB9M DCE Adapter for the SLC unit (PN 200.2069A)__________ 391
Figure C-4 RJ45 Receptacle to DB9F DCE Adapter for the SLC unit (PN 200.2070A) __________ 392
Figure C-5 RJ45 Receptacle to DB25M DTE Adapter (PN 200.2073) _______________________ 392

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 17

List of Tables

Table 2-7 Device (DCE Reversed & DTE) Port Pinout ___________________________________ 28
Table 2-9 Console (DTE) Port Pinout ________________________________________________ 28
Table 3-1 What’s in the Box ________________________________________________________ 32
Table 3-2 Optional Accessories _____________________________________________________ 33
Table 3-4 SLC Technical Specifications ______________________________________________ 34
Table 3-5 Console Port and Device Port - Reverse Pinout Disabled _________________________ 37
Table 3-6 Device Port - Reverse Pinout Enabled (Default) ________________________________ 37
Table 3-8 Available I/O Module Configurations _________________________________________ 39
Table 4-1 Methods of Assigning an IP Address _________________________________________ 48
Table 4-3 LCD Arrow Keypad Actions ________________________________________________ 50
Table 4-4 Front Panel Setup Options with Associated Parameters __________________________50
Table 5-3 SCS Commands ________________________________________________________ 64
Table 5-4 CLI Keyboard Shortcuts ___________________________________________________ 65
Table 8-1 Supported I/O Module Configurations _______________________________________ 119
Table 8-5 Port Status and Counters _________________________________________________ 133
Table 8-17 Definitions ___________________________________________________________ 165
Table 8-18 Primary Commands ____________________________________________________ 166
Table 8-19 Secondary Commands _________________________________________________ 168
Table 8-20 Control Flow Commands ________________________________________________ 169
Table 12-2 User Types and Rights _________________________________________________ 220
Table 15-1 Actions and Category Options ___________________________________________ 308

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 18

1: About this Guide

Purpose and Audience

This guide provides the information needed to install, configure, and use the Lantronix SLC™
8000 Advanced Console Manager. The SLC unit is for IT professionals who must remotely and
securely configure and administer servers, routers, switches, telephone equipment, or other
devices equipped with a serial port for facilities that are typically remote branch offices or
“distributed” IT locations.

Summary of Chapters
The remaining chapters in this guide include:
Chapter Description
Chapter 2: Introduction Describes the SLC 8000 models, their main features, and the protocols they
support.
Chapter 3: Installation Provides technical specifications; describes connection form factors and
power supplies; provides instructions for installing the SLC 8000 advanced
console manager in a rack.
Chapter 4: Quick Setup Provides instructions for getting your SLC unit up and running and for
configuring required settings.
Chapter 5: Web and Describes the web and command line interfaces available for configuring
Command Line Interfaces the SLC 8000 advanced console manager.
The configuration chapters (6-12) provide detailed instructions for using the
web interface and include equivalent command line interface commands.
Chapter 6: Basic Parameters Provides instructions for configuring network ports, firewall and routing
settings, and VPN.
Chapter 7: Services Provides instructions for enabling and disabling system logging, SSH and
Telnet logins, SNMP, SMTP, and the date and time.
Chapter 8: Device Ports Provides instructions for configuring global device port settings, individual
device port settings, and console port settings.
Chapter 9: USB/SD Card Port Provides instructions for using the USB port.
Chapter 10: Remote Power Provides instructions for using RPMs.
Managers
Chapter 11: Connections Provides instructions for configuring connections and viewing, updating, or
disconnecting a connection.
Chapter 12: User Provides instructions for enabling or disabling methods that authenticate
Authentication users who attempt to log in via the web, SSH, Telnet, or the console port.
Provides instructions for creating custom menus.
Chapter 13: Maintenance Provides instructions for upgrading firmware, viewing system logs and
diagnostics, generating reports, and defining events. Includes information
about web pages and commands used to shut down and reboot the SLC
8000 advanced console manager.
Chapter 14: Application Shows how to set up and use the SLC unit in three different configurations.
Examples

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 19

 1: About this Guide

Chapter (continued) Description

Chapter 15: Command Lists and describes all of the commands available on the SLC command line
Reference interface
Appendix A: Security Provides tips for enhancing SLC security.
Considerations
Appendix B: Safety Lists safety precautions for using the SLC 8000 advanced console
Information manager.
Appendix C: Adapters and Includes adapter pinout diagrams.
Pinouts
Appendix D: Protocol Lists the protocols supported by the SLC unit with brief descriptions.
Glossary
Appendix E: Compliance Provides information about the SLC 8000 advanced console manager’s
Information compliance with industry standards.

Additional Documentation
Visit the Lantronix Web site at www.lantronix.com/support/documentation for the latest
documentation and the following additional documentation.
Document Description
SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager Provides accessories and part number information,
Quick Start Guide hardware installation instructions, directions to connect the
SLC unit, and network IP configuration information.
SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager Provides product overview information and specifications.
Product Brief

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 20

2: Introduction
The SLC 8000 advanced console manager enables IT system administrators to manage remote
servers and IT infrastructure equipment securely over the Internet.
IT equipment can be configured, administered, and managed in a variety of ways, but most
devices have one of two methods in common: via USB port and/or via an RS-232 serial port,
sometimes called a console, auxiliary, or management port. These ports are often accessed
directly by connecting a terminal or laptop to them, meaning that the administrator must be in the
same physical location as the equipment. The SLC 8000 advanced console manager gives the
administrator a way to access them remotely from anywhere there is a network or modem
connection. The SLC 8000 unit can accommodate up to three I/O modules (16-port USB I/O
module and/or 16-port RJ45 I/O module.)
Many types of equipment can be accessed and administered using console managers including:
 Servers: Unix, Linux, Windows, and others.
 Networking equipment: Routers, switches, storage networking.
 Telecom: PBX, voice switches.
 Other systems with serial interfaces: Heating/cooling systems, security/building access
systems, UPS, medial devices.
The key benefits of using console managers:
 Saves money: Enables remote management and troubleshooting without sending a
technician onsite. Reduces travel costs and downtime costs.
 Saves time: Provides instant access and reduces response time, improving efficiency.
 Simplifies access: Enables you to access equipment securely and remotely after hours and
on weekends and holidays—without having to schedule visits or arrange for off-hour access.
 Protects assets: Security features provide encryption, authentication, authorization, and
firewall features to protect your IT infrastructure while providing flexible remote access.
The SLC advanced console manager provides features such as convenient text menu
systems, break-safe operation, port buffering (logging), remote authentication, and Secure
Shell (SSH) access. Dial-up modem support ensures access when the network is not
available.

Features

Console Management
 Up to 48 serial RJ45 RS-232 and/or USB type A ports for console connectivity
Note: USB ports are generally intended to connect directly to USB console ports. It
is also possible to connect a USB to serial adapter to them to connect to serial
console ports, if needed.
 Enables system administrators to remotely manage devices with serial and/or USB console
ports, e.g., Linux, Unix, and recent versions of Windows servers, routers, telecom, and
switches with RS-232C (now EIA-232) or USB compatible serial consoles in a 1U-tall rack
space. All models have two Ethernet ports, called Eth1 and Eth2 in this document.
 Provides data logging, monitoring, and secure access control via the Internet

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 21

 2: Introduction

Power
 Universal AC power input (100-240V, 50/60 Hz) or 20-72 VDC power input hardware option
 Convection cooled, silent operation, low power consumption

Hardware
 SLC Chassis: The SLC 8000 advanced console manager has a 1U-tall (1.75 inch), self-
contained rack-mountable chassis.
 Three I/O Module Bays are available on the back of the SLC unit, and able to accomodate a
combined total of 48 device ports depending on the number of I/O modules installed. See
Figure 2-2. Configuration possibilities are listed below. See Appendix C: Adapters and
Pinouts on page 390 for more information on serial adapters and pin-outs, and also Table 3-8
on page 39 which describes different I/O module configurations.
- Up to three 16-port RJ45 I/O modules can be installed to provide a maximum of forty-
eight serial RS-232C (EIA-232) device ports. The serial RJ45 ports match the RJ45 pin-
outs of the console ports of many popular devices found in a network environment, and
where different can be converted using Lantronix adapters.
- Up to three 16-port USB I/O modules can be installed to provide a maximum of forty-
eight USB I/O device ports.
- A combination of 16-port USB I/O modules and 16-port RJ45 I/O modules can be
installed to provide up to forty-eight serial RJ45 ports and/or USB type A ports, according
to the type and number of I/O modules installed on the back of the SLC unit.
Note: The SLC8008 ships with an 8-port serial module that must be installed in
the first bay. This module is not available separately. See Table 3-8 on page 39
which describes different I/O module configurations.
 Network Interface on the back left side of the SLC unit can accommodate either a factory-
installed:
- Dual 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet port I/F card. Ethernet ports are referred to as Eth1
and Eth2 in the user interface and this user guide.
- Dual SFP port I/F card to support 1 Gigabit-capable single or multi-mode fiber or copper
SFP transceiver modules. Single and multi-mode SFP transceiver modules are referred to
as F1 in the user interface and this user guide.
Notes:
 1000 BASE-T SFP transceiver copper modules need to use RX_LOS signal within
SFP interface pins for the indicator on Link Status LED. Not all vendor 1000 Base-T
SFP modules provide this feature. Qualified copper SFP transceiver modules with this
feature include the following: the Finisar 1000 Base-T Copper SFP Transceiver
FCLF8250P2BTL and the Fiberstore Cisco SFP-GE-T Compatible 1000 Base-T SFP
RJ-45 100m Transceiver.
 SFP transceiver modules are provided by users according to fiber mode and brand
preferences. Network ports and the SFP port have LEDs to indicate link and activity
status. If a single mode and a multi-mode are both installed the SLC 8000 unit, the
device can be configured to utilize one mode at a time.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 22

 2: Introduction

 Front Console Panel Ports (see Figure 2-1)

- One serial console port (RJ45) for VT100 terminal or PC with emulation with LED for
activity indicators
- Two USB type A ports for use with flash drives or external USB modems
- Optional internal modem
- One Secure Digital (SD) memory card slot (SD card provided by the user)
- One RJ11 modem port on the front panel
Note: Use of the RJ11 modem port requires installation of an optional modem
card (Lantronix part number 56KINTMODEM-01) - see Modem Installation on
page 41.
- LCD display and keypad
 256 KB-per-port buffer memory for serial device ports
 Software reversible device port pinouts
 Either universal AC power input (100-240V, 50/60 Hz) or DC power input (20-72 VDC)

Note: For more detailed information, see Chapter 4: Quick Setup on page 48.

Figure 2-1 SLC 8048 Unit (Front Side) - Part Number SLC 804812N-01-S

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 23

 2: Introduction

Figure 2-2 SLC 8048 Unit Samples (Back Side) - Part Number SLC80482201S

Dual Ethernet Port

OR Three I/O Modular Device Port Bays

Dual SFP Port

The back of the SLC unit appearance and function

will depend upon:
1) The type(s) of I/O modules installed in Bay 1, Bay
2 and Bay 3. See Table 3-8 on page 39.
2) The type of I/F card (dual Ethernet port or dual
The SLC 8000 supports the use of single mode, multi-mode SFP port) installed. If a dual SFP port is installed,
fiber optic and copper SFP transceiver modules in dual SFP then the type of SFP transceiver module (single
port models. SFP modules are provided by the user. mode optic fiber, multi-mode optic fiber, or copper)
inserted into the SFP port will also impact
appearance and function.

System Features
The SLC 8000 firmware has the following basic capabilities:
 Software reversible device port pinouts (serial RJ45 ports only)
 Connects up to 48 RS-232 serial consoles or up to 48 USB consoles
 Support use of simple straight-through cables for use with Cisco, Sun and other devices that
use the “Cisco” RJ-45 serial pinouts
 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet network compatibility or SFP port to support single or multi-
mode 1 Gigabit SFP transceiver modules
 Buffer logging to file
 Email and SNMP notification
 ID/Password security, configurable access rights
 Secure shell (SSH) security; supports numerous other security protocols
 Network File System (NFS) and Common Internet File System (CIFS) support
 RAW TCP, Telnet or SSH to a serial port by IP address per port or by IP address and TCP port
number
 Configurable user rights for local and remotely authenticated users
 Supports an external modem
 No unintentional break ever sent to attached servers (Solaris Ready)
 Simultaneous access on the same port - “listen” and “direct” connect mode
 Remote power manager (RPM) control of UPS and PDU devices

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 24

 2: Introduction

 Local access through a dedicated front panel serial console port

 Web administration (using most browsers)

Protocols Supported
The SLC 8000 advanced console manager supports the TCP/IP network protocol as well as:
 SSH, Telnet, PPP, NFS, and CIFS for connections in and out of the SLC console manager
 SMTP for mail transfer
 DNS for text-to-IP address name resolution
 SNMP for remote monitoring and management
 SCP, FTP and SFTP for file transfers and firmware upgrades
 TFTP for firmware upgrades
 DHCP and BOOTP for IP address assignment
 HTTPS (SSL) for secure browser-based configuration
 NTP for time synchronization
 LDAP, NIS, RADIUS, CHAP, PAP, Kerberos, TACACS+, and SecurID (via RADIUS) for user
authentication
 Callback Control Protocol (CBCP)
 IPsec for VPN access
For brief descriptions of these protocols, see Appendix D: Protocol Glossary on page 393.

Access Control
The system administrator controls access to attached servers or devices by assigning access
rights to up to 128 user profiles. Each user has an assigned ID, password, and access rights.
Other user profile access options may include externally configured authentication methods such
as Radius and LDAP.

Device Port Buffer

The SLC 8000 unit supports real-time data logging for each device port. The port can save the
data log to a file, send an email notification of an issue, or take no action.
You can define the path for logged data on a port-by-port basis, configure file size and number of
files per port for each logging event, and configure the device log to send an email alert message
automatically to the appropriate parties indicating a particular error.

Configuration Options
You may use the backlit front-panel LCD display for initial setup and configuration and to view
current network, console, and date/time settings, and get internal temperature status.
Both a web interface viewed through a standard browser and a command line interface (CLI) are
available for configuring the SLC settings and monitoring performance.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 25

 2: Introduction

Device Port and Console Port Interfaces

RS-232 RJ45 Interface

Device ports are located on the back of the SLC 8000 unit (please see Figure 2-2). The console
port is located on the front of the SLC 8000 unit (please see Figure 2-8). All devices attached to
the device ports and the console port must support the RS-232C (EIA-232) standard. For serial
RJ45 device ports and the console port, RJ45 cabling (e.g., category 5 or 6 patch cabling) is used.
Serial RJ45 device ports for the SLC 8000 advanced console manager are reversed by default so
that straight-through RJ45 patch cables may be used to connect to Cisco and Sun RJ45 serial
console ports. If you are replacing an SLC with an SLC 8000 you can either switch the ports to the
non-reversed pinout used by SLC units and use your original cables and adapters, or remove any
rolled cables or adapters and replace them with straight-through RJ45 cables, e.g. Ethernet patch
cables.

Note: RJ45 to DB9/DB25 adapters are available from Lantronix. For serial pinout
information, see the Appendix C: Adapters and Pinouts on page 390.

Device ports and the console port support the following baud-rate options: 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 and 230400 baud.

USB Interface

The SLC unit can contain up to up to three I/O modules comprised of 16-port USB I/O module(s)
and/or 16-port RJ45 I/O module(s) installled in the three module bays available from the back of
the SLC 8000 unit. USB device ports can be used with a USB type A connector to serial adapter, if
needed.
Figure 2-3 shows an SLC unit containing two 16-port RJ45 I/O modules installed in Bay 1 and
Bay 2 for a total of 32 serial RJ45 device ports and one 16-port USB I/O module installed in Bay 3,
for a total of 48 device ports. Figure 2-4 shows an SLC unit containing three 16-port RJ45 I/O
modules installed in Bay 1, Bay 2 and Bay 3 for a total of 48 serial RJ45 device ports.

Note: When installing I/O modules into an SLC 8000 (Figure 2-2), Bay 1, Bay 2, and Bay
3 must be populated in order. The 8-port RJ45 serial module is supported on Bay 1 only.

I/F Card Slot: Dual Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) or Dual Ethernet Port

On the left back side of the SLC 8000 unit, a dual SFP port or dual Ethernet port I/F card can be
installed. See Figure 2-5. If the dual SFP port is installed, copper or optic fiber 1 Gigabit SFP
transceiver modules may be used. The SLC 8000 supports use of single and multi-mode SFPs.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 26

 2: Introduction

Figure 2-3 Three 16-Port USB I/O Modules Installed in Bays 1, 2, & 3 with Dual Ethernet Port

Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3

Figure 2-4 One 16-Port USB I/O Module Installed in Bay 1 with Dual Ethernet Port

Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3

Figure 2-5 One 16 RJ-45 Serial Port I/O Module Installed in Bay1 & Two 15 USB I/O Module Installed
Bays 2 & 3 with Dual SFP Port

Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 27

 2: Introduction

Figure 2-6 SFP Port LEDs

Table 2-7 Device (DCE Reversed & DTE) Port Pinout

DCE Pin DTE Pin Description
8 1 RTS (output)
7 2 DTR (output)
6 3 TXD (output)
5 4 Ground
4 5 Ground
3 6 RXD (input)
2 7 DSR (input)
1 8 CTS (input)

Figure 2-8 Console Port (Front Side)

Table 2-9 Console (DTE) Port Pinout

DTE Pin Description
1 RTS (output)
2 DTR (output)
3 TXD (output)
4 Ground
5 Ground
6 RXD (input)
7 DSR (input)
8 CTS (input)

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 28

 2: Introduction

Network Connections
The SLC 8000 network interfaces are 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet for use with a conventional
Ethernet network as shown in Figure 2-10. Use standard RJ45-terminated cables, like Category 5
or 6 patch cable. CAT5E or better cables are recommended for 1000 Base Ethernet. Network
parameters must be configured before the SLC console manager can be accessed over the network.

Note: One possible use for the two Ethernet ports is to have one port on a private,
secure network and the other on a public, unsecured network. The SLC 8000 can also be
equipped with a factory-installed NIC (Ethernet RJ45 or SFP ports). The NIC with SFP
ports can support single/multi-mode fiber or copper SFP transceiver modules at 1 Gigabit
speed.

Figure 2-10 Dual Ethernet Network Connection

Figure 2-11 Inserting SFP Transceiver Module into the SFP Port

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 29

 2: Introduction

Front Panel USB Ports

The SLC 8000 unit has two 2.0 USB ports (HS, FS, LS) on the front panel, as seen in Figure 2-12.

Figure 2-12 Dual USB Ports

Memory Card Port

The SLC unit has a memory card port on the front panel of the unit which accepts SD cards.

Figure 2-13 Memory Card Port

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 30

 2: Introduction

Internal Modem
An internal modem can be installed in the SLC 8000 advanced console manager. See Modem
Installation on page 41 for instructions.

Figure 2-14 Internal Modem Location

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 31

3: Installation
This chapter provides a high-level procedure for installing the SLC advanced console manager
followed by more detailed information about the SLC connections and power supplies.

Caution: To avoid physical and electrical hazards, please read

Appendix A: Security Considerations on page 387 before installing the
SLC 8000 advanced console manager.

What's in the Box

Table 3-1 lists all included components that come in the box and their corresponding part
numbers.

Table 3-1 What’s in the Box

Part Number Component Description
SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager Models
SLC80162211S SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with RJ45 16-Port, Dual SFP, Dual AC PSU
SLC80162411S SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with RJ45 16-Port, Dual SFP, Dual DC PSU
SLC80322211S SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with RJ45 32-Port, Dual SFP, Dual AC PSU
SLC80482211S SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with RJ45 48-Port, Dual SFP, Dual AC PSU
SLC81162211S SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with USB 16-Port, Dual SFP, Dual AC PSU
SLC81162411S SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with USB 16-Port, Dual SFP, Dual DC PSU
SLC80081201S* SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with RJ45 8-Port, Dual Ethernet, Single AC PSU
SLC80082201S* SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with RJ45 8-Port, Dual Ethernet, Dual AC PSU
SLC81161201S* SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with USB 6-Port, Dual Ethernet, Single AC PSU
SLC80161201S* SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with RJ45 16-Port, Dual Ethernet, Single AC PSU
SLC80162201S SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with RJ45 16-Port, Dual Ethernet, Dual AC PSU
SLC80162401S SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with RJ45 16-Port, Dual Ethernet, Dual DC PSU
SLC80321201S* SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with RJ45 32-Port, Dual Ethernet, Single AC PSU
SLC80322201S* SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with RJ45 32-Port, Dual Ethernet, Dual AC PSU
SLC80322401S SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with RJ45 32-Port, Dual Ethernet, Dual DC PSU
SLC80481201S* SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager with RJ45 48-Port, Dual Ethernet, Single AC PSU
SLC80482201S* SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager Serial RJ45 48-Port, Dual Ethernet, Dual AC
PSU
SLC80482401S SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager Serial RJ45 48-Port, Dual Ethernet, Dual DC
PSU
Cables
200.2070A RJ45 to DB9F Adapter
Note: Available only with SLC 8000 units with RJ-45 modules.
200.0062 RJ45 to RJ45, Cat5, 6.6 ft (2 m)
Note: Available only with SLC 8000 units with GbE variants.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 32

 3: Installation

Part Number Component Description

500-153 RJ45 Loopback Plug
Note: Available only with SLC 8000 units with RJ-45 modules.
North American Power Cords
500-041-ACC For AC Supply Models, USA & Canada: 110V AC Power Cord,
8 ft (2.43 m), RoHS.
Note: Power cords for other international regions are available and sold separately. See
Table 3-2.
083-152-R For DC Supply Models, USA & Canada: the DC Installation Kit is included.

Notes:
 Accessories that can be ordered separately are listed below in Table 3-2. Regional
power cords are available as accessories.
 SLC 8000 single and dual AC supply variants ship with 110V North American AC
power cord(s).
 * TAA Compliant models available, replace the “S” with “G” in the SKUs above, (e.g.
SLC80321201G for 16-Port RS-232 (RJ45) Single AC Supply).

Table 3-2 Optional Accessories

Part Number Component Description

International Power Cords:
930-077-R Power Cord, Israel, 250VAC 10A, 8FT, RoHS
930-075-R Power Cord, UK, 250VAC 10A, 8FT, RoHS
930-074-R Power Cord, European, 250VAC 10A, 8FT, RoHS
User Swappable Modules
FRRJ451601 16 Device Port RS-232 (RJ45) I/O Device Port Module
FRUSB1601 16 Device Port USB I/O Device Port Module
FR1ACPS01 100 to 240V AC Single Power Supply Module
FR2ACPS01 100 to 240V AC Dual Power Supply Module
FR2DCPS01 -20 to -72V DC Dual Power Supply Module
Secondary Connectivity Accessories for SLC 8000
56KINTMODEM-0156K v.92 Internal Modem for Dial-UP Out-of-Band Connection
PXC2102H2-01-S 3.5G Cellular Out-of-Band Connectivity Intelligent Gateway
Note: Wireless data plan sold separately.

Verify and inspect the contents of the SLC package using the enclosed packing slip or the table
above. If any item is missing or damaged, contact your place of purchase immediately.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 33

 3: Installation

Product Label
The product label on the underside of the SLC 8000 advanced console manager contains the
following information about each SLC unit:
 Part Number
 Product Revision
 Country of Manufacturing Origin
 Serial Number
 Manufacturing Date Code
 Bar Code

Figure 3-3 Product Label

Technical Specifications

Table 3-4 SLC Technical Specifications

Component Description
Serial Interface (Device)  Up to 48 RJ45-type 8-conductor connectors as up to three16-port RJ45 I/O
modules can be installed. These connectors have individually configurable
standard and reversible pinouts, 8 or 16 ports per I/O module.
 Speed software selectable (300 to 230400 baud)
Note: Serial RJ45 device ports for the SLC 8000 advanced console manager
are reversed by default. Do not use rolled cables and adapters when replacing
an SLC console manager with the SLC 8000 model.
USB 2.0 Interface  Up to 48 USB type A (Host) as up to three 16-port USB I/O modules can be
(Device) installed
 HS, FS, and LS
 Capable of providing VBUS 5V up to 100 mA per port, but not to exceed 600
mA total per 16-port USB I/O module.
 May be used with a USB-to-serial adapter to connect a serial device, if
needed. Please contact Lantronix for the list of tested adapters.
Caution: USB ports are designed for data traffic only. They are not
designed for charging or powering devices. Over-current conditions on
VBUS 5V may disrupt operations.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 34

 3: Installation

Component (continued) Description

Serial Interface (Console)  (1) RJ45-type 8-pin connector (DTE)
 Speed software selectable (300 to 230400 baud)
 LEDs:
 Green light ON indicates data transmission activities
 Yellow light ON indicates data receiving activities

Network Interface  (2) 10/100/1000 Base-T RJ45 Ethernet with LED indicators:
 Green light ON indicates a link at 1000 Base-T.
 Green light OFF indicates a link at other speeds or no link.
 Yellow light ON indicates a link is established.
 Yellow light blinking indicates activity.

OR
 (2) SFP ports to support standard fiber or copper SFP transceiver modules
(single or multi-mode) at speed 1 Gigabit. LED indicators:
 Green light ON indicates a link is established.
 Green light OFF indicates no link.
 Yellow light ON indicates no link activity.
 Yellow light blinking indicates activity.

Power Supply AC  Universal AC power input: 100-240 VAC

(single or dual)  50 or 60 Hz IEC 60320/C19IEC-type regional cord set included
Power Supply DC (dual) 20V to 72V input
Power Consumption  Less than 25W with 48 RS232 serial ports
 Less than 45W with 48 USB ports
Dimensions 1U, 1.75 in x 17.25 in x 12 in
Weight  12.1 lbs with 48 serial ports
 11.8 lbs with 48 USB ports
Temperature  Operating: 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F), 30 to 90% RH, non-condensing
 Storage: -20 to 80°C (-4 to 176°F), 10 to 90% RH, non-condensing
Relative Humidity  Operating: 10% to 90% non-condensing; 40% to 60% recommended
 Storage: 10% to 90% non-condensing
Front USB Ports  (2) ports, type A, host USB 2.0 (HS, FS, LS)
Memory Card Single memory card slot supporting:
 SD
 SDHC
Optional Internal Modem  300 bps to 56K bps data rate
 Upstream 48K bps, downstream 56K bps
 V.44 data compression (V92MB-U, V92HU)
 V.42 bis and MNP-5 data compression
 V.29 FastPOS support
 Caller ID type I and II for select countries
 Agency approvals: Transferable FCC68, CS03 and CTR21 certifications,
IEC60601-1 (Medical Electronics) compliant, CE Marking, IEC60950 approved
Operating Atmosphere
For use at altitudes no more than 2000 meters above sea level only.
Caution: EQUIPMENT 仅适用于海拔 2000m 以下地区安全使用
IS FOR INDOOR USE
ONLY! For use in non-tropical conditions only.
仅适用于非热带气候条件下安全使用

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 35

 3: Installation

Physical Installation
Install the SLC 8000 advanced console manager in an EIA-standard 19-inch rack (1U tall) or as a
desktop unit. The SLC module uses convection cooling to dissipate excess heat.

To install the SLC 8000 advanced console manager in a rack:

1. Place the SLC unit in a 19-inch rack.

Warning: Do not to block the air vents on the sides of the SLC module. If you
mount the SLC advanced console manager in an enclosed rack, we
recommended that the rack have a ventilation fan to provide adequate
airflow through the SLC unit.
2. Connect the serial device(s) to the SLC unit ports. See the section,
Connecting to a Device Port (on page 36).
3. Choose one of the following options:
- To configure the SLC 8000 advanced console manager using the network, or to monitor
serial devices on the network, connect at least one SLC network port to a network. See
Connecting to Network Ports (on page 39).
- To configure the SLC unit using a dumb terminal or a computer with terminal emulation,
connect the terminal or PC to the front panel SLC console port. See
Connecting Terminals (on page 39).
4. Connect the power cord, and apply power. See AC Input (on page 40).
5. Wait approximately one minute for the boot process to complete.
When the boot process ends, the SLC host name and the clock appear on the LCD display.
Now you are ready to configure the network settings as described in Chapter 4: Quick Setup.

Connecting to a Device Port

You can connect almost any device that has a serial console port to a device port on the SLC 8000
unit for remote administration. The console port must support the RS-232C interface.

Note: Many servers must either have the serial port enabled as a console or the
keyboard and mouse detached. Consult the server hardware and/or software
documentation for more information.

To connect to a serial RJ45 device port:

1. Connect one end of the Cat 5 cable to the device port.

2. Connect the other end of the Cat 5 cable to an RJ45 serial console port or to other port types
using a Lantronix serial console adapter.
Notes:
 See Device Port Commands to enable or disable reverse pinouts through the CLI.
 Table 3-5 and Table 3-6 provide additional information on reverse pinouts.
 See Appendix C: Adapters and Pinouts for information about Lantronix adapters.
3. Connect the adapter to the serial console port on the serial device as shown in Figure 3-7.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 36

 3: Installation

Table 3-5 Console Port and Device Port - Reverse Pinout Disabled
Pin Number Description
1 RTS (output)
2 DTR (output)
3 TXD (output)
4 Ground
5 Ground
6 RXD (input)
7 DSR (input)
8 CTS (input)

Table 3-6 Device Port - Reverse Pinout Enabled (Default)

Pin Number Description
1 CTS (input)
2 DSR (input)
3 RXD (input)
4 Ground
5 Ground
6 TXD (output)
7 DTR (output)
8 RTS (output)

To connect to a USB device port:

1. Connect the USB type A connector of a USB cable to a device port.

2. Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB console port.
Figure 3-7 shows a sample I/O module installation with two 16-port RJ45 I/O modules and one
16-port USB I/O module, and how the device ports correspond to the buttons on the Dashboard.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 37

 3: Installation

Figure 3-7 Sample Device Port Connections (Back Side)

Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3

16-Port RJ45 16-Port RJ45

I/O Module I/O Module
(Part Number (Part Number 16-Port USB
FRRJ451601) FRRJ451601) I/O Module
(Part Number
FRUSB1601)

Modular Expansion for I/O Module Bays

The SLC 8000 advanced console manager, which provides 3 separate bays, supports the
flexibility to change the I/O module configuration by offering a 16-port module for expansion. When
populating the bays, Bay 1, Bay 2 and Bay 3 must be populated in consecutive order. Bay 1 is the
slot next to the Ethernet ports and Bay 3 is the slot beside the power supply module. See
Figure 3-7 and Table 3-8. When device ports are unused or unsupported, they do not appear in
the Dashboard. See Sample Dashboards.

Note: See the SLC 8000 I/O Module Installation Guide for information on installing I/O
modules.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 38

 3: Installation

Table 3-8 Available I/O Module Configurations

Note: The 8-port RJ45 serial module is supported on Bay 1 only. The available I/O
module configurations in Table 3-8 are supported with either dual Gigabit Ethernet or dual
SFP ports.

Connecting to Network Ports

The SLC network ports, 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet, allow remote access to the attached
devices and the system administrative functions. Use a standard RJ45-terminated Category 5
cable to connect to the network port. A CAT5e or better cable is recommended for use with a
1000 Base-T Ethernet connection.

Note: One possible use for the two Ethernet ports is to have one port on a private,
secure network, and the other on an unsecured network.

Connecting Terminals
The console port is for local access to the SLC 8000 advanced console manager and the attached
devices. You may attach a dumb terminal or a computer with terminal emulation to the console
port. The SLC console port uses RS-232C protocol and supports VT100 emulation. The default
serial settings are 9600 baud, 8 bit data, No parity, 1 stop bit with no flow control.
To connect the console port to a terminal or computer with terminal emulation, Lantronix offers
optional adapters that provide a connection between an RJ45 jack and a DB9 or DB25 connector.
The console port is configured as DTE (non-reversed RJ45). See Appendix C: Adapters and
Pinouts on page 390 for more information.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 39

 3: Installation

To connect a terminal:

1. Attach the Lantronix adapter to your terminal (typically a PN 200.2066A adapter - see
Figure C-1) or your PC's serial port (use PN 200.2070A adapter - see Figure C-4).
2. Connect the Cat 5 cable to the adapter, and connect the other end to the SLC console port.
3. Turn on the terminal or start your computer's communication program (e.g., PuTTY or
TeraTerm Pro).
4. Once the SLC 8000 advanced console manager is running, press Enter to establish
connection. You should see the model name and a login prompt on your terminal. On a factory
default SLC you may log in with the user name sysadmin and the password PASS.

AC Input
The power supply module for the SLC controller accepts AC input voltage of 100-240 VAC, 50/60
HZ. Rear-mounted IEC-type AC power connectors are provided for universal AC power input.
(See What's in the Box on page 32.)

Warning: Disconnect all power supply modules before servicing to avoid electric
shock.

Figure 3-9 AC Power Input

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 40

 3: Installation

Modem Installation

Caution: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, USE ONLY NO. 26 AWG OR LARGER
(e.g., 24 AWG) UL LISTED OR CSA CERTIFIED TELECOMMUNICATION
LINE CORD.

Attention: POUR RÉDUIRE LES RISQUES D'INCENDIE, UTILISER UNIQUEMENT DES

CONDUCTEURS DE TÉLÉCOMMUNICATIONS 26 AWG AU DE SECTION
SUPÉRLEURE.

Warning: RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCKS; DISCONNECT ALL POWER AND

PHONE LINES BEFORE SERVICING!

Caution: DEVICES INSIDE THE EQUIPMENT AND THE MODEM ARE

ELECTROSTATIC -SENSITIVE; DO NOT HANDLE EXCEPT AT A STATIC
FREE WORKPLACE.

MODEM PART NUMBER

Lantronix 56KINTMODEM-01

MODEM SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS

You will need a medium size Phillips screw driver.

1. Turn off power to the SLC 8000 advanced console manager.

2. Locate the battery modem door on the top of the SLC unit.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 41

 3: Installation

3. Carefully unscrew and lift the door off with the screw driver.

4. Take note of the orientation of the modem in the photograph so that you can install a new
modem correctly with the same orientation.

5. If there is a modem replacement, carefully lift the old modem out of its socket.

6. Install the new modem with correct orientation.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 42

 3: Installation

7. Make sure to have correct pin alignment.

8. Press the modem down to make sure it sits down all the way in the socket.

9. Double-check the new modem placement to make sure it is done properly.

10. Place the battery/modem door back.

11. Carefully tighten the door screw.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 43

 3: Installation

Battery Replacement

Caution: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT

TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE
INSTRUCTIONS.

Attention: II Y A DANGER D'EXPLOSION S'IL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA

BATTERIE. REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MÊME TYPE
OU D'UN TYPE EQUIVALENT RECOMMANDÉ PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR.
METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES USAGÉES CONFORMÉMENT AUX
INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT.

Caution: DEVICES INSIDE THE EQUIPMENT ARE ELECTROSTATIC -SENSITIVE;

DO NOT HANDLE EXCEPT AT A STATIC FREE WORKPLACE.

Battery Part Numbers

Panasonic BR2032 or equivalent (button cell lithium, non-rechargeable.)

Caution: DO NOT USE BATTERY TYPE CR2032 SINCE IT HAS A LOWER

OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE.

DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES (from battery data sheet)

 If not in a large quantity, button cell batteries contain so little Lithium that they do not qualify as
reactive hazardous waste. These batteries are safe for disposal in the normal municipal waste
stream.
 If in a large quantity, disposal of button cell batteries should be performed by permitted,
professional firms knowledgeable in Federal, State and local hazardous waste transportation
and disposal requirements.

Caution: RISK OF FIRE, EXPLOSION AND BURNS. DO NOT RECHARGE, CRUSH,

HEAT ABOVE 212°F (100°C) OR INCINERATE.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 44

 3: Installation

Battery Replacement Instructions

Warning: RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCKS; DISCONNECT ALL POWER AND

PHONE LINE BEFORE SERVICING!
You will need a medium size Phillips screw driver.

1. Turn off power to the SLC 8000 advanced console manager.

2. Locate the battery/modem door on the top of the SLC unit.

3. Carefully unscrew and lift the door off with the screw driver.

4. If there is a modem installed, note the orientation of the modem so that later you can install it
back correctly.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 45

 3: Installation

5. If there is a modem installed, carefully lift the modem out of its socket.

6. Use fingers to lift the battery out of the socket.

Caution: DO NOT USE A METAL OBJECT TO PRY OUT THE BATTERY. IT MAY
SHORT THE BATTERY AND DAMAGE THE BATTERY HOUSING.
7. Install the new battery with the (+) side up making sure the battery sits completely and
securely in the housing.

8. Re-install the modem with correct orientation.

a. Make sure also to have correct pin alignment.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 46

 3: Installation

b. Press the modem down to make sure it sits down all the way in the socket.

9. Double-check the battery and modem placements to make sure they are done properly.

10. Place the battery/modem door back.

11. Carefully tighten the door screw.

12. If necessary, reprogram the SLC system date-time after installing a new battery.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 47

4: Quick Setup
This chapter helps get the IP network port up and running quickly, so you can administer the SLC
advanced console manager using your network.

Recommendations
To set up the network connections quickly, we suggest you do one of the following:
 Use the front panel LCD display and keypad buttons to configure the IP address, subnet
mask, gateway address and DNS address(es), if applicable.
 Complete the quick setup (see Figure 4-5) on the web interface.
 SSH to the command line interface and follow the Quick Setup script on the command line
interface.
 Connect to the console port and follow the Quick Setup script on the command line interface.

Note: The first time you power up the SLC unit, Eth1 tries to obtain its IP address via
DHCP. If you have connected Eth1 to the network, and Eth1 is able to acquire an IP
address, you can view this IP address on the LCD or by running the Lantronix
DeviceInstaller™ application. If Eth1 cannot acquire an IP address, you cannot use
Telnet, SSH, or the web interface to run Quick Setup.

IP Address
Your SLC 8000 advanced console manager must have a unique IP address on your network. The
system administrator generally provides the IP address and corresponding subnet mask and
gateway. The IP address must be within a valid range and unique to your network. If a valid
gateway address has not been assigned the IP address must be on the same subnet as
workstations connecting to the SLC 8000 over the network.
The following table lists the options for assigning an IP address to your SLC unit.

Table 4-1 Methods of Assigning an IP Address

Method Description
DHCP A DHCP server automatically assigns the IP address and network settings.
The SLC 8000 advanced console manager is DHCP-enabled by default.
With the Eth1 network port connected to the network, and the SLC unit
powered up, Eth1 acquires an IP address, viewable on the LCD.
At this point, you can use SSH to connect to the SLC console manager or use
the web interface.
BOOTP Non-dynamic predecessor to DHCP.
Front panel LCD display You manually assign the IP address and other basic network, console, and
and keypads date/time settings. If desired, you can restore the factory defaults.
Serial port login to You assign an IP address and configure the SLC unit using a terminal or a PC
command line interface running a terminal emulation program to the SLC serial console port
connection.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 48

 4: Quick Setup

Method #1 Using the Front Panel Display

Before you begin, ensure that you have:

 Unique IP address that is valid on your network (unless automatically assigned)

 Subnet mask (unless automatically assigned)
 Gateway (unless automatically assigned)
 DNS settings (unless automatically assigned)
 Date, time, and time zone
 Console port settings: baud rate, data bits, stop bits, parity, and flow control
Make sure the SLC advanced console manager is plugged into power and turned on.

Front Panel LCD Display and Keypads

With the SLC unit powered up, you can use the front panel display and buttons to set up the basic
parameters.

Figure 4-2 Front Panel LCD Display and Five Button Keypad (Enter, Up, Down, Left, Right)

The front panel display initially shows the hostname (abbreviated to 14 letters) and the date and
time.
When you click the right-arrow button, the SLC network settings displays. Using the five buttons on
the keypad, you can change the network, console port, and date/time settings and view the
firmware release version. If desired, you can restore the factory defaults.

Note: Have your information handy as the display times out without accepting any
unsaved changes if you take more than 30 seconds between entries.

Any changes made to the network, console port, and date/time settings take effect immediately.

Navigating
The front panel keypad has one Enter button (in the center) and four arrow buttons (up, left, right,
and down). Press the arrow buttons to navigate from one option to another, or to increment or
decrement a numerical entry of the selected option. Use the Enter button to select an option to
change or to save your settings.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 49

 4: Quick Setup

The following table lists the SLC navigation actions, buttons, and options.

Table 4-3 LCD Arrow Keypad Actions

Button Action
Right arrow To move to the next option (e.g., from Network Settings to Console Settings)
Left arrow To return to the previous option
Enter (center button) To enter edit mode
Up and down arrows Within edit mode, to increase or decrease a numerical entry
Right or left arrows Within edit mode, to move the cursor right or left
Enter To exit edit mode
Up and down arrows To scroll up or down the list of parameters within an option (e.g., from IP
Address to Mask)

Table 4-4 Front Panel Setup Options with Associated Parameters

Left/Right Arrow
Current Eth1 Console Date / Release Internal User Location Device
Time Network Port Time Temp Strings Ports
Settings Settings Settings
User ID & Eth1 IP Baud Rate, Time Zone Firmware Reading in Displays Indicates Detects the
Current Address Data Bits, version and Celsius & configured the Rack connection
TIme Stop Bits, date code Fahrenheit user (RK), Row state of each
Parity, (display string(s), if (RW) & port:
Flow only) any. Cluster 0=No DSR
Control (CW) input signal
locations. detected on
Up/ device port
Down 1=DSR input
Arrow signal
detected on
device port
Eth1 Data Bits Date/Time Restore
Subnet Factory
Mask Defaults
Gateway Stop Bits
DNS1 Parity
DNS2 Flow
Control
DNS3

Note: The individual screens listed from left to right in Table 4-4 can be enabled or
disabled for display on the SLC LCD screen. The order of appearance of the screens, if
enabled, along with the elected “Home Page” may vary on the LCD monitor according to
configuration. The internal temperature, user strings, location and device ports LCD
menus are disabled by default. See LCD/Keypad (on page 299) for instructions on
enabling and disabling screens.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 50

 4: Quick Setup

Entering the Settings

To enter setup information:
1. From the normal display (host name, date and time), press the right arrow button to display
Network Settings. The IP address for Eth1 displays.

Note: If you have connected Eth1 to the network, and Eth1 is able to acquire an IP
address through DHCP, this IP address displays, followed by the letter [D]. Otherwise, the
IP address displays as all zeros (000.000.000.000).

2. Press the Enter button on the keypad to enter edit mode. A cursor displays below one
character of the existing IP address setting.
3. To enter values:
- Use the left or right arrow to move the cursor to the left or to the right position.
- Use the up or down arrow to increment or decrement the numerical value.
4. When you have the IP address as you want it, press Enter to exit edit mode, and then press
the down arrow button. The Subnet Mask parameter displays.

Note: You must edit the IP address and the Subnet Mask together for a valid IP address
combination.

5. To save your entries for one or more parameters in the group, press the right arrow button.
The Save Settings? Yes/No prompt displays.

Note: If the prompt does not display, make sure you are no longer in edit mode.

6. Use the left/right arrow buttons to select Yes, and press the Enter button.
7. Press the right arrow button to move to the next option, Console Settings.
8. Repeat steps 2-7 for each setting.
9. Press the right arrow button to move to the next option, Date/Time Settings, and click Enter
to edit the time zone.
- To enter a US time zone, use the up/down arrow buttons to scroll through the US time
zones, and then press Enter to select the correct one.
- To enter a time zone outside the US, press the left arrow button to move up to the top level
of time zones. Press the up/down arrow button to scroll through the top level.
A time zone with a trailing slash (such as Africa/) has sub-time zones. Use the right arrow
button to select the Africa time zones, and then the up/down arrows to scroll through them.
Press Enter to select the correct time zone. To move back to the top-level time zone at
any time, press the left arrow.
10. To save your entries, press the right arrow button. The Save Settings? Yes/No prompt
displays.

Note: If the prompt does not display, make sure you are no longer in edit mode.

11. Use the left/right arrow buttons to select Yes, and press the Enter button.
12. To review the saved settings, press the up or down arrows to step through the current settings.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 51

 4: Quick Setup

When you are done, the front panel returns to the clock display. The network port resets to the
new settings, and you can connect to your IP network for further administration. You should be
able to SSH to the SLC 8000 advanced console manager through your network connection, or
access the Web interface through a Web browser.

Restoring Factory Defaults

To use the LCD display to restore factory default settings:

1. Press the right arrow button to move to the last option, Release.
2. Use the down arrow to move to the Restore Factory Defaults option. A prompt for the 6-digit
Restore Factory Defaults password displays.
3. Press Enter to enter edit mode.
4. Using the left and right arrows to move between digits and the up and down arrows to change
digits, enter the password (the default password is 999999).
Notes: The Restore Factory Defaults password is only for the LCD. You can change it at
the command line interface using the admin keypad password command. The front
panel Factory Default password and sysadmin password should be recorded and stored
in a secure place accessible by at least two authorized system administrators. Recovering
an SLC if both of these passwords are unknown is cumbersome and time consuming.
5. Press Enter to exit edit mode. If the password is valid, a Save Settings? Yes/No prompt
displays.
6. Select Yes and press Enter. When the process is complete, the SLC unit reboots.

Method #2 Quick Setup on the Web Page

After the unit has an IP address, you can use the Quick Setup page to configure the remaining
network settings. This page displays the first time you log into the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager only. Otherwise, the SLC Home page displays.

To complete the Quick Setup page:

1. Open a web browser (Firefox, Chrome or Internet Explorer web browsers with the latest
browser updates).
2. In the URL field, type https:// followed by the IP address of your SLC console manager.

Note: The web server listens for requests on the unencrypted (HTTP) port (port 80) and
redirects all requests to the encrypted (HTTPS) port (port 443).

3. Log in using sysadmin as the user name and PASS as the password. The first time you log in to
the SLC unit, the Quick Setup page automatically displays.

Note: To open the Quick Setup page at another time, click the Quick Setup tab.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 52

 4: Quick Setup

Figure 4-5 Quick Setup

4. To accept the defaults, select the Accept default Quick Setup settings checkbox on the top
portion of the page and click the Apply button at the bottom of the page. Otherwise, continue
with step 5.

Note: Once you click the Apply button on the Quick Setup page, you can continue using
the web interface to configure the SLC further.

5. Enter the following settings:

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 53

 4: Quick Setup

Network Settings
Note: Configurations with the same IP subnet on multiple interfaces (Ethernet or PPP)
are not currently supported.

Network Setting Description

Eth 1 Settings  Obtain from DHCP: Acquires IP address, subnet mask, hostname and gateway
from the DHCP server. (The DHCP server may not provide the hostname
gateway, depending on its setup.) This is the default setting. If you select this
option, skip to Gateway.
 Obtain from BOOTP: Lets a network node request configuration information from
a BOOTP "server" node. If you select this option, skip to Gateway.
 Specify: Lets you manually assign a static IP address, generally provided by the
system administrator.
IP Address  Enter an IP address that is unique and valid on your network. There is no default.
(if specifying)  Enter all IP addresses in dot-quad notation. Do not use leading zeros in the fields
for dot-quad numbers less than 100. For example, if your IP address is
172.19.201.28, do not enter 028 for the last segment octet.
Note: Currently, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager does not support
configurations with the same IP subnet on multiple interfaces (Ethernet or PPP).
Subnet Mask If specifying an IP address, enter the subnet mask for the network on which the SLC
unit resides. There is no default.
Default Gateway The IP address of the router for this network. There is no default.
Hostname The default host name is slcXXXX, where XXXX is the last 4 characters of the
hardware address of Ethernet Port 1. There is a 64-character limit (contiguous
characters, no spaces).
Note: The host name becomes the prompt in the command line interface.
Domain If desired, specify a domain name (for example, support.lantronix.com). The
domain name is used for host name resolution within the SLC 8000 advanced
console manager. For example, if abcd is specified for the SMTP server, and
mydomain.com is specified for the domain, if abcd cannot be resolved, the SLC unit
attempts to resolve abcd.mydomain.com for the SMTP server.

Date & Time Settings

Date & Time Setting Description
Change Date/Time Select the checkbox to manually enter the date and time at the SLC unit’s location.
Date From the drop-down lists, select the current month, day, and year.
Time From the drop-down lists, select the current hour and minute.
Time Zone From the drop-down list, select the appropriate time zone.

Administrator Settings
Administrator Description
Setting
Sysadmin Password To change the password (e.g., from the default) enter a Sysadmin Password of up
to 64 characters.
Retype Password Re-enter the Sysadmin Password above in this field as a confirmation.

6. Click the Apply button to save your entries.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 54

 4: Quick Setup

Figure 4-6 Quick Setup Completed in Web Manager

If Quick Setup has already been run the standard Home page will display.

Figure 4-7 Home

Method #3 Quick Setup on the Command Line Interface

If the SLC 8000 advanced console manager does not have an IP address, you can connect a
dumb terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program (VT100) to access the command line
interface. (See Connecting Terminals on page 39.) If the unit has an IP address, you can use SSH
or Telnet to connect to the SLC unit.
By default, Telnet is disabled and SSH is enabled. To enable Telnet, use the
Services > SSH/Telnet/Logging (on page 90).

To complete the command line interface Quick Setup script:

1. Do one of the following:

- With a serial terminal connection, power up, and when the command line displays, press
Enter.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 55

 4: Quick Setup

- With a network connection, use an SSH client or Telnet program (if Telnet has been
enabled) to connect to xx.xx.xx.xx (the IP address in dot quad notation), and press
Enter. You should be at the login prompt.
2. Enter sysadmin as the user name and press Enter.
3. Enter PASS as the password and press Enter. The first time you log in, the Quick Setup script
runs automatically. Normally, the command prompt displays.

Figure 4-8 Beginning of Quick Setup Script

Welcome to the Lantronix SLC8000 Advanced Console Manager

Model Number: SLC8032

Quick Setup will now step you through configuring a few basic settings.

The current settings are shown in brackets ('[]').

You can accept the current setting for each question by pressing
<return>.

4. Enter the following information at the prompts:

Note: To accept a default or to skip an entry that is not required, press Enter.

CLI Quick Setup Description

Settings
Config Eth1 Select one of the following:
 (1) obtain IP Address from DHCP: The unit will acquire the IP address, subnet
mask, hostname, and gateway from the DHCP server. (The DHCP server may or
may not provide the gateway and hostname, depending on its setup.) This is the
default setting.
 (2) obtain IP Address from BOOTP: Permits a network node to request
configuration information from a BOOTP "server" node.
 (3) static IP Address: Allows you to assign a static IP address manually. The IP
address is generally provided by the system administrator.
IP Address (if An IP address that is unique and valid on your network and in the same subnet as
specifying) your PC. There is no default.
If you selected DHCP or BOOTP, this prompt does not display.
Enter all IP addresses in dot-quad notation. Do not use leading zeros in the fields for
dot-quad numbers less than 100. For example, if your IP address is 172.19.201.28,
do not enter 028 for the last octet.
Note: Configurations with the same IP subnet on multiple interfaces (Ethernet or
PPP) are not currently supported.
Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network segment on which the SLC 8000 advanced
console manager resides. There is no default. If you selected DHCP or BOOTP, this
prompt does not display.
Default Gateway IP address of the router for this network. There is no default.
Hostname The default host name is slcXXXX, where XXXX is the last 4 characters of the
hardware address of Ethernet Port 1. There is a 64-character limit (contiguous
characters, no spaces).
Note: The host name becomes the prompt in the command line interface.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 56

 4: Quick Setup

CLI Quick Setup Description

Settings
Domain If desired, specify a domain name (for example, support.lantronix.com). The domain
name is used for host name resolution within the SLC unit. For example, if abcd is
specified for the SMTP server, and mydomain.com is specified for the domain, if
abcd cannot be resolved, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager attempts to
resolve abcd.mydomain.com for the SMTP server.
Time Zone If the time zone displayed is incorrect, enter the correct time zone and press Enter. If
the entry is not a valid time zone, the system guides you through selecting a time
zone. A list of valid regions and countries displays. At the prompts, enter the correct
region and country.
Date/Time If the date and time displayed are correct, type n and continue. If the date and time
are incorrect, type y and enter the correct date and time in the formats shown at the
prompts.
Sysadmin Enter a new sysadmin password.
password

After you complete the Quick Setup script, the changes take effect immediately.

Figure 4-9 Quick Setup Completed in CLI

Welcome to the Lantronix SLC8000 Advanced Console Manager

Model Number: SLC8032

Quick Setup will now step you through configuring a few basic settings.

The current settings are shown in brackets ('[]').

You can accept the current setting for each question by pressing
<return>.

____Ethernet Port and Default Gateway___________________________________

The SLC8032 has two ethernet ports, Eth1 and Eth2.
By default, both ports are configured for DHCP.
Configure Eth1: (1) obtain IP Address from DHCP
(2) obtain IP Address from BOOTP
(3) static IP Address
Enter 1-3: [1]

The SLC8032 can be configured to use a default gateway.

Enter gateway IP Address: [none]

____Hostname____________________________________________________________
The current hostname is 'slc0348', and the current domain is
'<undefined>'.
The hostname will be shown in the CLI prompt.
Specify a hostname: [slc0348]
Specify a domain: [<undefined>]

____Time Zone___________________________________________________________

The current time zone is 'GMT'.

Enter time zone: [GMT]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 57

 4: Quick Setup

____Date/Time___________________________________________________________
The current time is Wed May 18 20:51:04 2016
Change the current time? [n]

____Sysadmin Password___________________________________________________
The default sysadmin (administrator user) password is 'PASS'.
Enter new password: [PASS]

Quick Setup is now complete.

For a list of commands, type 'help'.

Next Step
After completing quick setup on the SLC 8000 advanced console manager, you may want to
configure other settings. You can use the web page or the command line interface for
configuration.
 For information about the web and the command line interfaces, go to Chapter 5: Web and
Command Line Interfaces.
 To continue configuring the SLC unit, go to Chapter 6: Basic Parameters.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 58

5: Web and Command Line Interfaces
The SLC advanced console manager offers three interfaces for configuring the SLC unit: a
command line interface (CLI), a web interface, and an LCD with keypad buttons on the front panel.
This chapter discusses the web and command line interfaces.

Note: See Chapter 4: Quick Setup on page 48 for instructions on using the LCD front
panel to configure basic network settings, Web Manager, and CLI to perform quick setup.

Web Manager
A Web Manager allows the system administrator and other authorized users to configure and
manage the SLC 8000 advanced console manager using most web browsers (Firefox, Chrome or
Internet Explorer web applications with the latest browser updates). The SLC unit provides a
secure, encrypted web interface over SSL (secure sockets layer).

Note: The web server listens for requests on the unencrypted (HTTP) port (port 80) and
redirects all requests to the encrypted (HTTPS) port (port 443). Web Telnet and Web SSH
features (utilized in SLC console managers with firmware 7.2.0.0 or earlier) require Java
1.1 (or later) support in the browser.

The following figure shows a typical web page:

Figure 5-1 Web Page Layout

Logout Button Dashboard

Tabs Icons

Help
Options Button

Entry Fields
and Options

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 59

 5: Web and Command Line Interfaces

The web page has the following components:

 Tabs: Groups of settings to configure.
 Options: Below each tab are options for specific types of settings.

Note: Only those options for which the currently logged-in user has rights display.

Figure 5-2 Sample Dashboards

 Dashboard
The appearance of the user interface dashboard will differ according to the type of NIC card
and bay modules installed in the back of the SLC 8000. See Figure 2-2 SLC 8048 Unit
Samples (Back Side) - Part Number SLC80482201S (on page 24), Figure 3-7 Sample Device
Port Connections (Back Side) (on page 38), and Figure 5-2 Sample Dashboards (on page 60).
- The light green LCD button allows you to configure the front panel LCD.
- The beige SD button allows you to configure the SD card, if a card is inserted. See
Chapter 9: USB/SD Card Port on page 184.
- The gray U1 button allows you to configure the upper USB device (flash drive or modem)
plugged into the front panel USB connector. The gray U2 button allows you to configure
the lower USB device plugged into the front panel USB connector. See Chapter 9: USB/
SD Card Port on page 184.
- The brown MD button allows you to configure the internal modem, if an internal modem is
installed.
- The blue E1 and E2 buttons display the Network > Network Settings page for the Ethernet
port.
- The F1 and F2 buttons display the Network > Network Settings page for the SFP
transceiver port.
- The number buttons allow you to select a port and display its settings. Only ports to which
the currently logged-in user has rights are enabled.
Below the bar are options for use with the port buttons. Selecting a port and the
Configuration option takes you to the Device Ports > Settings page. Selecting a port and
the WebSSH option displays the WebSSH window for the device port --if Web SSH is
enabled, and if SSH is enabled for the device port. Selecting the port and the Connected
Device button allows access to supported devices such as remote power managers
(RPMs) and/or SensorSoft temperature and humidity probes connected to the device port.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 60

 5: Web and Command Line Interfaces

- The yellow orange A and B buttons display the status of the power supplies.
 Entry Fields and Options: Allow you to enter data and select options for the settings.

Note: For specific instructions on completing the fields on the web pages, see Chapters
5 through 12.

 Apply Button: Apply on each web page makes the changes immediately and saves them so
they will be there when the SLC 8000 advanced console manager is rebooted.
 Icons: The icon bar above the Main Menu has icons that display the following:

Home page.

Information about the SLC unit and Lantronix contact information.

Configuration site map.

Status of the SLC 8000 advanced console manager.

 Help Button: Provides online Help for the specific web page.

Logging in
Only the system administrator or users with web access rights can log into the Web Manager.
More than one user at a time can log in, but the same user cannot login more than once.

To log in to the SLC Web Manager:

1. Open a web browser.

2. In the URL field, type https:// followed by the IP address of your SLC 8000 advanced
console manager.
3. To configure the SLC unit, use sysadmin as the user name and PASS as the password.
(These are the default values.)

Note: The system administrator may have changed the password using one of the
Quick Setup methods in the previous chapter.

The Lantronix SLC Quick Setup page displays automatically the first time you log in.
Subsequently, the Lantronix SLC Home page displays. (If you want to display the Quick Setup
page again, click Quick Setup on the main menu.)

Logging Out
To log off the SLC web interface:

1. Click the Logout button located on the upper left part of any Web Manager page. You are
brought back to the login screen when logout is complete.

Web Page Help

To view detailed information about an SLC web page:

1. Click the Help button to the right of any Web Manager page. Online Help contents will appear
in a new browser window.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 61

 5: Web and Command Line Interfaces

Command Line Interface

A command line interface (CLI) is available for entering all the commands you can use with the
SLC 8000 advanced console manager. In this user guide, after each section of instructions for
using the web interface, you will find the equivalent CLI commands. You can access the command
line interface using Telnet, SSH, or a serial terminal connection.

Note: By default, Telnet is disabled and SSH is enabled. To enable Telnet, use the
Services > SSH/Telnet/Logging web page, a serial terminal connection, or an SSH
connection. (See Chapter 7: Services.)

The sysadmin user and users with who have full administrative rights have access to the complete
command set, while all other users have access to a reduced command set based on their
permissions.

Logging In
To log in to the SLC command line interface:

1. Do one of the following:

- With a serial terminal connection, power up, and when the command line displays, press
Enter.
- If the SLC 8000 advanced console manager already has an IP address (assigned
previously or assigned by DHCP), Telnet (if Telnet has been enabled) or SSH to
xx.xx.xx.xx (the IP address in dot quad notation) and press Enter. The login prompt
displays.
2. To log in as the system administrator for setup and configuration, enter sysadmin as the user
name and press Enter.
3. Enter PASS as the password and press Enter. The first time you log in, the Quick Setup script
runs automatically. Normally, the command prompt displays. (If you want to display the Quick
Setup script again, use the admin quicksetup command.)

Note: The system administrator may have changed the password using one of the
Quick Setup methods in the previous chapter.

To log in any other user:

1. Enter your SLC user name and press Enter.

2. Enter your SLC password and press Enter.

Logging Out
To log out of the SLC command line interface, type logout and press Enter.

Command Syntax
Commands have the following format:
<action> <category> <parameter(s)>
where
<action> is set, show, connect, admin, diag, or logout.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 62

 5: Web and Command Line Interfaces

<category> is a group of related parameters whose settings you want to configure or view.
Examples are ntp, deviceport, and network.
<parameter(s)> is one or more name-value pairs in one of the following formats:

<parameter name> <aa|bb> User must specify one of the values (aa or bb) separated by a
vertical line ( | ). The values are in all lowercase and must be
entered exactly as shown. Bold indicates a default value.
<parameter name> <Value> User must specify an appropriate value, for example, an IP address.
The parameter values are in mixed case. Square brackets [ ]
indicate optional parameters.

Command Line Help

 For general Help and to display the commands to which you have rights, type: help
 For general command line Help, type: help command line
 For release notes for the current firmware release, type: help release
 For more information about a specific command, type help followed by the command. For
example: help set network or help admin firmware

Tips
 Type enough characters to identify the action, category, or parameter name uniquely. For
parameter values, type the entire value. For example, you can shorten:
set network port 1 state static ipaddr 122.3.10.1 mask 255.255.0.0
to
se net po 1 st static ip 122.3.10.1 ma 255.255.0.0
 Use the Tab key to automatically complete action, category, or parameter names. Type a
partial name and press Tab either to complete the name if only one is possible, or to display
the possible names if more than one is possible. Following a space after the preceding name,
Tab displays all possible names.
 Should you make a mistake while typing, backspace by pressing the Backspace key and/or
the Delete key, depending on how you accessed the interface. Both keys work if you use
VT100 emulation in your terminal access program when connecting to the console port. Use
the left and right arrow keys to move within a command.
 Use the up and down arrows to scroll through previously entered commands. If desired, select
one and edit it. You can scroll through up to 100 previous commands entered in the session.
 To clear an IP address, type 0.0.0.0, or to clear a non-IP address value, type CLEAR.
 When the number of lines displayed by a command exceeds the size of the window (the
default is 25), the command output is halted until the user is ready to continue. To display the
next line, press Enter, and to display the page, press the space bar. You can override the
number of lines (or disable the feature altogether) with the set cli command.General CLI
Commands
The following commands relate to the CLI itself.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 63

 5: Web and Command Line Interfaces

To configure the current command line session:

set cli scscommands <enable|disable>

Allows you to use SCS-compatible commands as shortcuts for executing commands:

Note: Settings are retained between CLI sessions for local users and users listed in the
remote users list.

Table 5-3 SCS Commands

SCS Commands Commands
info 'show sysstatus'
version 'admin version'
reboot 'admin reboot'
poweroff 'admin shutdown'
listdev 'show deviceport names'
direct 'connect direct deviceport'
listen 'connect listen deviceport'
clear 'set locallog clear'
telnet 'connect direct telnet'
ssh 'connect direct ssh'

To set the number of lines displayed by a command:

set cli terminallines <disable|Number of lines>

Sets the number of lines in the terminal emulation (screen) for paging through text one screenful at
a time, if the SLC 8000 unit cannot detect the size of the terminal automatically.

To show current CLI settings:

show cli

To view the last 100 commands entered in the session:

show history

To clear the command history:

set history clear

To view the rights of the currently logged-in user:

show user

Note: For information about user rights, see Chapter 12: User Authentication.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 64

 5: Web and Command Line Interfaces

Table 5-4 CLI Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard Shortcut Description
Control + [a] Move to the start of the line.
Control + [e] Move to the end of the line.
Control + [b] Move back to the start of the current word.
Control + [f] Move forward to the end of the next word.
Control + [u] Erase from cursor to the beginning of the line.
Control + [k] Erase from cursor to the end of the line.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 65

6: Basic Parameters
This chapter explains how to set the following basic configuration settings for the SLC advanced
console manager using the SLC web interface or the CLI:
 Network parameters that determine how the SLC 8000 advanced console manager interacts
with the attached network
 Firewall and routing
 Date and time

Note: If you entered some of these settings using a Quick Setup procedure, you may
update them here.

Requirements
If you assign a different IP address from the current one, it must be within a valid range and unique
to your network. If a valid gateway address has not been assigned the IP address must be on the
same subnet as workstations connecting to the SLC 8000 over the network.
To configure the unit, you need the following information:
Eth1 IP address: ________ - ________ - ________ - ________
Subnet mask: ________ - ________ - ________ - ________
Eth2 IP address (optional): ________ - ________ - ________ - ________
Subnet mask (optional): ________ - ________ - ________ - ________

Gateway: ___________ - ___________ - ___________ - ___________

DNS: ___________ - ___________ - ___________ - ___________

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 66

 6: Basic Parameters

Network Port Settings

Network parameters determine how the SLC unit interacts with the attached network. Use this
page to set the following basic configuration settings for the network ports (Eth1 and Eth2).
The SLC supports the following types of network interfaces:
 RJ-45 ports, as part of the standard SLC RJ45 NIC board. In the web UI port banner bar,
these are represented as and . These ports can be configured for speeds of 10Mbit,
100 Mbit or 1000 Mbit, at half-duplex or full-duplex. The RJ45 Ethernet NIC LEDs display the
following states:
- Green Light On: indicates a link at 1000 BASE-T
- Green Light Off: indicates a link at other speeds, or no link
- Yellow Light On: indicates a link is established
- Yellow Light Blinking: indicates link activity
 A variety of SFP modules, installed in the SLC SFP NIC board. In the web UI port banner bar,
these are represented as and , in a variety of colors. Single mode 1000 BASE-LX
optical SFPs are shown in yellow as . Multi mode 1000 BASE-SX optical SFPs are shown
as . RJ45 1000 BASE-T SFPs are shown in blue as . A port with no SFP module is
shown in white as F1. A port with an unknown SFP module is shown as . The SFP
Ethernet NIC LEDs are located between the two SFP module slots; the LEDs for Ethernet 1
are on the left, and the LEDs for Ethernet 2 are on the right. They display the following states:
- Green Light On: indicates a link is established
- Green Light Off: indicates no link
- Yellow Light On: indicates no link activity
- Yellow Light Blinking: indicates link activity
These ports are fixed at 1000 Mbit full-duplex. Note that in some vendor's RJ45 1000 BASE-T
transceivers, the RX LOS is internally ground, so the link status feature may fail.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 67

 6: Basic Parameters

To enter settings for one or both network ports:

1. Click the Network tab and select the Network Settings option. The following page displays:

Figure 6-1 Network > Network Settings

Note: The SFP NIC Info & Diagnostics link in the Network > Network Settings page only
appears in SLC units equipped with an SFP NIC board.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 68

 6: Basic Parameters

Figure 6-2 Network Settings > SFP NIC Information & Diagnostics

2. Enter the following information:

Ethernet Interfaces (Eth1 and Eth2)

Note: Configurations with the same IP subnet on multiple interfaces (Ethernet or PPP)
are not currently supported.

Eth 1 Settings  Disabled: If selected, disables the network port.

or  Obtain from DHCP: Acquires IP address, subnet mask, hostname and gateway
Eth 2 Settings from the DHCP server. (The DHCP server may not provide the hostname
gateway, depending on its setup.) This is the default setting. If you select this
option, skip to Gateway.
 Obtain from BOOTP: Lets a network node request configuration information
from a BOOTP "server" node. If you select this option, skip to Gateway.
 Specify: Lets you manually assign a static IP address, generally provided by the
system administrator.
IP Address  Enter an IP address that will be unique and valid on your network. There is no
(if specifying) default.
 Enter all IP addresses in dot-quad notation. Do not use leading zeros in the
fields for dot-quad numbers less than 100. For example, if your IP address is
172.19.201.28, do not enter 028 for the last segment octet.
Note: Currently, the SLC unit does not support configurations with the same IP
subnet on multiple interfaces (Ethernet or PPP).
Subnet Mask If specifying an IP address, enter the network segment on which the SLC unit
resides. There is no default.
IPv6 Address Address of the port in IPv6 format.
(Static)
Note: The SLC 8000 advanced console manager supports IPv6 connections for
the following services: the web, SSH, Telnet, remote syslog, SNMP, NTP, LDAP,
Kerberos, RADIUS, TACACS+, connections to device ports, and diagnostic ping.
IPv6 addresses are written as 8 sets of 4-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by
colons. There are several rules for modifying the address. For example:
1234:0BCD:1D67:0000:0000:8375:BADD:0057 may be shortened to
1234:BCD:1D67::8375:BADD:57.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 69

 6: Basic Parameters

IPv6 Address IPv6 address with global scope that is generated by address autoconfiguration. The
(Global)" address is generated from a combination of router advertisements and MAC
address to create a unique IPv6 address. This field is read only.
Note: This field will not appear in the absence of an IPv6 global address.
IPv6 Address An IPv6 address that is intended only for communications within the segment of a
(Link Local) local network. This field is read only.
Mode Select the direction, duplex mode (full duplex or half-duplex), and speed (10, 100,
or 1000 Mbit) of data transmission. The default is Auto, which allows the Ethernet
port to auto-negotiate the speed and duplex with the hardware endpoint to which it
is connected.
MTU Specifies the maximum transmission unit (MTU) or maximum packet size of
packets at the IP layer (OSI layer 3) for the Ethernet port. When fragmenting a
datagram, this is the largest number of bytes that can be used in a packet.
HW Address Displays the hardware address of the Ethernet port.
Multicast Displays the multicast address of the Ethernet port.
Enable IPv6 Select this box to enable the IPv6 protocol. If changed, the SLC unit will need to
reboot. Enabled by default.
Ethernet Bonding Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 can be bonded to support redundancy (Active Backup),
aggregation (802.3ad), and load balancing. Disabled by default. Note that if
Ethernet Bonding is enabled, assigning individual IP Addresses to Device Ports is
not supported.
SFP NIC Info & Clicking the link brings you to the Network Settings > SFP NIC Information &
Diagnostics (Link) Diagnostics page showing information and diagnostics about the SFP connection
port, temperature, voltage, current, output power, input power, LOS, and TX fault.
Click Back to Network Settings to return to the Network > Network Settings page.
Note: The SFP NIC Info & Diagnostics link in the Network > Network Settings
page only appears in SLC units equipped with an SFP NIC board.
Ethernet Bonding Click the link to access Ethernet bonding status information. Ethernet 1 and
Status (Link) Ethernet 2 can be bonded to support redundancy (Active Backup), aggregation
(802.3ad), and load balancing. Disabled by default. Note that if Ethernet Bonding is
enabled, assigning individual IP Addresses to Device Ports is not supported.
Click Back to Network Settings link to return to the Network Settings page.
Prefer IPv4 DNS If enabled, IPv4 DNS records will be preferred when DNS hostname lookups are
Records performed. Otherwise IPv6 records will be preferred (when IPv6 is enabled).
Enabled by default.
Enable IP Forwarding If enabled, IP forwarding enables IPv4 network traffic received on one interface
(Eth1, Eth2, or an external/USB modem attached to the SLC unit with an active
PPP connection) to be transferred out another interface (any of the above). The
default behavior (if IP forwarding is disabled) is for network traffic to be received but
not routed to another destination.
Enabling IP forwarding is required if you enable Network Address Translation
(NAT) for any device port modem or USB/ISDN modem. IP forwarding allows a
user accessing the SLC 8000 advanced console manager over a modem to access
the network connected to Eth1 or Eth2.
Enable IPv6 If enabled, IPv6 forwarding enables IPv6 network traffic received on one interface
Forwarding (Eth1, Eth2, or an external/USB modem attached to the SLC unit with an active
PPP connection) to be transferred out another interface (any of the above). The
default behavior (if IP forwarding is disabled) is for network traffic to be received but
not routed to another destination.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 70

 6: Basic Parameters

Note: Configurations with the same IP subnet on multiple interfaces (Ethernet or PPP)
are not currently supported.

Gateway
Default IP address of the IPv4 router for this network.
If this has not been set manually, any gateway acquired by DHCP for Eth1 or Eth2
displays.
All network traffic that matches the Eth1 IP address and subnet mask is sent out
Eth1. All network traffic that matches the Eth2 IP address and subnet mask is sent
out Eth 2.
If you set a default gateway, any network traffic that does not match Eth1 or Eth2 is
sent to the default gateway for routing.
DHCP-Acquired Gateway acquired by DHCP for Eth1 or Eth2. View only.
Precedence Indicates whether the gateway acquired by DHCP or the default gateway takes
precedence. The default is DHCP Gateway. If the DHCP Gateway is selected and
both Eth1 and Eth2 are configured for DHCP, the SLC unit gives precedence to the
Eth1 gateway.
IPv6 Default Indicates the IPv6 default gateway.
Alternate An alternate IP address of the router for this network, to be used if an IP address
usually accessible through the default gateway fails to return one or more pings.
IP Address to Ping IP address to ping to determine whether to use the alternate gateway.
Ethernet Port to Ping Ethernet port to use for the ping.
Delay between Pings Number of seconds between pings
Number of Failed Number of pings that fail before the SLC 8000 advanced console manager uses the
Pings alternate gateway.

Hostname & Name Servers

Hostname The default host name is slcXXXX, where XXXX is the last 4 characters of the
hardware address of Ethernet Port 1. There is a 64-character limit (contiguous
characters, no spaces). The host name becomes the prompt in the command line
interface.
Domain If desired, specify a domain name (for example, support.lantronix.com). The domain
name is used for host name resolution within the SLC unit. For example, if abcd is
specified for the SMTP server, and mydomain.com is specified for the domain, if
abcd cannot be resolved, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager attempts to
resolve abcd.mydomain.com for the SMTP server.

DNS Servers
#1 - #3 Configure up to three name servers with an IPv4 or IPv6 address. #1 is required if
you choose to configure DNS (Domain Name Server) servers.
The first three DNS servers acquired via DHCP through Eth1 and/or Eth2 display
automatically.

DHCP-Acquired DNS Servers

#1 - #3 Displays the IP address of the name servers if automatically assigned by DHCP.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 71

 6: Basic Parameters

TCP Keepalive Parameters

Start Probes Number of seconds the SLC unit waits after the last transmission before sending the
first probe to determine whether a TCP session is still alive. The default is 600
seconds (10 minutes).
Number of Probes Number of probes the SLC 8000 advanced console manager sends before closing a
session. The default is 5.
Interval The number of seconds the SLC unit waits between probes. The default is 60
seconds.

3. To save your entries, click the Apply button. Apply makes the changes immediately and
saves them so they will be there when the SLC 8000 advanced console manager is rebooted.

Ethernet Counters
The Network > Network Settings page displays statistics for each of the SLC Ethernet ports since
boot-up. The system automatically updates them.

Note: For Ethernet statistics for a smaller time period, use the diag perfstat
command.

Network Commands
The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To configure Ethernet port 1 or 2:

set network port <1|2> <Parameters>

Parameters

state <dhcp|bootp|static|disable> [ipaddr <IP Address> mask <Mask>]

ipv6addr <IPv6 Address/Prefix>
mode <auto|10mbit-half|100mbit-half|10mbit-full|100mbit-full|
1000mbit-full>
mtu <Maximum Transmission Unit>

To configure IPv6 networking:

set network ipv6 <enable|disable>

To configure IPv4/IPv6 DNS lookup precedence:

set network dnsipv4prec <enable|disable>

To configure up to three DNS servers:

set network dns <1|2|3> ipaddr <IP Address>

To set the default and alternate network gateways:

set network gateway <parameters>

Parameters
default <IP Address>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 72

 6: Basic Parameters

ipv6default <IPv6 Address>

precedence <dhcp|default>
alternate <IP Address>
pingip <IP Address>
ethport <1 or 2>
pingdelay <1-250 seconds>
failedpings <1-25>
The alternate gateway is used if an IP address usually accessible through the default gateway fails
to return one or more pings.

To set the SLC host name and domain name:

set network host <Hostname> [domain <Domain Name>]

To set TCP Keepalive and IP Forwarding network parameters:

set network <parameters>

Parameters
startprobes <1-99999 Seconds>
probes <Number of Probes>
interval <1-99999 Seconds>
ipforwarding <enable|disable>
ipv6forwarding <enable|disable>

To view all network settings:

show network all

To view Ethernet port settings and counters:

show network port <1|2>

To view DNS settings:

show network dns

To view gateway settings:

show network gateway

To view the host name of the SLC 8000 advanced console manager:

show network host

To view bonding settings and status of the SLC 8000 advanced console manager:

show network bonding

To view IPv6 settings of the SLC 8000 advanced console manager:

show network ipv6

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 73

 6: Basic Parameters

To view SFP diagnostics of the SLC 8000 advanced console manager:

show network sfp

IP Filter
IP filters (also called a rule set) act as a firewall to allow or deny individual or a range of IP
addresses, ports, and protocols. When a network connection is configured to use an IP filter, all
network traffic through that connection is compared, in order, to the rules of that filter. Network
traffic may be allowed to pass, it may be dropped (without notice), or it may be rejected (sends
back an error packet) depending upon the rules of that filter rule set.
The administrator uses the Network > IP Filter page to view, add, edit, delete, and map IP filters.

Warning: IP filters configuration is a feature for advanced users. Adding and

enabling IP filter sets incorrectly can disable access to your SLC unit.

Viewing IP Filters
You can view a list of filters and a table showing how each filter is mapped to an interface.

To view a list of IP filters:

1. Click the Network tab and select the IP Filter option. The following page displays:

Figure 6-3 Network > IP Filter

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 74

 6: Basic Parameters

Mapping Rulesets
The administrator can assign an IP Filter Rule Set to a network interface (Ethernet interface), a
modem connected to a device port, or a USB modem or an internal modem (if installed).

To map a ruleset to a network interface:

1. Click the Network tab and select the IP Filter option. The Network > IP Filter page displays.
2. Select the IP filter rule set to be mapped.
3. From the Interface drop-down list, select the desired network interface and click the Map
Ruleset button. The Interface and rule set display in the IP Filter Mappings table.

To delete a mapping:

1. Click the Network tab and select the IP Filter option. The Network > IP Filter page displays.
2. Select the mapping from the list and click the Delete Mappings button. The mapping no
longer displays.
3. Click the Apply button.

Enabling IP Filters
On the Network > IP Filter page, you can enable all filters or disable all filters.

Note: There is no way to enable or disable individual filters.

To enable IP filters:

1. Enter the following:

Enable IP Filter Select the Enable IP Filter checkbox to enable all filters, or clear the checkbox
to disable all filters. Disabled by default.
Packets Dropped Displays the number of data packets that the filter ignored (did not respond to).
View only.
Packets Rejected Displays the number of data packets that the filter sent a “rejected” response to.
View only.
Test Timer Timer for testing IP Filter rulesets. Select No to disable the timer. Select Yes,
minutes (1-120) to enable the timer and enter the number of minutes the timer
should run. The timer automatically disables the IP Filters when the time
expires.
Time Remaining Indicates how many minutes are left on the timer before it expires and IP Filters
disabled. View only.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 75

 6: Basic Parameters

Configuring IP Filters
The administrator can add, edit, delete, and map IP filters.

Note: A configured filter has no effect until it is mapped to a network interface.

See Mapping Rulesets on page 75.

To add an IP filter:

1. On the Network > IP Filter page, click the Add Ruleset button. The following page displays:

Figure 6-4 Network > IP Filter Ruleset (Adding/Editing Rulesets)

Rulesets can be added or updated on this page.

2. Enter the following:
Ruleset Name Name that identifies a filter; may be composed of letters, numbers, and hyphens
only. (The name cannot start with a hyphen.)
Example: FILTER-2

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 76

 6: Basic Parameters

Rule Parameters
IP Address(es) Specify a single IP address to act as a filter.
Example: 172.19.220.64 – this specific IP address only
Subnet Mask Specify a subnet mask to act determine how much of the address should apply to
the filter.
Example: 255.255.255.255 to specify the whole address should apply.
Protocol From the drop-down list, select the type of protocol through which the filter will
operate. The default setting is All.
Port Range Enter a range of destination TCP or UDP port numbers to be tested. An entry is
required for TCP, TCP New, TCP Established, and UDP, and is not allowed for
other protocols. Separate multiple ports with commas. Separate ranges of ports by
colons.
Examples:
 22 – filter on port 22 only
 23,64,80 – filter on ports 23, 64 and 80
 23:64,80,143:150 – filter on ports 23 through 64, port 80 and ports 143 through
150
Action Select whether to Drop, Reject, or Allow communications for the specified IP
address, subnet mask, protocol, and port range. Drop ignores the packet with no
notification. Reject ignores the packet and sends back an error message. Allow
permits the packet through the filter.
Clear Click the Clear button to clear any Rule Parameter information set above.
Generate rule to You may wish to “punch holes” in your filter set for a particular protocol or service.
allow service For instance, if you have configured your NIS server and wish to create an opening
in your filter set, select the NIS option and click the Add Rule button. This entry
adds a new rule to your filter set using the NIS -configured IP address. Other
services and protocols added automatically generate the necessary rule to allow
their use.

3. Click the right arrow button to add the new rule to the bottom of the Rules list box on the
right. A maximum of 64 rules can be created for each ruleset.

4. To remove a rule from the filter set, highlight that line and click the left arrow. The rule
populates the rule definition fields, allowing you to make minor changes before reinserting the
rule. To clear the definition fields, click the Clear button.
5. To change the order of priority of the rules in the list box, select the rule to move and use the
up or down arrow buttons on the right side of the filter list box.
6. To save, click the Apply button. The new filter displays in the menu tree.

Note: To add another new filter rule set, click the Back to IP Filter link to return to the
Network > IP Filter page.

Updating an IP Filter
To update an IP filter rule set:

1. From the Network > IP Filter page, the administrator selects the IP filter ruleset to be edited
and clicks the Edit Ruleset button to return to the Network > IP Filter Ruleset (Adding/Editing
Rulesets) page (see Figure 6-4).
2. Edit the information as desired and click the Apply button.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 77

 6: Basic Parameters

Deleting an IP Filter
To delete an IP filter rule set:

1. On the Network > IP Filter page, the administrator selects the IP filter ruleset to be deleted and
clicks the Delete Ruleset button.

IP Filter Commands
The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To enable or disable IP filtering for incoming network traffic:

set ipfilter state <enable|disable> [testtimer <disable|1-120 minutes>]

To set IP filter mapping:

set ipfilter mapping <parameters>

Parameters
ethernet <1|2|bond0> state <disable>
ethernet <1|2|bond0> state <enable> ruleset <Ruleset Name>
deviceport <1..48> state <disable>
deviceport <1..48> state <enable> ruleset <Ruleset Name>
internal modem state <disable>
internal modem state <enable> ruleset <Ruleset Name>
usbport <U1|U2> state <disable>
usbport <U1|U2> state <enable> ruleset <Ruleset Name>

To set IP filter rules:

set ipfilter rules <parameters>

Parameters
add <Ruleset Name>
delete <Ruleset Name>
edit <Ruleset Name> <Edit Parameters>

Edit Parameters

append
insert <Rule Number>
replace <Rule Number>
delete <Rule Number>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 78

 6: Basic Parameters

Routing
The SLC 8000 advanced console manager allows you to define static routes and, for networks
using Routing Information Protocol (RIP)-capable routes, to enable the RIP protocol to configure
the routes dynamically.

To configure routing settings:

1. Click the Network tab and select the Routing option. The following page displays:

Figure 6-5 Network > Routing

2. Enter the following:

Dynamic Routing
Enable RIP Select to enable Dynamic Routing Information Protocol (RIP) to assign routes
automatically. Disabled by default.
RIP Version Select the RIP version. The default is 2.

Static Routing
Enable Static Select to assign the routes manually. The system administrator usually provides the
Routing routes. Disabled by default.
 To add a static route, enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway for the
route and click the Add/Edit Route button. The route displays in the Static Routes
table. You can add up to 64 static routes.
 To edit a static route, select the radio button to the right of the route, change the IP
Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway fields as desired, and click the Add/Edit
Route button.
 To delete a static route, select the radio button to the right of the route and click the
Delete Route button.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 79

 6: Basic Parameters

3. Click the Apply button.

Note: To display the routing table, status or specific report, see the section,
Status/Reports on page 291.

Equivalent Routing Commands

The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To configure static or dynamic routing:

set routing [parameters]

Parameters
rip <enable|disable>
route <1-64> ipaddr <IP Address> mask <Netmask> gateway <IP Address>
static <enable|disable>
version <1|2|both>

Note: To delete a static route, set the IP address, mask, and gateway parameters to
0.0.0.0.

To set the routing table to display IP addresses (disable) or the corresponding host names
(enable):

show routing [resolveip <enable|disable>] [email <Email Address>]

Note: You can optionally email the displayed information.

VPN
This page can be used to create a Virtual Private Network (VPN) tunnel to the SLC 8000 advanced
console manager for secure communication between the SLC unit and a remote host or gateway.
The SLC 8000 advanced console manager supports IPSec tunnels using Encapsulated Security
Payload (ESP). The SLC unit supports host-to-host, net-to-net, host-to-net, and roaming user
tunnels.

Note: To allow VPN tunnel access if the SLC firewall is enabled, traffic to UDP ports 500
and 4500 from the remote host should be allowed, as well as protocol ESP from the
remote host.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 80

 6: Basic Parameters

To complete the VPN page:

1. Click the Network tab and select the VPN option. The following page displays:

Figure 6-6 Network > VPN

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 81

 6: Basic Parameters

2. Enter the following:

Enable VPN Tunnel Select to create a tunnel.
Name The name assigned to the tunnel. Required to create a tunnel.
Ethernet Port Select Ethernet port 1 or 2.
Remote Host The IP address of the remote host's public network interface. The special
value of any can be entered if the remote host is a roaming user who may
not have the same IP address each time a tunnel is created. In this case, it
is recommended that the Remote Id also be configured.
Remote Id How the remote host should be identified for authentication. The Id is used
to select the proper credentials for communicating with the remote host.
Remote Hop/Router If the remote host is behind a gateway, this specifies the IP address of the
gateway's public network interface.
Remote Subnet(s) One or more subnets behind the remote host, expressed in CIDR notation
(IP address/mask bits). If multiple subnets are specified, the subnets should
be separated by a comma.
Local Id How the SLC 8000 advanced console manager should be identified for
authentication. The Id is used by the remote host to select the proper
credentials for communicating with the SLC advanced console manager.
Local Hop/ If the SLC unit is behind a gateway, this specifies the IP address of the
Router gateway's public network interface.
Local Subnet(s) One or more subnets behind the SLC 8000 advanced console manager,
expressed in CIDR notation (IP address/mask bits). If multiple subnets are
specified, the subnets should be separated by a comma.
IKE Negotiation The Internet Key Exchange (IKE) protocol is used to exchange security
options between two hosts who want to communicate via IPSec. The first
phase of the protocol authenticates the two hosts to each other and
establishes the Internet Security Association Key Management Protocol
Security Association (ISAKMP SA). The second phase of the protocol
establishes the cryptographic parameters for protecting the data passed
through the tunnel, which is the IPSec Security Association (IPSec SA). The
IPSec SA can periodically be renegotiated to ensure security. The IKE
protocol can use one of two modes: Main Mode, which provides identity
protection and takes longer, or Aggressive Mode, which provides no
identity protection but is quicker. With Aggressive Mode, there is no
negotiation of which cryptographic parameters will be used; each side must
give the correct cryptographic parameters in the initial package of the
exchange, otherwise the exchange will fail. If Aggressive Mode is used, the
IKE Encryption, IKE Authentication, and IKE DH Group must be
specified.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 82

 6: Basic Parameters

IKE v2 IKE version 2 settings to be used. Currently the accepted values are Permit,
(the default) signifying no IKEv2 should be transmitted, but will be accepted
if the other ends initiates to us with IKEv2; Never signifying no IKEv2
negotiation should be transmitted or accepted; Propose signifying that the
SLC will permit IKEv2, and also use it as the default to initiate; Insist,
signifying that the SLC only accept and receive IKEv2 and IKEv1
negotiations will be rejected.
If the IKEv2 setting is set to Permit or Propose, the SLC will try and detect a
"bid down" attack from IKEv2 to IKEv1. Since there is no standard for
transmitting the IKEv2 capability with IKEv1, the SLC uses a special Vendor
ID "CAN-IKEv2". If a fall back from IKEv2 to IKEv1 was detected, and the
IKEv1 negotiation contains Vendor ID "CAN-IKEv2", the SLC will
immediately attempt an IKEv2 rekey and refuse to use the IKEv1
connection. With an IKEv2 setting of Insist, no IKEv1 negotiation is allowed,
and no bid down attack is possible.
IKE Encryption The type of encryption, 3DES, AES, SHA2_256 or SHA2_512 used for IKE
negotiation. Any can be selected if the two sides can negotiate which type
of encryption to use.
Authentication (IKE) The type of authentication, SHA1 or MD5, used for IKE negotiation. Any
can be selected if the two sides can negotiate which type of authentication
to use.
DH Group (IKE) The Diffie-Hellman Group, 2, 5, 14 or 15 used for IKE negotiation. Any can
be selected if the two sides can negotiate which Diffie-Hellman Group to
use.
ESP Encryption The type of encryption, 3DES or AES, used for encrypting the data sent
through the tunnel. Any can be selected if the two sides can negotiate
which type of encryption to use.
Authentication (ESP) The type of authentication, SHA1, MD5, or SHA2_512 used for
authenticating data sent through the tunnel. Any can be selected if the two
sides can negotiate which type of authentication to use.
DH Group (ESP) The Diffie-Hellman Group, 2, 5, 14 or 15, used for the key exchange for data
sent through the tunnel. Any can be selected if the two sides can negotiate
which Diffie-Hellman Group to use.
Authentication The type of authentication used by the host on each side of the VPN tunnel
to verify the identity of the other host.
 For RSA Public Key, each host generates a RSA public-private key pair,
and shares its public key with the remote host. The RSA Public Key for
the SLC 8000 advanced console manager (which has 2192 bits) can be
viewed at either the web or CLI.
 For Pre-Shared Key, each host enters the same passphrase to be used
for authentication.
 For X.509 Certificate, each host is configured with a Certificate Authority
certificate along with a X.509 certificate with a corresponding private key,
and shares the X.509 certificate with the remote host.
RSA Public Key for If RSA Public Key is selected for authentication, enter the public key for the
Remote Host remote host.
Pre-Shared Key If Pre-Shared Key is selected for authentication, enter the key.
Retype Pre-Shared Key If Pre-Shared Key is selected for authentication, re-enter the key.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 83

 6: Basic Parameters

Certificate Authority for A certificate can be uploaded to the SLC unit for peer authentication. The
Remote Peer certificate for the remote peer is used to authenticate the SLC to the remote
peer, and at a minimum contains the public certificate file of the remote
Certificate File for Remote
peer. The certificate may also contain a Certificate Authority file; if the
Peer
Certificate Authority file is omitted, the SLC may display "issuer cacert not
found" and "X.509 certificate rejected" messages, but still authenticate. The
Certificate Authority file and public certificate File must be in PEM format,
e.g.:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
(certificate in base64 encoding)
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
Certificate Authority for A certificate can be uploaded to the SLC unit for peer authentication. The
Local Peer certificate for the local peer is used to authenticate any remote peer to the
SLC, and contains a Certificate Authority file, a public certificate file, and a
Certificate File for Local
private key file. The public certificate file can be shared with any remote
Peer
peer for authentication. The Certificate Authority and public certificate file
Key File for Local Peer must be in PEM format, e.g.:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
(certificate in base64 encoding)
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

The key file must be in RSA private key file (PKCS#1) format, eg:
-----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
(private key in base64 encoding)
-----END RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
Perfect Forward Secrecy When a new IPSec SA is negotiated after the IPSec SA lifetime expires, a
new Diffie-Hellman key exchange can be performed to generate a new
session key to be used to encrypt the data being sent through the tunnel. If
this is enabled, it provides greater security, since the old session keys are
destroyed.
SA Lifetime How long a particular instance of a connection should last, from successful
negotiation to expiry, in seconds. Normally, the connection is renegotiated
(via the keying channel) before it expires.
Mode Configuration Client If this is enabled, the SLC unit can receive network configuration from the
remote host. This allows the remote host to assign an IP address/netmask
to the SLC advanced console manager side of the VPN tunnel.
XAUTH Client If this is enabled, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager will send
authentication credentials to the remote host if they are requested. XAUTH,
or Extended Authentication, can be used as an additional security measure
on top of the Pre-Shared Key or RSA Public Key.
XAUTH Login (Client) If XAUTH Client is enabled, this is the login used for authentication.
XAUTH Password If XAUTH Client is enabled, this is the password used for authentication.
Retype Password If XAUTH Client is enabled, this is the password used for authentication.
Remote Peer Type Defines the type of the remote peer, either IETF (non-Cisco) or Cisco.
When set to Cisco, support for Cisco IPsec gateway redirection and Cisco
obtained DNS and domainname are enabled.
Force Encapsulation In some cases, for example when ESP packets are filtered or when a
broken IPsec peer does not properly recognise NAT, it can be useful to
force RFC-3948 encapsulation.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 84

 6: Basic Parameters

Dead Peer Detection Sets the delay (in seconds) between Dead Peer Detection (RFC 3706)
keepalives (R_U_THERE, R_U_THERE_ACK) that are sent for the tunnel
(default 30 seconds). Dead Peer Detection can also be disabled.
Dead Peer Detection Sets the length of time (in seconds) the SLC will idle without hearing either
Timeout an R_U_THERE poll from the peer, or an R_U_THERE_ACK reply. The
default is 120 seconds. After this period has elapsed with no response and
no traffic, the SLC will declare the peer dead, remove the Security
Association (SA), and perform the action defined by Dead Peer Detection
Action.
Dead Peer Detection Action When a Dead Peer Detection enabled peer is declared dead, the action that
should be taken. Hold (the default) means the tunnel will be put into a hold
status. Clear means the Security Association (SA) will be cleared. Restart
means the SA will immediately be renegotiated.

3. To save, click Apply button.

4. To see a details of the VPN tunnel connection, including the cryptographic algorithms used,
select the View Detailed Status link.
5. To see the last 100 lines of the logs associated with the VPN tunnel, select the View VPN
Logs link.
6. To see the RSA public key for the SLC 8000 advanced console manager (required for
configuring the remote host if RSA Public Keys are being used), select the View SLC RSA
Public Key link.
7. To see the X.509 Certificates for the SLC 8000 advanced console manager, select the View
X.509 Certificates link.

Configuring an IPsec VPN Tunnel through the CLI

1. Set vpn <parameters>:
tunnel <enable|disable>
ethport <1|2>
auth <rsa|psk|x509>
remotehost <RemoteHost IP Address or name>
remoteid <Authentication name>
remotehop <IP Address>
remotesubnet <one or more subnets in CIDR notation>
localid <Authentication Name>
localhop <IP Address>
localsubnet <one or more subnets in CIDR notation>
ikenegotation <main|aggressive>
ikeenc <any|3des|aes>
ikeauth <any|sha1|md5|sha2_256|sha2_512>
ikedhgroup <any|dh2|dh5|dh14|dh15>
espenc <any|3des|aes>
espauth <any|sha1|md5|sha2_256|sha2_512>
espdhgroup <any|dh2|dh5|dh14|dh15>
pfs <enable|disable>
lifetime <SA Lifetime in Seconds>
modeconfig <enable|disable>
xauthclient <enable|disable>
xauthlogin <User Login>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 85

 6: Basic Parameters

remotepeertype <ietf|cisco>
forceencaps <enable|disable>
deadpeerdelay <disable|1-300 seconds>
deadpeertimeout <5-1200 seconds>
deadpeeraction <restart|hold|clear>
2. Enter RSA public key or Pre-Shared Key of remote host: set vpn key
3. Configure X.509 certificate for remote peer or local peer.
set vpn certificate local via <sftp|scp> rootfile
<Cert Authority File>
certfile <Certificate File> keyfile <Private Key File>
host <IP Address or Name> login <User Login> [path <Path to Files>
set vpn certificate remote via <sftp|scp> [rootfile
<Cert Authority File>
certfile <Certificate File> host <IP Address or Name>
login <User Login> [path <Path to Files>
4. Delete X.509 certificate for local and/or remote peer.
set vpn certificate delete
5. Enter XAUTH password: set vpn xauthpassword
6. Display all VPN settings and current status: show vpn [email <Email Address>]
7. Display detailed VPN status: show vpn status [email <Email Address>]
8. Display VPN logs: show vpn viewlog [numlines <Number of Lines][email
<Email Address>]
9. Display RSA public key of the SLC: show vpn rsakey

Security
The SLC 8000 advanced console manager supports a security mode that complies with the FIPS
140-2 standard. FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard) 140-2 is a security standard
developed by the United States federal government that defines rules, regulations and standards
for the use of encryption and cryptographic services. The National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST) maintains the documents related to FIPS at:
http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/PubsFIPS.html
FIPS 140-2 defines four security levels, Level 1 through Level 4. The SLC unit uses a FIPS
module certified at Level 1.

Note: The SSH client keyboard-interactive authentication type is not supported while the
SLC unit is in FIPS mode. The SLC 8000 can support a limit of 25 concurrent CLI sessions
simultaneously when in FIPs mode.

To enable FIPS mode, the Network -> Security -> FIPS Mode flag needs to be enabled and the
SLC unit rebooted. Each time the SLC unit is booted in FIPS mode, it will perform a power up self
test to verify the integrity of the SLC unit's cryptographic module. If there are any issues with the
integrity of the cryptographic module, FIPS mode will be disabled and the SLC unit will be
rebooted into non-FIPS mode.
When the SLC unit is running in FIPS mode, the following protocols are supported: TLS 1.0, TLS
1.1, TLS 1.2, and SSH v2.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 86

 6: Basic Parameters

For SSL, the SLC unit will support the following cipher suites:
 AES128-SHA
 AES128-SHA256
 AES128-GCM-SHA256
 AES256-SHA
 AES256-SHA256
 AES256-GCM-SHA384
SSL/secure certificates imported for use with the web server or LDAP authentication must use
either the SHA1 or SHA2 hash with a RSA public key of 1024, 2048 or 3072 bits.
For SSH, the SLC unit will support the following cipher suites:
* AEAD-AES-128-GCM-SSH
* AEAD-AES-256-GCM-SSH
* AES128-CTR
* AES256-CTR
* AES192-CTR
SSH Keys imported for use with SSH authentication must use a RSA public key of 1024, 2048 or
3072 bits. SSH Keys exported by the SLC must use a RSA public key of 2048 or 3072 bits.
When the SLC unit is running in FIPS mode, the following protocols/functions will not be
supported: NIS, Kerberos, RADIUS, TACACS+, Telnet/WebTelnet, WebSSH, IPSec/VPN, SSH
v1, FTP, PPP, CIFS/Samba, TCP, UDP, unencrypted LDAP, and SNMP. If any of these protocols/
functions are enabled prior to enabling FIPS mode, they will be automatically disabled.
LDAP authentication must be configured with the following:
 StartTLS encryption (SSL encryption over port 636 is not supported)
 A SSL/secure certificate
 Either Bind with Login or a Bind Name and Password

Note: In FIPS mode, passphrases are not supported for SSH keys and SSL certificates.

Figure 6-7 Network > Security

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 87

 6: Basic Parameters

To enable FIPS:

Note: The SSH client keyboard-interactive authentication type is not supported while the
SLC unit is in FIPS mode.

1. Check the Enable FIPS Mode check box on the Networks > Security page.
2. Click Apply. The SLC unit will need to be rebooted to initiate FIPS mode. Once the SLC
module is running in FIPS mode, the Security page, will display all processes that are running
in FIPS mode.

To disable FIPS:

1. Uncheck the Enable FIPS Mode check box on the Networks > Security page.
2. Click Apply. The SLC unit will need to be rebooted for this change to take effect. When
rebooted after disabling FIPS mode, information about processes running in FIPS mode will
no longer display on the Security page.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 88

7: Services

System Logging and Other Services

Use the Services tab to:
 Configure the amount of data sent to the logs.
 Enable or disable SSH and Telnet logins.
 Enable a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent.

Note: The SLC advanced console manager supports both MIB-II (as defined by RFC
1213) and a private enterprise MIB. The private enterprise MIB provides read-only access
to all statistics and configurable items provided by the SLC unit. It provides read-write
access to a select set of functions for controlling the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager and device ports. See the MIB definition file for details.

 Identify a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server.

 Enable or disable SSH and Telnet logins.
 Configure an audit log.
 View the status of and manage the SLC 8000 advanced console managers on the Secure
Lantronix network.
 Set the date and time.
 Configure NFS and CIFS shares.
 Configure the web server.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 89

 7: Services

SSH/Telnet/Logging
To configure SSH, Telnet, and Logging settings:
1. Click the Services tab and select the SSH/Telnet/Logging option. The following page
displays.

Figure 7-1 Services > SSH/Telnet/Logging

2. Enter the following settings:

System Logging
In the System Logging section, select one of the following alert levels from the drop-down list for
each message category:
 Off: Disables this type of logging.
 Error: Saves messages that are output because of an error.
 Warning: Saves message output from a condition that may be cause for concern, in addition
to error messages. This is the default for all message types.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 90

 7: Services

 Info: Saves informative message, in addition to warning and error messages.

 Debug: Saves extraneous detail that may be helpful in tracking down a problem, in addition to
information, warning, and error messages.
Network Level Messages concerning the network activity, for example about Ethernet and routing.
Services Messages concerning services such as SNMP and SMTP.
Authentication Messages concerning user authentication.
Device Ports Messages concerning device ports and connections.
Diagnostics Messages concerning system status and problems.
General Any message not in the categories above.
Remote Servers The IPv4 or IPv6 address of the remote server(s) where system logs are stored.
(#1 and #2) The system log is always saved to local SLC storage. It is retained through SLC unit
reboots for files up to 200K. Saving the system log to a server that supports remote
logging services (see RFC 3164) allows the administrator to save the complete system
log history.
Note: If the SLC is unable resolve the Remote Server hostnames or contact the
Remote Servers to send syslog messages, the syslog messages that cannot be sent to
a Remote Server may appear on the SLC console port.
RPM Log Size The maximum size in Kbytes that RPM logs can grow to before they are pruned. When
the file is pruned, it will be pruned to 50% of the RPM Log Size.
Other Log Size The maximum size in Kbytes that all logs other than the RPM logs can grow to before
they are pruned. When the file is pruned, it will be pruned to 50% of the Other Log Size.

Audit Log
Enable Log Select to save a history of all configuration changes in a circular log. Disabled by
default. The audit log is saved through SLC 8000 advanced console manager reboots.
Size The log has a default maximum size of 50 Kbytes (approximately 500 entries). You
can set the maximum size of the log from 1 to 500 Kbytes.
Include CLI Select to cause the audit log to include the CLI commands that have been executed.
Commands Disabled by default.
Include In System If enabled, the contents of the audit log are added to the system log (under the
Log General/Info category/level). Disabled by default.

SMTP
Server IP address of your network’s Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) relay server. If an
SMTP server is not specified, the SLC module will attempt to look up the MX record for
the domain in the destination email addresses of outgoing emails.
Sender The email address of the sender of outgoing emails. The strings "$host" and "$domain"
can be part of the email address - they will be substituted with the actual hostname and
domain. The default is donotreply@$host.$domain.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 91

 7: Services

SSH
Enable Logins Enables or disables SSH logins to the SLC unit to allow users to access the CLI using
SSH. Enabled by default.
This setting does not control SSH access to individual device ports. (See Device Ports
- Settings (on page 123) for information on enabling SSH access to individual ports.)
Most system administrators enable SSH logins, which is the preferred method of
accessing the system.
Web SSH Enables or disables the ability to access the SLC command Iine interface or device
ports (connect direct) through the Web SSH window. Disabled by default.
Timeout If you enable SSH logins, you can cause an idle connection to disconnect after a
specified number of minutes. Select Yes and enter a value of from 1 to 30 minutes.
Timeout Data If idle connection timeouts are enabled, this setting indicates the direction of data used
Direction to determine if the connection has timed out. Select the type of data direction:
 Both Directions
 Incoming Network
 Outgoing Network
SSH Port Allows you to change the SSH login port to a different value in the range of 1 - 65535.
The default is 22. Use of ports other than 22 that are less than 1025 is not
recommended.
SSH V1 Logins Enables or disables SSH version 1 connections to the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager. Enabled by default.
DSA Keys Enables or disables support for DSA keys for incoming and outgoing connections for
the SLC unit. Any imported or exported DSA keys will be retained but will not be visible
on the web or the CLI. Enabled by default.

Telnet
Enable Logins Enables or disables Telnet logins to the SLC unit to allow users to access the CLI
using Telnet. Disabled by default.
This setting does not control Telnet access to individual device ports. (See Device
Ports > Settings (on page 125) for information on enabling Telnet access to individual
ports.) You may want to keep this option disabled for security reasons.

Web Telnet Enables or disables the ability to access the SLC command Iine interface or device
ports (connect direct) through the Web Telnet window. Disabled by default.

Timeout If you enable Telnet logins, you can cause an idle connection to disconnect after a
specified number of minutes. Select Yes and enter a value of from 1 to 30 minutes.
Timeout Data If idle connection timeouts are enabled, this setting indicates the direction of data used
Direction to determine if the connection has timed out. Select the type of data direction:
 Both Directions
 Incoming Network
 Outgoing Network
Outgoing Telnet Enables or disables the ability to create Telnet out connections.

Web SSH/Web Telnet Settings

Terminal Buffer Number of lines in the Web SSH or Web Telnet terminal window that are available for
Size scrolling back through output.
Note: For tips on browser issues with Web SSH or Web Telnet, see Troubleshooting
Browser Issues.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 92

 7: Services

Phone Home
Enable If enabled, allows SLC 8000 advanced console manager to directly contact a vSLM™
management appliance and request addition to the database
IP Address IP address of the SLM device.
Last Attempt Displays the date and time of last connection attempt.
(view only)
Results Indicates whether the attempt was successful.
(view only)

3. To save, click the Apply button.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 93

 7: Services

SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a set of protocols for managing complex
networks. The SLC unit supports both MIB-II (as defined by RFC 1213) and a private enterprise
MIB. The private enterprise MIB provides read-only access to all statistics and configurable items
provided by the SLC unit. It provides read-write access to a select set of functions for controlling
the SLC unit and device ports. See the MIB definition file for details. The SLC MIB definition file
and the top level MIB file for all Lantronix products is accessible from the SNMP web page.
1. Click the Services tab and select the SNMP option. The following page displays:

Figure 7-2 Services > SNMP

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 94

 7: Services

2. Enter the following:

Enable Agent Enables or disables the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent, which
allows read-only access to the system. Disabled by default.
Top Level MIB Click the link to access the top level MIB file for all Lantronix products.
SLC MIB Click the link to access the SLC MIB definition file for SLC 8000 advanced console
managers and advanced console managers.
Enable v1/v2c If checked, SNMP version 1 and version 2 (which use the Read-Only and Read-Write
Communities) are enabled. Uncheck to only allow the more secure version 3 to be
used to access the SLC unit via SNMP. The default is enabled.
Enable Traps Traps are notifications of certain critical events. Disabled by default. This feature is
applicable when SNMP is enabled. Traps that the SLC unit sends include:
 coldStart (generic trap 0, OID 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1)
 linkDown (generic trap 2, OID 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3)
 linkUp (generic trap 3, OID 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4
 authenticationFailure (generic trap 4, OID 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5)
 slcEventPowerSupply (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.1)
 slcEventSysadminPassword (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.2)
 slcEventSLCShutdown (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.3)
 slcEventDevicePortData (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.4)
 slcEventDevicePortSLMData (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.5)
 slcEventDevicePortSLMConfig (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.6)
 slcEventDevicePortDeviceLowTemp (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.7)
 slcEventDevicePortDeviceHighTemp (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.8)
 slcEventDevicePortDeviceLowHumidity (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.9)
 slcEventDevicePortDeviceHighHumidity (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.10)
 slcEventDevicePortDeviceError (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.11)
 slcEventUSBAction (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.14)
 slcEventInternalTemp (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.13)
 slcEventDevicePortError (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.15)
 slcEventSDCardAction (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.16)
 slcEventNoDialToneAlarm (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.17)
 slcEventDevicePortDeviceContactChanged (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.20)
 slcEventSFPAction (1.3.6.1.4.1.244.1.1.0.21)
The SLC unit sends the traps to the host identified in the NMS #1 and NMS #2 field
using the selected Trap Version.
For information on these traps, view the SLC enterprise MIB, which is available on the
SNMP web page.
Trap Version When traps are sent, which SNMP version to use when sending the trap: v1, v2c or v3.
The default is v2c.
NMS #1 (or #2) When SNMP is enabled, an NMS (Network Management System) acts as a central
server, requesting and receiving SNMP-type information from any computer using
SNMP. The NMS can request information from the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager and receive traps from the SLC unit. Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the
NMS server. At least NMS #1 is required if you selected Enable Traps.
Alarm Delay Number of seconds delay between outgoing SNMP traps.
Engine ID The unique SNMP engine identifier for the SLC. This identifier may be required by the
NMS in order to received v3 traps.
Location Physical location of the SLC 8000 advanced console manager (optional). Useful for
managing the SLC unit using SNMP. Up to 20 characters.
Contact Description of the person responsible for maintaining the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager, for example, a name (optional). Up to 20 characters.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 95

 7: Services

v1/v2c Communities
Read-Only A string that SNMP agent provides. The default is public.
Read-Write A string that acts like a password for an SNMP manager to access the read-only data
from the SLC unit SNMP, like a password for an SNMP manager to access the read-
only data the SLC SNMP agent provides, and to modify data where permitted. The
default is private.
Trap The trap used for outgoing generic and enterprise traps. Traps sent with the Event
trigger mechanism still use the trap community specified with the Event action. The
default is public.

Version 3
Security Levels of security available with SNMP v. 3.
 No Auth/No Encrypt: No authentication or encryption.
 Auth/No Encrypt: Authentication but no encryption. (default)
 Auth/Encrypt: Authentication and encryption.
Auth with For Auth/No Encryp or Auth/Encrypt, the authentication method:
 MD5: Message-Digest algorithm 5 (default)
 SHA: Secure Hash Algorithm
Encrypt with Encryption standard to use:
 DES: Data Encryption Standard (default)
 AES: Advanced Encryption Standard

V3 User Read-Only
User Name SNMP v3 is secure and requires user-based authorization to access SLC MIB objects.
Enter a user ID. The default is snmpuser. Up to 20 characters.
Password/Retype Password for a user with read-only authority to use to access SNMP v3. The default is
Password SNMPPASS. Up to 20 characters.
Passphrase/ Passphrase associated with the password for a user with read-only authority. Up to 20
Retype characters. If this is not specified it will default to the v3 Read-Only Password.
Passphrase

V3 User Read-Write
User Name SNMP v3 is secure and requires user-based authorization to access SLC MIB objects.
Enter a user ID for users with read-write authority. The default is snmprwuser. Up to
20 characters.
Password/ Password for the user with read-write authority to use to access SNMP v3. The default
Retype Password is SNMPRWPASS. Up to 20 characters.
Passphrase/ Passphrase associated with the password for a user with read-write authority. Up to 20
Retype characters. If this is not specified it will default to the v3 Read-Write Password.
Passphrase

V3 User Trap
User Name SNMP v3 is secure and requires user-based authorization to access SLC unit MIB
objects. Enter a user ID for users with authority to send traps. The default is
snmptrapuser. Up to 20 characters.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 96

 7: Services

Password/ Password for the user with authority to send v3 traps. The default is
Retype Password SNMPTRAPPASS. Up to 20 characters.
Passphrase/ Passphrase associated with the password for a user with authority to send v3 traps. Up
Retype to 20 characters. If this is not specified it will default to the v3 Trap Password.
Passphrase

3. To save, click the Apply button.

SNMP, SSH, Telnet, and Logging Commands

The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To configure services (system logging, SSH and Telnet access, SSH and Telnet timeout,
SNMP agent, email (SMTP) server, and audit log):

set services <one or more services parameters>

Parameters
netlog <off|error|warning|info|debug> auditlog <enable|disable>
authlog <off|error|warning|info|debug> auditsize <1-500 Kbytes>
diaglog <off|error|warning|info|debug> clicommands <enable|disable>
servlog <off|error|warning|info|debug> includesyslog <enable|disable>
devlog <off|error|warning|info|debug> snmp <enable|disable>
genlog <off|error|warning|info|debug> v1v2 <enable|disable>
syslogserver1 <IP Address or Name> traps <enable|disable>
syslogserver2 <IP Address or Name> trapversion <1|2|3>
rpmlogsize <5-40 Kbytes> nms1 <IP Address or Name>
otherlogsize <5-400 Kbytes> nms2 <IP Address or Name>
telnet <enable|disable> alarmdelay <1-6000 Seconds>
timeouttelnet <disable|1-30 minutes> location <Physical Location>
telnetdatadir <netin|netout|both> contact <Admin Contact Info>
webtelnet <enable|disable> rocommunity <Read-Only
Community>
escapeseqtelnet <1-10 Chars> rwcommunity <Read-Write
Community>
outgoingtelnet <enable|disable> trapcommunity <Trap Community>
ssh <enable|disable> v3user <v3 RO User>
portssh <TCP Port> v3rwuser <v3 RW User>
v1ssh <enable|disable> v3trapuser <v3 Trap User>
timeoutssh <disable|1-30 minutes> v3security
<noauth|auth|authencrypt>
sshdatadir <netin|netout|both> v3auth <md5|sha>
dsakeys <enable|disable> v3encrypt <des|aes>
webssh <enable|disable> phonehome <enable|disable>
smtpserver <IP Address or Name> phoneip <IP Address>
smtpsender <Email Address> termbufsize <Number of Lines>

To set SNMP v3 read-only password or passphrase, or read-write password or passphrase:

set services v3password|v3phrase|v3rwpassword|v3rwphrase|v3trappassword

|v3trapphrase

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 97

 7: Services

To view current services:

show services

NFS and SMB/CIFS

Use the Services > NFS & SMB/CIFS page if you want to save configuration and logging data onto
a remote NFS server, or export configurations by means of an exported CIFS share.
Mounting an NFS shared directory on a remote network server onto a local SLC directory enables
the SLC advanced console manager to store device port logging data on that network server. This
configuration avoids possible limitations in the amount of disk space on the SLC unit available for
the logging file(s). You may also save SLC configurations on the network server.
Similarly, use SMB/CIFS (Server Message Block/Common Internet File System), Microsoft's file-
sharing protocol, to export a directory on the SLC 8000 advanced console manager as an SMB/
CIFS share. The SLC unit exports a single read-write CIFS share called "public," with the
subdirectory the config directory, which contains saved configurations and is read-write.
The share allows users to access the contents of the directory or map the directory onto a
Windows computer.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 98

 7: Services

To configure NFS and SMB/CIFS:

1. Click the Services tab and select the NFS/CIFS option. The following page displays:

Figure 7-3 Services > NFS & SMB/CIFS

2. Enter the following for up to three directories:

NFS Mounts
Remote Directory The remote NFS share directory in the format:
nfs_server_hostname or ipaddr:/exported/path
Local Directory The local directory on the SLC 8000 advanced console manager on which to mount
the remote directory. The SLC unit creates the local directory automatically.
Read-Write If enabled, indicates that the SLC 8000 advanced console manager can write files to
the remote directory. If you plan to log port data or save configurations to this
directory, you must enable this option.
Mount Select the checkbox to enable the SLC unit to mount the file to the NFS server.
Disabled by default.
Mounted Indicates if the SLC was able to successfully mount the NFS share directory.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 99

 7: Services

3. Enter the following:

SMB/CIFS Share
Share SMB/CIFS Select the checkbox to enable the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to export an
directory SMB/CIFS share called “public.” Disabled by default.
Network Select the network ports from which the share can be seen. The default is for the share
Interfaces to be visible on both network ports.
CIFS User Only one user special username (cifsuser) can access the CIFS share. Enter the CIFS
Password/Retype user password in both password fields. The default user password is CIFSPASS.
Password More than one user can access the share with the cifsuser user name and password
at the same time.
Workgroup The Windows workgroup to which the SLC unit belongs. Every PC exporting a CIFS
share must belong to a workgroup. Can have up to 15 characters.

4. To save, click the Apply button.

5. Click the Firmware & Configurations link to access the
Firmware & Configurations (on page 271) to save SLC configuration, as desired.

NFS and SMB/CIFS Commands

The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To mount a remote NFS share:

set nfs mount <one or more parameters>

Parameters
locdir <Directory>
mount <enable|disable>
remdir <Remote NFS Directory>
rw <enable|disable>
Enables read/write access to remote directory.

Note: The remdir and locdir parameters are required, but if you specified them
previously, you do not need to provide them again.

To unmount a remote NFS share:

set nfs unmount <1|2|3>

To view NFS share settings:

show nfs

To configure the SMB/CIFS share, which contains the system and device port logs:

set cifs <one or more parameters>

Parameters
eth1 <enable|disable>
eth2 <enable|disable>
state <enable|disable>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 100

 7: Services

workgroup <Windows Workgroup>

Note: The admin config command saves SLC configurations on the SMB/CIFS share.

To change the password for the SMB/CIFS share login (default is cifsuser):

set cifs password

To view SMB/CIFS settings:

show cifs

Secure Lantronix Network

Use the Secure Lantronix Network option to view and manage SLC and SLB console
managers, SLC 8000 advanced console managers, and Lantronix Spider® devices on the local
subnet.

Note: Status and statistics shown on the web interface represent a snapshot in time. To
see the most recent data, reload the web page.

To access SLC and SLB console managers, and Lantronix Spider devices on the local
network:

1. Click the Services tab and select the Secure Lantronix Network option. The following page
displays.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 101

 7: Services

Figure 7-4 Services > Secure Lantronix Network

2. Access your device or device port through any of the methods below.

To directly access the web interface for a secure Lantronix device:

1. Make sure Web Telnet and Web SSH is enabled for the specific device or device port.
2. Click the IP address of a specific secure Lantronix device to open a new browser page with
the web interface for the selected secure Lantronix device.
3. Log in as usual.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 102

 7: Services

Figure 7-5 IP Address Login Page

To directly access the CLI interface for a device:

1. Click the SSH or Telnet link in the SSH/Telnet to CLI column directly beside the port you
would like to access.
Note: For SLC console managers with 7.2.0.0 firmware releases and earlier, an
SSH or Telnet popup window for Java appears (see Figure 7-6) before login. Click OK
to dismiss this popup window and continue on to the login. For SLC console
managers with 7.3.0.0 firmware releases and later, the SSH or Telnet popup window
is bypassed and you are brought directly to the login in a non-Java based browser
window (see Figure 7-7). For tips on troubleshooting browser issues for the non-Java
based Web SSH/Telnet application, see Browser Issues (on page 105).

Figure 7-6 SSH and Telnet Opening File Popups

2. Click your mouse into the CLI login interface that appears and login. The CLI interface will
indicate when your connection is established.
3. When using the non-Java Web SSH or Web Telnet window, to terminate the session, use
either the host's logoff command. You may also use ^] to terminate a Telnet session or ~. to
terminate an SSH session.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 103

 7: Services

Figure 7-7 SSH or Telnet CLI Session

To directly access a specific port on a particular device:

1. You have two options:

- Dashboard
Make sure the WebSSH (DP only) radio button directly beneath the Dashboard is
selected and click the desired port number. The Dashboard is located on the upper right
corner of each Web Manager page (see Chapter 5: Web Page Layout.) An SSH popup
window appears.
Note: WebTelnet is not available from the Dashboard. See Dashboard on page
60 as the dashboard may vary in appearance.

- Secure Lantronix Page

Click the Services tab, then click the Secure Lantronix Network link (see Figure 7-4.)
Select the port you want to configure. Enabled port numbers are in bright green boxes and
will allow you to select either a WebSSH or a WebTelnet session. If enabled, an SSH or
Telnet popup window appears depending on what is clicked. For SLC console managers
with 7.2.0.0 firmware releases and earlier, an SSH or Telnet popup window for Java

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 104

 7: Services

appears (see Figure 7-6) before login. Click OK to dismiss this popup window and
continue on to the login. For SLC console managers with 7.3.0.0 firmware releases and
later, the SSH or Telnet popup window is bypassed and you are brought directly to the
login in a non-Java based window (see Figure 7-7). For tips on troubleshooting browser
issues for the non-Java based Web SSH/Telnet application, see Browser Issues (on page
105).
Note: Port numbers that are disabled are in dark green boxes; clicking a
disabled port number generates a popup window indicating the port is disabled
(see Figure 7-8 below.)

Figure 7-8 Disabled Port Number Popup Window

2. Click your mouse into the CLI login interface that appears (see Figure 7-7) and login. The CLI
interface will indicate when your connection is established.
3. When using the non-Java Web SSH or Web Telnet window, to terminate the session, use
either the host's logoff command, or use ^] to terminate a Telnet session or ~. to terminate
an SSH session.

Browser Issues
Please check the Lantronix Knowledge Base at http://ltxfaq.custhelp.com/app/answers/list to
research any browser errors.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 105

 7: Services

To configure how secure Lantronix devices are searched for on the network:

1. Click the Search Options link on the top right of the Services > Secure Lantronix Network
page. The following web page displays:

Figure 7-9 Services > Secure Lantronix Network > Search Options

2. Enter the following:

Secure Lantronix Select the type of search you want to conduct.

Network Search  Local Subnet performs a broadcast to detect secure Lantronix devices on the
local subnet.
 Manually Entered IP Address List provides a list of IP addresses that may not
respond to a broadcast because of how the network is configured.
 Both is the default selection.
IP Address If you selected Manually Entered IP Address List or Both, enter the IP address of
the secure Lantronix device you want to find and manage.

3. If you entered an IP address, click the Add IP Address button. The IP address displays in the
IP Address List.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each IP address you want to add.
5. To delete an IP address from the IP Address List, select the address and click the Delete IP
Address button.
6. Click the Apply button. When the confirmation message displays, click Secure Lantronix
Network on the main menu. The Services > Secure Lantronix Network page displays the
secure Lantronix devices resulting from the search. You can now manage these devices.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 106

 7: Services

Secure Lantronix Network Commands

The following commands for the command line interface correspond to the web page entries
described above.

To detect and view all SLC advanced console managers or user-defined IP addresses on
the local network:

set slcnetwork <one or more parameters>

Parameters
add <IP Address>
delete <IP Address>
search <localsubnet|ipaddrlist|both>

To detect and display all SLC and SLB console managers and Lantronix Spider devices on
the local network:

show slcnetwork [ipaddrlist <all|Address Mask>]

Note: Without the ipaddrlist parameter, the command searches the network according to
the search setting. With the ipaddrlist parameter, the command displays a sorted list of all
IP addresses or displays the IP addresses that match the mask (for example,
172.19.255.255 would display all IP addresses that start with 172.19).

Date and Time

Use the Date and Time Settings page to specify the local date, time, and time zone at the SLC
location, or enable the SLC unit to use NTP to synchronize with other NTP devices on your
network. Note that changing the date/time and/or timezone, or enabling NTP may affect the user's
ability to login to the web; if this happens, use the CLI admin web restart command to restart
the web server.
The CLI show ntp command will display the current NTP status if NTP is enabled. The column
headings are as follows: the host names or addresses shown in the remote column correspond to
configured NTP server names; however, the DNS names might not agree if the names listed are
not the canonical DNS names. The refid column shows the current source of synchronization,
while the st column reveals the stratum, t the type (u = unicast, m = multicast, l =
local, - = don't know), and poll the poll interval in seconds. The when column shows the
time since the peer was last heard in seconds, while the reach column shows the status of the
reachability register (see RFC-1305) in octal. The remaining entries show the latest delay, offset
and jitter in milliseconds. The symbol at the left margin displays the synchronization status of each
peer. The currently selected peer is marked *, while additional peers designated acceptable for
synchronization, but not currently selected, are marked +. Peers marked * and + are included in
the weighted average computation to set the local clock; the data produced by peers marked with
other symbols are discarded.

To set the local date, time, and time zone:

1. Click the Services tab and select the Date & Time option. The following page displays:

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 107

 7: Services

Figure 7-10 Services > Date & Time

2. Enter the following:

Change Date/Time Select the checkbox to manually enter the date and time at the SLC location.
Date From the drop-down lists, select the current month, day, and year.
Time From the drop-down lists, select the current hour and minute.
Time Zone From the drop-down list, select the appropriate time zone. For information on each
timezone, see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_tz_database_time_zones

3. To save, click the Apply button.

To synchronize the SLC 8000 advanced console manager with a remote timeserver using
NTP:

1. Enter the following:

Enable NTP Select the checkbox to enable NTP synchronization. NTP is disabled by default.
Current NTP status Displays the current NTP status if NTP is enabled above.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 108

 7: Services

Synchronize via Select one of the following:

 Broadcast from NTP Server: Enables the SLC unit to accept time
information periodically transmitted by the NTP server. This is the default if
you enable NTP.
 Poll NTP Server: Enables the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to query
the NTP Server for the correct time. If you select this option, complete one of
the following:
 Local: Select this option if the NTP servers are on a local network, and
enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of up to three NTP servers. This is the
default, and it is highly recommended.
 Public: Select this option if you want to use a public NTP server, and select
the address of the NTP server from the drop-down list. This is not
recommended because of the high load on many public NTP servers. All
servers in the drop-down list are stratum-2 servers. (See www.ntp.org for
more information.) Each public NTP server has its own usage rules --please
refer to the appropriate web site before using one. Our listing them here is
to provide easy configuration but does not indicate any permission for use.

2. To save, click the Apply button.

Date and Time Commands

The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To set the local date, time, and local time zone (one parameter at a time):

set datetime <one parameter>

Parameters
date <MMDDYYhhmm[ss]>
timezone <Time Zone>

Note: If you do not know a valid <Time Zone>, enter 'timezone <invalid time zone>' and
you will be guided through selecting one from the available time zones.

To view the local date, time, and time zone:

show datetime

To synchronize the SLC 8000 unit with a remote time server using NTP:

set ntp <one or more ntp parameters>

Parameters
localserver1 <IP Address or Hostname>
localserver2 <IP Address or Hostname>
localserver3 <IP Address or Hostname>
poll <local|public>
publicserver <IP Address or Hostname>
state <enable|disable>
sync <broadcast|poll>

To view NTP settings:

show ntp

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 109

 7: Services

Web Server
The Web Server supports all versions of the TLS protocol, but due to security concerns, does not
support any versions of the SSL protocol. The Web Server page allows the system administrator
to:
 Configure attributes of the web server.
 View and terminate current web sessions.
 Import a site-specific SSL certificate.
 Enable an iGoogle gadget that displays the status of ports on multiple SLC units.

To configure the Web Server:

1. Click the Services tab and select the Web Server option. The following page appears:

Figure 7-11 Services > Web Server

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 110

 7: Services

2. Enter the following fields:

Timeout  Select No to disable Timeout.
 Select Yes, minutes (5-120) to enable timeout.
Enter the number of minutes (must be between 30 and 120 minutes) after
which the SLC web session times out. The default is 5.
Note: If a session times out, refresh the browser page and login to a new web
session. If you close the browser without logging off the SLC unit first, you will
have to wait for the timeout time to expire. You can also end a web session by
using the admin web terminate command at the CLI or by asking your system
administrator to terminate your active web session.
 To view or terminate current web sessions, click the Web Sessions link. See
Services - Web Sessions.
 To view, import, or reset the SSL Certificate, click the SSL Certificate link.
See Services - SSL Certificate.
Enable TLS v1.0 By default, the web supports the TLS v1.0 protocol. Uncheck this to disable the
Protocol TLS v1.0 protocol. Changing this option requires a reboot or restarting the web
server with the CLI command "admin web restart" for the change to take effect.
Enable TLS v1.1 By default, the web supports the TLS v1.1 protocol. Uncheck this to disable the
Protocol TLS v1.1 protocol. Changing this option requires a reboot or restarting the web
server with the CLI command "admin web restart" for the change to take effect.
Cipher By default, the web uses High/Medium security (128 bits or higher) for the cipher.
This option can be used to configure the web to also support just High security
ciphers (256 bit, 168 bit and some 128 bit), or FIPS approved ciphers (see
Security.) Changing this option requires a reboot or restarting the web server
with the CLI command admin web restart for the change to take effect.
Group Access Specify one or more groups to allow access to the Web Manager user interface.
If undefined, any group can access the web. If one or more groups are specified
(groups are delimited by the characters ',' (comma) or ';' (semicolon)), then any
user who logs into the web must be a member of one of the specified groups,
otherwise access will be denied. Users authenticated via RADIUS may have a
group (or groups) provided by the RADIUS server via the Filter-Id attribute that
overrides the group defined for a user on the SLC. A group provided by a remote
server must be either a single group or multiple groups delimited by the
characters ',' (comma), ';' (semicolon), or '=' (equals) - for example
"group=group1,group2;" or "group1,group2,group3".
Banner Enter to replace default text displayed on the Web Manager home page after the
user logs in. May contain up to 1024 characters. Blank by default. To create
additional lines in the banner use the \n character sequence.
Network Interfaces The interfaces that the web server is available on. By default, Eth1, Eth2 and
PPP interfaces on modems are enabled.
Run Web Server If enabled, the web server will run and listen on TCP ports 80 and 443 (all
requests to port 80 are redirected to port 443). By default, the web server is
enabled. The web server supports TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, and TLS 1.2. Due to
security vulnerabilities, SSL is not supported.
Note: This option can only be changed at the CLI.

3. Click the Apply button to save.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 111

 7: Services

Admin Web Commands

The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To configure the timeout for web sessions:

admin web timeout <disable|5-120 minutes>

To configure the strength of the cipher used by the web server (high is 256, 168 and some
128 bit, medium is 128 bit):

admin web cipher <high|himed|fips>

To enable or disable TLS v1.0:

admin web tlsv10 <enable|disable>

To enable or disable TLS v1.1:

admin web tlsv11 <enable|disable>

To enable or disable iGoogle Gadget web content:

admin web gadget <enable|disable>

To configure the group that can access the web:

admin web group <Local or Remote Group Name>

To enable or disable the web server (TCP ports 80 and 443):

admin web server <enable|disable>

To configure the banner displayed on the web home page:

admin web banner <Banner Text>

To define a list of network interfaces the web is available on:

admin web iface <none,eth1,eth2,ppp>

To terminate a web session:

admin web terminate <Session ID>

To view the current sessions, with optional extra sessions or current ciphers:

admin web show [viewcipherlist <enable|disable>]

[viewslmsessions <enable|disable>]

To restart the web server:

admin web restart

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 112

 7: Services

To import an SSL certificate or reset the web server certificate to the default:

admin web certificate import via <sftp|scp> certfile <Certificate File>

privfile <Private Key File> host <IP Address or Name>
login <User Login> [path <Path to Files>]
admin web certificate reset
admin web certificate show

To generate a custom self-signed SSL certificate:

admin web certificate custom

Services - Web Sessions

The Services > Web Server page enables you to view and terminate current web sessions.

To view or terminate current web sessions:

1. On the Services tab, click the Web Server page and click the Web Sessions link to the right.
The following page displays:

Figure 7-12 Web Sessions

2. To terminate, click the check box in the row of the session you want to terminate and click the
Terminate button.
3. To return to the Services > Web Server page, click the Back to Web Server link.

Services - SSL Certificate

The Services > Web Server page enables you to view and update SSL certificate information. The
SSL certificate, consisting of a public/private key pair used to encrypt HTTP data, is associated
with the web server. You can import a site-specific SSL certificate or generate a custom self-
signed SSL certificate. The custom self-signed SSL certificates generated by the SLC use the
SHA256 hash algorithm.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 113

 7: Services

To view, reset, import, or change an SSL Certificate:

1. On the Services tab, click the Web Server page and click the SSL Certificate link. The
following page displays the current SSL certificate.

Figure 7-13 SSL Certificate

2. If desired, enter the following:

Reset to Default To reset to the default certificate, select the checkbox to reset to the default
Certificate certificate. Unselected by default.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 114

 7: Services

Import SSL Certificate To import your own SSL Certificate, select the checkbox. Unselected by default.
Import via From the drop-down list, select the method of importing the certificate (SCP,
SFTP, or HTTPS). The default is HTTPS.
Certificate Filename Filename of the certificate. If HTTPS is selected as the method for import, the
Upload File link will be selectable to upload a certificate file.
Key Filename Filename of the private key for the certificate. If HTTPS is selected as the method
for import, the Upload File link will be selectable to upload a key file.
Passphrase / Enter the passphrase associated with the SSL certificate if the private key is
Retype Passphrase encrypted.
Host Host name or IPaddress of the host from which to import the file.
Path Path of the directory where the certificate will be stored.
Login User ID to use to SCP or SFTP the file.
Password / Password to use to SCP or SFTP the file.
Retype Password
Generate custom self- To generate your own custom self-signed certificate with attributes specific to your
signed SSL Certificate site, select the checkbox. The SHA256 hasing alogorithm will be used to generate
the certificate. Unselected by default.
Number of Bits The number of bits to use when generating the certificate: 2048, 3072 or 4096.
Number of Days The number of days that the certificate can be used before it expires, up to 7500
days.
Country Name The two letter country code for the custom certificate, e.g. "US" or "FR".
State or Province The state or province for the custom certificate, e.g. "California". Must be at least
Name 2 characters long.
Locality Name The locality or city for the custom certificate, e.g. "Irvine". Must be at least 2
characters long.
Organization Name The organization or company name for the custom certificate, e.g. "Lantronix".
Must be at least 2 characters long.
Organization Unit The unit name for the custom certificate, e.g. "Engineering" or "Sales". Must be at
Name least 2 characters long.
Hostname or Common The hostname or other name associated with the SLC the certificate is generated
Name on, e.g., "slc100.engineering.lantronix.com". Must be at least 2 characters long.
Email Address An optional email address to associate with the custom certificate.
Optional Challenge An optional password use to encrypt the custom certificate.
Password & Retype
Password

3. Click the Apply button.

Note: You must reboot the SLC advanced console manager for the update to take
effect.

4. To return to the Services > Web Server page, click the Back to Web Server link.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 115

 7: Services

iGoogle Gadgets
You can create iGoogle gadgets that enables you to view the status of the ports of multiple SLC
8000 advanced console managers on one web page.
Anyone with a Google email account (gmail.com) can create an iGoogle gadget for viewing web
pages. There are two types of iGoogle gadgets: public gadgets and private gadgets. The public
gadgets are listed for import on iGoogle web pages. The SLC gadget is a private gadget, whose
location is not publicly advertised.

To set up an SLC iGoogle gadget:

1. Load the following XML code on a web server that is accessible over the Internet. This code
describes how to retrieve information and how to format the data for display.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>
- <Module>
<ModulePrefs title="__UP_model__ Devport Status"
title_url="http://www.lantronix.com"
directory_title="SLC/ Status" description="Devport
status and counters" scrolling="true" width="400"
height="360" />
<UserPref name="model" display_name="Model" datatype="enum"
default_value="slc">
<EnumValue value="SLC" display_value="SLC" />
<EnumValue value="SLC" display_value="SLC" />
</UserPref>
<UserPref name="ip" display_name="IP Address" required="true" />
- <UserPref name="rate" display_name="Refresh Rate"
datatype="enum" default_value="10">
<EnumValue value="1" display_value="1 second" />
<EnumValue value="5" display_value="5 seconds" />
<EnumValue value="10" display_value="10 seconds" />
<EnumValue value="30" display_value="30 seconds" />
<EnumValue value="60" display_value="1 minute" />
<EnumValue value="300" display_value="5 minutes" />
<EnumValue value="600" display_value="10 minutes" />
/UserPref>
<Content type="url" href="http://__UP_ip__/devstatus.htm" />
</Module>

2. On the iGoogle web page, click the Add stuff link.

3. On the new page, click the Add feed or gadget link.
4. In the field that displays, type the URL of the gadget location.
5. Return to the gadget viewing page and complete the SLC gadget configuration fields.
You should see an iGoogle gadget similar to the following:

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 116

 7: Services

Figure 7-14 iGoogle Gadget Example

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 117

8: Device Ports
This chapter describes how to configure and use an SLC advanced console manager port
connected to an external device, such as a server or a modem. The subsequent chapter,
Chapter 11: Connections describes how to use the Devices > Connections web page to connect
external devices and outbound network connections (such as Telnet or SSH) in various
configurations. The Devices > Console Port page allows you to configure the console port, if
desired.

Connection Methods
A user can connect to a device port in one of the following ways:
1. Telnet or SSH to the Eth1 or Eth2 IP address, or connect to the console port, and log in to the
command line interface. At the command line interface, issue the connect direct or connect
listen commands.
2. If Telnet is enabled for a device port, Telnet to <Eth1 IP address>:< telnet port
number> or <Eth2 IP address>:<telnet port number>, where telnet port number is
uniquely assigned for each device port.
3. If SSH is enabled for a device port, SSH to <Eth1 IP address>:<ssh port number> or
<Eth2 IP address>:<ssh port number>, where ssh port number is uniquely assigned for
each device port.
4. If TCP is enabled for a device port, establish a raw TCP connection to <Eth1 IP
address>:<tcp port number> or <Eth2 IP address>:<tcp port number>, where
tcp port number is uniquely assigned for each device port.
5. If a device port has an IP address assigned to it, you can Telnet, SSH, or establish a raw TCP
connection to the IP address. For Telnet and SSH, use the default TCP port number (23 and
22, respectively) to connect to the device port. For raw TCP, use the TCP port number defined
for TCP In to the device port according to the Device Ports - Settings (on page 123) section.
6. Connect a terminal or a terminal emulation program directly to the device port. If logins are
enabled, the user is prompted for a username/password and logs in to the command line interface.
For #2, #3, #4, #5, and #6, if logins or authentication are not enabled, the user is directly
connected to the device port with no authentication.
For #1 and #6, if logins are enabled, the user is authenticated first, and then logged into the
command line interface. The user login determines permissions for accessing device ports.

Permissions
There are three types of permissions:
1. Direct (or data) mode: The user can interact with and monitor the device port (connect direct
command).
2. Listen mode: The user can only monitor the device port (connect listen command).
3. Clear mode: The user can clear the contents of the device port buffer (set locallog <port>
clear buffer command).

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 118

 8: Device Ports

The administrator and users with local user rights may assign individual port permissions to local
users. The administrator and users with remote authentication rights assign port access to users
authenticated by NIS, RADIUS, LDAP, Kerberos and TACACS+.

I/O Modules
The SLC module port configuration can be changed by adding or replacing I/O modules in the I/O
module bays. Any changes to the I/O modules must be done while the SLC unit is powered off.
The following I/O module configurations are supported (Bay 1 is the leftmost bay when viewing the
back of the SLC 8000 advanced console manager where the device ports are located):

Table 8-1 Supported I/O Module Configurations

Model Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3
SLC 8008 8-port module Empty Empty
SLC 8016 16-port module Empty Empty
SLC 8024 8-port module 16-port module Empty
SLC 8032 16-port module 16-port module Empty
SLC 8040 8-port module 16-port module 16-port module
SLC 8048 16-port module 16-port module 16-port module

Note: A 16-port RJ45 module is shown as "RJ45-16" in the About page in the Web
interface and the output of the admin version command in the CLI, and a 8-port
module is shown as "RJ45-08". A 16-port USB module is shown as “USB-16.” For
example, I/O Module Type(s): RJ45-08, RJ45-16, and RJ45-16 indicate that the SLC
unit has an 8-port I/O module in Bay 1, and 16-port modules in Bay 2 and 3. Please note
that only the following configurations are available from Lantronix: SLC 8008, SLC 8016,
SLC 8032 and SLC 8048 modules. The SLC 8024 and SLC 8040 console managers can
only be created by adding 16-port RJ45 modules to an existing SLC 8008 unit.

The number of device ports in a SLC 8000 advanced console manager can be expanded by
adding 16-port I/O modules in Bay 2 and Bay 3, or by swapping an 8-port I/O module in Bay 1 for
a 16-port module. The configurations listed above are the only valid configurations; if any other
configuration is detected at boot, the SLC unit will still boot, disable use of the device ports, and
provide indications in the boot messages, in the CLI and in the web that the I/O configuration is
invalid. When an invalid configuration is corrected by reconfiguring the I/O modules into a valid
configuration, after the SLC module is powered up and booted, the valid configuration will be
detected and the SLC module ports can be used again.
For the SLC 8024 and SLC 8040 modules, with an 8-port I/O module in Bay 1, the device ports will
be numbered 1-8 and 17-32 (for the SLC 8024 model) and 1-8 and 17-48 (for the SLC 8040
model). See Figure 8-2 Devices > Device Status on page 120.
Restoring a configuration to the SLC 8000 advanced console manager will automatically adjust the
number of device ports to reflect the number of ports in the SLC unit the configuration is being
restored to. For example, a configuration that is saved on an SLC 8048 unit and restored to an
SLC 8016 unit will have the last 32 ports removed from the configuration. Conversely, a
configuration that is saved on a SLC 8016 unit and restored to a SLC 8048 unit will have 32 device
ports (with factory default settings) added to the configuration.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 119

 8: Device Ports

Device Status
The Devices > Device Status page displays the status of the SLC ports, USB ports and SD card
ports.
1. Click the Devices tab and select the Device Status option. The following page displays:

Figure 8-2 Devices > Device Status

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 120

 8: Device Ports

Device Ports
On the Devices > Device Ports page, you can set up the numbering of Telnet, SSH, and TCP
ports, view a summary of current port modes, establish the maximum number of direct
connections for each device port, and select individual ports to configure.
1. Click the Devices tab and select the Device Ports option. The following page displays:

Figure 8-3 Devices > Device Ports

Current port numbering schemes for Telnet, SSH, and TCP ports display on the left. The list of
ports 1-16 on the right includes the individual ports and their current mode.

Note: For units with more ports, click the buttons above the table to view additional
ports.

Icons that represent some of the possible modes include:

Idle The port is not in use.
The port is in data/text mode.
Note: You may set up ports to allow Telnet access using the IP Setting per Device Ports -
Settings (on page 123).
An external modem is connected to the port. The user may dial into or out of the port.

Telnet in or SSH in is enabled for the device port. The device port is either waiting for a Telnet
or SSH login or has received a Telnet or SSH login (a user has logged in).

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 121

 8: Device Ports

To set up Telnet, SSH, and TCP port numbering:

1. Enter the following:

Telnet/SSH/TCP in Port Numbers

Starting Telnet Port Each port is assigned a number for connecting via Telnet. Enter a number (1025-
65528) that represents the first port. The default is 2000 plus the port number. For
example, if you enter 2001, port 1 will be 2001 and subsequent 2000 ports are
automatically assigned numbers 2001, 2002, and so on.
Starting SSH Port Each port is assigned a number for connecting via SSH. Enter a number (1025-
65528) that represents the first port. The default is 3000 plus the port number. For
example, if you enter 3001, port 1 will be 3001 and subsequent 3000 ports are
automatically assigned numbers 3001, 3002, and so on.
Starting TCP Port Each port is assigned a number for connecting through a raw TCP connection. Enter
a number (1025-65528) that represents the first port. The default is 4000 plus the
port number. For example, if you enter 4001, port 1 will be 4001 and subsequent
4000 ports are automatically assigned numbers 4001, 4002, and so on.
You can use a raw TCP connection in situations where a TCP/IP connection is to
communicate with a serial device. For example, you can connect a serial printer to a
device port and use a raw TCP connection to send print jobs to the printer over the
network.
Note: When using raw TCP connections to transmit binary data, or where the break
command (escape sequence) is not required, set the Break Sequence of the
respective device port to null (clear it).

Caution: Ports 1-1024 are RFC-assigned and may conflict with services running
on the SLC 8000 advanced console manager. Avoid this range.
2. Click the Apply button to save the settings.

To set limits on direct connections:

1. Enter the maximum number (1-10) of simultaneous direct connections for each device port.
The default is 1.
2. Click the Apply button to save the settings.

To configure a specific port:

1. You have two options:

- Select the port from the ports list and click the Configure button. The Device Ports >
Settings page for the port displays.
- Click the port number on the green bar at the top of each page.
2. Continue with directions in the section, Device Ports - Settings (on page 123).

Global Commands
The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To configure settings for all or a group of device ports:

set deviceport global <one or more parameters>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 122

 8: Device Ports

Parameters
sshport <TCP Port>
tcpport <TCP Port>
telnetport <TCP Port>
Port is a port number between 1025 and 65528.

To view global settings for device ports:

show deviceport global

Device Ports - Settings

On the Device Ports > Settings page, configure IP and data (serial) settings for individual ports,
and if the port connects to an external modem, modem settings as well.

To open the Device Ports - Settings page:

1. You have two options:

- Dashboard
Make sure the Configuration radio button directly beneath the Dashboard is selected and
click the desired port number in the Dashboard. The Dashboard is located on the upper
right corner of each Web Manager page (see Chapter 5: Web Page Layout.)

- Device Ports Page

Click the Devices tab, then click the Device Ports link. Select the port you want to
configure and then click the Configure button. Higher numbered ports can be displayed
using the "1-16", "17-32" and "33-48" buttons at the top of the Device Port list.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 123

 8: Device Ports

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 124

 8: Device Ports

The following page displays:

Figure 8-4 Device Ports > Settings

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 125

 8: Device Ports

2. Enter the following:

Device Port Settings

Port Displays number of port; displays automatically.
Mode The status of the port; displays automatically.
USB Device This field is only displayed for USB ports. If a USB device is connected to the
device port, this displays the USB version, speed, and a short type description for
the USB device. The SLC supports up to 48 USB type A (Host) devices at data
rates of HS (480 Mbit/s), FS (12 Mbit/s) or LS (1.5 Mbit/s). Each port has VBUS 5V
support of up to 100mA (but not too exceed 600mA total per 16-port USB I/O
module). Drawing more than 150 mA on a USB device port will shut down the
VBUS 5V. USB ports are designed for data traffic only, and are not designed for
charging or powering devices. Overcurrent conditions may disrupt operations.
Name The name of the port. Valid characters are letters, numbers, dashes (-), periods,
and underscores ( _ ).
Group Access If undefined, any group can access the device port. If one or more groups are
specified (groups are delimited by the characters ' ' (space), ',' (comma), or ';'
(semicolon)), then any user who logs into the device port must be a member of one
of the specified groups, otherwise access will be denied. Users authenticated via
RADIUS may have a group (or groups) provided by the RADIUS server via the
Filter-Id attribute that overrides the group defined for a user on the SLC unit. A
group provided by a remote server must be either a single group or multiple groups
delimited by the characters ' ' (space), ',' (comma), ';' (semicolon), or '=' (equals) -
for example "group=group1,group2;" or "group1,group2,group3".
Banner Text to display when a user connects to a device port by means of Telnet, SSH, or
TCP. If authentication is enabled for the device port, the banner displays once the
user successfully logs in. Blank is the default.
# of Sessions Msg If enabled, a message will be displayed to a user when connecting to a device port
that indicates how many users are currently connected to the device port. Disabled
by default.
Idle Timeout Msg If enabled, a message will be displayed to a user when their connection to a device
port will be terminated soon due to the connection being idle. Disabled by default.
Note: When the Idle Timeout Msg is enabled, the terminal application timeout
values for Telnet, SSH and TCP should be set to a value greater than 15 seconds.
Connected Msg If enabled, a message will be displayed to a user when they initially connect to a
device port. Enabled by default.
Minimize Latency Minimize device port latency by reducing read delays. This may improve
communication efficiency in scenarios where a series of short messages are
exchanged, but may increase CPU utilization and decrease throughput in cases
where large messages are transmitted. Disabled by default.
Break Sequence A series of one to ten characters users can enter on the command line interface to
send a break signal to the external device. A suggested value is Esc+B (escape
key, then uppercase “B” performed quickly but not simultaneously). You would
specify this value as \x1bB, which is hexadecimal (\x) character 27 (1B) followed
by a B.
See Key Sequences on page 183 for notes on key sequence precedence and
behavior.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 126

 8: Device Ports

View Port Log Seq The key sequence used to view the Port Log while in Connect Direct mode. Non-
printing characters can be specified by giving their hexidecimal code (see Break
Sequence above). The default is Esc+V (\x1bV).
See Key Sequences on page 183 for notes on key sequence precedence and
behavior.
View Port Log Select to allow the user to enter the View Port Log Sequence to view the Port Log
during Connect Direct mode. The default is disabled.
Zero Port Counters Resets all of the numerical values in the Port Counters table at the bottom of the
page to zero (0).
Logging & Events Click the Settings link to configure file logging (see Device Ports - Logging and
Events on page 142), email logging, local logging, and USB logging.
Power Management Click the Settings link to configure power supplies for the device connected to this
device port on the Device Ports - Power Management page.
Connected to The type of device connected to the device port. Currently, the SLC unit supports
Remote Power Managers (PDUs and UPSes) from 140+ vendors, as well as
Sensorsoft devices. If the connected device is an RPM, the user can assign an
RPM to the device port by either select an existing RPM (via the Select dropdown)
or clicking the Add RPM link to configure a new RPM for the SLC. If an RPM is
already assigned to the device port, the user can click on the Selected RPM link to
view status and configuration for the RPM. If the connected device is a Sensorsoft
device, the user can click on Device Commands to manage the Sensorsoft
device. If the type of device connected to the device port is not listed, select
Undefined.
Note: Sensorsoft temperature/humidity devices are supported with USB-to-serial
adapters (ftdi/pl2303/cp210x) but are not supported for use with USB-to-Serial
CDC_ACM devices.

IP Settings
Telnet In Enables access to this port through Telnet. Disabled by default.
SSH In Enables access to this port through SSH. Disabled by default.
TCP in Enables access to this port through a raw TCP connection. Disabled by default:
Note: When using raw TCP connections to transmit binary data, or where the
break command (escape sequence) is not required, set the Break Sequence of
the respective device port to null (clear it).
Port Automatically assigned Telnet, SSH, and TCP port numbers. You may override
this value, if desired. The value must be unique on the SLC 8000; for example,
you cannot have two or more ports numbered 10001.
Authentication If selected, the SLC unit requires user authentication before granting access to
the port. Authenticate is selected by default for Telnet in and SSH in, but not for
TCP in.
Telnet/SSH/TCP Select the checkbox to cause an idle Telnet, SSH or TCP connection to
Timeout disconnect after a specified number of seconds as defined in the Seconds field to
the right.
Seconds Enter a value from 1 to 1800 seconds if selecting the Telnet, SSH or TCP
Timeout checkbox to the left. The default is 600 seconds.
Note: When the Idle Timeout Msg is enabled, the terminal application timeout
values for Telnet, SSH and TCP should be set to a value greater than 15
seconds.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 127

 8: Device Ports

Data Direction If a Telnet, SSH or TCP connection has the idle Timeout enabled, this setting
indicates the direction of data use to determine if the connection has timed out:
incoming network data, outgoing network data, or data from both directions. The
default is Both Directions for Telnet and SSH, and Incoming Network data for
TCP.
Telnet Soft IAC Mode When Telnet Soft IAC mode is enabled, the Telnet server will not block waiting
for the initial Telnet protocol IAC option responses. An abbreviated list of IAC
options will be sent to the client, including a request for client side Echoing.
Disabled by default.
IP Address/Netmask IP address used for this device port so a user can Telnet, SSH, or establish a raw
Bits TCP connection to this address and connect directly to the device port. The
optional netmask bits specify the netmask to use for the IP address. For
example, for a netmask of 255.255.255.0 specify 24 bits. If the netmask bits are
not specified, a default netmask used for the class of network that the IP address
falls in will be used.
For Telnet and SSH, the default TCP port numbers (22 and 23, respectively) are
used to connect to the device port. For raw TCP, the TCP port number defined
for TCP In to the device port is used.
Note: If Ethernet Bonding is enabled, assigning individual IP Addresses to
Device Ports is not supported. Note that the IP address will be bound to Eth1
only, so if Eth2 is connected and configured, and Eth1 is not, this feature will not
work.
Send Term String/Term If Send Term String is enabled and a Term String is defined, when a network
String connection to a device port is terminated, the termination string is sent to the
device connected to the device port. The string should be defined so that it sends
the appropriate command(s) to the device to terminate any active user sessions,
e.g. "logout" or "exit". The string may contain multiple commands separated by a
newline ("\n") character. This is a security mechanism used to close sessions
that are inadvertently left open by users.

Data Settings
Note: Check the serial device’s equipment settings and documentation for the proper
settings. The device port and the attached serial device must have the same settings.

Baud The speed with which the device port exchanges data with the attached serial
device.
From the drop-down list, select the baud rate. Most devices use 9600 for the
administration port, so the device port defaults to this value. Check the equipment
settings and documentation for the proper baud rate.
Data Bits Number of data bits used to transmit a character. From the drop-down list, select
the number of data bits. The default is 8 data bits.
Stop Bits The number of stop bit(s) used to indicate that a byte of data has been transmitted.
From the drop-down list, select the number of stop bits. The default is 1.
Parity Parity checking is a rudimentary method of detecting simple, single-bit errors.
From the drop-down list, select the parity. The default is none.
Flow Control A method of preventing buffer overflow and loss of data. The available methods
include none, xon/xoff (software), and rts/cts (hardware). The default is none.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 128

 8: Device Ports

Enable Logins For serial devices connected to the device port, displays a login prompt and
authenticates users. Successfully authenticated users are logged into the
command line interface.
The default is disabled. This is the correct setting if the device port is the endpoint
for a network connection.
Max Direct Connects Enter the maximum number (1-15) of simultaneous connections for the device
port. The default is 1.
Show Lines on If enabled, when the user either does a connect direct from the CLI or
Connecting connects directly to the port using Telnet or SSH, the SLC outputs up to 24 lines of
buffered data as soon as the serial port is connected.
For example, an SLC user issues a connect direct device 1 command
to connect port 1 to a Linux server.
For example, if the SLC user issues the ls command to display a directory on a
Linux server, then exits the connection, the results of the ls will be stored in the
buffer. When the SLC user then issues another direct connect device
1, the last 24 lines of the ls command is displayed so the user can see what state
the server was left in.

Hardware Signal Triggers

Check DSR on If this setting is enabled, the device port only establishes a connection if DSR
Connect (Data Set Ready) is in an asserted state. DSR should already be in an asserted
state, not transitioning to, when a connection attempt is made. Disabled by default
unless dial-in, dial-out, or dial-back is enabled for the device port.
Note: Applies to serial RJ45 device ports only.
Disconnect on DSR If a connection to a device port is currently in session, and the DSR signal
transitions to a de-asserted state, the connection disconnects immediately.
Disabled is the default unless dial-in, dial-out, or dial-back is enabled for the device
port.
Note: Applies to serial RJ45 device ports only.
Assert DTR By default, DTR is asserted on a device port nearly all of the time (except
momentarily when a port is opened for operations). Unchecking this option will
deassert DTR, simulating a cable disconnection for the device that is connected to
a device port.
Note: Applies to serial RJ45 device ports only.
Toggle DTR Applies to RJ45 device ports only. If enabled, when a user disconnects from a
device port, DTR will be toggled. This feature can be used when a serial
connection requires DSR to be active for the attached device to connect. In this
case, toggling DTR will end any active connection on the device.
Reverse Pinout If enabled, swaps the positions of the serial lines, such that the direction of data or
the signal is reversed. For instance, TX is swapped with RX. Enabling Reverse
Pinout facilitates connections to Cisco and Sun style RS-45 console ports using a
straight through Ethernet patch cable, without the need for a rolled cable or
adapter. Enabled by default.
Note: Applies to serial RJ45 device ports only. All Lantronix serial adapters are
intended to be used with Reverse Pinout disabled. If you are replacing an original
SLC unit with an SLC 8000 advanced console manager, disable the reverse pinout
so you can use the original cables and adapters.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 129

 8: Device Ports

USB VBUS For USB Device Ports only. If enabled, the USB VBUS signal provides power to
the USB device attached to a device port. Disabling VBUS will power down the
device as long as it is bus-powered instead of self-powered. The VBUS 5V signal
is up to 100 mA per port, but not to exceed 600mA total per USB I/O Module.
Drawing more than 150 mA on a USB port will shut down the VBUS 5V.
Caution: USB ports are designed for data traffic only. They are not
designed for charging or powering devices. Over-current conditions on
VBUS 5V may disrupt operations.

Modem Settings (Device Ports)

Note: Depending on the State and Mode you select, different fields are available.

State Used if an external modem is attached to the device port. If enabling, set the
modem to dial-out, dial-in, dial-back, dial-on-demand, dial-in/host list, dial-back &
dial-on-demand, dial in & dial-on-demand, CBCP Server, and CBCP Client.
Disabled by default. See Modem Dialing States (on page 178) for more
information.
Mode The format in which the data flows back and forth:
 Text: In this mode, the SLC advanced console manager assumes that the
modem will be used for remotely logging into the command line. Text mode
can only be used for dialing in or dialing back. Text is the default.
 PPP: This mode establishes an IP-based link over the modem. PPP
connections can be used in dial-out mode (e.g., the SLC unit connects to an
external network), dial-in mode (e.g., the external computer connects to the
network that the SLC 8000 advanced console manager is part of), or dial-on-
demand.
Use Sites Enables the use of site-oriented modem parameters which can be activated by
various modem-related events (authentication, outbound network traffic for dial-
on-demand connections, etc.). Sites can be used with the following modem
states: dial-in, dial-back, dial-on-demand, dial-in & dial-on-demand, dial-back &
dial-on-demand, and CBCP server.
Initialization Script Commands sent to configure the modem may have up to 100 characters. Consult
your modem’s documentation for recommended initialization options. If you do
not specify an initialization script, the SLC unit uses a default initialization string of
AT S7=45 SO=0 L1 V1 X4 &D2 &c1 E1 Q0.
Note: We recommend that the modem initialization script always be preceded
with AT and include E1 V1 x4 Q0 so that the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager may properly control the modem. For information on AT commands,
refer to the modem user guide, or do a web search for at command set.
Serial modems may need to include &B1 in the modem initialization string to set
the DTE rate to a fixed baud rate.
Modem Timeout Timeout for all modem connections. Select Yes (default) for the SLC unit to
terminate the connection if no traffic is received during the configured idle time.
Enter a value of from 1 to 9999 seconds. The default is 30 seconds.
Caller ID Logging Select to enable the SLC advanced console manager to log caller IDs on
incoming calls. Disabled by default.
Note: For the Caller ID AT command, refer to the modem user guide.
Modem Command Modem AT command used to initiate caller ID logging by the modem.
Note: For the AT command, refer to the modem user guide.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 130

 8: Device Ports

Dial-back Number Users with dial-back access can dial into the SLC device and enter their login and
password. Once the SLC 8000 advanced console manager authenticates them,
the modem hangs up and dials them back.
Select the phone number the modem dials back on -a fixed number or a number
associated with their login. If you select Fixed Number, enter the number (in the
format 2123456789).
The dial-back number is also used for CBCP client as the number for a user-
defined number. See Device Ports - Settings (on page 123) for more information.
Dial-back Delay For dial-back and CBCP Server, the number of seconds between the dial-in and
dial-out portions of the dialing sequence.
Dial-back Retries For dial-back and CBCP Server, the number of times the SLC unit will retry the
dial-out portion of the dialing sequence if the first attempt to dial-out fails.

Modem Settings: Text Mode

Timeout Logins If you selected Text mode, you can enable logins to time out after the connection is
inactive for a specified number of minutes. The default is No. This setting is only
applicable for text mode connections. PPP mode connections stay connected until
either side drops the connection. Disabled by default.
Dial-in Host List From the drop-down list, select the desired host list. The host list is a prioritized list
of SSH, Telnet, and TCP hosts that are available for establishing outgoing modem
connections or for connect direct at the CLI. The hosts in the list are cycled
through until the SLC 8000 advanced console manager successfully connects to
one.
To establish and configure host lists, click the Host Lists link.

Modem Settings: PPP Mode

Negotiate IP Address If the SLC unit and/or the serial device have dynamic IP addresses (e.g., IP
addresses assigned by a DHCP server), select Yes. Yes is the default.
If the SLC advanced console manager or the modem have fixed IP addresses,
select No, and enter the Local IP (IP address of the port) and Remote IP (IP
address of the modem).
Authentication Enables PAP or CHAP authentication for modem logins. PAP is the default.
With PAP, users are authenticated by means of the Local Users and any of the
remote authentication methods that are enabled. With CHAP, the CHAP
Handshake fields authenticate the user.
CHAP Handshake The Host/User Name (for UNIX systems) or Secret/User Password (for
Windows systems) used for CHAP authentication. May have up to 128
characters.
CHAP Auth Uses For CHAP authentication, determines what is used to validate the CHAP host/
user sent by the remote peer: either the CHAP Host defined for the modem, or
any of the users in the Local Users list.
Same authentication for Select this option to let incoming connections (dial-in) use the same
Dial-in & Dial-on-Demand authentication settings as outgoing connections (dial-on-demand). If this option
(DOD) is not selected, then the dial-on-demand connections take their authentication
settings from the DOD parameter settings. If DOD Authentication is PAP,
then the DOD CHAP Handshake field is not used.
DOD Authentication Enables PAP or CHAP authentication for dial-in & dial-on-demand. PAP is the
default. With PAP, users are authenticated by means of the Local Users and
any of the remote authentication methods that are enabled. With CHAP, the
DOD CHAP Handshake fields authenticate the user.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 131

 8: Device Ports

DOD CHAP Handshake For DOD Authentication, enter the Host/User Name for UNIX systems) or
Secret/User Password (for Windows systems) used for CHAP authentication.
May have up to 128 characters.
Enable NAT Select to enable Network Address Translation (NAT) for dial-in and dial-out
PPP connections on a per modem (device port or USB port) basis. Users
dialing into the SLC 8000 advanced console manager access the network
connected to Eth1 and/or Eth2.
Note: IP forwarding must be enabled on the Network > Network Settings page
for NAT to work. See Chapter 6: Basic Parameters on page 66.
Dial-out Number Phone number for dialing out to a remote system or serial device. May have up
to 20 characters. Any format is acceptable.
Remote/Dial-out Login User ID for dialing out to a remote system. May have up to 32 characters.
Remote/Dial-out Password for dialing out to a remote system. May have up to 64 characters.
Password
Retype Re-enter remote/dial-out password for dialing out to a remote system. May
have up to 64 characters.
Restart Delay The number of seconds after the timeout and before the SLC unit attempts
another connection. The default is 30 seconds.
CBCP Server Allow For CBCP Server state, allows "No Callback" as an option in the CBCP
No Callback handshake in addition to User-defined Number and Admin-defined Number.
CBCP Client Type For CBCP Client, this selects the number that the client would like to use for
callback - either a user-defined number passed to the server (specified by the
Fixed Dial-back Number) or an administrator-defined number determined by
the server based on the login that is PAP or CHAP authenticated.

3. To save settings for just this port, click the Apply button.
4. To save selected settings to ports other than the one you are configuring:
- From the Apply Settings drop-down box, select none, a group of settings, or All.
- In to Device Ports, type the device port numbers, separated by commas; indicate a range
of port numbers with a hyphen (e.g., 2, 5, 7-10).

Note: It may take a few minutes for the system to apply the settings to multiple ports.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 132

 8: Device Ports

Port Status and Counters

Port Counters describe the status of signals and
Table 8-5 Port Status and Counters
interfaces. SLC advanced console manager updates
and increments the port counters as signals change
and data flows in and out of the system. These
counters help troubleshoot connections or diagnose
problems because they give the user an overview of
the state of various parameters. By setting them to
zero and then re-checking them later, the user can
view changes in status.
The chart in the middle of the page displays the flow
control lines and port statistics for the device port.
The system automatically updates these values. To
reset them to zeros, select the Zero port counters
checkbox in the IP Settings section of the page.

Note: Status and statistics shown on the web

interface represent a snapshot in time. To see the
most recent data, you must reload the web page.
Status may display “N/A” if SLC is unable to
dynamically determine the connected/inserted device.

Device Ports - Power Management

In the Device Ports - Power Management page, configure power supplies that provide power to
the device or server connected to the device port. Up to 4 power supplies can be configured, by
selecting an RPM, an outlet on the RPM, and defining a unique name for the RPM/outlet pair. The
RPM outlet pair can also be controlled (power cycled, turned on, turned off).
This page also allows the user to define the Power Management Sequence, which, when entered
while the user is connected to a device port via the connect direct command, will display the Power
Management menu:
---------------------------------------------
Power Management Menu
---------------------------------------------
RPM/outlet>>> trippOUT4 sentry3OUT15
A. Status D. Turn On G. Turn On
B. Help E. Turn Off H. Turn Off
C. Quit F. Power Cycle I. Power Cycle
This menu allows the administrator to query status and control any of the power supplies that
provide power to the device connected to the device port.

To configure power management settings for a device port:

1. Connect to a specific port on the Devices > Device Ports page according to instructions in To
open the Device Ports - Settings page: (on page 123).
2. Click the Settings link beside Power Management to access the Device Ports - Power
Management page.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 133

 8: Device Ports

Figure 8-6 Device Ports - Power Management

3. Enter the following:

Power Management A series of one to ten characters that will display the Power Management menu
Sequence when connected to the device port. The default value is Esc+P (escape key, then
uppercase "P"). This value is specified as \x1bP, which is hexidecimal (\x)
character 27 (1B) followed by a P.
See Key Sequences on page 183 for notes on key sequence precedence and
behavior.
RPM For each managed power supply, select a RPM, most likely a PDU, which has
outlets that can be individually controlled, and which provides power to the device
connected to the device port.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 134

 8: Device Ports

Outlet For each managed power supply, enter the outlet on the selected RPM. As an aid to
selecting the outlet, click the View Outlets button, then select an outlet from the list
and click the Select Outlet button. The managed power supply outlet number will be
filled in, as well as the managed power supply outlet name if a name is listed for the
outlet and one has not already been defined for the managed power supply. A
unique name for the managed power supply name is required; this is what will be
displayed on the Power Management menu.
Name For each managed power supply, enter the name on the selected RPM. As an aid to
selecting the name, click the View Outlets button, then select an outlet from the list
and click the Select Outlet button. The managed power supply outlet number will be
filled in, as well as the managed power supply outlet name if a name is listed for the
outlet and one has not already been defined for the managed power supply. A
unique name for the managed power supply name is required; this is what will be
displayed on the Power Management menu.
State Displays the current state of the outlet when the Device Ports - Power Management
web page is loaded: on, off or unknown if the RPM does not provide status for
individual outlets or the SLC was unable to obtain the status of the outlet.
Action The action to take on the outlet: Cycle Power, On or Off.

4. To save, click Apply.

Device Ports - RPMs - Add Device

On the Devices > Device Ports page, access the Device Ports > RPMs - Add Device page to
configure a new managed remote power manager (RPM) for the SLC configuration.

To add a new managed RPM :

1. Connect to a specific port on the Devices > Device Ports page according to instructions in
To open the Device Ports - Settings page: (on page 123).
2. In the Connected to drop-down menu above the IP Settings section of the
Device Ports > Settings page, select RPM.
3. Click the Add RPM link. The Device Ports > RPMs - Add Device page displays.
Note: The Device Ports > RPMs - Add Device page can also be accessed via the
Devices > RPMs page.
4. Update the configuration settings on this page according to directions in
RPMs - Add Device (on page 196).

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 135

 8: Device Ports

Figure 8-7 Device Ports > RPMs - Add Device

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 136

 8: Device Ports

Device Port - Sensorsoft Device

Devices made by Sensorsoft are used to monitor environmental conditions.
1. In the Connected to drop-down menu above the IP Settings section of the
Device Ports > Settings page, select Sensorsoft.

Note: Sensorsoft temperature/humidity devices are supported with USB-to-serial adapters (ftdi/
pl2303/cp210x) but not supported for use with USB-to-Serial CDC_ACM devices.

2. Click the Device Commands link. The following page displays:

Figure 8-8 Devices > Device Ports > Sensorsoft

3. Select a port and enter or view the following information:

Dev Port Displays the number of the SLC port.

Device Port Name Displays the name of the SLC port.
Curr Temp Current temperature (degrees Celsius) on the device the sensor is monitoring.
Low Temp Enter the temperature (degrees Celsius) permitted on the monitored device below
which the SLC 8000 advanced console manager sends a trap.
High Temp Enter the temperature (degrees Celsius) permitted on the monitored device above
which the SLC unit sends a trap.
Use °F Display and set the temperature for this device in degrees Fahrenheit, instead of
Celsius, which is the default.
Humidity (%) Current relative humidity on the device the sensor is monitoring.
Low Humidity Enter the relative humidity permitted on the device the sensor is monitoring below
which the sensor sends a trap to the SLC advanced console manager.
High Humidity Enter the highest relative acceptable humidity permitted on the device above which
the sensor sends a trap to the SLC unit.
Contact Displays the current contact closure status of the sensor, if supported by the
connected Sensorsoft device. If the Sensorsoft device does not report a contact
status, N/A will be displayed. If Traps are enabled for the Sensorsoft device, an
slcEventDevicePortDeviceContactChanged trap will be sent when
the contact state changes from Open to Closed and from Closed to Open.
Traps Select to indicate whether the SLC 8000 unit should send a trap or configured
Event Alert when the sensor detects an out-of-range configured threshold.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 137

 8: Device Ports

4. Click the Apply button.

5. To view the status detected by the Sensorsoft, click the Show Status link in the far right
column of the table.

Figure 8-9 Sensorsoft Status

Device Port Commands

The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To configure a single port or a group of ports (for example, set deviceport port 2-5,6,12,15-
16 baud 2400):

set deviceport port <Device Port List or Name> <one or more device port
parameters>
Parameters
assertdtr <enable|disable>
auth <pap|chap>
banner <Banner Text>
baud <300-230400>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
calleridcmd <Modem Command String>
calleridlogging <enable|disable>
cbcpnocallback <enable|disable>
cbcptype <admin|user>
chapauth <chaphost|localusers>
chaphost <CHAP Host or User Name>
checkdsr <enable|disable>
closedsr <enable|disable>
connectedmsg <enable|disable>
databits <7|8>
device <none|sensorsoft|rpm> dialbackeretries <1-10>
dialbackdelay <PPP Dial-back Delay>
dialinlist <Host List for Dial-in>
dialoutnumber <Phone Number>
dialoutlogin <User Login>
dialbacknumber <usernumber|Phone Number>
dodauth <pap|chap>
dodchaphost <CHAP Host or User Name>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 138

 8: Device Ports

flowcontrol <none|xon/xoff|rts/cts>
group <Local or Remote Group Name>
idletimeout <disable|1-9999 seconds>
idletimeoutmsg <enable|disable>
ipaddr <IP Address>
initscript <Modem Initialization Script>
localipaddr <negotiate|IP Address>
logins <enable|disable>
maxdirect <1-15>
minimizelatency <enable|disable>
modemmode <text|ppp>
modemstate <disable|dialout|dialin|dialback|dialondemand|
dialin+ondemand|dialinhostlist>|dialback+ondemand|cbcpclient|cbcpserver
modemtimeout <disable|1-9999 seconds>
name <Device Port Name>
nat <enable|disable>
numsessionsmsg <enable|disable>
parity <none|odd|even>
portlogseq <1-10 Chars>
powermgmtseq <1-10 Chars>
remoteipaddr <negotiate|IP Address>
restartdelay <PPP Restart Delay>
reversepinout <enable|disable>
sendtermstr <enable|disable>
showlines <disable|1-50 lines>
sshauth <enable|disable>
sshdatadir <netin|netout|both>
sshin <enable|disable>
sshport <TCP Port>
sshtimeout <disable|1-1800 seconds>
stopbits <1|2>
tcpauth <enable|disable>
tcpdatadir <netin|netout|both>
tcpin <enable|disable>
tcpport <TCP Port>
tcptimeout <disable|1-1800 seconds>
telnetauth <enable|disable>
telnetdatadir <netin|netout|both>
telnetin <enable|disable>
telnetport <TCP Port>
telnetsoftiac <enable|disable>
telnettimeout <disable|1-1800 sec>
termstr <Termination String>
timeoutlogins <disable or 1-30 minutes>
toggledtr <enable|disable>
usbvbus <enable|disable>
usesites <enable|disable>
viewportlog <enable|disable>

To set the dialout password and CHAP secrets:

set deviceport port <Device Port # or List or Name> dialoutpassword

set deviceport port <Device Port # or List or Name> chapsecret
set deviceport port <Device Port # or List or Name> dodchapsecret

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 139

 8: Device Ports

To reset a device port, terminating and restarting all relevant connections:

set deviceport port <Device Port # or List or Name> reset

To configure up to 4 managed power supplies for device connected to a device port:

set deviceport port <Device Port # or Name> managepower

To view the settings for one or more device ports:

show deviceport port <Device Port List or Name> [display

<ip|data|modem|logging|device>]

To view a list of all device port names:

show deviceport names

To view a list of all device port types (RJ45 or USB):

show deviceport types

To view global device port settings:

show deviceport global

To view the modes and states of one or more device port(s):

Note: You can optionally email the displayed information.

show portstatus [deviceport <Device Port List or Name>] [email <Email

Address>]

To view device port statistics and errors for one or more ports:

Note: You can optionally email the displayed information.

show portcounters [deviceport <Device Port List or Name>] [email <Email

Address>]

To zero the port counters for one or more device ports:

show portcounters zerocounters <Device Port List or Name>

Device Commands
The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To send commands to (or control) a device connected to an SLC unit port over the serial
port:

Note: Currently the only devices supported for this type of interaction are the Sensorsoft
devices.

set command <Device Port # or Name or List> <one or more parameters>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 140

 8: Device Ports

Parameters
sensorsoft lowtemp <Low Temperature>
Sets the lowest temperature permitted for the port.
sensorsoft hightemp <High Temperature>
Sets the hightest temperature permitted for the port.
sensorsoft lowhumidity <Low Humidity %>
Sets the lowest humidity pemitted for the port.
sensorsoft highhumidity <High Humidity %>
Sets the highest humidity permitted for the port.
sensorsoft degrees <celsius|fahrenheit>
Enables or disables temperature settings as Celcius or Fahrenheit.
sensorsoft traps <enable|disable>
Enables or disables traps when specified conditions are met.
sensorsoft status
Displays the status of the port.
sensorsoft showall
Displays the status for all connected Sensorsoft devices and ignores the device port list.

Note: The Sensorsoft lowtemp and hightemp settings are given in the scale specified by
the degrees setting.

For commands to control RPMs, see RPM Commands (on page 206).

Interacting with a Device Port

Once a device port has been configured and connected to an external device such as the console
port of an external server, the data received over the device port can be monitored at the
command line interface with the connect listen command, as follows:

To connect to a device port to monitor it:

connect listen deviceport <Port # or Name>

In addition, you can send data out the device port (for example, commands issued to an external
server) with the connect direct command, as follows:

To connect to a device port to monitor and/or interact with it, or to establish an outbound
network connection:

connect direct <endpoint>

endpoint is one of:
deviceport <Port # or Name>
ssh <IP Address> [port <TCP Port>][<SSH flags>]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 141

 8: Device Ports

where:
<SSH flags> is one or more of:
user <Login Name>
version <1|2>
command <Command to Execute>
tcp <IP Address> port <TCP Port>
telnet <IP Address> [port <TCP Port>]
udp <IP Address> port <UDP Port>
hostlist <Host List>

Notes: To escape from the connect direct command when the endpoint of the
command is deviceport, tcp, or udp and return to the command line interface, type the
escape sequence assigned to the currently logged in user. If the endpoint is telnet or
SSH, logging out returns the user to the command line prompt.
To escape from the connect listen command, press any key. Setting up a user with
an escape sequence is optional. For any NIS, LDAP, RADIUS, Kerberos, or TACACS+
user, or any local user who does not have an escape sequence defined, the default
escape sequence is Esc+A.
When connecting to a USB device port, buffered data collected while there was no active
connection to the device port may be displayed initially. This is due to clearing internal
buffers in preparation for the new connection to the device port.

Device Ports - Logging and Events

The SLC products support port buffering of the data on the system's device ports as well as
notification of receiving data on a device port. Port logging is disabled by default. You can enable
more than one type of logging (local, NFS file, token and data detection, SD card, or USB port) at
a time. The buffer containing device port data is cleared when any type of logging is enabled.

Local Logging
If local logging is enabled, each device port stores 256 Kbytes (approximately 400 screens) of I/O
data in a true FIFO buffer. You may view this data (in ASCII format) at the CLI with the show
locallog command or on the Devices > Device Ports - Logging & Events page. Buffered data is
normally stored in RAM and is lost in the event of a power failure if it is not logged using an NFS
mount solution. If the buffer data overflows the buffer capacity, only the oldest data is lost, and only
in the amount of overrun (not in large blocks of memory).

NFS File Logging

Data can be logged to a file on a remote NFS server. Data logged locally to the SLC 8000
advanced console manager is limited to 256 Kbytes and may be lost in the event of a power loss.
Data logged to a file on an NFS server does not have these limitations. The system administrator
can define the directory for saving logged data on a port-by-port basis and configure file size and
number of files per port.
The directory path must be the local directory for one of the NFS mounts. For each logging file,
once the file size reaches the maximum, a new file opens for logging. Once the number of files
reaches the maximum, the oldest file is overwritten. The file naming convention is: <Device Port
Number>_<Device Port Name>_<File number>.log.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 142

 8: Device Ports

Examples:
02_Port-2_1.log
02_Port-2_2.log
02_Port-2_3.log
02_Port-2_4.log
02_Port-2_5.log

USB and SD Card Logging

Data can be logged to a USB flash drive that is loaded into the USB ports or the SD card slot on
the front of the SLC unit and properly mounted. Data logged locally to the SLC advanced console
manager is limited to 256 Kbytes and may be lost in the event of a power loss. Data logged to a
USB flash drive or SD card does not have these limitations. The system administrator can define
the file size and number of files per port. For each logging file, once the file size reaches the
maximum, a new file opens for logging. Once the number of files reaches the maximum, the oldest
file is overwritten. The file naming convention is:
<Device Port Number>_<Device Port Name>_<File number>.log
Examples:
02_Port-2_1.log
02_Port-2_2.log
02_Port-2_3.log
02_Port-2_4.log
02_Port-2_5.log

Token/Data Detection
The system administrator can configure the device log to detect when a user-defined string or
number of characters is received from the device, and automatically perform one or more actions:
send a message to the system log, send an SNMP trap, send an email alert, send a string to the
device, or control one of the power supplies associated with the device.

Syslog Logging
Data can be logged to the system log. If this feature is enabled, the data will appear in the Device
Ports log, under the Info level. The log level for the Device Ports log must be set to Info for the data
to be saved to the system log. See Device Ports - Logging and Events (on page 142).

To set logging parameters:

1. In the top section of the Device Port Settings page, click the Settings link in the Logging field.
The following page displays:

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 143

 8: Device Ports

Figure 8-10 Devices > Device Ports - Logging & Events

2. Enter the following:

Token & Data Detection

Token & Data Select to enable token and data detection on the selected device port, with a set of
Detection actions that can be enabled if a data trigger occurs. The default is disabled.
Trigger on Select the method of triggering an action:
 Data Byte Count: A specific number of bytes of data. This is the default.
 Token/Character String: A specific pattern of characters, which you can define
by a regular expression.
Note: Token/Character String recognition may negatively impact the SLC unit's
performance, particularly when regular expressions are used.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 144

 8: Device Ports

Byte Threshold The number of bytes of data the port will receive before the SLC unit will capture
log data and initiate the selected actions. The default is 100 bytes.
In most cases, the console port of your device does not send any data unless
there is an alarm condition. After the SLC unit receives a small number of bytes, it
perceives that your device needs some attention.
A threshold set to 30 characters means that as soon as the unit receives 30 bytes
of data, it performs the actions that are selected for this port.
Token The specific pattern of characters the SLC unit must recognize before initiating the
actions configured for this port. The maximum is 100 characters. You may use a
regular expression to define the pattern. For example, the regular expression
"abc[def]g" recognizes the strings abcdg, abceg, abcfg.
The SLC console manager supports GNU regular expressions; for more
information, see:
 http://www.gnu.org/software/libc/manual/html_node/Regular-Expressions.html
 http://www.delorie.com/gnu/docs/regex/regex.html
Actions Select one or more actions to perform if there is a data trigger:
 Syslog: A message is logged to the system log indicating what the data trigger
was along with the initial portion of the data received.
 SNMP Trap: A slcEventDevicePortData trap will be sent to the NMS configured
in the SNMP settings.
 Email: An email alert will be sent to the address configured for the device port.
 Send String to Device: A string will be sent to the device connected to the
device port.
 Control Power Supply: The state of one or more of the device port power
supplies can be changed.
Email to The email address of the message recipient(s) for an email alert. To enter more
than one email address, separate the addresses with a single space. You can
enter a total of 128 characters.
Email Subject A subject text appropriate for your site. May have up to 128 characters.
The email subject line is pre-defined for each port with its port number. You can
use the email subject to inform the desired recipients of the problem on a certain
server or location (e.g., server location or other classification of your equipment).
Note: The character sequence %d anywhere in the email subject is automatically
replaced with the device port number.
String to Send The string to send to the device connected to the device port. The string supports
the following special characters: newline ("\n"), double quote ("\""), single
quote ("\'"), and escape ("\x1b"). You can enter a total of 128 characters.
Power Supply The power supply that provides power to the device connected to the device port
which to control. Select either all power supplies or an individual power supply.
Power Action The action to perform on the selected power supply or power supplies - Cycle
Power, Turn On or Turn Off.
Action Delay A time limit of how long, in seconds, the device port will capture data after the data
trigger is detected and before closing the log file (with a fixed internal buffer
maximum capacity of 1500 bytes) and performing the selected actions. The default
is 60 seconds.
Restart Delay The number of seconds for the period of time, after performing the selected action,
during which the device port will ignore additional characters received. The data
will simply be ignored and not trigger additional actions until this time elapses. The
default is 60 seconds.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 145

 8: Device Ports

Local Logging
Local Logging If you enable local logging, each device port stores 256 Kbytes (approximately 400
screens) of I/O data in a true FIFO buffer. Disabled by default.
Clear Local Log Select the checkbox to clear the local log.
View Local Log Click this link to see the local log in text format.

Log Viewing Attributes

Display Select to view either the beginning (Head) or end (Tail) of the log.
Number of Lines Number of lines from the head or tail of the log to display.

NFS File Logging

NFS File Logging Select the checkbox to log all data sent to the device port to one or more files on an
external NFS server. Disabled by default.
NFS Log to View Available log files in the selected NFS Directory to view.
Directory to Log to The path of the directory where the log files will be stored.
Note: This directory must be a directory exported from an NFS server mounted on
the SLC 8000 advanced console manager Specify the local directory path for the
NFS mount.
Max Number of Files The maximum number of files to create to contain log data to the port. These files
keep a history of the data received from the port. Once this limit is exceeded, the
oldest file is overwritten. The default is 10.
Max Size of Files The maximum allowable file size in bytes. The default is 2048 bytes. Once the
maximum size of a file is reached, the SLC unit begins generating a new file.

USB / SD Card Logging

USB / SD Card Select to enable USB / SD card logging. A USB thumb drive or SD card must be
Logging loaded into one of the ports of the SLC and properly mounted. Disabled by default.
Log to View Available log files in the selected USB / SD card slot to view.
Log To Select the USB port or SD card to use for logging.
Max Number of Files The maximum number of files to create to contain log data to the port. These files
keep a history of the data received from the port. Once this limit is exceeded, the
oldest file is overwritten. The default is 10.
Max Size of Files The maximum allowable file size in bytes. The default is 2048 bytes. Once the
maximum size of a file is reached, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager
begins generating a new file. The default is 2048 bytes.

Syslog Logging
Syslog Logging Select to enable system logging.
Note: The logging level for the device ports log must be set to Info to view Syslog
entries for Device Port logging on the Services > SSH/Telnet/Logging page.

Note: To apply the settings to additional device ports, in the Apply settings to Device
Ports field, enter the additional ports, (e.g., 1-3, 5, 6)

3. To apply settings to other device ports in addition to the currently selected port, select the

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 146

 8: Device Ports

Apply settings to Device Ports and enter port numbers separated by commas. Indicate a
range of port numbers with a hyphen (e.g., 2, 5, 7-10), and separate ranges with commas.
4. To save, click the Apply button.

Logging Commands
The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To configure logging settings for one or more device ports:

set deviceport port <Device Port List or Name> <one or more parameters>

Note: Local logging must be enabled for a device port for the locallog commands to
be executed. To use the set locallog clear command, the user must have permission to
clear port buffers (see Chapter 12: User Authentication on page 217).

Example:
set deviceport port 2-5,6,12,15-16 locallogging enable
Parameters
actiondelay <Action Delay>
actionrestart <Restart Delay>
bytethreshold <# of Characters>
emailsubj <Email Subject>
emailto <Email Address>
locallogging <enable|disable>
nfsdir <Logging Directory>
nfslogging <enable|disable>
nfsmaxfiles <Max # of Files>
nfsmaxsize <Size in Bytes>
poweraction <on|off|cycle>
powersupply <Managed Power Supply Name>
sendstring <String to Send|QUOTEDSTRING>
sysloglogging <enable|disable>
tokenaction <List of none,log,trap,email,string,power>
tokendatadetect <enable|disable>
tokenstring <Regex String>
tokentrigger <bytecnt|charstr>
usblogging <enable|disable>
usbmaxfiles <max # of Files>
usbmaxsize <Size in Bytes>
usbport <U1|U2|SD>

To view a specific number of bytes of data for a device port:

show locallog <Device Port # or Name> [bytes <Bytes To Display>]

1 Kbyte is the default.

To clear the local log for a device port:

set locallog clear <Device Port # or Name>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 147

 8: Device Ports

Note: The locallog commands can only be executed for a device port if local logging is
enabled for the port. The set locallog clear command can only be executed if the user
has permission to clear port buffers (see Chapter 12: User Authentication on page 217).

Console Port
The console port initially has the same defaults as the device ports. Use the Devices > Console
Port page to change the settings, if desired.

To set console port parameters:

1. Click the Devices tab and select Console Port. The following page displays:

Figure 8-11 Devices > Console Port

2. Change the following as desired:

Baud The speed with which the device port exchanges data with the attached serial
device.
From the drop-down list, select the baud rate. Most devices use 9600 for the
administration port, so the console port defaults to this value.
Data Bits Number of data bits used to transmit a character. From the drop-down list, select
the number of data bits. The default is 8 data bits.
Stop Bits The number of stop bits that indicate that a byte of data has been transmitted.
From the drop-down list, select the number of stop bits. The default is 1.
Parity Parity checking is a rudimentary method of detecting simple, single-bit errors.
From the drop-down list, select the parity. The default is none.
Flow Control A method of preventing buffer overflow and loss of data. The available methods
include none, xon/xoff (software), and rts/cts (hardware). The default is none.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 148

 8: Device Ports

Timeout The number of minutes (1-30) after which an idle session on the console is
automatically logged out. Disabled by default.
Show Lines on If selected, when you connect to the console port with a terminal emulator, you will
Connecting see the last lines output to the console, for example, the SLC boot messages or
the last lines output during a CLI session on the console.
Group Access If undefined, any group can access the console port. If one or more groups are
specified (groups are delimited by the characters ' ' (space), ',' (comma), or ';'
(semicolon)), then any user who logs into the console port must be a member of
one of the specified groups, otherwise access will be denied. Users authenticated
via RADIUS may have a group (or groups) provided by the RADIUS server via the
Filter-Id attribute that overrides the group defined for a user on the SLC 8000
advanced console manager. A group provided by a remote server must be either a
single group or multiple groups delimited by the characters ' ' (space), ',' (comma),
';' (semicolon), or '=' (equals) - for example "group=group1,group2;" or
"group1,group2,group3".

3. Click the Apply button to save the changes.

Console Port Commands

The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To configure console port settings:

set consoleport <one or more parameters>

Parameters
baud <300-230400>
databits <7|8>
stopbits <1|2>
group <Local or Remote Group Name>
parity <none|odd|even>
flowcontrol <none|xon/xoff|rts/cts>
showlines <disable|1-50 lines>
timeout <disable|1-30>

To view console port settings:

show consoleport

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 149

 8: Device Ports

Internal Modem Settings

This section describes how to configure an internal modem in the SLC advanced console
manager. The SLC 8000 internal modem is an optional part. If the modem is installed, a message
will be displayed when the SLC unit is booted:
Internal modem installed.
The presence of the modem will also be displayed in the CLI admin version command, the
web About SLC page, and the System Configuration report. The internal modem provides a
subset of the modem functionality available for modems connected to a Device Port and USB
modems. If the internal modem is installed, the Internal Modem web page can be displayed by
selecting the Internal Modem option from the main menu, or by selecting the MD button in the
Sample Dashboards on the upper right corner of the web page.

Note: The internal modem only supports Dial-in, Dial-out and Dial-back.

Setting Up Internal Modem Storage

An internal modem may be configured on the Devices > Internal Modem page and accessed
through the Sample Dashboards only if it is installed into the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager. .

To set up internal modem storage in the SLC 8000 advanced console manager:

1. Insert an internal modem into the SLC unit according to the instructions in Modem Installation
(on page 41).
Note: Your internal modem will appear in the Sample Dashboards in the upper right
hand corner once the SLC unit is reboots.
2. Reboot the SLC 8000 advanced console manager.
3. Log into the SLC unit and click Devices.
4. Click Internal Modem. Figure 8-12 shows the page that displays.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 150

 8: Device Ports

Figure 8-12 Devices > Internal Modem

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 151

 8: Device Ports

5. Enter the following fields.

State Indicates whether the internal is enabled. When enabling, set the modem to
Disabled, Dial-in, Dial-out, and Dial-back. Disabled by default.
Mode The format in which the data flows back and forth.
 With Text selected, the SLC unit assumes that the modem will be used for
remotely logging into the command line. Text mode is only for dialing in. This
is the default.
 PPP establishes an IP-based link over the modem. PPP connections can be
used in dial-out mode (e.g., the SLC unit connects to an external network) or
dial-in mode (e.g., the external computer connects to the network that the
SLC unit is part of), dial-back (dial-in followed by dial-out), CBCP server and
CBCP client.
Use Sites For more information see Sites (on page 174).
Group Access If undefined, any group can access the modem (text login only). If one or more
groups are specified (groups are delimited by the characters ',' (comma) or ';'
(semicolon)), then any user who logs into the modem must be a member of one
of the specified groups, otherwise access will be denied. Users authenticated
via RADIUS may have a group (or groups) provided by the RADIUS server via
the Filter-Id attribute that overrides the group defined for a user on the SLC unit.
A group provided by a remote server must be either a single group or multiple
groups delimited by the characters ',' (comma), ';' (semicolon), or '=' (equals) -
for example "group=group1,group2;" or "group1,group2,group3".
Initialization Script Commands sent to configure the modem may have up to 100 characters.
Consult your modem’s documentation for recommended initialization options. If
you do not specify an initialization script, the SLC uses a uses a default
initialization string of:
AT S7=45 SO=0 L1 V1 X4 &D2 &c1 E1 Q0
Note: We recommend that the modem initialization script always be pre-
pended with AT and include E1 V1 x4 Q0 so that the SLC unit may properly
control the modem.
Modem Timeout Timeout for modem connections. Set to No by default.
To configure the modem connection to time out when no traffic is received
choose Yes and enter a value of 1 to 9999 seconds.
Caller ID Logging Select to enable the SLC unit to log caller IDs on incoming calls. Disabled by
default.
Modem Command Modem AT command used to initiate caller ID logging by the modem.
Note: For the AT command, use +VCID=1 to enable Caller ID with formatted
presentation, and use +VCID=2 to enable Caller ID with unformatted
presentation. This is subject to subscribing to a Caller ID service for the modem
line.
Check Dial Tone If set to Yes, the SLC will periodically check the modem for a dial tone while
waiting for a dial in (e.g., if the Modem State is set to Dial-in, or if the Modem
State is set to Dial-back and the SLC unit is in the Dial-in portion of the
sequence). The SLC unit can issue a trap or an event can be setup to notify the
user if no dial tone is detected. Set to Yes by default (every 15 minutes).

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 152

 8: Device Ports

Dial-back Number Users with Dial-back can dial into the SLC unit and enter their login and
password. Once the SLC unit authenticates them, the modem hangs up and
dials them back .
Select the phone number the modem dials back on: a fixed number or a
number associated with their login. If you select Fixed Number, enter the
number (in the format 2123456789).
The dial-back number is also used for CBCP client as the number for a user-
defined number. See CBCP Server and CBCP Client for more information.
Dial-back Delay For dial-back and CBCP Server, the number of seconds between the dial-in
and dial-out portions of the dialing sequence.
Dial-back Retries For dial-back and CBCP Server, the number of times the SLC unit will retry the
dial-out portion of the dialing sequence if the first attempt to dial-out fails.
Timeout Logins If you selected text mode, you can enable logins to time out after the
connection is inactive for a specified number of minutes. The default is No. This
setting only applies to text mode connections. PPP mode connections stay
connected until either side drops the connection. Disabled by default.
Negotiate IP Address If the SLC and/or the serial device have dynamic IP addresses (e.g., IP
addresses assigned by a DHCP server), select Yes. This is the default.
If the SLC unit or the modem have fixed IP addresses, select No, and enter the
Local IP (IP address of the internal modem) and Remote IP (IP address of the
modem).
Authentication Enables PAP or CHAP authentication for modem logins. PAP is the default.
With PAP, users are authenticated by means of the Local Users and any of the
remote authentication methods that are enabled.
With CHAP, the CHAP Handshake fields authenticate the user.
CHAP Handshake The Host/User Name (for UNIX systems) or
Secret/User Password (for Windows systems) used for CHAP authentication.
May have up to 128 characters.
CHAP Auth Uses For CHAP authentication, determines what is used to validate the CHAP host/
user sent by the remote peer: either the CHAP Host defined for the modem, or
any of the users in the Local Users list.
Enable NAT Select to enable Network Address Translation (NAT) for dial-in and dial-out
PPP connections on a per modem (device port, USB port, or internal modem)
basis. Users dialing into the SLC unit access the network connected to Eth1
and/or Eth2.
Note: IP forwarding must be enabled on the Network Settings (on page 54) for
NAT to work.
Dial-out Number Phone number for dialing out to a remote system or serial device. May have up
to 20 characters. Any format is acceptable.
Remote/Dial-out Login User ID for authentication when dialing out to a remote system, or if a remote
system requests authentication from the SLC module when it dials in. May have
up to 32 characters.
Remote/Dial-out Password for authentication when dialing out to a remote system, or if a remote
Password/ Retype system requests authentication from the SLC unit when it dials in. May have up
to 20 characters.
Restart Delay The number of seconds after the timeout and before the SLC module attempts
another connection. The default is 30 seconds.

6. Click Apply.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 153

 8: Device Ports

Internal Modem Commands

Configure the internal modem:
set intmodem <parameters>

Parameters

auth <pap|chap>
calleridcmd <Modem Command String>
calleridlogging <enable|disable>
modemstate <disable|dialin|dialout|dialback>
usesites <enable|disable>
modemmode <text|ppp>
group <Local or Remote Group Name>
timeoutlogins <disable|1-30 minutes>
modemtimeout <disable|1-9999 sec>
localipaddr <negotiate|IP Address>
restartdelay <PPP Restart Delay>
remoteipaddr <negotiate|IP Address>
chaphost <CHAP Host or User Name>
initscript <Modem Init Script>
nat <enable|disable>
chapauth <chaphost|localusers>
checkdialtone <disable|5-600 min>
dialbacknumber <usernumber|Phone Number>
dialoutnumber <Phone Number>
dialbackdelay <PPP Dialback Delay>
dialoutlogin <Remote User Login>
dialbackretries <1-10>
Set the modem password and CHAP secret (any extra parameters will be ignored):
set intmodem dialoutpassword
set intmodem chapsecret

Note: It is recommended that the initscript be prepended with 'AT' and include
'E1 V1 x4 Q0' so that the SLC may properly control the modem.

Display settings for the internal modem:

show intmodem

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 154

 8: Device Ports

Host Lists
A host list is a prioritized list of SSH, Telnet, and TCP hosts available for establishing incoming
modem connections or for the connect direct command on the CLI. The SLC unit cycles
through the list until it successfully connects to one.

To add a host list:

1. Click the Devices tab and select the Host Lists option. The following page displays:

Figure 8-13 Devices > Host Lists

2. Enter the following:

Note: To clear fields in the lower part of the page, click the Clear Host List button.

Host List Id Displays after a host list is saved.

Host List Name Enter a name for the host list.
Retry Count Enter the number of times the SLC advanced console manager should attempt
to retry connecting to the host list.
Authentication Select to require authentication when the SLC unit connects to a host.

3. You have the following options:

- To save the host list without adding hosts at this time, click the Add Host List button.
- To add hosts, enter the following:

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 155

 8: Device Ports

Host Parameters
Host Name or IP address of the host.
Protocol Protocol for connecting to the host (TCP, SSH, or Telnet).
Port Port on the host to connect to.
Escape Sequence The escape character used to get the attention of the SSH or Telnet client. It is
optional, and if not specified, Telnet and SSH use their default escape character.
For Telnet, the escape character is either a single character or a two-character
sequence consisting of '^' followed by one character. If the second character is '?',
the DEL character is selected. Otherwise, the second character is converted to a
control character and used as the escape character.
For SSH, the escape character is a single character.
Note: When the Device Port Esc Sequence/ViewLog/PowerMenu Escape
Sequence is configured, the following escape sequence precedent behavior can be
expected: 1) Escape 2) PowerMenu 3) ViewLogs
A clear/restart of the remaining escape events occurs when there is a match in any
configured sequence. All the sequences should have unique sequence defined and
user should avoid overlapping sequence strings. When detecting key sequences,
after receiving the first character(s) of a sequence, the SLC will wait 3 or more
seconds for the remaining characters, before timing out and sending all characters
to the device. For example, if the Escape Sequence is ABCD, and the user types
"AB", the SLC will wait at least 3 seconds for the next character ("C") before timing
out and sending the "AB" characters to the device.

4. Click the right arrow. The host displays in the Hosts box.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 to add more hosts to the host list.
6. Click the Clear Host Parameters button to clear fields before adding the next host.
7. You have the following options:
- To remove a host from the host list, select the host in the Hosts box and click the
left arrow.
- To give the host a higher precedence, select the host in the Hosts box and click the
up arrow.
- To give the host a lower precedence, select the host in the Hosts box and click the
down arrow.
8. Click the Add Host List button. After the process completes, a link back to the Device Ports >
Settings page displays.

To view or update a host list:

1. In the Host Lists table, select the host list and click the View Host List button. The list of hosts
display in the Hosts box.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 156

 8: Device Ports

Figure 8-14 View Host Lists

2. View, add, or update the following:

Host List Id Displays after a host list is saved.
Host List Name Enter a name for the host list.
Retry Count Enter the number of times the SLC 8000 advanced console manager should
attempt to retry connecting to the host list.
Authentication Select to require authentication when the SLC unit connects to a host.

Host Parameters
Host Name or IP address of the host.
Protocol Protocol for connecting to the host (TCP, SSH, or Telnet).
Port Port on the host to connect to SLC advanced console manager
Escape Sequence The escape character used to get the attention of the SSH or Telnet client. It is
optional, and if not specified, Telnet and SSH use their default escape character.
For Telnet, the escape character is either a single character or a two-character
sequence consisting of '^' followed by one character. If the second character is '?',
the DEL character is selected. Otherwise, the second character is converted to a
control character and used as the escape character.
For SSH, the escape character is a single character.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 157

 8: Device Ports

3. You have the following options:

- To add a host to the host list, click the right arrow. The host displays in the Hosts box.
- To remove a host from the host list, select the host in the Hosts box and click the
left arrow.
- To give the host a higher precedence, select the host in the Hosts box and click the
up arrow.
- To give the host a lower precedence, select the host in the Hosts box and click the
down arrow.
4. Click the Edit Host List button. After the process completes, a link back to the
Device Ports > Settings page displays.

To delete a host list:

1. Select the host list in the Host Lists table.

2. Click the Delete Host List button. After the process completes, a link back to the
Device Ports > Settings page displays.

Host List Commands

The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To configure a prioritized list of hosts to be used for modem dial-in connections:

set hostlist add|edit <Host List Name> [<parameters>]

Parameters
name <Host List Name> (edit only)
retrycount <1-10>
auth <enable|disable>
Default: retrycount=3, auth=enable.

To add a new host entry to a list or edit an existing entry:

set hostlist add|edit <Host List Name> entry <Host Number>

[<parameters>]
Parameters
host <IP Address or Name>
protocol <ssh|telnet|tcp>
port <TCP Port>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>

To move a host entry to a new position in the host list:

set hostlist edit <Host List Name> move <Host Number> position <Host
Number>

To delete a host list, or a single host entry from a host list:

set hostlist delete <Host List> [entry <Host Number>]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 158

 8: Device Ports

To display the members of a host list:

show hostlist <all|names|Host List Name>

Scripts
The SLC unit supports two types of scripts:
 Interface Scripts which use a subset of the Expect/Tcl scripting language to perform pattern
detection and action generation on Device Port output.
 Batch Scripts which are a series of CLI commands. A user can create scripts at the web,
view scripts at the web and the CLI, and utilize scripts at the CLI. For a description of the
syntax allowed in Interface Scripts, see Interface Script Syntax at the end of this page.
All scripts have permissions associated with them; a user who runs a script must have the
permissions associated with the script in order to run the script.

To add a script:

1. Click the Devices tab and select the Scripts option. This page displays.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 159

 8: Device Ports

Figure 8-15 Devices > Scripts

2. Click the Add Scripts button. The page for editing script attributes displays.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 160

 8: Device Ports

Figure 8-16 Adding or Editing New Scripts

3. Enter the following:

Scripts
Script Name A unique identifier for the script.
Type  Select Interface for a script that utilizes Expect/Tcl to perform pattern detection
and action generation on Device Port output.
 Select Batch for a script of CLI commands.

4. In the User Rights section, select the user Group to which NIS users will belong:

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 161

 8: Device Ports

User Rights
Group Select the group to which the NIS users will belong:
 Default Users: This group has only the most basic rights. You can specify
additional rights for the individual user.
 Power Users: This group has the same rights as Default Users plus Web
Access, Networking, Date/Time, Reboot & Shutdown, and Diagnostics &
Reports.
 Administrators: This group has all possible rights.

5. Assign or unassign User Rights for the specific user by checking or unchecking the following
boxes:
Full Administrative Right to add, update, and delete all editable fields.
Networking Right to enter Network settings.
Services Right to enable and disable system logging, SSH and Telnet logins, SNMP, and
SMTP.
Secure Lantronix Right to view and manage secure Lantronix units (e.g., Spider, or SLC devices) on
Network the local subnet.
Date/Time Right to set the date and time.
Reboot & Shutdown Right to shut down and reboot the SLC unit.
Local Users Right to add or delete local users on the system.
Remote Right to assign a remote user to a user group and assign a set of rights to the user.
Authentication
SSH Keys Right to set SSH keys for authenticating users.
User Menus Right to create a custom user menu for the CLI.
Web Access Right to access Web-Manager.
Diagnostics & Right to obtain diagnostic information and reports about the unit.
Reports
Firmware & Right to upgrade the firmware on the unit and save or restore a configuration (all
Configuration settings). Selecting this option automatically selects Reboot & Shutdown.
Internal Modem Right to configure internal modem settings.
Device Port Right to control device ports.
Operations
Device Port Right to enter device port configurations.
Configuration
USB Right to enter modem settings for USB modems and to control USB storage
devices.
SD Card Right to view and enter settings for SD card.
RPM Right to view and enter remote power manager settings.

6. To save, click the Apply button. If the type of script is Interface, the script will be validated
before it is saved. Once the script is saved, the main Scripts page is displayed.

To view or update a script:

1. In the Scripts table, select the script and click the Edit Script button. The page for editing
script attributes displays (see Figure 8-16).
2. Update the script attributes (see To add a script: above).

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 162

 8: Device Ports

3. To save, click the Apply button.

To rename a script:

1. In the Scripts table, select the script and enter a new script name in the New Name field.
2. Click the Rename Script button. The script will be renamed and the Devices > Scripts page
redisplays.

To delete a script:

1. In the Scripts table, select the script to delete.

2. Click the Delete Script button. After a confirmation, the script will be deleted and the
Devices > Scripts page redisplays.

To change the permissions for a script:

1. In the Scripts table, select the script and select the new Group and/or Permissions.
2. Click the Change Permissions button. The script updates and the Devices > Scripts page
redisplays.

To use a script at the CLI:

1. To run an Interface Script on a device port for pattern recognition and action generation, use
the connect script <Script Name> deviceport <Device Port # or Name>
command.
2. To run a Batch Script at the CLI with a series of CLI commands, use the set script
runcli <Script Name> command.

Set Script CLI Commands

To run a CLI batch script:

set script runcli <Script Name>

To import a script:

set script import <interface|batch> via <ftp|scp|copypaste>

[file <Script File>] [name <Script Name>] [host <IP Address or Name>]
[login <User Login>] [path <Path to Script File>]

Note: Interface scripts will be given default/do user rights; Batch scripts will be given
admin/ad user rights. The name of the script will be the same as the file name (if it is a
valid script name), otherwise a script name must be specified for import.

set script update <interface|batch> name <Script Name>

[group <default|power|admin>] [permissions <Permission List>]

Note: See 'help user permissions' for information on groups and user rights.

To rename a script:

set script rename <interface|batch> name <Script Name> newname

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 163

 8: Device Ports

<New Script Name>

To delete a script

set script delete <interface|batch> name <Script Name>

To connect an interface script to a Device Port and run it:

connect script <Script Name> deviceport <Device Port # or Name>

To display list of Device Port (interface) scripts or CLI (batch) scripts, or view the contents
of a script:

show script [type <interface|batch> [name <Script Name>]]

Show Script CLI Commands

To run a CLI batch script:

set script runcli <Script Name>

To import a script:

set script import <interface|batch> via <ftp|scp|copypaste>

[file <Script File>] [name <Script Name>] [host <IP Address or Name>]
[login <User Login>] [path <Path to Script File>]

Note: Interface scripts will be given default/do user rights; Batch scripts will be given
admin/ad user rights. The name of the script will be the same as the file name (if it is a
valid script name), otherwise a script name must be specified for import.

set script update <interface|batch> name <Script Name>

[group <default|power|admin>] [permissions <Permission List>]
See 'help user permissions' for information on groups and user rights.

To rename a script:

set script rename <interface|batch> name <Script Name> newname <New

Script Name>

To delete a script

set script delete <interface|batch> name <Script Name>

To connect an interface script to a Device Port and run it:

connect script <Script Name> deviceport <Device Port # or Name>

To display list of Device Port (interface) scripts or CLI (batch) scripts, or view the contents
of a script:

show script [type <interface|batch> [name <Script Name>]]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 164

 8: Device Ports

Batch Script Syntax

The syntax for Batch Scripts is exactly the same as the commands that can be typed at the CLI,
with the additions described in this section.
The sleep command suspends execution of the script (puts it to 'sleep') for the specified number
of seconds. Syntax:
sleep <value>
The while command allows a loop containing CLI commands to be executed. Syntax:
while {<Boolean expression>} {
CLI command 1
CLI command 2
...
CLI command n
}

Note: The closing left brace '}' must be on a line without any other characters. To
support a while command, the set command, variables, and secondary commands are
also supported.

Interface Script Syntax

This section describes the abbreviated scripting syntax for Interface Scripts. This limited syntax
was created to prevent the creation of scripts containing potentially harmful commands. Script
commands are divided into three groups: Primary, Secondary and Control Flow. Primary
commands provide the basic functionality of a script and are generally the first element on a line of
a script, as in:
send_user "Password:"
Secondary commands provide support for the primary commands and are generally not useful by
themselves. For example, the expr command can be used to generate a value for a set
command.
set <my_var> [expr 1 + 1]
Control Flow commands allow conditional execution of other commands based on the results
of the evaluation of a Boolean expression.

Table 8-17 Definitions

Term Definition
Word A contiguous group of characters delimited on either side by spaces. Not enclosed
by double quotes.
Primary Command One of the primary commands listed in this section.
Secondary Command One of the secondary commands defined in this section.
Quoted String A group of characters enclosed by double quote (") characters. A quoted string
may include any characters, including space characters. If a double quote
character is to be included in a quoted string it must be preceded (escaped) by a
backslash character ('\').
Variable Reference A word (as defined above) preceded by a dollar sign character ('$').
CLI Command A quoted string containing a valid CLI show command.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 165

 8: Device Ports

Term Definition
Arithmetic Operator A single character representing a simple arithmetic operation. The character may
be one of the following:
 A plus sign (+) representing addition
 A minus sign (-) representing subtraction
 An asterisk sign (*) representing multiplication
 A forward slash (/) representing division
 A percent sign (%) representing a modulus
Boolean Expression An expression which evaluates to TRUE or FALSE. A Boolean expression has the
following syntax:
<value> <Boolean operator> <value>
Each can be either a word or a variable reference.
Boolean Operator A binary operator which expresses a comparison between two operands and
evaluates to TRUE or FALSE. The following Boolean operators are valid:
 '<' less than
 '>' greater than
 '<=' less than or equal to
 '>=' greater than or equal to
 '==' equal to
 '!=' not equal to

Primary Commands
These are stand-alone commands which provide the primary functionality in a script. These
commands may rely on one or more of the Secondary Commands to provide values for some
parameters. The preprocessor will require that these commands appear only as the first element
of a command line. The start of a command line is delimited by any of the following:
 The start of a new line of text in the script
 A semicolon (';')
 A left brace ('{')

Table 8-18 Primary Commands

Command Description
set The set command assigns a value to a variable. Syntax:
set <variable> <value>
where <variable> is a word, and <value> can be defined in one of the following
ways:
 A quoted string
 A word
 A variable reference
 A value generated via one of the string secondary commands (compare,
match, first, etc.)
 A value generated via the expr secondary command
 A value generated via the format secondary command
 A value generated via the expr timestamp command
unset This command removes the definition of a variable within a script. Syntax:
unset <variable>
where <variable> is a word.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 166

 8: Device Ports

Command Description
scan The scan command is analogous to the C language scanf(). Syntax:
scan <variable> <format string> <value 1> <value 2> ... <value n>
where <variable> a variable reference, and <format string> is a quoted
string. Each of the <value x> elements will be a word.
sleep The sleep command suspends execution of the script (puts it to 'sleep') for the
specified number of seconds. Syntax:
sleep <value>
where <value> can be a word, a quoted string or a variable reference.
exec The exec command executes a single CLI command. Currently only CLI 'show'
commands may be executed via exec. Syntax:
exec <CLI command>
send, send_user The send command sends output to a sub-process, The send_user
command sends output to the standard output. Both commands have the same
syntax:
send <string>
send_user <string>
where <string> can be either a quoted string or a variable reference.
expect, expect_user, The expect command waits for input and attempts to match it against one or
expect_before, more patterns. If one of the patterns matches the input the corresponding
expect_after, (optional) command is executed. All expect commands have the same syntax:
expect_background
expect {<string 1> {command 1} <string 2> {command 2} ... <string n> {command
n}}
where <string x> will either be a quoted string, a variable reference or the
reserved word 'timeout.' The command x is optional, but the curly braces
('{' and '}') are required. If present it must be a primary command.
return The return command terminates execution of the script and returns an optional
value to the calling environment. Syntax:
return <value>
where <value> can be a word or a variable reference.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 167

 8: Device Ports

Secondary Commands
These are commands which provide data or other support to the Primary commands. These
commands are never used by themselves in a script. The preprocessor will require that these
commands always follow a left square bracket ('[') character and be followed on a single line by a
right bracket (']').

Table 8-19 Secondary Commands

Command Description
string The string command provides a series of string manipulation operations. The
string command will only be used with the set command to generate a value
for a variable. There are nine operations provided by the string command.
Syntax (varies by operation):
string compare <str 1> <str 2>
Compare two strings
string match <str 1> <str 2>
Determine if two strings are equal
string first <str needle> <str haystack>
Find and return the index of the first occurrence
of 'str_needle' in 'str_haystack'
string last <str needle> <str haystack>
Find and return the index of the last occurrence of
'str_needle' in 'str_haystack'
string length <str>
Return the length of 'str'
string index <str> <int>
Return the character located at position 'int' in
'str'
string range <str> <int start> <int end>
Return a string consisting of the characters in
'str' between 'int start' and 'int end'
string tolower <str>
Convert <str> to lowercase
string toupper <str>
Convert <str> to uppercase
string trim <str 1> <str 2>
Trim 'str 2' from 'str 1'
string trimleft <str 1> <str 2>
Trim 'str 2' from the beginning of 'str 1'
string trimright <str 1> <str 2>
Trim 'str 2' from the end of 'str 1'
In each of the above operations, each <str *> element can either be a quoted string
or a variable reference. The <int *> elements will be either words or variable
references.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 168

 8: Device Ports

Command Description
expr This command evaluates an arithmetic expression and returns the result. The expr
command will only be used in combination with the set command to generate a
value for a variable. Syntax:
expr <value> <operation> <value>
Each <value> will be either a word or a variable reference, and <operation> an
arithmetic operation.
timestamp This command returns the current time of day as determined by the SLC . The
timestamp command will only be used in combination with the set command
to produce the value for a variable. Syntax:
timestamp <format>
where <format> is a quoted string.
format The format command is analogous to the C language sprintf(). The format
command will only be used in combination with the set command to produce the
value for a variable. Syntax:
format <format string> <value 1> <value 2> ... <value n>
where <format string> will be a quoted string. Each of the <value x> elements will be
a word, a quoted string or a variable reference.

Control Flow Commands

The control flow commands allow conditional execution of blocks of other commands. The
preprocessor treats these as Primary commands, allowing them to appear anywhere in a script
that a Primary command is appropriate.

Table 8-20 Control Flow Commands

Command Description
while The while command executes an associated block of commands as long as its
Boolean expression evaluates to TRUE. After each iteration the Boolean expression
is re-evaluated; when the Boolean expression evaluates to FALSE execution
passes to the first command following the associated block. Each command within
the block must be a Primary command. Syntax:
while {<Boolean expression>} {
command 1
command 2
...
command n
}

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 169

 8: Device Ports

Command Description
if, elseif and else The if command executes an associated block of commands if its Boolean
expression evaluates to TRUE. Each command within the block must be a Primary
command. Syntax:
if {<Boolean expression>} {
command 1
command 2
...
command n
}
The elseif command is used in association with an if command - it must
immediately follow an if or elseif command. It executes an associated block of
commands if its Boolean expression evaluates to TRUE. Each command within the
block must be a Primay command. Syntax:
elseif {<Boolean expression>} {
command 1
command 2
...
command n
}
The else command is used in combination with an if or elseif command to
provide a default path of execution. If the Boolean expressions for all preceding if
and elseif commands evaluate to FALSE the associated block of commands is
executed. Each command within the block must be a primary command. Syntax:
else {
command 1
command 2
...
command n
}

Sample Scripts
Interface Script—Monitor Port

The Monitor Port (Monport) script connects directly to a device port by logging into the SLC port,
gets the device hostname, loops a couple of times to get port interface statistics, and logs out. The
following is the script:
set monPort 7
set monTime 5
set sleepTime 2
set prompt ">"
set login "sysadmin"
set pwd "PASS"
#Send CR to echo prompt
send "\r"
sleep $sleepTime
#Log in or check for Command Prompt

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 170

 8: Device Ports

expect {
#Did not capture "ogin" or Command Prompt
timeout { send_user "Time out login......\r\n"; return }
#Got login prompt
"login" {
send_user "Logging in....\r\n"
send "$login\r"
expect {
timeout { send_user "Time out waiting for pwd
prompt......\r\n"; return }
#Got password prompt
"password" {
#Send Password
send "$pwd\r"
expect {
timeout { send_user "Time out waiting for prompt......\r\n";
return }
$prompt {}
}
}
}
}
#Already Logged in got Command Prompt
$prompt {
send_user "Already Logged....\r\n"
}
}
#Get hostname info
send "show network port 1 host\r"
expect {
timeout { send_user "Time out Getting Hostname 1\r\n"; return }
"Domain" {
#Get Hostname from SLC
set hostname "[string range $expect_out(buffer) [string first
Hostname:
$expect_out(buffer)] [expr [string first Domain
$expect_out(buffer)]-2]]"
}
}
send_user "\r\n\r\n\r\n\r\n"
send_user "Device [string toupper $hostname]\r\n"
send_user "________________________________________________________\r\n"
send_user "Monitored Port: Port $monPort \r\n"
send_user "Monitor Interval Time: $monTime Seconds \r\n"
set loopCtr 0
set loopMax 2
while { $loopCtr < $loopMax } {
#Get current time

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 171

 8: Device Ports

The following is the screen output:

slc247glenn]> conn script ex4 deviceport 7
login: Logging in....
sysadmin
sysadmin
Password: PASS
Welcome to the Secure Lantronix Console Manager
Model Number: SLC 48
For a list of commands, type 'help'.
[SLC251glenn]> show network port 1 host
show network port 1 host
___Current Hostname Settings____________________________________________
Hostname: SLC251glenn
Domain: support.int.lantronix.com
[SLC251glen
Device HOSTNAME: SLC 251GLENN
________________________________________________________________________
Monitored Port: Port 7
Monitor Interval Time: 5 Seconds
[Current Time:21:16:43]
show portcounter deviceport 7
n]> show portcounter deviceport 7
Device Port: 7 Seconds since zeroed: 1453619
Bytes input: 0 Bytes output: 0
Framing errors: 0 Flow control errors: 0
Overrun errors: 0 Parity errors: 0
[SLC251glenn]>
[Current Time:21:16:58]
show portcounter deviceport 7
show portcounter deviceport 7
Device Port: 7 Seconds since zeroed: 1453634
Bytes input: 0 Bytes output: 0
Framing errors: 0 Flow control errors: 0
Overrun errors: 0 Parity errors: 0
[SLC251glenn]>
Port Counter Monitor Script Ending......
________________________________________________________________________
Login Out.......
logout
Returning to command line
[slc247glenn]>

Batch Script—SLC CLI

This script runs the following SLC CLI commands, then runs the Monport Interface script:
 show network port 1 host
 show deviceport names
 show script
 connect script monport deviceport 7

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 172

 8: Device Ports

The following is the screen output of the script:

[slc247glenn]> se script runcli cli
[slc247glenn]> show network port 1 host
___Current Hostname Settings____________________________________________
Hostname: slc247glenn
Domain: <none>
[slc247glenn]>
[slc247glenn]> show deviceport names
___Current Device Port Names____________________________________________
01 - SCS_ALIAS_Test 05 - Port-5
02 - Port-2 06 - Port-6
03 - Port-3 07 - SLC -251
04 - Port-4 08 - Port-8
[slc247glenn]>
[slc247glenn]> show script
___Interface Scripts______Group/Permissions_____________________________
getSLC Adm/ad,nt,sv,dt,lu,ra,um,dp,pc,rp,rs,fc,dr,sn,wb,sk,po,do
Test Adm/ad,nt,sv,dt,lu,ra,um,dp,pc,rp,rs,fc,dr,sn,wb,sk,po,do
monport Adm/<none>
___Batch Scripts__________Group/Permissions_____________________________
cli Adm/ad,nt,sv,dt,lu,ra,um,dp,pc,rs,fc,dr,sn,wb,sk,po,do,rp
[slc247glenn]>
[slc247glenn]> connect script monport deviceport 7
login: Logging in....
sysadmin
sysadmin
Password: PASS
Welcome to the Secure Lantronix Console Manager
Model Number: SLC 48
For a list of commands, type 'help'.
[SLC251glenn]> show network port 1 host
show network port 1 host
___Current Hostname Settings____________________________________________
Hostname: SLC251glenn
Domain: support.int.
Device HOSTNAME: SLC 251GLENN
________________________________________________________________________
Monitored Port: Port 7
Monitor Interval Time: 5 Seconds
[Current Time:21:25:04]
show portcounter deviceport 7
lantronix.com
[SLC251glenn]> show portcounter deviceport 7
Device Port: 7 Seconds since zeroed: 1454120
Bytes input: 0 Bytes output: 0
Framing errors: 0 Flow control errors: 0
Overrun errors: 0 Parity errors: 0
[SLC251glenn]>
[Current Time:21:25:20]
show portcounter deviceport 7
show portcounter deviceport 7
Device Port: 7 Seconds since zeroed: 1454136
Bytes input: 0 Bytes output: 0

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 173

 8: Device Ports

Framing errors: 0 Flow control errors: 0

Overrun errors: 0 Parity errors: 0
[SLC251glenn]>
Port Counter Monitor Script Ending......
________________________________________________________________________
Login Out.......
logout
Returning to command line
[slcvz249_glenn]> show script
___Interface Scripts______Group/Permissions_____________________________
test3 Def/do
___Batch Scripts__________Group/Permissions_____________________________
test1 Adm/
ad,nt,sv,dt,lu,ra,um,dp,ub,rs,fc,dr,rp,sn,wb,sk,po,do
[slcvz249_glenn]>

Sites
A site is a group of site-oriented modem parameters that can be activated by various modem-
related events (authentication on dial-in, outbound network traffic for a dial-on-demand
connection, etc.). The site parameters will override parameters that are configured for a modem.
To use sites with a modem, create one or more sites (described below), then enable Use Sites for
the modem. Sites can be used with the following modem states: dial-in, dial-back, CBCP Server,
dial-on-demand, dial-in & dial-on-demand, and dial-back & dial-on-demand. For more information
on how sites are used with each modem state, see Modem Dialing States on page 178.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 174

 8: Device Ports

To add a site:

1. Click the Devices tab and select the Sites option. The Sites page displays:

Figure 8-21 Devices > Sites

2. In the lower section of the page, enter the following:

Note: To clear fields in the lower part of the page, click the Reset Site button.

Site Id Displays after a site is created.

(view only)
Site Name Enter a name for the site.
Port Select the port: None, Internal Modem, Device Port, USB Port U1, or USB
Port U2 the site is assigned to. For dial-on-demand sites, a port must be
selected. For any other sites, the port selection can be set to None. See Modem
Dialing States on page 178.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 175

 8: Device Ports

Login/CHAP Host The login name (for PAP authentication) or CHAP host (for CHAP authentication)
associated with this site. If a modem has sites enabled and the authentication is
successful at dial-in (for modem states dial-in, dial-back, CBCP server, dial-in &
dial-on-demand, or dial-back & dial-on-demand), and the name that was
authenticated matches the Login/CHAP Host, the site parameters will be used for
the remainder of the modem connection.
CHAP Secret/Retype The CHAP secret associated with this site. If a modem has sites enabled and
CHAP authentication enabled, then at dial-in, if the remote server sends a name
in the CHAP challenge response that matches the CHAP host of a site, the CHAP
secret for the site will be used to authenticate the CHAP challenge response sent
by the remote server.
Authentication The type of authentication, PAP or CHAP, for which this site is applicable. On
dial-in authentication, only sites with the authentication type that matches the
authentication type configured for the modem will be used to try to find a matching
site.
Timeout Logins For text dial-in connections, the connection can time out after the connection is
inactive for a specified number of minutes.
Negotiate IP Address If the SLC advanced console manager and the remote server should negotiate
the IP addresses for each side of the PPP connection, select Yes. Select No if the
address of the SLC unit (Local IP) and remote server (Remote IP) need to be
specified.
Static Route IP The Static Route IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway must be configured for
Address dial-on-demand sites. The SLC 8000 advanced console manager will
automatically dial-out and establish a PPP connection when IP traffic destined for
the network specified by the static route needs to be sent.
Note: Static Routing must be enabled on the Network - Routing page for dial-on-
demand connections.
Static Route Subnet The subnet mask for a dial-on-demand connection.
Mask
Static Route Gateway The gateway for a dial-on-demand connection.
Dial-out Number The dial-out number must be specified for dial-on-demand sites. This indicates
the phone number to dial when the SLC unit needs to send IP traffice for a dial-
on-demand connection.
Dial-out Login User ID for authentication when dialing out to a remote system, or when a remote
system requests authentication from the SLC 8000 unit when it dials in. May have
up to 32 characters. This ID is used for authenticating the SLC 8000 advanced
console manager during the dial-out portion of a dial-back (including CBCP
server) and dial-on-demand.
Dial-out Password Password for authentication when dialing out to a remote system, or if a remote
system requests authentication from the SLC unit when it dials in. May have up to
64 characters
Retype Password Re-enter password for dialing out to a remote system. May have up to 64
characters.
Dial-back Number The phone number to dial on callback for text or PPP dial-back connections. A
site must successfully authenticate, have Allow Dial-back enabled and have a
Dial-back Number defined in order for the site to be used for callback.
Allow Dial-back If enabled, the site is allowed to be used for dial-back connections.
Dial-back Delay For dial-back and CBCP Server, the number of seconds between the dial-in and
dial-out portions of the dialing sequence.
Dial-back Retries For dial-back and CBCP Server, the number of times the SLC unit will retry the
dial-out portion of the dialing sequence if the first attempt to dial-out fails.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 176

 8: Device Ports

Modem Timeout Timeout for dial-in and dial-on-demand PPP connections. Select Yes (default) for
the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to terminate the connection if no traffic
is received during the configured idle time. Enter a value of from 1 to 9999
seconds. The default is 30 seconds.
Restart Delay The number of seconds after the modem timeout and before the SLC unit
attempts another connection. The default is 30 seconds.
CBCP Server For a CBCP Server site, allows "No Callback" as an option in the CBCP
Allow No Callback handshake in addition to User-defined Number and Admin-defined Number.
Enable NAT Select to enable Network Address Translation (NAT) for PPP connections.
Note: IP forwarding must be enabled on Network Settings (on page 54) for NAT
to work.

3. Click the Add Site button.

To view or update a site:

1. In the Sites table, select the site and click the View Site button. The site attributes are
displayed in the bottom half of the page.
2. Update any of the site attributes.
3. Click the Edit Site button.

To delete a site:

1. Select the site in the Sites table.

2. Click the Delete Site button.
Configures a set of site-oriented modem parameters that can be activated by various modem-
related events (authentication, outbound network traffic for DOD connections, etc.).
The site parameters will override any parameters configuredfor the modem.
Uses sites with a modem, enable 'usesites'. Sites can be used with the following modem states:
dialin, dialback, cbcpserver, dialondemand, dialin+ondemand, and dialback+ondemand.

To create or edit a site:

set site add|edit <Site Name> [<parameters>]

Parameters
name <Site Name> (edit only)
deviceport <Device Port # or Name or none>
usbport <U1|U2>
internal modem
auth <pap|chap>
loginhost <User Login/CHAP Host>
localipaddr <negotiate|IP Address>
remoteipaddr <negotiate|IP Address>
routeipaddr <IP Address>
routemask <Mask>
routegateway <Gateway>
nat <enable|disable>
dialoutnumber <Phone Number>
dialoutlogin <User Login>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 177

 8: Device Ports

allowdialback <enable|disable>
dialbacknumber <Phone Number>
dialbackdelay <Dial-back Delay>
dialbackretries <1-10>
timeoutlogins <disable|1-30 minutes>
modemtimeout <disable|1-9999 secs>
restartdelay <PPP Restart Delay>
cbcpnocallback <enable|disable>

To set the site password and CHAP secret:

set site dialoutpassword <Site Name>

set site chapsecret <Site Name>

To add passwords to a site:

set site dialoutpassword <Site Name>

set site chapsecret <Site Name>

To delete a site:

set site delete <Site Name>

To display details for all sites, the names of all sites, or details for just one site:

show site <all|names|Site Name>

Modem Dialing States

This section describes how each modem state that supports sites operates when sites are
enabled.

Dial In
The SLC 8000 advanced console manager waits for a peer to call the SLC unit to establish a text
(command line) or PPP connection.
 For text connections, the user will be prompted for a login and password, and will be
authenticated via the currently enabled authentication methods (Local Users, NIS, LDAP, etc).
The site list will be searched for a site that (a) the Login/CHAP Host matches the name that
was authenticated, (b) Authentication is set to PAP, and (c) the Port is set to None or
matches the port the modem is on.
If a matching site is found, the Timeout Logins parameter configured for the site will be used
for the rest of the dial-in connection instead of the Timeout Logins parameter configured for
the modem. Once authenticated, a CLI session will be initiated, and the user will remain
connected to the SLC 8000 advanced console manager until they either logout of the CLI
session, or (if Timeout Logins is enabled) the CLI session is terminated if it has been idle.
 For PPP connections, the user will be authenticated via PAP or CHAP (determined by the
Authentication setting for the modem). For PAP, the Local/Remote User list will be used to
authenticate the login and password sent by the PPP peer, and the site list will be searched for
a site that (a) the Login/CHAP Host matches the name that was authenticated, (b)
Authentication is set to PAP, and (c) the Port is set to None or matches the port the modem
is on. For CHAP, the site list will be searched for a site that (a) the Login/CHAP Host and

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 178

 8: Device Ports

CHAP Secret match the name and secret sent in the CHAP Challenge response by the PPP
peer, (b) Authentication is set to CHAP, and (c) the Port is set to None or matches the port
the modem is on. If the remote peer requests PAP or CHAP authentication from the SLC unit,
the Remote/Dial-out Login and Remote/Dial-out Password configured for the modem (not
the site) will be provided as authentication tokens.
If a matching site is found, its Negotiate IP Address, NAT, and Modem Timeout parameters
will be used for the rest of the dial-in connection instead of the parameters configured for the
modem. Once authenticated, a PPP session will be established using either negotiated IP
addresses or specific IP addresses (determined by the Negotiate IP Address setting). The
PPP connection will stay active until no IP traffic is sent for Modem Timeout seconds.

Dial-back
The SLC advanced console manager waits for a peer to call the SLC unit, establishes a text
(command line) or PPP connection, authenticates the user, and if the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager is able to determine a dial-back number to use, hangs up and calls the dial-back number
to establish either a text or PPP connection.
 For text connections, the user will be prompted for a login and password, and will be
authenticated via the currently enabled authentication methods (Local Users, NIS, LDAP, etc).
The site list will be searched for a site that (a) the Login/CHAP Host matches the name that
was authenticated, (b) Authentication is set to PAP, and (c) the Port is set to None or
matches the port the modem is on.
If a matching site is found, its Timeout Logins, Dial-back Number, Allow Dial-back, and
Dial-back Delay parameters will be used for the rest of the dial-back connection instead of the
parameters configured for the modem. Once the remote server is authenticated, if Allow Dial-
back is enabled for the site and a Dial-back Number is defined, the SLC unit will hang up and
wait Dial-back Delay seconds before initiating the dial-back. The SLC 8000 advanced
console manager will dial, prompt the user again for a login and password, and a CLI session
will be initiated. The user will remain connected to the SLC unit until they either logout of the
CLI session, or (if Timeout Logins is enabled) the CLI session is terminated if it has been
idle.
 For PPP connections, the user will be authenticated via PAP or CHAP (determined by the
Authentication setting for the modem). For PAP, the Local/Remote User list will be used to
authenticate the login and password sent by the PPP peer, and the site list will be searched for
a site that (a) the Login/CHAP Host matches the name that was authenticated, (b)
Authentication is set to PAP, and (c) the Port is set to None or matches the port the modem
is on. For CHAP, the site list will be searched for a site that (a) the Login/CHAP Host and
CHAP Secret match the name and secret sent in the CHAP Challenge response by the PPP
peer, (b) Authentication is set to CHAP, and (c) the Port is set to None or matches the port
the modem is on. If the remote peer requests PAP or CHAP authentication from the SLC 8000
advanced console manager, the Remote/Dial-out Login and Remote/Dial-out Password
configured for the modem (not the site) will be provided as authentication tokens.
If a matching site is found, its Dial-back Number, Allow Dial-back, Dial-back Delay, Dial-
out Login, Dial-out Password, Negotiate IP Address, NAT, and Modem Timeout
parameters will be used for the rest of the dial-back connection instead of the parameters
configured for the modem. Once the remote server is authenticated, if Allow Dial-back is
enabled for the site and a Dial-back Number is defined, the SLC unit will will hang up and wait
Dial-back Delay seconds before initiating the dial-back. The SLC 8000 advanced console
manager will dial, and if the remote peer requests PAP or CHAP authentication, provide the
Dial-out Login and Dial-out Password as authentication tokens. Once authenticated, a PPP
session will be established using either negotiated IP addresses or specific IP addresses
(determined by the Negotiate IP Address setting).

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 179

 8: Device Ports

Dial-on-demand
The SLC unit automatically dial outs and establishes a PPP connection when IP traffic destined for
a remote network needs to be sent. It will remain connected until no data packets have been sent
to the peer for a specified amount of time.
When this modem state is initiated, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager searches the site
list for all sites that (a) have a Dial-out Number defined, (b) have a Static Route IP Address,
Static Route Subnet Mask and Static Route Gateway defined, and (c) the Port matches the port
the modem is on. A dial-on-demand connection will be started for each, waiting for IP traffic
destined for a remote network.
When IP traffic needs to be sent, the SLC unit dials the appropriate Dial-out Number for the site,
and if the remote peer requests PAP or CHAP authentication, provides the Dial-out Login and
Dial-out Password as authentication tokens. Once authenticated, a PPP session will be
established using either negotiated IP addresses or specific IP addresses (determined by the
Negotiate IP Address setting). The PPP connection will stay active until no IP traffic is sent for
Modem Timeout seconds. Once the timeout has expired, the PPP connection will be terminated
and will not be reestablished for at least Restart Delay seconds.

Dial-in & Dial-on-demand

A modem is configured to be in two modes: answering incoming calls to establish a PPP
connection, and automatically dialing out to establish a PPP connection when IP traffic destined
for a remote network needs to be sent. When either event occurs (an incoming call or IP traffic
destined for the remote network), the other mode will be disabled.
 For Dial-in, the user will be authenticated via PAP or CHAP (determined by the
Authentication setting for the modem). For PAP, the Local/Remote User list will be used to
authenticate the login and password sent by the PPP peer, and the site list will be searched for
a site that (a) the Login/CHAP Host matches the name that was authenticated, (b)
Authentication is set to PAP, and (c) the Port is set to None or matches the port the modem
is on. For CHAP, the site list will be searched for a site that (a) the Login/CHAP Host and
CHAP Secret match the name and secret sent in the CHAP Challenge response by the PPP
peer, (b) Authentication is set to CHAP, and (c) the Port is set to None or matches the port
the modem is on. If the remote peer requests PAP or CHAP authentication from the SLC
advanced console manager, the Remote/Dial-out Login and Remote/Dial-out Password
configured for the modem (not the site) will be provided as authentication tokens.
If a matching site is found, its Negotiate IP Address, NAT, and Modem Timeout parameters
will be used for the rest of the dial-in connection instead of the parameters configured for the
modem. Once authenticated, a PPP session will be established using either negotiated IP
addresses or specific IP addresses (determined by the Negotiate IP Address setting). The
PPP connection will stay active until no IP traffic is sent for Modem Timeout seconds.
 For Dial-on-Demand, the SLC unit searches the site list for all sites that (a) have a Dial-out
Number defined, (b) have a Static Route IP Address, Static Route Subnet Mask and Static
Route Gateway defined, and (c) the Port matches the port the modem is on. A dial-on-
demand connection will be started for each, waiting for IP traffic destined for a remote
network. When IP traffic needs to be sent, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager dials the
appropriate Dial-out Number for the site, and if the remote peer requests PAP or CHAP
authentication, provides the Dial-out Login and Dial-out Password as authentication tokens.
Once authenticated, a PPP session will be established using either negotiated IP addresses
or specific IP addresses (determined by the Negotiate IP Address setting). The PPP
connection will stay active until no IP traffic is sent for Modem Timeout seconds. Once the
timeout has expired, the PPP connection will be terminated and will not be reestablished for at
least Restart Delay seconds.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 180

 8: Device Ports

Dial-back & Dial-on-demand

A modem is configured to be in two modes: answering incoming calls to initiate a dial-back, and
automatically dialing out to establish a PPP connection when IP traffic destined for a remote
network needs to be sent. When either event occurs (an incoming call or IP traffic destined for the
remote network), the other mode will be disabled.
 For Dial-back, the user will be authenticated via PAP or CHAP (determined by the
Authentication setting for the modem). For PAP, the Local/Remote User list will be used to
authenticate the login and password sent by the PPP peer, and the site list will be searched for
a site that (a) the Login/CHAP Host matches the name that was authenticated, (b)
Authentication is set to PAP, and (c) the Port is set to None or matches the port the modem
is on. For CHAP, the site list will be searched for a site that (a) the Login/CHAP Host and
CHAP Secret match the name and secret sent in the CHAP Challenge response by the PPP
peer, (b) Authentication is set to CHAP, and (c) the Port is set to None or matches the port
the modem is on. If the remote peer requests PAP or CHAP authentication from the SLC unit,
the Remote/Dial-out Login and Remote/Dial-out Password configured for the modem (not
the site) will be provided as authentication tokens.
If a matching site is found, its Dial-back Number, Allow Dial-back, Dial-back Delay, Dial-
out Login, Dial-out Password, Negotiate IP Address, NAT, and Modem Timeout
parameters will be used for the rest of the dial-back connection instead of the parameters
configured for the modem. Once the remote server is authenticated, if Allow Dial-back is
enabled for the site and a Dial-back Number is defined, the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager will will hang up and wait Dial-back Delay seconds before initiating the dial-back.
The SLC unit will dial, and if the remote peer requests PAP or CHAP authentication, provide
the Dial-out Login and Dial-out Password as authentication tokens. Once authenticated, a
PPP session will be established using either negotiated IP addresses or specific IP addresses
(determined by the Negotiate IP Address setting).
 For Dial-on-Demand, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager searches the site list for all
sites that (a) have a Dial-out Number defined, (b) have a Static Route IP Address, Static
Route Subnet Mask and Static Route Gateway defined, and (c) the Port matches the port
the modem is on. A dial-on-demand connection will be started for each, waiting for IP traffic
destined for a remote network.
When IP traffic needs to be sent, the SLC unit dials the appropriate Dial-out Number for the
site, and if the remote peer requests PAP or CHAP authentication, provides the Dial-out
Login and Dial-out Password as authentication tokens. Once authenticated, a PPP session
will be established using either negotiated IP addresses or specific IP addresses (determined
by the Negotiate IP Address setting). The PPP connection will stay active until no IP traffic is
sent for Modem Timeout seconds. Once the timeout has expired, the PPP connection will be
terminated and will not be reestablished for at least Restart Delay seconds.

CBCP Server and CBCP Client

Callback Control Protocl (CBCP) is a PPP option that negotiates the use of callback where the
server, after authenticating the client, terminates the connection and calls the client back at a
phone number that is determined by the CBCP handshake. For more information on CBCP, see
http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc957979.aspx. CBCP is used primarily by Microsoft
PPP peers. CBCP supports two options for determining the number to dial on callback: the client
can specify a user-defined number for the server to dial on callback, or the client can request the
server use an administrator-defined number to dial on callback. Optionally, some servers may also
allow "no callback" as an option.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 181

 8: Device Ports

CBCP Server
The SLC 8000 advanced console manager waits for a client to call the SLC unit, establishes a
PPP connection, authenticates the user, and negotiates a dial-back number with the client using
CBCP. If the SLC 8000 advanced console manager is able to determine a dial-back number to
use, it hangs up and calls the dial-back number.
When a call is received, a PPP connection is established, and the user will be authenticated via
PAP or CHAP (configured with the Authentication setting). For PAP, the Local/Remote list will be
used to authenticate the login and password sent by the PPP peer. For CHAP, the CHAP
Handshake Host/User Name and Secret/User Password will be used to authenticate CHAP
Challenge response sent by the PPP peer. If the remote peer requests PAP or CHAP
authentication from the SLC unit, the Remote/Dial-out Login and Remote/Dial-out Password
will be provided as authentication tokens. Once authenticated, the CBCP handshake with the
client determines the number to use for dial-back. The SLC unit will present the client with the
available options: if the authenticated user is a Local/Remote User with Allow Dial-back enabled
and a Dial-back Number defined, the administrator-defined option is allowed; if this is not the case,
the user-defined number is allowed. Additionally, if CBCP Server Allow No Callback is enabled,
the client can also select no callback (the PPP connection established at dial-in will remain up).
The client will select from the available callback options. If the SLC unit can determine a dial-back
number to use, it will hang up and wait Dial-back Delay seconds before initiating the dial-back (if
the dial-back fails, the SLC will try Dial-back Retries times to dial-back). The SLC unit will call
back the previously authenticated remote peer, and if the remote peer requests PAP or CHAP
authentication, provide the Remote/Dial-out Login and Remote/Dial-out Password as
authentication tokens. Once authenticated, a PPP session will be established using either
negotiated IP addresses or specific IP addresses (determined by the Negotiate IP Address
setting).

CBCP Client
The SLC unit will dial out to a CBCP server, establish a PPP connection, negotiate a callback
number with the server using CBCP, terminate the connection, and wait for the server to call back.
The SLC unit dials the Dial-out Number, and if the remote peer requests PAP or CHAP
authentication, provides the Remote/Dial-out Login and Remote/Dial-out Password as
authentication tokens. Once authenticated, the CBCP handshake with the server determines the
number to use for dial-back. The SLC device will request the type of number defined by CBCP
Client Type - either an Admin-defined Number (the CBCP server determines the number to call)
or a User-defined Number (the SLC unit will provide the Fixed Dial-back Number as the number
to call). If the CBCP handshake is successful, the SLC unit will terminate the PPP connection,
hang up, and wait for the server to dial back. When the remote server calls back the SLC unit and
the PPP connection is established, the user will be authenticated via PAP or CHAP (configured
with the Authentication setting). For PAP, the Local/Remote list will be used to authenticate the
login and password sent by the PPP peer. For CHAP, the CHAP Handshake Host/User Name
and Secret/User Password will be used to authenticate CHAP Challenge response sent by the
PPP peer. Once authenticated, a PPP session will be established using either negotiated IP
addresses or specific IP addresses (determined by the Negotiate IP Address setting).

Notes:
 In a state where the modem will be answering a call, the modem should always be
configured for manual answer, not auto answer.
 When answering a call, the SLC unit answers after the 2nd ring.
 Any text or PPP connection can be terminated by setting the modem state to disabled.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 182

 8: Device Ports

Key Sequences
The default values for the various key sequences (Escape Sequence, Break Sequence, View Port
Log Sequence, Power Menu Sequence) are set to different key sequences, and it is
recommended that they always be set to different key sequences so that the SLC can properly
handle each of the functions accessed by the key sequence while connected to a device.
For example, if the View Port Log Sequence is set to the same sequence as the Power Menu
Sequence, and this sequence is typed while connected to a device port, both the Power Menu and
the option to display Port Log will be displayed, with the Power Menu taking precedence and
processing user input.
If any of the key sequences are set to the same value, the precedence used to process the key
sequences is:
 Escape Sequence
 Power Management Sequence
 View Port Log Sequence
It is also recommended that the key sequences not share a significant amount of overlap other
than the first character. For example, if the View Port Log Sequence is set to ABCD and the Power
Management Sequence is set to ABCE, the first three characters of both sequences are the same
- this is not recommended.
When any portion of key sequences overlap, typing a complete escape sequence for one of the
sequences will reset recognition of the other sequences back to the beginning of the key
sequence. For example, with the default View Port Log sequence of ESC-V and the default Power
Management sequence of ESC-P, if the user types "ESC-V" and views the port log and then
returns to interacting with the device, they need to type "ESC-P" to view the Power Menu, and not
just "P".
When detecting key sequences, after receiving the first character(s) of a sequence, the SLC will
wait 3 or more seconds for the remaining characters, before timing out and sending all characters
to the device. For example, if the Escape Sequence is ABCD, and the user types "AB", the SLC
will wait at least 3 seconds for the next character ("C") before timing out and sending the "AB"
characters to the device.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 183

9: USB/SD Card Port
This chapter describes how to configure storage by using the Devices > USB / SD Card page and
CLI. This page can be used to configure the thumb drive and modems. The thumb drive or SD
card is useful for firmware updates, saving and restoring configurations and for device port
logging. See Firmware & Configurations (on page 271).
The SLC advanced console manager supports a variety of thumb drives.
This chapter describes the Web Manager pages and available CLI commands that configure the
SLC USB, ports and SD card. This chapter contains the following sections:
 Set Up of USB/SD Card Storage
 Manage Files
 USB Commands

Set Up of USB/SD Card Storage

The Devices > USB / SD Card page has a checkbox for both USB Access and SD card access.
These checkboxes are a security feature to ensure that access to any USB device or the SD card
is disabled if the box is unchecked. If unchecked, the SLC unit ignores any device plugged into the
port.

To set up USB or SD card storage in the SLC 8000 advanced console manager:

1. Insert any of the supported storage devices into the USB port or the SD card slot on the front
of the SLC unit. You can do this before or after powering up the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager. If the first partition on the storage device is formatted with a file system supported by
the SLC unit (ext2, FAT16 and FAT32), the card mounts automatically.
2. Log into the SLC unit and click Devices.
3. Click USB / SD Card. Figure 9-1 shows the page that displays. Your storage device should
display in the appropriate row of the USB ports / SD card table if you have inserted it. If is does
not display and you have inserted it, refresh the web page.
4. View the USB/SD card information and options available on the page:
Port (view only) Port on the SLC unit where the USB device or SD card is inserted.
Device (view only) Type of USB device or SD card (modem or storage).
Type (view only) Information read from USB device or SD card.
State (view only) Indicates if the device is mounted, and if mounted, how much space is available.
USB Access Check to enable USB Access. Uncheck to disable USB access.
(check box)
SD Card Access Check to enable SD Card Access. Uncheck to disable SD card access.
(check box)

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 184

 9: USB/SD Card Port

Figure 9-1 Devices > USB / SD Card

To configure a USB/SD card storage port, from the USB Ports / SD Card table,

1. Click the radio button (on the far right) of a USB or SD card device storage port.
2. Click Configure.
- Figure 9-2 shows the page that displays if a USB storage device is inserted.
- Figure 9-3 shows the page that displays if an SD Card is inserted.

Figure 9-2 Devices > SD Card > Configure

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 185

 9: USB/SD Card Port

Figure 9-3 Devices > USB > Configure

3. Enter the following fields.

Mount Select the checkbox to mount the first partition of the storage device on
the SLC unit (if not currently mounted). Once mounted, a USB thumb
drive or SD card is used for firmware updates, device port logging and
saving/restoring configurations.
Unmount To eject the USB thumb drive or SD card from the SLC unit , first
unmount the thumb drive or SD card . Select the checkbox to unmount it.
Warning: If you eject a thumb drive or SD card from the SLC unit
without unmounting it, subsequent mounts of a USB thumb drive or
SD card in may fail, and you will need to reboot the device to restore
thumb drive or SD card functionality.
Format Select to:
 Unmount the USB/SD card device (if it is mounted)
 Remove all existing partitions
 Create one partition
 Format it with the selected file system (ext2, FAT16 or FAT32)
 Mount the USB device
Filesystem Select Ext2, FAT16 or FAT32, the filesystems the SLC supports.
Filesystem Check Select to run a filesystem integrity check on the thumb drive. This is
recommended if the filesystem does not mount or if the filesystem has errors.

4. Click Apply.
5. Click the Manage Files on Storage Device link to view and manage files on the selected USB
thumb drive or SD Card. Files on the storage device may then be deleted, downloaded or
renamed. See Manage Files on page 191 for more information.

To configure the USB Modem port, from the USB Ports table:

1. Click the radio button (on the far right) for Port U1 or U2.
2. Click Configure. Figure 9-4 shows the page that displays if a USB modem is inserted in Port
U1, or if Port U2 is selected.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 186

 9: USB/SD Card Port

Figure 9-4 Devices > USB > Modem

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 187

 9: USB/SD Card Port

3. Enter the following fields.

Data Settings
Note: Check the modem’s equipment settings and documentation for the proper
settings. The attached modem must have the same settings.

Baud The speed with which the device port exchanges data with the attached serial
device.
From the drop-down list, select the baud rate. Most devices use 9600 for the
administration port, so the device port defaults to this value. Check the equipment
settings and documentation for the proper baud rate.
Note: Cypress ACM-based USB to serial chip set does not support 230400 baud
rate.
Data Bits Number of data bits used to transmit a character. From the drop-down list, select
the number of data bits. The default is 8 data bits.
Parity Parity checking is a rudimentary method of detecting simple, single-bit errors.
From the drop-down list, select the parity. The default is none.
Stop Bits The number of stop bit(s) used to indicate that a byte of data has been transmitted.
From the drop-down list, select the number of stop bits. The default is 1.
Flow Control A method of preventing buffer overflow and loss of data. The available methods
include none, xon/xoff (software), and rts/cts (hardware). The default is none.

Modem Settings
Note: Depending on the State and Mode you select, different fields are available.

State Indicates whether an external modem is attached to the device port. If enabling,
set the modem to dial-out, dial-in, dial-back, dial-on-demand, dial-in/host list, or
dial in, dial-on-demand, CBCP Server, and CBCP Client. Disabled by default. See
Modem Dialing States (on page 178) for more information.
Mode The format in which the data flows back and forth:
 Text: In this mode, the SLC unit assumes that the modem will be used for
remotely logging into the command line. Text mode can only be used for
dialing in or dialing back. Text is the default.
 PPP: This mode establishes an IP-based link over the modem. PPP
connections can be used in dial-out mode (e.g., the SLC 8000 advanced
console manager connects to an external network), dial-in mode (e.g., the
external computer connects to the network that the SLC unit is part of), or dial-
on-demand.
Use Sites Enables the use of site-oriented modem parameters which can be activated by
various modem-related events (authentication, outbound network traffic for dial-
on-demand connections, etc.). Sites can be used with the following modem
states: dial-in, dial-back, dial-on-demand, dial-in & dial-on-demand, dial-back &
dial-on-demand, and CBCP server.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 188

 9: USB/SD Card Port

Group Access If undefined, any group can access the modem (text login only). If one or more
groups are specified (groups are delimited by the characters ' ' (space), ','
(comma), or ';' (semicolon)), then any user who logs into the modem must be a
member of one of the specified groups, otherwise access will be denied. Users
authenticated via RADIUS may have a group (or groups) provided by the
RADIUS server via the Filter-Id attribute that overrides the group defined for a
user on the SLC 8000 advanced console manager. A group provided by a remote
server must be either a single group or multiple groups delimited by the
characters ' ' (space), ',' (comma), ';' (semicolon), or '=' (equals) - for example
"group=group1,group2;" or "group1,group2,group3".
Initialization Script Commands sent to configure the modem may have up to 100 characters. Consult
your modem’s documentation for recommended initialization options. If you do
not specify an initialization script, the SLC unit uses a default initialization string of
AT S7=45 SO=0 L1 V1 X4 &D2 &c1 E1 Q0.
Note: We recommend that the modem initialization script always be preceded
with AT and include E1 V1 x4 Q0 so that the SLC unit may properly control the
modem.
Modem Timeout Timeout for all modem connections. Select Yes (default) for the SLC 8000
advanced console manager to terminate the connection if no traffic is received
during the configured idle time. Enter a value of from 1 to 9999 seconds. The
default is 30 seconds.
Caller ID Logging Select to enable the SLC unit to log caller IDs on incoming calls. Disabled by
default.
Note: For the Caller ID AT command, refer to the modem user guide.
Modem Command Modem AT command used to initiate caller ID logging by the modem.
Note: For the AT command, refer to the modem user guide.
Dial-back Number Users with dial-back access can dial into the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager and enter their login and password. Once the SLC unit authenticates
them, the modem hangs up and dials them back.
Select the phone number the modem dials back on -a fixed number or a number
associated with their login. If you select Fixed Number, enter the number (in the
format 2123456789).
The dial-back number is also used for CBCP client as the number for a user-
defined number. See Device Ports - Settings (on page 123) for more information.
Dial-back Delay For dial-back and CBCP Server, the number of seconds between the dial-in and
dial-out portions of the dialing sequence.
Dial-back Retries Specify the number of times to retry dialing back.

Text Mode
Timeout Logins If you selected Text mode, you can enable logins to time out after the connection is
inactive for a specified number of minutes. The default is No. This setting is only
applicable for text mode connections. PPP mode connections stay connected until
either side drops the connection. Disabled by default.
Dial-in Host List From the drop-down list, select the desired host list. The host list is a prioritized list
of SSH, Telnet, and TCP hosts that are available for establishing outgoing modem
connections or for connect direct at the CLI. The hosts in the list are cycled
through until the SLC unit successfully connects to one.
To establish and configure host lists, click the Host Lists link.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 189

 9: USB/SD Card Port

PPP Mode
Negotiate IP Address If the SLC unit and/or the serial device have dynamic IP addresses (e.g., IP
addresses assigned by a DHCP server), select Yes. Yes is the default.
If the SLC unit or the modem have fixed IP addresses, select No, and enter the
Local IP (IP address of the port) and Remote IP (IP address of the modem).
Authentication Enables PAP or CHAP authentication for modem logins. PAP is the default.
With PAP, users are authenticated by means of the Local Users and any of the
remote authentication methods that are enabled. With CHAP, the CHAP
Handshake fields authenticate the user.
CHAP Handshake The Host/User Name (for UNIX systems) or Secret/User Password (for
Windows systems) used for CHAP authentication. May have up to 128 characters.
CHAP Auth Uses For CHAP authentication, determines what is used to validate the CHAP Host
and Chap Local host/user sent by the remote peer: either the CHAP Host
defined for the modem, or any of the users in the Local Users list.
Same authentication for Select this option to let incoming connections (dial-in) use the same
Dial-in & Dial-on-Demand authentication settings as outgoing connections (dial-on-demand). If this option
(DOD) is not selected, then the dial-on-demand connections take their authentication
settings from the DOD parameter settings. If DOD Authentication is PAP,
then the DOD CHAP Handshake field is not used.
DOD Authentication Enables PAP or CHAP authentication for dial-in & dial-on-demand. PAP is the
default. With PAP, users are authenticated by means of the Local Users and
any of the remote authentication methods that are enabled. With CHAP, the
DOD CHAP Handshake fields authenticate the user.
DOD CHAP Handshake For DOD Authentication, enter the Host/User Name for UNIX systems) or
Secret/User Password (for Windows systems) used for CHAP authentication.
May have up to 128 characters.
Enable NAT Select to enable Network Address Translation (NAT) for dial-in and dial-out
PPP connections on a per modem (device port or USB port) basis. Users
dialing into the SLC access the network connected to Eth1 and/or Eth2.
Note: IP forwarding must be enabled on the Network > Network Settings page
for NAT to work. See Chapter 6: Basic Parameters on page 66.
Dial-out Number Phone number for dialing out to a remote system or serial device. May have up
to 20 characters. Any format is acceptable.
Remote/Dial-out Login User ID for authentication when dialing out to a remote system, or if a remote
system requests authentication from the SLC device when it dials in. May have up
to 32 characters. This ID is used for authenticating the SLC unit during the dial-out
portion of a dial-back (including CBCP server) and dial-on-demand.
Remote/Dial-out Pwd Password for authentication when dialing out to a remote system, or if a
remote system requests authentication from the SLC unit when it dials in. May
have up to 64 characters.
Retype Re-enter password for dialing out to a remote system. May have up to 64
characters.
Restart Delay The number of seconds after the timeout and before the SLC 8000 advanced
console manager attempts another connection. The default is 30 seconds.
CBCP Server For CBCP Server state, allows "No Callback" as an option in the CBCP
Allow No Callback handshake in addition to User-defined Number and Admin-defined Number.
CBCP Client Type For CBCP Client, this selects the number that the client would like to use for
callback - either a user-defined number passed to the server (specified by the
Fixed Dial-back Number) or an administrator-defined number determined by
the server based on the login that is PAP or CHAP authenticated.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 190

 9: USB/SD Card Port

IP Settings
Service The available connection services for this modem port (None, Telnet, SSH, or
TCP). Only one can be active at a time. The default is None.
Telnet Port Telnet Port Telnet session port number to use if you selected Telnet. Defaults:
 USB Port U1: 2049
 USB Port U2: 2050
 Range: 1025-65535
SSH Port The SSH session port number to use if you selected SSH.
Defaults:
 USB Port U1: 3049
 USB Port U2: 3050
 Range: 1025-65535
TCP Port The TCP (raw) session port number to use if you selected TCP.
Defaults:
 USB Port U1: 4049
 USB Port U2: 4050
 Range: 1025-65535
Authenticate If selected, the SLC unit requires user authentication before granting access to
(checkbox) the port. Authenticate is selected by default for Telnet Port and SSH Port, but
not for TCP Port.

4. Click Apply.

Manage Files
To manage files, perform the following steps.
1. Click the Manage Files on the Storage Device link on the Devices > USB > Configure page.

Figure 9-5 Firmware and Configurations - Manage Files

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 191

 9: USB/SD Card Port

Note: The Delete, Download, and Rename options are at the bottom of the page (Figure 9-5).

2. To delete a file, click the check box next to the filename and click Delete File. A confirmation
message displays.
3. To download a file, click the Download File button. Select the file from the list.
4. To rename a file, click the check box next to the filename and enter a new name in the New
File Name field.
5. Click Rename File.

USB Commands
The following CLI commands correspond to the USB port. For more information,
see Chapter 15: Command Reference on page 308.
 set usb access
 set usb modem
 set usb storage mount
 set usb storage unmount
 set usb storage dir
 set usb storage rename
 set usb storage copy
 set usb storage delete
 set usb storage format
 set usb storage fsck
 show usb
 show usb storage
 show usb modem
 show usb devices

SD Card Commands
The following CLI commands correspond to the SD Card. For more information,
see Chapter 15: Command Reference on page 308.
 set sdcard access
 set sdcard mount
 set sdcard unmount
 set sdcard format
 set sdcard fsck
 set sdcard dir
 set sdcard rename
 set sdcard copy
 set sdcard delete
 show sdcard

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 192

10: Remote Power Managers
The SLC supports managing remote power managers (RPMs) for devices from over 140 vendors.
The RPMs can be either PDUs or UPSes, and can be managed via SNMP, serial port, network
and USB connections. The RPMs web page displays a list of all currently managed RPMs with an
overview of their current status, with options to control and view detailed status for each RPM,
depending on its supported capabilities.
Network and SNMP managed RPMs are disabled in FIPS mode. The only action that can be
performed on a network or SNMP managed RPM in FIPS mode is that it can be deleted via the
CLI.
For notes on optimizing the management of specific devices, see
Optimizing and Troubleshooting RPM Behavior (on page 205).

Devices - RPMs
To control or view status for an RPM:

1. Click the Devices tab and select the RPMs option. The RPMs page displays.

Figure 10-1 Devices > RPMs

2. In the lower section of the page, select an RPM by clicking on the radio button to the far right
in the RPM's row. The options that are available for that RPM will be available (ungreyed).
Select one of the following options:
Refresh Refreshes the information in the RPMs table.
Add Device Displays the Device Ports > RPMs - Add Device to add a new
managed PDU or UPS.
Shutdown Order Displays the order in which all UPS devices are shutdown in the event
that a UPS reaches a low battery state. See Figure 10-2. For more
information, see RPM Shutdown Procedure.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 193

 10: Remote Power Managers

Notifications Displays the notifications configured for each PDU and UPS. See
Figure 10-3.
Raw Data Displays a window with all of the information returned by the driver
when a query for status is requested. This option is available for all
RPMs. See Figure 10-4.
Logs Displays a window with any logging information that has been
accumulated for the selected RPM, if logging is enabled for the RPM.
This option is available for all RPMs. See Figure 10-5.
Environmental Displays a window with any environmental (humidity and
temperature) information that may be available for the selected RPM,
if sensors are installed for the RPM. This option is available for all
RPMs. See Figure 10-6.
Managed Device Displays the RPMs - Manage Device page, with the complete status
and configuration for the selected RPM. This option is available for all
RPMs.
Outlets Displays the RPMs - Outlets page for RPMs that support individual
outlet control and status.
Beeper: Enable, Mute, If the RPM has a beeper than can be controlled, these options allow
Disable the administrator to Enable, Mute, or Disable the beeper. If you try to
use Mute to silence a beeper and the beeper continues to sound, the
UPS most likely does not support mute, and the Disable option will be
the only way to silence the beeper.
Reboot Reboots the RPM immediately, which may interrupt the power
provided by the RPM while it is rebooting. Some PDUs and UPSes
have a default delay that they will wait before initiating a reboot; this
setting may be visible in the raw data (see above) as
"ups.delay.reboot".
Shutdown Shutsdown the RPM immediately, which will interrupt the power
provided by the RPM. Some PDUs and UPSes have a default delay
that they will wait before initiating a shutdown; this setting may be
visible in the raw data (see above) as "ups.delay.shutdown".
Delete Deletes the selected RPM, after a confirmation.

Figure 10-2 RPM Shutdown Order

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 194

 10: Remote Power Managers

Figure 10-3 RPM Notifications

Figure 10-4 RPM Raw Data Log

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 195

 10: Remote Power Managers

Figure 10-5 RPM Logs

Figure 10-6 RPM Environmental Log

RPMs - Add Device

The Add Device page assists the administrator with adding a new managed RPM to the SLC
configuration. With over 140 different vendors and nearly 1000 different models that are
supported, the key to ensuring the SLC can properly manage a PDU or UPS is selecting the right
model (with its associated driver) and any required driver options, especially for USB managed
devices. On the Devices > RPMs page, access the Device Ports > RPMs - Add Device page to
configure a new managed remote power manager (RPM) for the SLC configuration.

Note: The Device Ports > RPMs - Add Device page with the same functionality can also
be accessed through the Devices > Device Ports page.

To add a new managed RPM :

1. Click the Devices tab and select the RPMs option. Figure 10-1 shows the page that displays.
2. Click the Add Device link on the Devices > RPMs page. The following page displays.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 196

 10: Remote Power Managers

Figure 10-7 Device Ports > RPMs - Add Device

3. Enter the following:

Vendor Select the correct vendor from the drop-down menu.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 197

 10: Remote Power Managers

Model Select the Model in the drop-down menu. The drop-down menu will be
populated with models supported for the selected vendor above. To the left of
each model name is one or two letters in parentheses that indicate the type of
control available for the selected model: P - SNMP, S - serial port, U - USB
port, N - network. Some of the model names in the dropdown may be
truncated because the list of models is very long - in this case, hover over the
model name and the complete model name(s) will be displayed.
Managed via If there is more than one way to manage the selected model, select the
appropriate management method.
USB Device For USB controlled devices, if the RPM is connected to a USB port, the device
should be displayed in the USB Device dropdown. Select the correct device.
This will automatically fill in the Port with the correct port number and the
Driver Opts with the USB vendor and product ID (see below).
Name Specify the unique name of the RPM (up to 20 characters).
# of Outlets Specify the number of outlets on the RPM (maximum of 120 outlets).
IP Address For SNMP and Network (Telnet) managed RPMs, specify the IP address of
the RPM.
Port For network (Telnet) managed RPMs, this is assumed to be port 23 (if left
blank), or it can be filled in with an alternate TCP port. For USB managed
RPMs, this is one of the front USB ports ("0") or the device port that the RPM
is connected to on the SLC (this may be automatically filled in when the USB
Device is selected). For serially controlled RPMs, this is the device port that
the RPM is connect to on the SLC.
Driver Opts For the driver associated with the RPM device, these are extra options which
may be required to make the driver work. The most frequent use of the driver
options is for USB devices (the vendor and product ID may be required so that
the SLC can find the correct device on the USB bus), or in the event that the
default driver options do not work with the RPM. The vendor and product ID
may be automatically filled in if a USB Device is selected. There may also be
other driver options that are filled in by the SLC from an internal table - these
will be automatically set and can be viewed after the RPM has been added,
and can always be overridden by driver options set by the user. For a
complete list of RPM models, drivers and driver options, refer to the Network
UPS Tools Hardware Compatibility List. The format of the driver options
setting is one or more comma-separated parameters-value pairs, e.g.
<parameter name>=<value>.
Login For Network and serially managed RPMs, this is the administrator login.
Password/Retype For Network and serially managed RPMs, this is the administrator password.
Password
Read Community For SNMP managed RPMs, this is the SNMP read (get) community.
Write Community/Retype For SNMP managed RPMs, this is the SNMP write (set) community.
Write Comm
Log Status Indicates if the status of the RPM is periodically logged. Select Yes, minutes
to log the status periodically and enter a value between 1 and 60 minutes. The
logs can be viewed by viewing the Devices > RPMs page and clicking on
"Logs".
Critical SNMP Traps If enabled, under critical conditions (UPS goes onto battery power, UPS
battery is low, UPS forced shutdown in progress, UPS on line power, UPS
battery needs to be replaced, RPM is unavailable, communications with RPM
lost, communications with RPM established), a slcEventRPMAction
trap will be sent to the NMS configured in the SNMP settings. This requires
that SNMP traps be enabled.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 198

 10: Remote Power Managers

Critical Emails If an email address is specified, under critical conditions (see Critical SNMP
Traps above), an email notification will be sent to the email address. The
Server and Sender configured in the SMTP settings will be used to send the
email.
Low Battery For UPS devices only. Indicates the behavior to take when the UPS reaches a
low battery state. Options are to Shutdown this UPS - shutdown only the
UPS that has reached a low battery state; Shutdown all UPSes - shutdown
all UPSes managed by the SLC; Allow battery failure - allow the battery to
completely fail, which may result in the unsafe shutdown of the devices it
provides power to; Shutdown both SLC UPSes - shutdown both UPSes that
provide power to the SLC, including the UPS with that has reached a low
battery state (some SLCs have dual power supplies). For more information,
see RPM Shutdown Procedure.
Shutdown Order For UPS devices only. If any of the UPSes managed by the SLC reaches a
low battery state AND is configured for Shutdown all UPSes for its Low
Battery setting, this indicates the order in which this UPS will be shutdown. All
UPSes with a shutdown order of "1" will be shutdown first, followed by all
UPSes with a shutdown order of "2", etc. Shutdown orders are in the range of
1 to 49, with 50 being reserved for UPSes that provide power to the SLC -
they will always be shutdown last (see Provides SLC Power below).
Provides SLC Power For UPS devices only. Indicates if this UPS provides power to the SLC.

4. Click Apply to Save.

RPMs - Manage Device

The Manage Device page allows the administrator to modify the settings for a managed RPM.

To modify a managed RPM:

1. Click the Devices tab and select the RPMs option. Figure 10-1 Devices > RPMs shows the
page which displays.
2. Select an RPM and click the Manage Device link. Figure 10-8 RPMs - Managed Device
shows the page which displays.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 199

 10: Remote Power Managers

Figure 10-8 RPMs - Managed Device

3. Enter the following:

RPM Id (view only) The unique number associated with the RPM.
Name Specify the unique name of the RPM (up to 20 characters).
Status (view only) The current status of the RPM. Any error status will be shown here.
Vendor (view only) The manufacturer of the RPM.
Model (view only) The model of the RPM. The model is read from the device, if it is provided; not all
RPMs provide a model string. If the device normally provides the device model and
becomes unreachable, or does not provide a model string, the Model is derived from
the supported model list strings.
# of Outlets Specify the number of outlets on the RPM (maximum of 120 outlets).
Outlets On (view The number of outlets that are currently turned on, if this information is provided by
only) the RPM.
F/W Version (view The firmware version of the RPM, if this information is provided by the RPM.
only)
Serial Num (view The serial number of the RPM, if this information is provided by the RPM.
only)
MAC Address (view The MAC address of the RPM, if this information is provided by the RPM.
only)

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 200

 10: Remote Power Managers

Current (view only) The total current value for the RPM in Amperes, if this information is provided by the
RPM. If the RPM consists of two separate towers or units, each with its own current
value, both current values will be displayed, separated by a slash.
Input Voltage (view The input voltage for the RPM in Volts, if this information is provided by the RPM. If
only) the RPM consists of two separate towers or units, each with its own input voltage
value, both voltage values will be displayed, separated by a slash.
Apparent Power The apparent power value for the RPM in Volt-Amperes, if this information is
(view only) provided by the RPM. If the RPM consists of two separate towers or units, each with
its own apparent power value, both power values will be displayed, separated by a
slash.
Nominal Apparent The nominal apparent power value for the RPM in Volt-Amperes, if this information is
Power (view only) provided by the RPM. If the RPM consists of two separate towers or units, each with
its own nominal apparent power value, both power values will be displayed,
separated by a slash.
Real Power (view The real power value for the RPM in Watts, if this information is provided by the
only) RPM. If the RPM consists of two separate towers or units, each with its own real
power value, both power values will be displayed, separated by a slash.
Battery Charge For UPS devices only. Displays the current charge level for the battery, as a
(view only) percentage.
Battery Runtime For UPS devices only. Displays the amount of time remaining in the UPS battery life.
(view only)
Beeper Status (view For UPS devices only. Displays the current state of the UPS beeper.
only)
Managed via (view Displays the method used to control the RPM device (SNMP, Network, Serial Port,
only) USB port).
IP Address For SNMP and Network (Telnet) managed RPMs, specify the IP address of the
RPM.
Port For network (Telnet) managed RPMs, this is assumed to be port 23 (if left blank), or
it can be filled in with an alternate TCP port. For USB managed RPMs, this is one of
the front USB ports ("0") or the device port that the RPM is connected to on the SLC.
For serially controlled RPMs, this is the device port that the RPM is connect to on the
SLC.
Driver Opts For the driver associated with the RPM device, these are extra options which may be
required to make the driver work. The most frequent use of the driver options is for
USB devices (the vendor and product ID may be required so that the SLC can find
the correct device on the USB bus), or in the event that the default driver options do
not work with the RPM. There may also be other driver options that are filled in by
the SLC from an internal table - these will be automatically set and can be viewed
after the RPM has been added, and can always be overridden by driver options set
by the user. For a complete list of RPM models, drivers and driver options, refer to
Network UPS Tools Hardware Compatibility List. The format of the driver options
setting is one or more comma-separated parameters-value pairs, e.g. "<parameter
name>=<value>".
Login For Network and serially managed RPMs, this is the administrator login.
Password/Retype For Network and serially managed RPMs, this is the administrator password.
Password
Read Community For SNMP managed RPMs, this is the SNMP read (get) community.
Write Community/ For SNMP managed RPMs, this is the SNMP write (set) community.
Retype Write Comm

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 201

 10: Remote Power Managers

Log Status Indicates if the status of the RPM is periodically logged. Select Yes, minutes to log
the status periodically and enter a value between 1 and 60 minutes. The logs can be
viewed by viewing the RPMs web page and clicking on "Logs".
Critical SNMP Traps If enabled, under critical conditions (UPS goes onto battery power, UPS battery is
low, UPS forced shutdown in progress, UPS on line power, UPS battery needs to be
replaced, RPM is unavailable, communications with RPM lost, communications with
RPM established), a slcEventRPMAction trap will be sent to the NMS configured in
SNMP settings. This requires that SNMP traps be enabled.
Critical Emails If an email address is specified, under critical conditions (see Critical SNMP Traps
above), an email notification will be sent to the email address. The Server and
Sender configured in the SMTP settings will be used to send the email.
Low Battery For UPS devices only. Indicates the behavior to take when the UPS reaches a low
battery state. Options are to Shutdown this UPS - shutdown only the UPS that has
reached a low battery state; Shutdown all UPSes - shutdown all UPSes managed by
the SLC; Allow battery failure - allow the battery to completely fail, which may result
in the unsafe shutdown of the devices it provides power to; Shutdown both SLC
UPSes - shutdown both UPSes that provide power to the SLC, including the UPS
with that has reached a low battery state (some SLCs have dual power supplies).
For more information, see RPM Shutdown Procedure
Shutdown Order For UPS devices only. If any of the UPSes managed by the SLC reaches a low
battery state AND is configured for Shutdown all UPSes for its Low Battery setting,
this indicates the order in which this UPS will be shutdown. All UPSes with a
shutdown order of "1" will be shutdown first, followed by all UPSes with a shutdown
order of "2", etc. Shutdown orders are in the range of 1 to 49, with 50 being reserved
for UPSes that provide power to the SLC - they will always be shutdown last (see
Provides SLC Power in the next field below).
Provides SLC For UPS devices only. Indicates if this UPS provides power to the SLC.
Power

3. To save, click Apply.

RPMs - Outlets
The Outlets page allows the administrator to view the current status of each individual outlet on an
RPM, and change the state of the outlets. Not all RPMs support individual outlet status and
control.

To control and view status for RPM outlets:

1. Click the Devices tab and select the RPMs option. Figure 10-1 Devices > RPMs shows the
page which displays.
2. Select an RPM and click the Outlets link. Figure 10-9 RPMs - Outlets shows the page which
displays. This page will, at a minimum, list the outlet numbers and their state - On or Off. If the
RPM provides additional information for the outlets, the custom name and the current reading
in Amperes will also be displayed for each outlet.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 202

 10: Remote Power Managers

Figure 10-9 RPMs - Outlets

3. To change the state of one or more outlets, select the outlets, and click the Cycle Power,
Turn On or Turn Off buttons. The command will be sent to the RPM and the page will refresh.
It may take one or two minutes before the new outlet state(s) are reflected on the Outlets
page.

RPM Shutdown Procedure

This section applies to UPS-type RPMs only, and does not apply to PDU-type RPMS. This section
describes the shutdown process when a UPS managed by the SLC reaches a low battery state.
When one UPS reaches a low battery state, the SLC can be configured to allow the UPS to
continue to run until its battery fails completely, to shutdown just the UPS with the low battery, or to
shutdown one or more UPSes. UPS-type RPMs can report the following states:
 OL - On line power
 OB - On battery power
 LB - Low battery
 HB - High battery
 RB - The battery needs to be replaced
 CHRG - The battery is charging
 DISCHRG - The battery is discharging (inverter is providing load power)
 BYPASS - UPS bypass circuit is active - no battery protection available
 CAL - UPS is currently performing runtime calibration (on battery)
 OFF - UPS is offline and is not supplying power to the load
 OVER - UPS is overloaded
 TRIM - UPS is trimming incoming voltage

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 203

 10: Remote Power Managers

 BOOST - UPS is boosting incoming voltage

 FSD - UPS is in forced shutdown due to a critical condition
Once a UPS is on line power (status is OL) and goes off of line power and onto battery power
(status is OB), it may reach a low battery state (status is OB, LB or LB). Switching from line power
to battery power, and reaching a low battery state are critical states that can result in syslog, email
and SNMP trap notifications. The exact point at which a UPS reaches a low battery state is device
dependent and is related to the battery.charge, battery.charge.low, battery.runtime and
battery.runtime.low settings which can be viewed in the "Raw Data" report.
Once a UPS reaches a low battery state, the Shutdown Order, Low Battery Action and
Provides SLC Power settings determine which UPSes to shutdown, and in what order. The UPS
with the low battery will be placed into FSD (Forced Shutdown) mode. The following actions will be
performed based on the Low Battery Action setting for the UPS with the failed battery:
 Allow Battery Failure - The UPS battery will be allowed to run until it fails completely. If the
UPS provides power to the SLC and the battery fails, the SLC will not be cleanly shutdown. In
this scenario, the Shutdown Order setting will be ignored. The Shutdown Order setting may
be used if another UPS reaches the low battery state (see Shutdown all UPSes below).
 Shutdown This UPS - If the UPS provides power to the SLC, the SLC will begin shutdown
procedures, shutting down the UPS last. If the UPS does not provide power to the SLC, the
UPS will be shutdown, but will continued to be monitored in case it comes back online.
 Shutdown all UPSes - The SLC will begin shutting down all UPSes with a non-zero
Shutdown Order, shutting down UPSes with a shutdown order of "1" first, UPSes with a
shutdown order of "2" second, etc. Any UPS which provides power to the SLC is always forced
to have its Shutdown Order set to 50, which the highest (and last) Shutdown Order. If the
UPS with the failed battery provides power to the SLC (and thus has a Shutdown Order set to
50), the SLC will also begin shutdown procedures, shutting down the failed UPS last. If none
of the UPSes provide power to the SLC, after they are all shutdown their drivers will remaining
running in case the UPS comes back online. In this case, any queries to an RPM while it is still
offline may report "RPM driver data is stale". If the Low Battery Action for a UPS is set to
Allow Battery Failure, but the UPS has a non-zero Shutdown Order, the UPS will still be
shutdown if another UPS reaches the low battery state and has its Low Battery Action set to
Shutdown all UPSes.
 Shutdown Both SLC UPSes - This setting should only be used on dual-power SLC units
which have each power supply connected to separate (different) UPS devices, and both UPS
devices are being managed by the SLC. If a UPS is configured for Shutdown Both SLC
UPSes but does not have Provides SLC Power enabled, this is an ambiguous configuration,
and no shutdown action will occur.
For this configuration, when one of the UPSes providing power to the SLC reaches a low
battery state, the event will be noted in the system log, and the SLC will continue to run with no
further actions until the second UPS providing power to the SLC reaches a low battery state.
At this point the SLC will begin shutdown procedures, shutting down both failed UPSes last.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 204

 10: Remote Power Managers

Optimizing and Troubleshooting RPM Behavior

This section gives tips on how to optimize the management of specific PDUs and UPSes, and how
to troubleshoot any problems with the SLC connecting to and managing an RPM.
 Sentry3 - Network and Serially Managed PDUs - Some Sentry3 PDUs have a CLI timeout,
with a default setting of 5 minutes. This timeout may cause frequent query errors when
requesting information from the Sentry3 PDU. It is recommended that the timeout be set as
high as possible to reduce the frequency of the query errors.
 Serially Managed RPMs with Administrator Logins - Some serially managed devices will
have an administrator login for the console port. It is recommended that any active sessions
be logged out before adding the device as an RPM, otherwise the RPM may experience query
errors.
If the SLC is unable to communicate with an RPM, or an RPM is displaying the error "driver is not
running", the following steps can be used to troubleshoot the driver issues:
 Correct Driver - The CLI command set rpm driver <RPM Id or Name> action show
can be used to display the current running driver for the RPM. Some serially and network
managed RPMs do not have drivers; if this is the case for the RPM, the CLI command will
indicate this. Otherwise it will display the driver that is running for the RPM, and it should
match the driver listed for the device at Network UPS Tools Hardware Compatibility List. If the
wrong driver is shown, the RPM will need to be deleted and re-added, with the correct vendor
and model selected. If no driver is shown, the driver may not be able to start for a variety of
reasons; see remaining steps.
 SNMP Settings - For SNMP managed devices, verify the IP Address, Read Community and
Write Community settings are correct.
 Reverse Pinout Setting - For serially managed devices, verify the Reverse Pinout setting
(located in the Device Port Settings page) is set correctly.
 VendorId and ProductId Driver Options - For USB managed devices, verify the vendorid
and productid shown in the RPM driver options are correct. These can be set automatically
by the SLC from an internal table, set by the user by selecting a specific USB device when
adding a USB-managed RPM, or changed by the user at any time. The CLI command show
usb devices displays all connected USB devices with their port, Product ID and Vendor ID.
 Extra Driver Options - The driver documentation at Network UPS Tools Hardware Compatibility
List may indicate that extra driver options are required for the RPM. Select the driver name link
under the Driver column to see any special requirements for the UPS or PDU.
 Driver Debug Mode - The driver can be run in debug mode at the CLI and the output
examined to determine why the driver is not starting or is unable to communicate with the
RPM. The CLI command set rpm driver <RPM Id or Name> action debug [level
<1|2|3>] will stop any currently running driver and restart the driver in debug mode with
output sent to a local file. Running set rpm driver <RPM Id or Name> action show
should show a driver running with one or more -D flags. The debug output can be examined or
emailed with the set rpm driver <RPM Id or Name> action viewoutput [email
<Email Address>] [display <head|tail>] [numlines <Number or Lines>]
command. To return the driver to its normal non-debug state, run set rpm driver <RPM
Id or Name> action restart. Note that drivers running in debug mode will generate
copious output, and for disk space reasons should not be left running in debug mode for long
periods of time (e.g. more than an hour).

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 205

 10: Remote Power Managers

RPM Commands

set rpm add

Syntax

set rpm add <RPM Name>

Description

Adds an RPM to be managed (prompts will guide selection of RPM vendor and model).

set RPM command

Syntax

set rpm command <RPM Id or Name>

outlet <all|Outlet # or List> state <on|off|cyclepower>

Description

Sends a command to control one or more outlets on an RPM.

Syntax

set rpm command <RPM Id or Name> device <reboot|shutdown>

Description

Sends a command to control an RPM device.

Syntax

set rpm command <RPM Id or Name> beeper <mute|enable|disable>

Description

Sends a command to control an RPM beeper.

set rpm delete

Syntax

set rpm delete <RPM Id or Name>

Description

Deletes an RPM.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 206

 10: Remote Power Managers

set rpm driver

Syntax

set rpm driver <RPM Id or Name> action restart

set rpm driver <RPM Id or Name> action debug [level <1|2|3>]
set rpm driver <RPM Id or Name> action show
set rpm driver <RPM Id or Name> action viewoutput [email <Email Address>]
[display <head|tail>] [numlines <Number of Lines>]

Description

Control and debug the RPM driver if the driver is not properly communicating with the PDU or
UPS: restart the driver; restart the driver with debug output to a file; show the running driver; view
and email the driver debug output.

Note: Drivers running in debug mode will generate copious output and for disk space
reasons should not be left running in debug mode for long periods of time.

set rpm edit

Syntax

set rpm edit <RPM Id or Name> <one or more parameters>

Parameters

name <New RPM Name>

outlets <# of Outlets>
ipaddr <IP Address>
port <TCP or Device Port>
login <RPM Admin Login>
rocommunity <SNMP Read-Only Community>
rwcommunity <SNMP Read-Write Community>
logstatus <disable|1-60 minutes>
snmptraps <enable|disable>
emailaddress <Email Address>
upslowbattery <shutdown|shutdownall|shutdownboth|allowfailure>
sdorder <disable|1-49>
powertoslc <enable|disable>
driveropts <Driver Options Override>

Description

Configure and control Remote Power Managers (RPMs), including PDUs and UPSes.

set rpm password

Syntax

set rpm password <RPM Id or Name>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 207

 10: Remote Power Managers

Description

Set RPM administrative password.

show RPM

Syntax

show rpm [type <ups|pdu>]

[config <sdorder|notify>]
[device <RPM Name or Id> [data <raw|logs|envmon>]]

Note: The show rpm envmon command for RPM-configured ServerTech Serial/Network
Mode is not supported by NUT/Powerman.

Description

Display a list of all RPMs, RPMs of a specific type, UPS shutdown and notification configuration, or
details and outlets for a single RPM device.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 208

11: Connections
Chapter 8: Device Ports on page 118 described how to configure and interact with an SLC
advanced console server port connected to an external device. This chapter describes how to use
the Devices > Connections page to connect external devices and outbound network connections
(such as Telnet or SSH) in various configurations.
An SLC unit port attached to an external device can be connected to one of the following
endpoints:
 Another device port attached to an external device
 Another device port with a modem attached
 An outgoing Telnet or SSH session
 An outgoing TCP or UDP network connection
This enables the user to set up connections such as those described in the next section. You can
establish a connection at various times:
 Immediately. These connections are always re-established after reboot.
 At a specified date and time. These connections connect if the date and time have already
passed.
 After a specified amount of data or a specified sequence of data passes through the
connection. Following reboot, the connection is not reestablished until the specified data
passes through the connection.

Typical Setup Scenarios for the SLC Unit

Following are typical configurations in which SLC connections can be used, with references to
settings on the Devices > Connections and Device Ports > Settings web pages.

Terminal Server
In this setup, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager acts as a multiplexer of serial data to a
single server computer. Terminal devices are connected to the serial ports of the SLC unit and
configured as a Device Port to Telnet out type connection on the Devices > Connections page.
The users of the terminals can access the server as if they were connected directly to it by local
serial ports or a console.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 209

 11: Connections

Figure 11-1 Terminal Server

SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager Server

Telnet Sessions (via

Serial Network connection)
Connections

VT100 Terminals

Remote Access Server

In this setup, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager is connected to one or more modems by
its device ports. Configure the device ports on the Device Ports > Settings web page by selecting
the Dial-in option in the Modem Settings section. Most customers use the modems in PPP mode
to establish an IP connection to the SLC unit and either Telnet or SSH into the SLC 8000
advanced console manager. They could also select text mode where, using a terminal emulation
program, a user could dial into the SLC unit and connect to the command line interface.

Figure 11-2 Remote Access Server

SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager

Internal
Phone System Network
Serial Network
Modems Connections Connections

Reverse Terminal Server

In this scenario, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager has one or more device ports
connected to one or more serial ports of a mainframe server. Users can access a terminal session
by establishing a Telnet or SSH session to the SLC unit. To configure the SLC console manager,
select the Enable Telnet In or Enable SSH In option on the Device Ports > Settings page.

Figure 11-3 Reverse Terminal Server

PC

Unix Server SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager

PC

Serial
Sessions Telnet/SSH PC
Sessions

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 210

 11: Connections

Multiport Device Server

A PC can use the device ports on the SLC unit as virtual serial ports, enabling the ports to act as if
they are local ports to the PC. To use the SLC 8000 advanced console manager in this setup, the
PC requires special software, for example, Com Port Redirector (available on www.lantronix.com)
or similar software).

Figure 11-4 Multiport Device Server

Serial Printer

Windows/
SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager Linux PC
Modem

Raw TCP
Serial Sessions
Connections

Serial
Device

Console Server
For this situation, the SLC unit is configured so that the user can manage a number of servers or
pieces of network equipment using their console ports. The device ports on the SLC 8000
advanced console manager are connected to the console ports of the equipment that the user
would like to manage. To manage a specific piece of equipment, the user can Telnet or SSH to a
specific port or IP address on the SLC unit and be connected directly to the console port of the end
server or device. To configure this setup, set the Enable Telnet In or Enable SSH In option on the
Device Ports > Settings page for the device port in question. The user can implement an extra
remote management capability by adding a modem to one of the device ports and setting the Dial-
in option in the Modem Settings section of the Device Ports > Settings page. A user could then dial
into the SLC 8000 advanced console manager using another modem and terminal emulation
program at a remote location.

Figure 11-5 Console Server

Web Server

PC

Switch SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager

PC

Router
Telnet/SSH PC
Serial Sessions
Terminal
Modem Sessions

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 211

 11: Connections

Connection Configuration
Note: These are advanced connection settings for specific applications. If the SLC 8000
advanced console manager is being used as a console or device server it is unlikely that
you will need any of the Connection settings described below.

To create a connection:

1. Click the Devices tab and select the Connections opton. The following page displays:

Figure 11-6 Devices > Connections

2. For a device port, enter the following:

Outgoing Select to turn on or turn off the connection timeout:

Connection  No for no timeout
Timeout  Yes for a timeout. Specify the number of seconds in the seconds field.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 212

 11: Connections

Port The number of the device port you are connecting.

This device port must be connected to an external serial device and must not have
command line interface logins enabled, be connected to a modem, or be running a
loopback test.
Note: To see the current settings for this device port, click the Settings link.
Data Flow Select the arrow showing the direction (bidirectional or unidirectional) the data will flow in
relationship to the device port you are connecting.
to From the drop-down list, select a destination for the connection: a device port connected
to a serial device, a device port connected to a modem, or an outbound network
connection (Telnet out, SSH out, TCP Port, or UDP Port).
Note: To see the current settings for a selected device port, click the Settings link.
Hostname The host name or IP Address of the destination. This entry is required if the to field is set
to Telnet out, SSH out, TCP port, or UDP port.
Port If the to field is set to Device Port or Modem on Device Port, enter the number of the
device port. For all other options, this is the TCP/UDP port number, which is optional for
Telnet out and SSH out, but required for TCP Port and UDP Port.
Note: If you select Device Port, it must not have command line interface logins
enabled or be running a loopback test. To view the device port's settings, click the
Settings link to the right of the port number.
SSH Out Select one of the following optional flags to use for the SSH connection.
Options  User: Login ID to use for authenticating on the remote host.
 Version: Version of SSH. Select 1 or 2.
 Command: Enter a specific command on the remote host (for example, reboot).
Trigger Select the condition that will trigger a connection. Options include:
 Connect now: Connects immediately, or if you reboot the SLC 8000 advanced
console manager, immediately on reboot.
 Connect at date/time: Connects at a specified date and time. Use the drop-down
lists to complete the date and time. Upon rebooting, the SLC unit reestablishes the
connection if the date/time has passed.
 Auto-connect on characters transferring: Select the arrow indicating the direction
of the data transfer and either the minimum number of characters or a specific
character sequence that will trigger the connection.
You can select the direction of the data transfer only if Data Flow is bidirectional. Upon
rebooting, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager does not reestablish the
connection until the specified data has passed through one of the endpoints of the
connection.
3. To save, click the Apply button.

To view, update, or disconnect a current connection:

The bottom of the Current Connections page displays current connections.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 213

 11: Connections

Figure 11-7 Current Connections

1. To view details about a connection, hold the mouse over the arrow in the Flow column.
2. To disconnect (delete) a connection, select the connection in the Select column and click the
Terminate button.
3. To reestablish the connection, create the connection again in the top part of the page.
4. To view information about Web connections, click the here link in the text above the table. The
Maintenance > Firmware & Configurations page displays.

Connection Commands
These commands for configuring connections correspond to the web page entries described
above.

To connect to a device port to monitor and/or interact with it, or to establish an outbound
network connection:

connect direct <endpoint>

Endpoint is one of:
deviceport <Port # or Name>
ssh <IP Address or Name> [port <TCP Port>] [<SSH flags>]
where <SSH flags> is one or more of:
user <Login Name>
version <1|2>
command <Command to Execute>
tcp <IP Address> [port <TCP Port>]
telnet <IP Address or Name> [port <TCP Port>]
udp <IP Address> [port <UDP Port>]
hostlist <Host List>

To configure initial timeout for outgoing connections:

connect global outgoingtimeout <disable|1-9999 seconds>

Note: This is not a TCP timeout.

To monitor a device port:

connect listen deviceport <Device Port # or Name>

To connect a device port to another device port or an outbound network connection (data
flows in both directions):

connect bidirection <Port # or Name> <endpoint>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 214

 11: Connections

Endpoint is one of:

charcount <# of Chars>
charseq <Char Sequence>
charxfer <toendpoint|fromendpoint>
deviceport <Device Port # or Name>
date <MMDDYYhhmm[ss]>
exclusive <enable|disable>
ssh <IP Address or Name> [port <TCP Port] [<SSH flags>]
where <SSH flags> is one or more of:
user <Login Name>
version <1|2>
command <Command to Execute>
tcp <IP Address> [port <TCP Port>]
telnet <IP Address or Name> [port <TCP Port>]
trigger <now|datetime|chars>
udp <IP Address> [port <UDP Port>]

Note: If the trigger is datetime (establish connection at a specified date/time), enter the
date parameter. If the trigger is chars (establish connection on receipt of a specified
number or characters or a character sequence), enter the charxfer parameter and either
the charcount or the charseq parameter.

To connect a device port to another device port or an outbound network connection (data
flows in one direction):

connect unidirection <Device Port # or Name> dataflow <toendpoint|

fromendpoint> <endpoint>
Endpoint is one of:
charcount <# of Chars>
charseq <Char Sequence>
datetime <MMDDYYhhmm[ss]>
deviceport <Port # or Name>
exclusive <enable|disable>
ssh <IP Address or Name> [port <TCP Port] >]
<SSH flags>]
where <SSH flags> is one or more of:
user <Login Name>
version <1|2>
command <Command to Execute>
tcp <IP Address> [port <TCP Port>]
telnet <IP Address or Name> [port <TCP Port]
trigger <now|datetime|chars>
udp <IP Address> [port <UDP Port>]

Note: If the trigger is datetime (establish connection at a specified date/time), enter

the date parameter. If the trigger is chars (establish connection on receipt of a specified
number or characters or a character sequence), enter either the charcount or the
charseq parameter.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 215

 11: Connections

To terminate a bidirectional or unidirectional connection:

connect terminate <Connection ID>

To view connections and their IDs:

show connections [email <Email Address>].

You can optionally email the displayed information.

Note: The connection IDs are in the left column of the resulting table. The connection ID
associated with a particular connection may change if connection times out and is restarted.

To display details for a single connection:

show connections connid <Connection ID> [email <Email Address>

You can optionally email the displayed information.

To display global connections:

connect global show

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 216

12: User Authentication
Users who attempt to log in to the SLC advanced console manager by means of Telnet, SSH, the
console port, or one of the device ports are granted access by one or more authentication
methods.
The User Authentication page provides a submenu of methods (Local Users, NIS, LDAP,
RADIUS, Kerberos, and TACACS+) for authenticating users attempting to log in. Use this page to
assign the order in which the SLC unit will use the methods. By default, local user authentication is
enabled and is the first method the SLC 8000 advanced console manager uses to authenticate
users. If desired, you can disable local user authentication or assign it a lower precedence.

Note: Regardless of whether local user authentication is enabled, the local user
sysadmin account is always available for login.

Authentication can occur using all methods, in the order of precedence, until a successful
authentication is obtained, or using only the first authentication method that responds (in the event
that a server is down).
If you have the same user name defined in multiple authentication methods, the result is unknown.
Example:
There is an LDAP user "joe" and an NIS user "joe" and the order of authentication methods is:
1. Local Users
2. LDAP
3. NIS
User "joe" tries to log in. Because there is an LDAP user "joe," the SLC unit tries to authenticate
him against his LDAP password first. If he fails to log in, then the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager may (or may not) try to authenticate him against his NIS "joe" user password.

To enable, disable, and set the precedence of authentication methods:

1. From the main menu, select User Authentication. The following page displays:

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 217

 12: User Authentication

Figure 12-1 User Authentication > Authentication Methods

2. To enable a method currently in the Disabled methods list, select the method and press the
left arrow to the left of the list. The methods include:

NIS A network naming and administration system developed by Sun Microsystems

(Network Information for smaller networks. Each host client or server computer in the system has
System) knowledge about the entire system. A user at any host can access files or
applications on any host in the network with a single user identification and
password.
NIS uses the client/server model and the Remote Procedure Call (RPC)
interface for communication between hosts. NIS consists of a server, a library of
client programs, and some administrative tools. NIS is often used with the
Network File System (NFS).
LDAP A set of protocols for accessing information directories, specifically X.500-based
(Lightweight Directory directory services. LDAP runs over TCP/IP or other connection-oriented transfer
Access Protocol) services.

RADIUS An authentication and accounting system used by many Internet Service

(Remote Authentication Providers (ISPs). A client/server protocol, it enables remote access servers to
Dial-In User Service) authenticate dial-in users and authorize their access to the requested system or
service.
RADIUS allows a company to maintain user profiles in a central database that all
remote servers can share. It increases security, allowing a company to set up a
policy that can be applied at a single administered network point.
Kerberos Kerberos is a network authentication protocol that enables two parties to
exchange private information across an unprotected network.
It works by assigning a unique electronic credential, called a ticket, to each user
who logs on to the network. The ticket is embedded in messages to identify the
sender.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 218

 12: User Authentication

TACACS+ TACACS+ allows a remote access server to communicate with an

(Terminal Access authentication server to determine whether the user has access to the network.
Controller Access Control TACACS+ is a completely new protocol and is not compatible with TACACS or
System) XTACACS. The SLC 8000 advanced console manager supports TACACS+
only.
Local Users Local accounts on the SLC unit used to authenticate users who log in using
SSH, Telnet, the web, or the console port.

3. To disable a method currently in the Enabled methods list, select the method and click the
right arrow between the lists.

4. To set the order in which the SLC unit will authenticate users, use the up and down
arrows to the left of the Enabled methods list.
5. For Attempt next method on authentication rejection, you have the following options:
- To enable the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to use all methods, in order of
precedence, until it obtains a successful authentication, select the check box. This is the
default.
- To enable the SLC unit to use only the first authentication method that responds (in case a
server is down or unavailable), clear the check box.
6. Click Apply.
Now that you have enabled one or more authentication methods, you must configure them.

Authentication Commands
The following command for the command line interface corresponds to the web page entries
described above.

To set ordering of authentication methods:

Note: Local Users authentication is always the first method used. Any methods omitted
from the command will be disabled.

set auth <one or more parameters>

Parameters
authusenextmethod <enable|disable>
kerberos <1-6>
ldap <1-6>
localusers <1-6>
nis <1-6>
radius <1-6>
tacacs+ <1-6>

To view authentication methods and their order of precedence:

show auth

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 219

 12: User Authentication

User Rights
The SLC has three user groups: Administrators, Power Users, and Default Users. Each has a
predefined set of rights; users inherit rights from the user group to which they belong. These rights
are in addition to the current functions that a user can perform at the command line interface:
 connect direct/listen
 set locallog/password/history/cli
 show datetime/deviceport/locallog/portstatus/portcounters/
 history/cli/user
The table below shows the mapping of groups and user rights.

Table 12-2 User Types and Rights

User Right Administrator Power Users Default Users
Full Administrative Rights X
Networking X X
Services X
Date/Time X X
Local Users X
Remote Authentication X
SSH Keys X
User Menus X
Device Port Operations X
Device Port Configuration X
USB X
Reboot/Shutdown X X
Firmware/Configuration X
Diagnostics and Reports X X
Secure Lantronix Network X
Web Access X X
Internal Modem X
RPMs X
SD Card X

You cannot deny a user rights defined for the group, but you can add or remove all other rights at
any time.
By default, the system assigns new users to the Default Users group, but you can change their
group membership at any time. If you change a user's rights while the user is logged into the web
or CLI, the results do not take effect until the next time the user logs in.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 220

 12: User Authentication

Local and Remote User Settings

The system administrator can configure the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to use local
accounts and remote accounts to authenticate users.
1. Click the User Authentication tab and select the Local/Remote Users option. The following
page displays.

Figure 12-3 User Authentication > Local/Remote Users

The top of the page has entry fields for enabling local and remote users and for setting
password requirements. The bottom of the page displays a table listing and describing all local
and remote users.

To enable local and/or remote users:

1) Enter the following:

Enable Local Users Select to enable all local users except sysadmin. The sysadmin is always
available regardless of how you set the check box. Enabled by default.
Multiple Sysadmin Select to allow the sysadmin to have multiple simultaneous logins to the web
Web Logins interface. Disabled by default.
Sysadmin Access Select to limit sysadmin logins to the Console Port only. Disabled by default.
Limited to Console
Port
Authenticate only Select the check box to authenticate users listed in the Remote Users list in the
remote users who are lower part of the page. Disabled by default.
in the remote users list

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 221

 12: User Authentication

2) Continue to set Local User Passwords:

Complex Passwords Select to enable the SLC unit to enforce rules concerning the password structure
(e.g., alphanumeric requirements, number of characters, punctuation marks).
Disabled by default.
Complexity rules:
Passwords must be at least eight characters long.
They must contain one upper case letter (A-Z), one lower case letter (a-z), one
digit ( 0-9), and one punctuation character (()`~!@#$%%^&*-+=\{}[]:;"'<>,.?/_).
Allow Reuse Select to enable users to continue to reuse old passwords. If you disable the
check box, they cannot use any of the Reuse History number of passwords.
Enabled by default.
Reuse History The number of passwords the user must use before reusing an old password. The
default is 4.
For example, if you set reuse history to 4, the user may reuse an old password
after using 4 other passwords.
Password Lifetime The number of days until the password expires. The default setting is 90.
(days)
Warning Period The number of days ahead that the system warns that the user's password will
(days) expire. The default setting is 7.
Max Login Attempts The number of times (up to 8) the user can attempt to log in unsuccessfully before
the system locks the user out. The default setting is 0 (disabled).
Lockout Period The number of minutes (up to 90) the locked-out user must wait before trying to
(minutes) log in to the web interface again. The default setting is 0 (disabled).

2. Click the Apply button.

Adding, Editing or Deleting a User

Through this User Authentication > Local/Remote Users page, you can delete a user listed in the
table or open a page for adding or editing a user.

To add a user:

1. On the User Authentication > Local/Remote Users, click the Add/Edit User button. The User
Authentication > Local/Remote User > Add/Edit User page displays.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 222

 12: User Authentication

Figure 12-4 User Authentication > Local/Remote User > Add/Edit User

2. Enter the following information for the user:

Login User ID of selected user.
Authentication Select the type of authenticated user:
 Local: User listed in the SLC database.
 Remote: User not listed in the SLC database.
UID A unique numeric identifier the system administrator assigns to each user.
Valid UIDs are 101-4294967295.
Note: The UID must be unique. If it is not, SLC unit automatically increments
it. Starting at 101, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager finds the next
unused UID.
Listen Ports The device ports that the user may access to view data using the connect
listen command. Enter the port numbers or the range of port numbers (for
example, 1, 5, 8, 10-15). U1 and U2 denote the USB upper and lower ports on
the front of the SLC unit.
Data Ports The device ports with which the user may interact using the connect direct
command. Enter the port numbers or the range of port numbers.
Clear Port Buffers The device port buffers the users may clear using the set locallog
clear command. Enter the port numbers or the range of port numbers.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 223

 12: User Authentication

Enable for Dial-back Select to grant a local user dial-back access. Users with dial-back access can
dial into the SLC unit and enter their login and password. Once the SLC 8000
advanced console manager authenticates them, the modem hangs up and
dials them back. Disabled by default.
Dial-back Number The phone number the modem dials back on depends on this setting for the
device port. The user is either dialed back on a fixed number (specified on the
Device Port - Settings page), or on a number that is associated with the user’s
login (specified here).
Escape Sequence A single character or a two-character sequence that causes the SLC unit to
leave direct (interactive) mode. (To leave listen mode, press any key.)
A suggested value is Esc+A (escape key, then uppercase "A" performed
quickly but not simultaneously). You would specify this value as \x1bA, which
is hexadecimal (\x) character 27 (1B) followed by an A.
This setting allows the user to terminate the connect direct command on
the command line interface when the endpoint of the command is deviceport,
tcp, or udp.
See Key Sequences on page 183 for notes on key sequence precedence and
behavior.
Break Sequence A series of 1-10 characters users can enter on the command line interface to
send a break signal to the external device. A suggested value is Esc+B
(escape key, then uppercase “B” performed quickly but not simultaneously).
You would specify this value as \x1bB, which is hexadecimal (\x) character 27
(1B) followed by a B.
See Key Sequences on page 183 for notes on key sequence precedence and
behavior.
Custom Menu If custom menus have been created, you can assign a default custom menu to
the user. The custom menu will display at login.
Note: In the Local Users table, if the menu assigned to a local user no longer
exists, it is marked with an asterisk (*).
Display Menu at Login If custom menus have been created, select to enable the menu to display
when the user logs into the CLI.
Password / When a user logs into the SLC 8000 advanced console manager, the SLC unit
Retype Password prompts for a password (up to 64 characters). The sysadmin establishes that
password here.
Password Expires If not selected, allows the user to keep a password indefinitely. If selected the
user keeps the password for a set period. (See the section, Local and Remote
User Settings (on page 221) for information on specifying the length of time
before the password expires.)
Allow Password Change Select to allow the user to change password.
Change Password on Indicate whether the user must change the password at the next login.
Next Login
Lock Account Select to lock the account indefinitely.
Account Status Displays the current account status:
 Active
 Locked
 Locked (invalid logins)

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 224

 12: User Authentication

3. In the User Rights section, select the user group to which local/remote users will belong.
Group Select the group to which the local or remote user will belong:
 Default Users: This group has only the most basic rights. You can specify
additional rights for the individual user.
 Power Users: This group has the same rights as Default Users plus Web
Access, Networking, Date/Time, Reboot & Shutdown, and Diagnostics &
Reports.
 Administrators: This group has all possible rights.
 Custom Group: Select a custom group from the drop-down menu.

4. Select or clear the checkboxes for the following rights:

Full Administrative Right to add, update, and delete all editable fields.
Networking Right to enter Network settings.
Services Right to enable and disable system logging, SSH and Telnet logins, SNMP, and
SMTP.
Secure Lantronix Right to view and manage Secure Lantronix units (e.g., Spider, or SLC units) on
Network the local subnet.
Date/Time Right to set the date and time.
Reboot & Shutdown Right to shut down and reboot the SLC unit.
Local Users Right to add or delete local users on the system.
Remote Right to assign a remote user to a user group and assign a set of rights to the user.
Authentication
SSH Keys Right to set SSH keys for authenticating users.
User Menus Right to create a custom user menu for the CLI.
Web Access Right to access Web-Manager.
Diagnostics & Right to obtain diagnostic information and reports about the unit.
Reports
Firmware & Right to upgrade the firmware on the unit and save or restore a configuration (all
Configuration settings). Selecting this option automatically selects Reboot & Shutdown.
Internal Modem Right to update internal modem settings.
Device Port Right to control device ports.
Operations
Device Port Right to enter device port settings.
Configuration
USB Right to enter modem settings for USB devices and control USB storage devices.
SD Card Right to enter settings for SD card.
RPM Right to manage and control remote power managers.

5. Click the Apply button.

6. Click the Back to Local/Remote Users link to return to the Local/Remote User Settings page.
7. Add another user or click the Back to Local/Remote Users link. The Local/Remote Users
page displays with the new user(s) listed in the table.

Note: The logged-in user's name displays at the top of the web page. Only the tabs and
options for which the user has rights display.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 225

 12: User Authentication

Shortcut
To add a user based on an existing user:

1. Display the existing user on the User Authentication > Local/Remote Users page. The fields in
the top part of the page display the current values for the user.
2. Change the Login to that of the new user. It is best to change the Password too.
3. Click the Apply button.

To edit a local user:

1. On the User Authentication > Local/Remote Users page, select the user and click the Add/
Edit User button. The Local/Remote User Settings page displays.
2. Update values as desired.
3. Click the Apply button.

To delete a local user:

1. On the User Authentication > Local/Remote Users page, select the user and click the Add/
Edit User button. The Local/Remote User Settings page displays.
2. Click the Delete User button.
3. Click the Apply button.

To change the sysadmin password:

1. On the User Authentication > Local/Remote Users page, select sysadmin and click the Add/
Edit User button. The Local/Remote User Settings page displays.
2. Enter the new password in the Password and Retype Password fields.

Note: You can change Escape Sequence and Break Sequence, if desired. You cannot
delete the UID or change the UID, port permissions, or custom menu.

3. Click the Apply button.

Local Users Commands

The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To configure local accounts (including sysadmin) who log in to the SLC 8000 advanced
console manager by means of SSH, Telnet, the Web, or the console port:

set localusers add|edit <User Login> <parameters>

Parameters
allowdialback <enable|disable>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
changenextlogin <enable|disable>
changepassword <enable|disable>
clearports <Port List>
custommenu <Menu Name>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 226

 12: User Authentication

dataports <Port List>

dialbacknumber <Phone Number>
displaymenu <enable|disable>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>
group <default|power|admin|Custom Group Name>
listenports <Port List>
passwordexpires <enable|disable>
permissions <Permission List>
uid <User Identifier>

To configure settings for local user passwords and logins:

set localusers complexpasswords <enable|disable>

set localusers allowreuse <enable|disable>
set localusers reusehistory <Number of Passwords>
set localusers lifetime <Number of Days>
set localusers periodwarning <Number of Days>
set localusers maxloginattempts <Number of Logins>
set localusers periodlockout <Number of Minutes>
set localusers multipleadminlogins <enable|disable>
set localusers consoleonlyadmin <enable|disable>

To enable or disable authentication of local users:

set localusers state <enable|disable>

To set a login password for the local user:

set localusers password <User Login>

To delete a local user:

set localusers delete <User Login>

To view settings for all users or a local user:

show localusers [display <brief|extended>][user <User Login>]

To allow (unlock) or block (lock) to a user's ability to log in:

set localusers lock|unlock <User Login>

Local User Rights Commands

The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To add a local user to a user group or to change the group the user belongs to:

set localusers add|edit <user> group <default|power|admin>

To set a local user's permissions (not defined by the user group):

set localusers add|edit <user> permissions <Permission List>

where

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 227

 12: User Authentication

<Permission List> is one or more of nt, sv, dt, lu, ra, sk, um, dp, do,
ub, rp, rs, rc, dr, wb, sn, ad, md, sd

To remove a permission, type a minus sign before the two-letter abbreviation for a user
right.

To view the rights of the currently logged-in user:

show user

Remote User Commands

The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To configure whether remote users who are not part of the remote user list will be
authenticated:

set remoteusers listonlyauth <enable|disable>

To configure attributes for users who log in by a remote authentication method:

set remoteusers add|edit <User Login> [<parameters>]

Parameters
allowdialback <enable|disable>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
clearports <Port List>
custommenu <Menu Name>
dataports <Port List>
dialbacknumber <Phone Number>
displaymenu <enable|disable>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>
group <default|power|admin|Custom Group Name>
listenports <Port List>
permissions <Permissions List>
where
<Permission List> is one or more of nt, sv, dt, lu, ra, sk, um, dp, do,
ub, rp, rs, rc, dr, wb, sn, ad, md, sd

To remove a permission, type a minus sign before the two-letter abbreviation for a user
right.

To remove a remote user:

set remoteusers delete <User Login>

Allow (unlock) or block (lock) a user's ability to login:
set remoteusers lock|unlock <User Login>

To view settings for all remote users:

show remoteusers[display <brief|extended>] [user <User Login>]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 228

 12: User Authentication

To view the rights of the currently logged-in user:

show user

NIS
The system administrator can configure the SLC advanced console manager to use NIS to
authenticate users attempting to log in to the SLC unit through the Web, SSH, Telnet, or the
console port. If NIS does not provide port permissions, you can use this page to grant device port
access to users who are authenticated through NIS.
All NIS users are members of a group that has predefined user rights associated with it. You can
assign additional user rights that are not defined by the group.

To configure the SLC unit to use NIS to authenticate users:

1. Click the User Authentication tab and select the NIS option.

Figure 12-5 User Authentication > NIS

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 229

 12: User Authentication

2. Enter the following:

Enable NIS Displays selected if you enabled this method on the Authentication Methods page.
If you want to set up this authentication method but not enable it immediately, clear
the checkbox.
Note: You can enable NIS here or on the first User Authentication page. If you
enable NIS here, it automatically displays at the end of the order of precedence on
the User Authentication page.
NIS Domain The NIS domain of the SLC 8000 advanced console manager must be the same as
the NIS domain of the NIS server.
Broadcast for NIS If selected, the SLC unit sends a broadcast datagram to find the NIS Server on the
Server local network.
NIS Master Server The IP address or host name of the master server.
NIS Slave The IP addresses or host names of up to five slave servers.
Servers #1 -5
Custom Menu If custom menus have been created you can assign a default custom menu to NIS
users.
Escape Sequence A single character or a two-character sequence that causes the SLC 8000
advanced console manager to leave direct (interactive) mode. (To leave listen
mode, press any key.)
A suggested value is Esc+A (escape key, then uppercase "A" performed quickly
but not simultaneously). You would specify this value as \x1bA, which is
hexadecimal (\x) character 27 (1B) followed by an A.
This setting allows the user to terminate the connect direct command on the
command line interface when the endpoint of the command is deviceport, tcp, or
udp.
See Key Sequences on page 183 for notes on key sequence precedence and
behavior.
Break A series of 1-10 characters users can enter on the command line interface to send
Sequence a break signal to the external device. A suggested value is Esc+B (escape key,
then uppercase “B” performed quickly but not simultaneously). You would specify
this value as \x1bB, which is hexadecimal (\x) character 27 (1B) followed by a B.
Enable for Dial-back Select to grant a user Dial-back (on page 179). Users with dial-back access can
dial into the SLC 8000 advanced console manager and enter their login and
password. Once the SLC unit authenticates them, the modem hangs up and dials
them back. Disabled by default.
Dial-back Number The phone number the modem dials back on depends on this setting for the device
port. The user is either dialed back on a fixed number, or on a number that is
associated with the user’s login (specified here).
Data Ports The ports users are able to monitor and interact with using the connect direct
command. Enter the port numbers or the range of port numbers (for example, 1, 5,
8, 10-15). U1 and U2 denote the USB upper and lower ports on the front of the SLC
unit.
Listen Ports The ports users are able to monitor using the connect listen command.
Clear Port Buffers The ports whose port buffer users may clear using the set locallog clear command.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 230

 12: User Authentication

3. In the User Rights section, select the user Group to which NIS users will belong:
Group Select the group to which the NIS users will belong:
 Default Users: This group has only the most basic rights. You can specify
additional rights for the individual user .
 Power Users: This group has the same rights as Default Users plus Web
Access, Networking, Date/Time, Reboot & Shutdown, and Diagnostics &
Reports.
 Administrators: This group has all possible rights.

4. Assign or unassign User Rights for the specific user by checking or unchecking the following
checkboxes:

Full Administrative Right to add, update, and delete all editable fields.
Networking Right to enter Network settings.
Services Right to enable and disable system logging, SSH and Telnet logins, SNMP, and
SMTP.
Secure Lantronix Right to view and manage secure Lantronix units (e.g., Spider, or SLC units) on the
Network local subnet.
Date/Time Right to set the date and time.
Reboot & Shutdown Right to shut down and reboot the SLC unit.
Local Users Right to add or delete local users on the system.
Remote Right to assign a remote user to a user group and assign a set of rights to the user.
Authentication
SSH Keys Right to set SSH keys for authenticating users.
User Menus Right to create a custom user menu for the CLI.
Web Access Right to access Web-Manager.
Diagnostics & Right to obtain diagnostic information and reports about the unit.
Reports
Firmware & Right to upgrade the firmware on the unit and save or restore a configuration (all
Configuration settings). Selecting this option automatically selects Reboot & Shutdown.
Internal Modem Right to update internal modem settings.
Device Port Right to control device ports.
Operations
Device Port Right to enter device port settings.
Configuration
USB Right to enter modem settings for USB devices and control USB storage devices.
SD Card Right to enter settings for SD card.
RPM Right to manage and control remote power managers.

5. Click the Apply button.

Note: You must reboot the unit before your changes will take effect.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 231

 12: User Authentication

NIS Commands
These commands for the CLI correspond to the web page entries described above.

To configure the SLC unit to use NIS to authenticate users who log in via the Web, SSH,
Telnet, or the console port:

set nis <one or more parameters>

Parameters
allowdialback <enable|disable>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
broadcast <enable|disable>
clearports <Port List>
dataports <Port List>
dialbacknumber <Phone Number>
domain <NIS Domain Name>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>
listenports <Port List>
master <IP Address or Hostname>
slave1 <IP Address or Hostname>
slave2 <IP Address or Hostname>
slave3 <IP Address or Hostname>
slave4 <IP Address or Hostname>
slave5 <IP Address or Hostname>
state <enable|disable>

To set group and permissions for NIS users:

set nis group <default|power|admin>

To set permissions for NIS users not already defined by the user rights group:

set nis permissions <Permission List>

where
<Permission List> is one or more of nt, sv, dt, lu, ra, sk, um, dp, do,
ub, rp, rs, rc, dr, wb, sn, ad, md, sd

To remove a permission, type a minus sign before the two-letter abbreviation for a user
right.

To set a default custom menu for NIS users:

set nis custommenu <Menu Name>

To view NIS settings:

show nis

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 232

 12: User Authentication

LDAP
The system administrator can configure the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to use LDAP to
authenticate users attempting to log in using the Web, Telnet, SSH, or the console port.
LDAP allows SLC unit users to authenticate using a wide variety of LDAP servers, such as
OpenLDAP and Microsoft Active Directory. The LDAP implementation supports LDAP servers that
do not allow anonymous queries.
Users who are authenticated through LDAP are granted device port access through the port
permissions on this page.
All LDAP users are members of a group that has predefined user rights associated with it. You can
add additional user rights that are not defined by the group.

To configure the SLC unit to use LDAP to authenticate users:

1. Click the User Authentication tab and select LDAP. The following page displays.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 233

 12: User Authentication

Figure 12-6 User Authentication > LDAP

2. Enter the following:

Enable LDAP Displays selected if you enabled this method on the first User Authentication page.
If you want to set up this authentication method but not enable it immediately, clear
the checkbox.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 234

 12: User Authentication

Server #1 The IPv4 or IPv6 address or host name of the primary and secondary LDAP
(or Server #2) servers. The secondary LDAP server will be used for authentication in the event
that the primary LDAP server cannot be reached.
Port Number of the TCP port on the LDAP server to which the SLC talks. The default is
389.
Base The name of the LDAP search base (e.g., dc=company, dc=com). May have up to
80 characters.
Bind Name The name for a non-anonymous bind to an LDAP server. This item has the same
format as LDAP Base. One example is
cn=administrator,cn=Users,dc=domain,dc=com
Bind Password / Password for a non-anonymous bind. This entry is optional. Acceptable characters
Retype Password are a-z, A-Z, and 0-9.
The maximum length is 127 characters.
Bind with Login Select to bind with the login and password that a user is authenticating with. This
requires that the Bind Name contain the $login token, which will be replaced with
the current login. For example, if the Bind Name is
uid=$login,ou=People,dc=lantronix,dc=com, and user roberts
logs into the SLC 8000 advanced console manager, LDAP will bind with
uid=roberts,ou=People,dc=lantronix,dc=com and the password
entered by roberts.
User Login Attribute The attribute used by the LDAP server for user logins. If nothing is specified for the
user filter, the SLC unit will use "uid". For AD LDAP servers, the attribute for user
logins is typically "sAMAccountName".
Group Filter The objectclass used by the LDAP server for groups. If nothing is specified for the
Objectclass group filter, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager will use "posixGroup". For
AD LDAP servers, the objectclass for groups is typically "Group".
Group Member The attribute used by the LDAP server for group membership. This attribute may be
Attribute use to search for a name (ie, "msmith") or a Distinguished Name (ie,
"uid=msmith,ou=People,dc=lantronix,dc=com"). Select either Name or DN as
appropriate for the LDAP server. If nothing is specified for the group membership
attribute, the SLC unit will use "memberUID" for name and "uniqueMember" for DN.
For AD LDAP servers, the Group Membership Value is typically DN, with the Group
Membership Attribute of "member".
Group Member Value The attribute used by the LDAP server for group membership. This attribute may be
use to search for a name (ie, "msmith") or a Distinguished Name (ie,
"uid=msmith,ou=People,dc=lantronix,dc=com"). Select either Name or DN as
appropriate for the LDAP server. If nothing is specified for the group membership
attribute, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager will use "memberUID" for
name and "uniqueMember" for DN. For AD LDAP servers, the Group Membership
Value is typically DN, with the Group Membership Attribute of "member".
Use LDAP Schema Select the check box to obtain remote user attributes (group/permissions and port
access) from an Active Directory server's scheme via the user attribute 'Secure
LantronixPerms' (see details below). Disabled by default.
Active Directory Select to enable. Active Directory is a directory service from Microsoft that is a part
Support of Windows 2000 and later versions of Windows. It is LDAP- and Kerberos-
compliant. Disabled by default.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 235

 12: User Authentication

Encrypt Messages Select Start TLS or SSL to encrypt messages between the SLC unit and the LDAP
server. If Start TLS is selected, the port will automatically be set to 389 and the
StartTLS extension will be used to initiate a secure connection; if SSL is selected,
the port will automatically be set to 636 and a SSL tunnel will be used for LDAP
communication. The port number can be changed to a non-standard LDAP port; if
the port number is set to anything other than 636, Start TLS will be used as the
encryption method. Disabled by default.
Certificate Authority A certificate can be uploaded to the SLC unit for peer authentication. In non-FIPS
mode, the uploaded certificate may contain a Certificate Authority file, a Certificate
Certificate File
file (with an optional Key file), or both. A Key file alone is not a valid certificate. In
Key File FIPS mode, all 3 files (CA, certificate and key) are required. The Certificate
Authority and Certificate File are in PEM format, for instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
(certificate in base64 encoding)
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
The Key File is in PEM format, eg:
-----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
(private key in base64 encoding)
-----END RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
Custom Menu If custom menus have been created, you can assign a default custom menu to
LDAP users. (See “Custom Menus” on page 264.)
Escape Sequence A single character or a two-character sequence that causes the SLC 8000
advanced console manager to leave direct (interactive) mode. (To leave listen
mode, press any key.)
A suggested value is Esc+A (escape key, then uppercase "A" performed quickly
but not simultaneously). You would specify this value as \x1bA, which is
hexadecimal (\x) character 27 (1B) followed by an A.
This setting allows the user to terminate the connect direct command on the
command line interface when the endpoint of the command is deviceport, tcp, or
udp.
See Key Sequences on page 183 for notes on key sequence precedence and
behavior.
Break Sequence A series of 1-10 characters users can enter on the command line interface to send
a break signal to the external device. A suggested value is Esc+B (escape key,
then uppercase “B” performed quickly but not simultaneously). You would specify
this value as \x1bB, which is hexadecimal (\x) character 27 (1B) followed by a B.
Enable for Dial-back Select to grant a user dial-back access. Users with dial-back access can dial into
the SLC unit and enter their login and password. Once the SLC 8000 advanced
console manager authenticates them, the modem hangs up and dials them back.
Disabled by default.
Dial-back Number The phone number the modem dials back on depends on this setting for the device
port. The user is either dialed back on a fixed number, or on a number that is
associated with the user’s login (specified here).
Data Ports The ports users are able to monitor and interact with using the connect
direct command. U1 and U2 denote the USB upper and lower ports on the front
of the SLC unit.
Listen Ports The ports users are able to monitor using the connect listen command.
Clear Port Buffers The ports whose port buffer users may clear using the set locallog clear
command.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 236

 12: User Authentication

3. In the User Rights section, select the user group to which LDAP users will belong:
Group Select the group to which the LDAP users will belong:
 Default Users: This group has only the most basic rights. You can specify
additional rights for the individual user.
 Power Users: This group has the same rights as Default Users plus Web
Access, Networking, Date/Time, Reboot & Shutdown, and Diagnostics &
Reports.
 Administrators: This group has all possible rights.

4. Select or clear the checkboxes for the following rights:

Full Administrative Right to add, update, and delete all editable fields.
Networking Right to enter Network settings.
Services Right to enable and disable system logging, SSH and Telnet logins, SNMP, and
SMTP.
Secure Lantronix Right to view and manage secure Lantronix units (e.g., Spider, or SLC devices) on
Network the local subnet.
Date/Time Right to set the date and time.
Reboot & Shutdown Right to shut down and reboot the SLC unit.
Local Users Right to add or delete local users on the system.
Remote Right to assign a remote user to a user group and assign a set of rights to the user.
Authentication
SSH Keys Right to set SSH keys for authenticating users.
User Menus Right to create a custom user menu for the CLI.
Web Access Right to access Web-Manager.
Diagnostics & Right to obtain diagnostic information and reports about the unit.
Reports
Firmware & Right to upgrade the firmware on the unit and save or restore a configuration (all
Configuration settings). Selecting this option automatically selects Reboot & Shutdown.
Internal Modem Right to configure internal modem settings.
Device Port Right to control device ports.
Operations
Device Port Right to enter device port configurations.
Configuration
USB Right to enter modem settings for USB.
SD Card Right to view and enter settings for SD card.
RPM Right to manage and control remote power managers.

5. Click the Apply button.

Note: You must reboot the unit before your changes will take effect.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 237

 12: User Authentication

LDAP Commands
These commands for the command line interface correspond to the web page entries described
above.

To configure the SLC unit to use LDAP to authenticate users who log in via the Web, SSH,
Telnet, or the console port:

set ldap <one or more parameters>

Parameters
adsupport <enable|disable>
allowdialback <enable|disable>
base <LDAP Base>
bindname <Bind Name>
bindwithlogin <enable|disable>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
clearports <Port List>
custommenu <Menu Name>
dataports <Port List>
dialbacknumber <Phone Number>
encrypt <starttls|ssl|disable>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>
filtergroup <Group Objectclass>
filteruser <User Login Attribute>
grmemberattr <Group Membership Attribute>
grmembervalue <dn|name>
group <default|power|admin>
listenports <Port List>
permissions <Permission>
port <TCP Port>
server1 <IP Address or Name>
server2 <IP Address or Name>
state <enable|disable>
useldapschema <enable|disable>

To set user group and permissions for LDAP users:

set ldap group <default|power|admin>

To set permissions for LDAP users not already defined by the user rights group:

set ldap permissions <Permission List>

where
<Permission List> is one or more of nt, sv, dt, lu, ra, sk, um, dp, do,
ub, rp, rs, rc, dr, wb, sn, ad, md, sd

To remove a permission, type a minus sign before the two-letter abbreviation for a user
right.

To set a default custom menu for LDAP users:

custommenu <Menu Name>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 238

 12: User Authentication

To set the LDAP bind password:

set ldap set ldap bindpassword

To import or delete a certificate:

set ldap certificate import via <sftp|scp> rootfile <Cert Auth File>
certfile <Certificate File> keyfile <Key File>
host <IP Address or Name> login <User Login> [path <Path to Files>]
set ldap certificate delete

To view LDAP settings:

show ldap

RADIUS
The system administrator can configure the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to use RADIUS
to authenticate users attempting to log in using the Web, Telnet, SSH, or the console port.
Users who are authenticated through RADIUS are granted device port access through the port
permissions on this page.
All RADIUS users are members of a group that has predefined user rights associated with it. You
can add additional user rights that are not defined by the group.

To configure the SLC unit to use RADIUS to authenticate users:

1. Click the User Authentication tab and select RADIUS. The following page displays.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 239

 12: User Authentication

Figure 12-7 User Authentication > RADIUS

2. Enter the following:

Enable RADIUS Displays selected if you enabled this method on the User Authentication page. If
you want to set up this authentication method but not enable it immediately, clear
the checkbox.
Note: You can enable RADIUS here or on the first User Authentication page. If
you enable RADIUS here, it automatically displays at the end of the order of
precedence on the User Authentication page.
RADIUS Server #1 IPv4 or IPv6 address or hostname of the primary RADIUS server. This RADIUS
server may be a proxy for SecurID.
SecurID is a two-factor authentication method based on the user's SecurID token
and pin number. The SecurID token displays a string of digits called a token code
that changes once a minute (some tokens are set to change codes every 30
seconds).
Server #1 Port Number of the TCP port on the RADIUS server used for the RADIUS service. If you
do not specify an optional port, the SLC unit uses the default RADIUS port (1812).

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 240

 12: User Authentication

Server #1 Secret Text that serves as a shared secret between a RADIUS client and the server (SLC
unit). The shared secret is used to encrypt a password sent between the client and
the server. May have up to 128 characters.
RADIUS Server #2 IPv4 or IPv6 address or host name of the secondary RADIUS server. This server
can be used as a SecurID proxy.
Server #2 Port Number of the TCP port on the RADIUS server used for the RADIUS service. If you
do not specify an optional port, the SLC 8000 advanced console manager uses the
default RADIUS port (1812).
Server #2 Secret Text that serves as a shared secret between a RADIUS client and the server (SLC
unit). The shared secret is used to encrypt a password sent between the client and
the server. May have up to 128 characters.
Timeout The number of seconds (1-30) after which the connection attempt times out. The
default is 30 seconds.
Use VSA Select the check box to obtain remote user attributes (group/permissions and port
access) from the RADIUS server via the Vendor-Specific Attribute (VSA). For
details on the format of the VSA, see User Attributes & Permissions from LDAP
Schema or RADIUS VSA on page 243.
Custom Menu If custom menus have been created, you can assign a default custom menu to
RADIUS users.
Escape Sequence A single character or a two-character sequence that causes the SLC unit to leave
direct (interactive) mode. (To leave listen mode, press any key.)
A suggested value is Esc+A (escape key, then uppercase "A" performed quickly
but not simultaneously). You would specify this value as \x1bA, which is
hexadecimal (\x) character 27 (1B) followed by an A.
This setting allows the user to terminate the connect direct command on the
command line interface when the endpoint of the command is deviceport,
tcp, or udp.
See Key Sequences on page 183 for notes on key sequence precedence and
behavior.
Break Sequence A series of 1-10 characters users can enter on the command line interface to send
a break signal to the external device. A suggested value is Esc+B (escape key,
then uppercase “B” performed quickly but not simultaneously). You would specify
this value as \x1bB, which is hexadecimal (\x) character 27 (1B) followed by a B.
Enable for Dial-back Select to grant a user dial-back access. Users with dial-back access can dial into
the SLC 8000 advanced console manager and enter their login and password.
Once the SLC device authenticates them, the modem hangs up and dials them
back. Disabled by default.
Dial-back Number The phone number the modem dials back on depends on this setting for the device
port. The user is either dialed back on a fixed number, or on a number that is
associated with the user’s login (specified here).
Data Ports The ports users are able to monitor and interact with using the connect direct
command. U1 and U2 denote the USB upper and lower ports on the front of the
SLC unit.
Listen Port The ports users are able to monitor using the connect listen command.
Clear Port Buffers The ports whose port buffer users may clear using the set locallog clear
command.

Note: Older RADIUS servers may use 1645 as the default port. Check your RADIUS
server configuration.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 241

 12: User Authentication

3. In the User Rights section, select the user group to which RADIUS users will belong.
Group Select the group to which the RADIUS users will belong:
 Default Users: This group has only the most basic rights. You can specify
additional rights for the individual user.
 Power Users: This group has the same rights as Default Users plus Web
Access, Networking, Date/Time, Reboot & Shutdown, and Diagnostics &
Reports.
 Administrators: This group has all possible rights.

4. Select or clear the checkboxes for the following rights:

Full Administrative Right to add, update, and delete all editable fields.
Networking Right to enter Network settings.
Services Right to enable and disable system logging, SSH and Telnet logins, SNMP, and
SMTP.
Secure Lantronix Right to view and manage Secure Lantronix units (e.g., Spider, or SLC units) on
Network the local subnet.
Date/Time Right to set the date and time.
Reboot & Shutdown Right to shut down and reboot the SLC unit.
Local Users Right to add or delete local users on the system.
Remote Right to assign a remote user to a user group and assign a set of rights to the user.
Authentication
SSH Keys Right to set SSH keys for authenticating users.
User Menus Right to create a custom user menu for the CLI.
Web Access Right to access Web-Manager.
Diagnostics & Right to obtain diagnostic information and reports about the unit.
Reports
Firmware & Right to upgrade the firmware on the unit and save or restore a configuration (all
Configuration settings). Selecting this option automatically selects Reboot & Shutdown.
Internal Modem Right to update internal modem settings.
Device Port Right to control device ports.
Operations
Device Port Right to enter device port settings.
Configuration
USB Right to enter modem settings for USB devices and control USB storage devices.
SD Card Right to enter settings for SD card.
RPM Right to manage and control remote power managers.

5. Click the Apply button.

RADIUS Commands
These commands for the command line interface correspond to the web page entries described
above.

To configure the SLC unit to use RADIUS to authenticate users who log in via the Web,
SSH, Telnet, or the console port:

set radius <one or more parameters>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 242

 12: User Authentication

Parameters
allowdialback <enable|disable>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
clearports <Port List>
dataports <Port List>
dialbacknumber <Phone Number>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>
listenports <Port List>
state <enable|disable>
usevsa <enable|disable>

To identify the RADIUS server(s), the text secret, and the number of the TCP port on the
RADIUS server:

set radius server <1|2> host <IP Address or Hostname> secret <Secret>
[port <TCP Port>]
The default port is 1812.

To set the number of seconds after which the connection attempt times out:

set radius timeout <disable|1-30>

May be 1-30 seconds.

To set user group and permissions for RADIUS users:

set radius group <default|power|admin>

To set permissions for RADIUS users not already defined by the user rights group:

set radius permissions <Permission List>

where
<Permission List> is one or more of nt, sv, dt, lu, ra, sk, um, dp, do,
ub, rp, rs, rc, dr, wb, sn, ad, md, sd

To remove a permission, type a minus sign before the two-letter abbreviation for a user
right.

To set a default custom menu for RADIUS users:

set radius custommenu <Menu Name>

To view RADIUS settings:

show radius

User Attributes & Permissions from LDAP Schema or RADIUS VSA

Remote user attributes (group/permissions and port access) can be obtained from an Active
Directory server's schema via the user attribute 'secureLinxSLCPerms', or from a RADIUS server's
Vendor-Specific Attribute (see below). This attribute is a set of parameter-value pairs. Each
parameter and value is separated by a space, and a space separates each parameter-value pair.
Whitespace is not supported in the value strings. The parameters that are supported are:

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 243

 12: User Authentication

 rights - User rights. The value string is a comma-separated list of two letter user permissions.
Example: "nt,wb,ra".
 data - Data port access. The value string specifies the list of ports the user has 'direct' access
to. Example: "2,4-18,U1,U2".
 listen - Listen port access. The value string specifies the list of ports the user has 'listen'
access to.
 clear - Clear port access. The value string specifies the list of port buffers the user has the
right to clear.
 group - User group. Valid values for the value string are "default", "power", and "admin", and
any SLC custom group name. If a custom group name is specified and it matches a current
SLC custom group name, any rights attribute will be ignored, and the custom group's rights
(permissions) will be used instead. A group name with spaces cannot be specified.
 escseq - Escape sequence. The value string specifies the user's escape sequence. Use "\x"
to specify non-printable characters. For example, "\x1bA" specifies the sequence "ESC-A".
 brkseq - Break sequence. The value string specifies the user's break sequence.
 menu - Custom user menu. The value string specifies the user's custom user menu.
 display - Display custom user menu when a user logs into the CLI. Valid values for the value
string are "yes" and "no".
 dbnumber - Dial-back number. The value string specifies the user's dial-back number for
modem dial-back connections.
 allowdb - Allow a user to have dial-back access. Valid values for the value string are "yes"
and "no".
RADIUS servers will need to be configured to support the Lantronix Vendor-Specific Attribute. For
example, on a FreeRADIUS server, the dictionary will need be updated with the Lantronix
definition by including the contents below in a file named dictionary.lantronix, and including it in the
RADIUS server dictionary definitions by adding the appropriate $INCLUDE directive to the main
dictionary file.
# dictionary.lantronix
#
# Lantronix SLC Console Manager
# Provides SLC-specific user attributes
#
VENDOR Lantronix 244

BEGIN-VENDOR Lantronix

ATTRIBUTE Lantronix-User-Attributes 1 string

END-VENDOR Lantronix

Once this is complete, the users file can be updated to include the Lantronix VSA for any user:
myuser Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "myuser_pwd"
Reply-Message = "Hello, %u",
Lantronix-User-Attributes = "data 1-4 listen 1-6 clear 1-4
group power"

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 244

 12: User Authentication

Kerberos
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol that provides strong authentication for client/server
applications by using secret-key cryptography.
The system administrator can configure the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to use
Kerberos to authenticate users attempting to log in using the Web, Telnet, SSH, or the console
port.
Users who are authenticated through Kerberos are granted device port access through the port
permissions on this page.
All Kerberos users are members of a group that has predefined user rights associated with it. You
can add additional user rights that are not defined by the group.

To configure the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to use Kerberos to authenticate
users:

1. Click the User Authentication tab and select the Kerberos option. The following page
displays.

Figure 12-8 User Authentication > Kerberos

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 245

 12: User Authentication

2. Enter the following:

Enable Kerberos Displays selected if you enabled this method on the User Authentication page. If
you want to set up this authentication method but not enable it immediately, clear
the checkbox.
Note: You can enable Kerberos here or on the first User Authentication page. If
you enable Kerberos here, it automatically displays at the end of the order of
precedence on the User Authentication page.
Realm Enter the name of the logical network served by a single Kerberos database and a
set of Key Distribution Centers. Usually, realm names are all uppercase letters to
differentiate the realm from the Internet domain. Realm is similar in concept to an
NT domain.
KDC A key distribution center (KDC) is a server that issues Kerberos tickets. A ticket is a
temporary set of electronic credentials that verify the identity of a client for a
particular service.
Enter the KDC in the fully qualified domain format (FQDN). An example is
SLC.local.
KDC IP Address Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the Key Distribution Center (KDC).
KDC Port Port on the KDC listening for requests. Enter an integer with a maximum value of
65535. The default is 88.
Use LDAP Indicate whether Kerberos should rely on LDAP to look up
user IDs and Group IDs. This setting is disabled by default.
Note: Make sure to configure LDAP if you select this option.
Custom Menu If custom menus have been created, you can assign a default custom menu to
RADIUS users.
Escape Sequence A single character or a two-character sequence that causes the SLC 8000
advanced console manager to leave direct (interactive) mode. (To leave listen
mode, press any key.)
A suggested value is Esc+A (escape key, then uppercase "A" performed quickly
but not simultaneously). You would specify this value as \x1bA, which is
hexadecimal (\x) character 27 (1B) followed by an A.
This setting allows the user to terminate the connect direct command on the
command line interface when the endpoint of the command is deviceport,
tcp, or udp.
See Key Sequences on page 183 for notes on key sequence precedence and
behavior.
Break Sequence A series of 1-10 characters users can enter on the command line interface to send
a break signal to the external device. A suggested value is Esc+B (escape key,
then uppercase “B” performed quickly but not simultaneously). You would specify
this value as \x1bB, which is hexadecimal (\x) character 27 (1B) followed by a B.
Enable for Dial-back Select to grant a user dial-back access. Users with dial-back access can dial into
the SLC 8000 advanced console manager and enter their login and password.
Once the SLC unit authenticates them, the modem hangs up and dials them back.
Disabled by default.
Dial-back Number The phone number the modem dials back on depends on this setting for the device
port. The user is either dialed back on a fixed number, or on a number that is
associated with the user’s login (specified here).
Data Ports The ports users are able to monitor and interact with using the connect direct
command. U1 and U2 denote the USB upper and lower ports on the front of the
SLC unit.
Listen Port The ports users are able to monitor using the connect listen command.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 246

 12: User Authentication

Clear Port Buffers The ports whose port buffer users may clear using the set locallog clear
command.

3. In the User Rights section, select the user group to which Kerberos users will belong.
Group Select the group to which the Kerberos users will belong:
 Default Users: This group has only the most basic rights. You can specify
additional rights for the individual user.
 Power Users: This group has the same rights as Default Users plus Web
Access, Networking, Date/Time, Reboot & Shutdown, and Diagnostics &
Reports.
 Administrators: This group has all possible rights.

4. Select or clear the checkboxes for the following rights:

Full Administrative Right to add, update, and delete all editable fields.
Networking Right to enter Network settings.
Services Right to enable and disable system logging, SSH and Telnet logins, SNMP, and
SMTP.
Secure Lantronix Right to view and manage secure Lantronix units (e.g.,Spider, or SLC units) on the
Network local subnet.
Date/Time Right to set the date and time.
Reboot & Shutdown Right to shut down and reboot the SLC unit.
Local Users Right to add or delete local users on the system.
Remote Right to assign a remote user to a user group and assign a set of rights to the user.
Authentication
SSH Keys Right to set SSH keys for authenticating users.
User Menus Right to create a custom user menu for the CLI.
Web Access Right to access Web-Manager.
Diagnostics & Right to obtain diagnostic information and reports about the unit.
Reports
Firmware & Right to upgrade the firmware on the unit and save or restore a configuration (all
Configuration settings). Selecting this option automatically selects Reboot & Shutdown.
Internal Modem Right to update internal modem settings.
Device Port Right to control device ports.
Operations
Device Port Right to enter device port settings.
Configuration
USB Right to enter modem settings for USB devices and control USB storage devices.
SD Card Right to enter settings for SD card.
RPM Right to manage and control remote power managers.

5. Click the Apply button.

Note: You must reboot the unit before your changes will take effect.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 247

 12: User Authentication

Kerberos Commands
These commands for the command line interface correspond to the web page entries described
above.

To configure the SLC unit to use Kerberos to authenticate users who log in via the Web,
SSH, Telnet, or the console port:

set kerberos <one or more parameters>

Parameters
allowdialback <enable|disable>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
clearports <Port List>
custommenu <Menu Name>
dataports <Port List>
dialbacknumber <Phone Number>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>
group <default|power|admin>
ipaddr <Key Distribution Center IP Address>
kdc <Key Distribution Center>
listenports <Port List>
permissions <Permission List>
port <Key Distribution Center TCP Port>
realm <Kerberos Realm>
state <enable|disable>
useldapforlookup <enable|disable>

To set user group and permissions for Kerberos users:

set kerberos group <default|power|admin>

To set permissions for Kerberos users not already defined by the user rights group:

set kerberos permissions <Permission List>

where
<Permission List> is one or more of nt, sv, dt, lu, ra, sk, um, dp, do,
ub, rp, rs, rc, dr, wb, sn, ad, md, sd

To remove a permission, type a minus sign before the two-letter abbreviation for a user
right.

To set a default custom menu for Kerberos users:

set kerberos custommenu <Menu Name>

To view Kerberos settings:

show kerberos

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 248

 12: User Authentication

TACACS+
Similar to RADIUS, the main function of TACACS+ is to perform authentication for remote access.
The SLC 8000 advanced console manager supports the TACACS+ protocol (not the older
TACACS or XTACACS protocols).
The system administrator can configure the SLC unit to use TACACS+ to authenticate users
attempting to log in using the Web, Telnet, SSH, or the console port.
Users who are authenticated through Kerberos are granted device port access through the port
permissions on this page.
All TACACS+ users are members of a group with associated predefined user rights. You may add
additional user rights that are not defined by the group.

To configure the SLC unit to use TACACS+ to authenticate users:

1. Click the TACACS+ tab and select TACACS+. The following page displays.

Figure 12-9 User Authentication > TACACS+

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 249

 12: User Authentication

2. Enter the following:

Enable TACACS+ Displays selected if you enabled this method on the User Authentication page. If
you want to set up this authentication method but not enable it immediately, clear
the checkbox.
You can enable TACACS+ here or on the first User Authentication page. If you
enable TACACS+ here, it automatically displays at the end of the order of
precedence on the User Authentication page.
TACACS+ Servers 1-3 IPv4 or IPv6 address or host name of up to three TACACS+ servers.
Secret Shared secret for message encryption between the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager and the TACACS+ server. Enter an alphanumeric secret of up to 127
characters.
Encrypt Messages Select the checkbox to encrypt messages between the SLC unit and the
TACACS+ server. Selected by default.
Authentication The type of service used to pass the authentication tokens (e.g., login and
Service password) between the SLC and the TACACS+ server. Options are: ASCII Login
(login and password are transmitted in clear, unencrypted text), PPP/PAP (login
and password are transmitted in clear, unencrypted text via a PAP protocol
packet), and PPP/CHAP (the TACACS+ server sends a challenge that consists of
a session ID and an arbitrary challenge string, and the user name and password
are encrypted before they are sent back to the server). PPP/PAP is the default.
Timeout The timeout in seconds when attempting to connect to a TACACS+ server.
Timeout range is 1 to 10 seconds. 5 seconds is the default.
Custom Menu If custom menus have been created (see Custom User Menu Commands), you
can assign a default custom menu to TACACS+ users.
Escape Sequence A single character or a two-character sequence that causes the SLC 8000
advanced console manager to leave direct (interactive) mode. (To leave listen
mode, press any key.)
A suggested value is Esc+A (escape key, then uppercase "A" performed quickly
but not simultaneously). You would specify this value as \x1bA, which is
hexadecimal (\x) character 27 (1B) followed by an A.
This setting allows the user to terminate the connect direct command on
the command line interface when the endpoint of the command is deviceport,
tcp, or udp.
Break A series of 1-10 characters users can enter on the command line interface to send
Sequence a break signal to the external device. A suggested value is Esc+B (escape key,
then uppercase “B” performed quickly but not simultaneously). You would specify
this value as \x1bB, which is hexadecimal (\x) character 27 (1B) followed by a B.
See Key Sequences for notes on key sequence precedence and behavior.
Enable for Dial-back Select to grant a user Dial-back access. Users with dial-back access can dial into
the SLC unit and enter their login and password. Once the SLC 8000 advanced
console manager authenticates them, the modem hangs up and dials them back.
Disabled by default.
Dial-back Number The phone number the modem dials back on depends on this setting for the
device port. The user is either Dial-back on a fixed number, or on a number that is
associated with the user’s login (specified here).
Data Ports The ports users are able to monitor and interact with using the connect direct
command. U1 and U2 denote the USB upper and lower ports on the front of the
SLC unit.
Listen Ports The ports users are able to monitor using the connect listen command.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 250

 12: User Authentication

Clear Port Buffers The ports whose port buffer users may clear using the set locallog
clear command.
3. In the User Rights section, select the user group to which TACACS+ users will belong.
Group Select the group to which the TACACS+ users will belong:
 Default Users: This group has only the most basic rights. You can specify
additional rights for the individual user.
 Power Users: This group has the same rights as Default Users plus Web
Access, Networking, Date/Time, Reboot & Shutdown, and Diagnostics &
Reports.
 Administrators: This group has all possible rights.

4. Select or clear the checkboxes for the following rights:

Full Administrative Right to add, update, and delete all editable fields.
Networking Right to enter Network settings.
Services Right to enable and disable system logging, SSH and Telnet logins, SNMP, and
SMTP.
Secure Lantronix Right to view and manage secure Lantronix units (e.g., Spider, or SLC units) on the
Network local subnet.
Date/Time Right to set the date and time.
Reboot & Shutdown Right to shut down and reboot the SLC unit.
Local Users Right to add or delete local users on the system.
Remote Right to assign a remote user to a user group and assign a set of rights to the user.
Authentication
SSH Keys Right to set SSH keys for authenticating users.
User Menus Right to create a custom user menu for the CLI.
Web Access Right to access Web-Manager.
Diagnostics & Right to obtain diagnostic information and reports about the unit.
Reports
Firmware & Right to upgrade the firmware on the unit and save or restore a configuration (all
Configuration settings). Selecting this option automatically selects Reboot & Shutdown.
Internal Modem Right to update internal modem settings.
Device Port Right to control device ports.
Operations
Device Port Right to enter device port settings.
Configuration
USB Right to enter modem settings for USB devices and control USB storage devices.
SD Card Right to enter settings for SD card.
RPM Right to manage and control remote power managers.

5. Click the Apply button.

Note: You must reboot the unit before your changes will take effect.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 251

 12: User Authentication

TACACS+ Commands
These commands for the command line interface correspond to the web page entries described
above.

To configure the SLC unit to use TACACS+ to authenticate users who log in via the Web,
SSH, Telnet, or the console port:

set tacacs+ <one or more parameters>

Parameters
state <enable|disable>
server1 <IP Address or Name>
server2 <IP Address or Name>
server3 <IP Address or Name>
secret <TACACS+ Secret>
encrypt <enable|disable>
authservice <login|pap|chap>
timeout <1-10 seconds>
dataports <Port List>
listenports <Port List>
clearports <Port List>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
custommenu <Menu Name>
allowdialback <enable|disable>
dialbacknumber <Phone Number>
group <default|power|admin>
permissions <Permission List>
Notes: See User Attributes & Permissions from LDAP Schema or RADIUS VSA (on page
243) for information on groups and user rights.

To set user group and permissions for TACACS+ users:

set tacacs+ group <default|power|admin>

To set permissions for TACACS+ users not already defined by the user rights group:

set tacacs+ permissions <Permission List>

where
<Permission List> is one or more of nt, sv, dt, lu, ra, sk, um, dp, do,
ub, rp, rs, rc, dr, wb, sn, ad, md, sd

To remove a permission, type a minus sign before the two-letter abbreviation for a user
right.

To set a default custom menu for TACACS+ users:

set tacacs+ custommenu <Menu Name>

To view TACACS+ settings:

show tacacs+

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 252

 12: User Authentication

Groups
The SLC 8000 advanced console manager has 3 pre-defined groups: Administrators, Power
Users, and Default Users. Custom groups can also be created; each custom group is a set of user
attributes and permissions. Local Users and Remote Users defined on the SLC unit can be
assigned to one of the pre-defined groups or a custom group. When a user authenticates, if they
belong to custom group, they will be granted the custom group attributes and permissions, rather
than their individual attributes and permissions. The SLC 8000 advanced console manager
supports querying a LDAP server for groups that a LDAP user is a member of; if any of the LDAP
group names match a (Custom Group Name), the LDAP user will be granted the rights of the
custom group.
A custom group cannot be given the name of one of the pre-defined groups: "Admin", "Power" or
"Default" (or any version of these names where the case of the letters is different) since these
names are used for the SLC pre-defined groups. Any LDAP group that matches one of these pre-
defined group names will be ignored and not used to assign rights to a user.

To configure Groups in the SLC unit:

1. From the main menu, select User Authentication - Groups. The following page displays.

Note: If the fields in the lower part of the page have been populated by viewing another
group, the fields can be cleared by selecting the Reset Group button.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 253

 12: User Authentication

Figure 12-10 User Authentication > Groups

2. Enter the following:

Group Name Enter a name for the group.
Listen Ports The ports users are able to monitor using the connect listen
command.
Data Ports The ports users are able to monitor and interact with using the connect direct
command. U1 and U2 denote the USB upper and lower ports on the front of
the SLC unit.
Clear Port Buffers The ports whose port buffer users may clear using the set locallog
clear command.
Enable for Select to grant a user. Users with dial-back access can dial into the SLC unit
Dial-back and enter their login and password. Once the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager authenticates them, the modem hangs up and dials them back.
Disabled by default.
Dial-back Number The phone number the modem dials back on depends on this setting for the
device port. The user is either on a fixed number, or on a number that is
associated with the user’s login (specified here).

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 254

 12: User Authentication

Escape Sequence A single character or a two-character sequence that causes the SLC 8000
advanced console manager to leave direct (interactive) mode. (To leave
listen mode, press any key.)
A suggested value is Esc+A (escape key, then uppercase "A" performed
quickly but not simultaneously). You would specify this value as \x1bA, which
is hexadecimal (\x) character 27 (1B) followed by an A.
This setting allows the user to terminate the connect direct command
on the command line interface when the endpoint of the command is
deviceport, tcp, or udp.
Break Sequence A series of one to ten characters users can enter on the command line
interface to send a break signal to the external device. A suggested value is
Esc+B (escape key, then uppercase “B” performed quickly but not
simultaneously). You would specify this value as \x1bB, which is
hexadecimal (\x) character 27 (1B) followed by a B.
Custom Menu If custom menus have been created you can assign a default custom menu
to the group. See Custom Menus for more information.
Display Menu at Login Check the checkbox to display the menu at login.

3. Select or clear the checkboxes for the following rights:

Full Administrative Right to add, update, and delete all editable fields.
Networking Right to enter Network settings.
Services Right to enable and disable system logging, SSH and Telnet logins, SNMP, and
SMTP.
Secure Lantronix Right to view and manage Secure Lantronix units (e.g., Spider, or SLC units) on
Network the local subnet.
Date/Time Right to set the date and time.
Reboot & Shutdown Right to shut down and reboot the SLC unit.
Local Users Right to add or delete local users on the system.
Remote Right to assign a remote user to a user group and assign a set of rights to the user.
Authentication
SSH Keys Right to set SSH keys for authenticating users.
User Menus Right to create a custom user menu for the CLI.
Web Access Right to access Web-Manager.
Diagnostics & Right to obtain diagnostic information and reports about the unit.
Reports
Firmware & Right to upgrade the firmware on the unit and save or restore a configuration (all
Configuration settings). Selecting this option automatically selects Reboot & Shutdown.
Internal Modem Right to update internal modem settings.
Device Port Right to control device ports.
Operations
Device Port Right to enter device port settings.
Configuration
USB Right to enter modem settings for USB devices and control USB storage devices.
SD Card Right to enter settings for SD card.
RPM Right to manage and control remote power managers.

4. Click the Add Group button.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 255

 12: User Authentication

To view or update a group:

1. In the Groups table, select the group and click the View Group button. The group attributes
and permissions will be displayed in the lower section of the page.
2. Modify the group attributes and permissions and click the Edit Group button.

To delete a group:

1. Select the group in the Groups table.

2. Click the Delete Group button.

Group Commands
set groups add|edit <Group Name> [<parameters>]

Syntax

set groups add|edit <Group Name> [<parameters>]

Parameters

dataports <Port List>

listenports <Port List>
clearports <Port List>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
custommenu <Menu Name>
displaymenu <enable|disable>
allowdialback <enable|disable>
dialbacknumber <Phone Number>
permissions <Permission List>

Note: See 'help user permissions' for information on user rights.

Rename a group:
set groups rename <Group Name> newname <New Group Name>
Delete a group:
set groups delete <Group Name>
Show one or more groups:
show groups [name <Group Name>] members <enable|disable>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 256

 12: User Authentication

SSH Keys
The SLC 8000 advanced console manager can import and export SSH keys to facilitate shared
key authentication for all incoming and outgoing SSH connections. By using a public/private key
pair, a user can access multiple hosts with a single passphrase, or, if a passphrase is not used, a
user can access multiple hosts without entering a password. In either case, the authentication is
protected against security attacks because both the public key and the private key are required to
authenticate. For both imported and exported SSH keys, the SLC unit supports both RSA and
DSA keys, and can import and export keys in OpenSSH and SECSH formats. Imported and
exported keys are saved with the SLC console manager configuration, and the administrator has
the option of retaining the SSH keys during a reset to factory defaults.
The SLC unit can also update the SSH RSA1, RSA and DSA host keys that the SSH server uses
with site-specific host keys or reset them to the default values.

Imported Keys
Imported SSH keys must be associated with an SLC 8000 advanced console manager local user.
The key can be generated on host "MyHost" for user "MyUser," and when the key is imported into
the SLC unit, it must be associated with either "MyUser" (if "MyUser" is an existing SLC console
manager local user) or an alternate SLC local user. The public key file can be imported via SCP,
SFTP, or FTP; once imported, you can view or delete the public key. Any SSH connection into the
SLC unit from the designated host/user combination uses the SSH key for authentication.

Exported Keys
The SLC can generate SSH keys for SSH connections out of the SLC advanced console manager
for any SLC user. The SLC 8000 advanced console manager retains both the private and public
key on the SLC unit, and makes the public key available for export via SCP, SFTP, FTP, or copy
and paste. The name of the key is used to generate the name of the public key file that is exported
(for example, <keyname>.pub), and the exported keys are organized by user and key name. Once
a key is generated and exported, you can delete the key or view the public portion. Any SSH
connection out of the SLC console manager for the designated host/user combination uses the
SSH key for authentication.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 257

 12: User Authentication

To configure the SLC unit to use SSH keys to authenticate users:

1. From the main menu, select User Authentication - SSH Keys. The following page displays.

Figure 12-11 User Authentication > SSH Keys

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 258

 12: User Authentication

2. Enter the following:

Imported Keys (SSH In)

Host & User Associated with Key

These entries are required in the following cases:

 The imported key file does not contain the host that the user will be making an SSH
connection from, or
 The SLC local user login for the connection is different from the user name the key was
generated from or is not included in the imported key file, or
 The imported key file contains multiple keys; in this case, each key must include the user
name and host at the end of the line in the standard <key> <user name>@<host> format.
If either of these conditions is true, or the imported file is in SECSH format, you must specify the
user and host. The following is an example of a public key file that includes the user and host:
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAEEApUHCX9EWsHt+jmUGXa1YC3us
ABYxIXUhSU1N+NU9HNaUADUFfd8LYz8/gUnUSH4Ksm8GRT7/8/Sn9jCVfGPh
UQ== asallaway@winserver
Host The host name or IP address which will be associated with the SSH Key, typically
the host that the key was generated on. Once imported, the key can be used to
access the SLC from any host, not just the host associated with the key.
User The User ID of the user being given secure access to the SLC unit.

Host & Login for Import

Import via Select SCP, SFTP, FTP, HTTPS, or Copy/Paste as the method for importing the
SSH keys. SCP is the default. If SCP, SFTP or FTP are selected, the Filename,
Host, Path, Login, and Password fields are filled in. If HTTPS is selected, the
Upload File link will become active to upload a file containing a public key to the
SLC. If Copy/Paste is selected, the public key will be entered into the Filename/
Public Key field.
Filename Public Key The name of the file that was uploaded via HTTPS, or to be copied via SCP, SFTP
or FTP (may contain multiple keys); or the public key (optionally including
"user@host" at the end) if Copy/Paste is used.
Host IP address of the remote server from which to SCP, SFTP or FTP the public key
file.
Path Optional pathname to the public key file.
Login User ID to use to SCP, SFTP or FTP the file.
Password / Password to use to SCP, SFTP or FTP the file.
Retype Password

Exported Keys (SSH Out)

Export Enables you to export created public keys. Select one of the following:
 New Key for User: Enables you to create a new key for a user and export the
public key in a file.
 All Previously Created Keys: Does not create any keys, but exports all
previously created public keys in one file.
User User ID of the person given secure access to the remote server.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 259

 12: User Authentication

Key Name Name of the key. This will generate the public key filename (e.g., <keyname>.pub).
Key Type Select either the RSA or the DSA encryption standard. RSA is the default.
Number of Bits Select the number of bits in the key (1024, 2048, 3072, or 4096). The default is
2048.
Passphrase / Retype Optionally, enter a passphrase associated with the key. The passphrase may have
Passphrase up to 50 characters. The passphrase is an optional password that can be
associated with an SSH key. It is unique to each user and to each key.
See Key Sequences for notes on key sequence precedence and behavior.
SECSH Format Indicate whether the keys will be exported in SECSH format (by default the key is
exported in OpenSSH format).
Public Key Filename Filename of the public host key.

Host and Login for Export

Export via Select the method (SCP, SFTP, FTP, HTTPS, or Copy/Paste) of exporting the key
to the remote server. Copy/Paste, the default, requires no other parameters for
export.
Host IP address of the remote server to which the SLC 8000 advanced console manager
will SCP, SFTP or FTP the public key file.
Path Optional path of the file on the host to SCP, SFTP or FTP the public key too.
Login User ID to use to SCP, SFTP or FTP the public key file.
Password / Password to use to SCP, SFTP or FTP the public key file.
Retype Password

To view or delete a key:

1. Select the key from the appropriate table. The View and Delete buttons become active.
2. To view the key, click the View button. A pop-up page displays the key.
Imported key for sysadmin@DaveSLM:
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAxGxPGY9HsG9VqroDo98B89Cf
haqB6jG//0tTMKkb3zrpPu0HHAXaiVXHAvv7lAte31VTpoXdLAXN0uCvuJLf
aL/LvvGmoEWBuBSu505lQHfL70ijxZWOEVTJGFqUQTSq8Ls3/v3lkUJEX5ln
2AlQx0F40I5wNEC0+m3d5QE+FKc= sysadmin@DaveSLM
3. To delete the key, click the Delete button.

To view, reset, or import SSH RSA1, RSA, And DSA host keys:

1. On the User Authentication - SSH Keys page, click the SSH Server/Host Keys link at the
top right. The following page displays the current host keys. In the example below, the current
keys are the defaults.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 260

 12: User Authentication

Figure 12-12 Current Host Keys

2. View or enter the following:

Reset to Default Host Select the All Keys checkbox to reset all default key(s), or select one or more
Key checkboxes to reset defaults for RSA1, RSA, or DSA keys. All checkboxes are
unselected by default.
Import Host Key To import a site-specific host key, select the checkbox. Unselected by default.
Type From the drop-down list, select the type of host key to import.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 261

 12: User Authentication

Import via From the drop-down list, select the method of importing the host key (SCP or
SFTP). The default is SFTP.
Public Key Filename Filename of the public host key.
Private Key Filename Filename of the private host key.
Host Host name or IPaddress of the host from which to import the key.
Path Path of the directory where the host key will be stored.
Login User ID to use to SCP or SFTP the file.
Password / Password to use to SCP or SFTP the file.
Retype Password

3. Click the Apply button.

4. Repeat steps 2-3 for each key you want to import.
5. To return to the SSH Keys page, click the Back to SSH Keys link.

SSH Commands
These commands for the command line interface correspond to the web page entries described
above.

To import an SSH key:

set sshkey import <ftp|sftp|scp|copypaste> <one or more parameters>

Parameters
[keyhost <SSH Key IP Address or Name>]
[keyuser <SSH Key User>]
[path <Path to Public Key File>]
[file <Public Key File>]
[host <IP Address or Name>]
[login <User Login>]

To export a key:

set sshkey export <ftp|sftp|scp|copypaste> <one or more parameters>

Parameters
[format <openssh|secsh>]
[host <IP Address or Name>]
[login <User Login>]
[path <Path to Copy Key>]
[bits <1024|2048|3072|4096>]
keyname <SSH Key Name>
keyuser <SSH Key User>
type <rsa|dsa>

To export the public keys of all previously created SSH keys:

set sshkey all export <ftp|sftp|scp|copypaste> [pubfile <Public Key

File>] [host <IP Address or Name>] [login <User Login>] [path <Path to
Copy Keys>]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 262

 12: User Authentication

To delete a key:

set sshkey delete <one or more parameters>

Parameters
keyhost <SSH Key Host>
keyname <SSH Key Name>
keyuser <SSH Key User>

Note: Specify the key user and key host to delete an imported key; specify the keyuser
and keyname to delete an exported key.

To import an SLC host key or to reset a SLC host key to the default:

set sshkey server import type <rsa1|rsa|dsa> via <sftp|scp>

pubfile <Public Key File> privfile <Private Key File>
host <IP Address or Name> login <User Login> [path <Path to Key File>]

To reset defaults for all or selected host keys:

set sshkey server reset [type <all|rsa1|rsa|dsa>]

To display SSH keys that have been imported:

show sshkey import <one or more parameters>

Parameters
[keyhost <SSH Key IP Address or Name>]
[keyuser <SSH Key User>]
[viewkey <enable|disable>]

To display SSH keys that have been exported:

show sshkey export <one or more parameters>

Parameters
[keyname <SSH Key Name>]
[keyuser <SSH Key User>]
[viewkey <enable|disable>]

To display host keys (public key only):

show sshkey server [type <all|rsa1|rsa|dsa>]

1. Click the Apply button. New entries display in the Imported SSH Keys table and Exported
SSH Keys table, as applicable.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 263

 12: User Authentication

Custom Menus
Users can have custom user menus as their command line interface, rather than the standard CLI
command set. Each custom user menu can contain up to 50 commands ('logout' is always the last
command). Instead of typing each command, the user enters the number associated with the
command. Each command can also have a nickname associated with it, which can be displayed in
the menu instead of the command. The commands showmenu <Menu Name> and returnmenu
can be entered to display another menu from a menu, or to return to the prior menu. The
command returncli can be used to break out of a menu and return to the regular CLI.

To add a custom menu:

1. Click the User Authentication tab and select the Custom Menus option. The Custom Menus
page displays:

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 264

 12: User Authentication

Figure 12-13 User Authentication > Custom Menus

2. In the lower section of the page, enter the following:

Note: To clear fields in the lower part of the page, click the Clear Custom Menu button.

Menu Name Enter a name for the custom menu.

Title Enter an optional title which will be displayed about the menu at the CLI.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 265

 12: User Authentication

Nicknames Select to enable nicknames to be displayed in the menu instead of the

commands. If the custom menu will have nicknames, this should also be
selected prior to entering the commands in the web page, as this will facilitate
entry of the nicknames.
Redisplay Menu Select to redisplay the custom menu each time before the CLI prompt is
displayed.

3. You have the following options:

- To save the custom menu without any more commands than the default logout
command, click the Add Custom Menu button.
- To add menu commands, select the QuickEdit Mode box. This will move the cursor from
Command to Nickname and back to Command (if Nicknames is selected), or keep the
cursor on Command (if Nicknames is not selected). Commands (and the optional
nicknames) are added to the Menu Commands/Nicknames list when carriage return is
entered at the Command field (if Nicknames is not selected) or the Nickname field (if
Nicknames is selected). Most browsers have a "Select All" keystroke (such as Control-A)
which allow you to select all of the text in a field; this can be used in conjunction with the
Delete key to clear the contents of a field before entering a new command or nickname.
The Clear Command & Nickname button can also be used to delete the contents of the
Command and Nickname fields.
Commands can also be added to the list when QuickEdit Mode is not selected. Enter the
command and the optional nickname and click the right arrow. The command will be
added before the logout command (if a command/nickname is not selected in the list) or
will replace the currently selected command/nickname in the list. The Unselect
Command & Nickname button can be used to unselect the currently selected command/
nickname in the list.
4. To add more commands to the custom menu, repeat step 3.
5. You also have the following options:
- To edit a command/nickname in the custom menu, select the command in the
Commands/Nicknames List box and select the left arrow button. Change the
command and/or the nickname, and with the same command still selected in the list,
select the right arrow button.
- To remove a command/nickname from the custom menu, select the command in the
Commands/Nicknames List box and select the Delete Command & Nickname button.
- To move a command higher up in the menu (the commands are shown in the order they
will be presented in the custom menu, with command #1 listed first), select the command
in the Commands/Nicknames List box and click the up arrow.
- To move a command further down in the menu, select the menu in the Commands/
Nicknames List and click the down arrow.
6. Click the Add Custom Menu button.

To view or update a custom menu:

1. In the Custom Menus table, select the custom menu and click the View Custom Menu
button. The custom menu attributes appear in the lower part of the page.
2. Update the menu attributes following the instructions for adding a menu above.
3. Click the Edit Custom Menu button.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 266

 12: User Authentication

To delete a custom menu:

1. Select the custom menu in the Custom Menus table.

2. Click the Delete Custom Menu button.

To create a new custom menu from an existing custom menu:

1. Select the custom menu in the Custom Menus table.

2. Enter a name for the new menu in the New Menu Name field.
3. Click the Copy Custom Menu button.

Custom User Menu Commands

From the current menu, a user can display another menu, thus allowing menus to be nested. The
special command showmenu <Menu Name> displays a specified menu. The special command
returnmenu redisplays the parent menu if the current menu was displayed from a showmenu
command.
The user with appropriate rights creates and manages custom user menus from the command line
interface, but can assign a custom user menu to a user from either the command line or the web
interface.
When creating a custom user menu, note the following limitations:
 Maximum of 20 custom user menus
 Maximum of 50 commands per custom user menu (logout is always the last command)
 Maximum of 15 characters for menu names
 Maximum of five nested menus can be called.
 No syntax checking (Enter each command correctly.)

To assign a custom user menu to a local or remote user:

set localusers add|edit <User Login> menu <Menu Name>

To create a new custom user menu or add a command to an existing custom user menu:

set menu add <Menu Name> [command <Command Number>]

To change a command or nickname within an existing custom user menu:

set menu edit <Menu Name> command <Command Number>

set menu edit <Menu Name> nickname <Command Number>

To set the optional title for a menu:

set menu edit <Menu Name> title <Menu Title>

To enable or disable the display of command nicknames instead of commands:

set menu edit <Menu Name> shownicknames <enable|disable>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 267

 12: User Authentication

To enable or disable the redisplay of the menu before each prompt:

set menu edit <Menu Name> redisplaymenu <enable|disable>

To delete a custom user menu or one command within a custom user menu:

set menu delete <Menu Name> [command <Command Number>]

To view a list of all menu names or all commands for a specific menu:

show menu <all|Menu Name>

To test an existing menu:

set cli menu <Menu Name>

Example:

The system administrator creates two custom user menus, with menu1 having a nested menu
(menu2):
[SLC]> set menu add menu1
Enter optional menu title (<return> for none): Menu1 Title
Specify nickname for each command? [no] y
Enter each command, up to 50 commands ('logout' is always the last
command).
Press <return> when the menu command set is complete.
Command #1: connect direct deviceport 1
Nickname #1: connect Port-1
Command #2: connect direct deviceport 2
Nickname #2: connect Port-2
Command #3: showmenu menu2
Warning: menu 'menu2' does not exist.
Nickname #3: menu2
Command #4:
Command #4: logout
Nickname #4: log off
Custom User Menu settings successfully updated.
[SLC]> set menu add menu2
Enter optional menu title (<return> for none): Menu2 Title
Specify nickname for each command? [no]
Enter each command, up to 50 commands ('logout' is always the last
command).
Press <return> when the menu command set is complete.
Command #1: connect direct deviceport 3
Command #2: connect direct deviceport 4
Command #3: show datetime
Command #4: returnmenu
Command #5:
Command #5: logout
Custom User Menu settings successfully updated.
[SLC]> show menu all
___Custom User
Menus___________________________________________________________
menu1 menu2

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 268

 12: User Authentication

[SLC]> show menu menu1

___Custom User
Menus___________________________________________________________
Menu: menu1
Title: Menu1 Title
Show Nicknames: enabled
Redisplay Menu: disabled
Command 1: connect direct deviceport 1
Nickname 1: connect Port-1
Command 2: connect direct deviceport 2
Nickname 2: connect Port-2
Command 3: showmenu menu2
Nickname 3: menu2
Command 4: logout
Nickname 4: log off
[SLC]> show menu menu2
_
__Custom User
Menus___________________________________________________________
Menu: menu2
Title: Menu2 Title
Show Nicknames: disabled
Redisplay Menu: disabled
Command 1: connect direct deviceport 3
Nickname 1: <none>
Command 2: connect direct deviceport 4
Nickname 2: <none>
Command 3: show datetime
Nickname 3: <none>
Command 4: returnmenu
Nickname 4: <none>
Command 5: logout
Nickname 5: <none>

The system administrator configures local user 'john' to use custom menu 'menu1':
[SLC]> set localusers edit john custommenu menu1
Local users settings successfully updated.
[SLC]> show localusers user john
___Current Local Users
Settings________________________________________________
Login: john
Password: <set> UID: 101
Listen Ports: 1-32
Data Ports: 1-32
Clear Ports: 1-32
Escape Sequence: \x1bA Break Sequence: \x1bB
Custom Menu: menu1
Allow Dialback: disabled
Dialback Number: <none>
User 'john ' logs into the command line interface, initially sees menu1, executes the command to
jump to nested menu menu2, and then returns to menu1:

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 269

 12: User Authentication

Welcome to the SLC-Console Server

Model Number: SLC32
For a list of commands, type 'help'.
[Enter 1-4]> help

Menu1 Title
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) connect Port-1 3) menu2
2) connect Port-2 4) log off
[Enter 1-4]> 3
Executing: showmenu menu2
[Enter 1-5]> help
Menu2 Title
-----------
1) connect direct deviceport 3
2) connect direct deviceport 4
3) show datetime
4) returnmenu
5) logout
[Enter 1-5]> 3
Executing: show datetime
Date/Time: Tue Sep 7 19:13:35 2004
Timezone: UTC
[Enter 1-5]> 4
Executing: returnmenu
[Enter 1-4]> help
Menu1 Title
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) connect Port-1 3) menu2
2) connect Port-2 4) log off
[Enter 1-4]> 4
Executing: logout
Logging out...

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 270

13: Maintenance
The system administrator performs maintenance activities and operates the SLC advanced
console manager using the options for the Maintenance tab and additional commands on the
command line interface.

Firmware & Configurations

The Firmware & Configuration page allows the system administrator to:
 Configure the FTP, SFTP, or TFTP server that will be used to provide firmware updates and
save/restore configurations. (TFTP is only used for firmware updates and configurations
restored via DHCP/TFTP Zero Touch Provisioning Configuration Restore.)
 Set up the location or method that will be used to save or restore configurations (Local Disk,
FTP, SFTP, NFS, CIFS, USB, HTTPS or SD card). Update the version of the firmware running
on the SLC unit.
 Save a snapshot of all settings on the SLC device (save a configuration).
 Restore the configuration, either to a previously saved configuration, or to the factory defaults.
 Configurations can also be pushed to the SLC via the HTTPS Push Configuration Restore
feature.

Zero Touch Provisioning Configuration Restore

The Zero Touch Provisioning feature allows a factory defaulted SLC to acquire a default
configuration from a DHCP server and TFTP server when it is booted. At boot-time, before the
normal startup process, a unit will attempt to acquire network parameters and a configuration file,
first over Eth1, and then over Eth2:
 The unit will broadcast on the Eth1 network port for a DHCP server on the local subnet,
requesting DHCP options "TFTP Server" (DHCP option #66) and "Boot Filename" (DHCP
option #67).
 If it receives both options from the DHCP server, and the Boot Filename is a valid SLC
configuration filename ending in "-slccfg.tgz", it will attempt to download the Boot Filename
from the TFTP Server.
 If it is able to download the Boot Filename from the TFTP Server, it will restore the
configuration onto the SLC, and begin the normal startup process.
 If any of these steps fail for the Eth1 network port, it will repeat the process of trying to acquire
a configuration over the Eth2 network port.
 After attempting to acquire a configuration over the Eth2 network port, the unit will begin the
normal startup process.
Any results of attempting to acquire and restore a configuration file will be output to the console
port and the system log. Configurations for firmware versions that are newer than the firmware
version running on the unit will not be restored. Spaces are not supported in either the directory or
filename portion of the Boot Filename path.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 271

 13: Maintenance

HTTPS Push Configuration Restore

The HTTPS Push Configuration feature allows a saved configuration to be pushed to a SLC via a
command line tool such as "curl" that includes the configuration to upload:
% curl --insecure --request POST --form "file=@/home/users/admin/
current-slccfg.tgz" https://myslc.company.com/
cfgupdate.htm?login=sysadmin&password=PASS&config=all&comment=FirmwareUp
date
The arguments that are passed with the URL are:
 login - Login token to use for authentication. This must be a local user with firmware/config
and reboot/shutdown rights.
 password - Clear text password for the login token.
 config - Indicates the portion of the configuration to restore, either all, or any combination of
the following separated by commas: network, datetime, services, localusers, devports, usb,
rpms, remoteauth, connections, events, ipfilter, groups, hostlist, nfscifs, maintenance, sites,
scripts, slcnetwork, consoleport, menus, sshkeys, or sslcerts.
 comment - optional comment to include in the system log and audit log. If spaces are included
in the comment they should be URL encoded as shown in this bash script:

#!/bin/bash

url="https://myslc.company.com/
cfgupdate.htm?login=sysadmin&password=PASS&config=all&comment=Update
myslc.company.com with default configuration"

curl --insecure --request POST --form "file=@/home/users/admin/current-

slccfg.tgz" "$( echo $url | sed 's/ /%20/g' )"

If an HTTPS Push Config command is accepted and initiated by the SLC, the SLC will respond
with "Configuration restore initiated; SLC will reboot.", the restore will be performed, a message
will be logged to the audit log and the system log, and the SLC will reboot. Any errors in the
process will result in an error message being displayed.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 272

 13: Maintenance

To configure settings:

1. Click the Maintenance tab. The Maintenance > Firmware & Configurations page displays.

Figure 13-1 Maintenance > Firmware & Configurations

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 273

 13: Maintenance

2. Enter the following:

Reboot Select this option to reboot the SLC 8000 advanced console manager
immediately. The default is No.
Note: The front panel LCD displays the “Rebooting the SLC” message, and the
normal boot sequence occurs.
Shutdown Select this option to shut down the SLC unit. The default is No.

Internal Temperature
Current Displays current temperature.
Low Sets the acceptable minimum for the internal temperature of the SLC 8000
advanced console manager. If the temperature of the SLC device changes to be
outside of this range, the SLC console manager will issue an SNMP trap.
High Sets the acceptable maximum for the internal temperature of the SLC unit. If the
temperature of the SLC 8000 advanced console manager changes to be outside
of this range, the SLC unit will issue an SNMP trap.
Calibrate Offset An offset for calibrating the internal temperature of the SLC console manager. The
offset will be applied one hour after setting the calibration value. Zeroing the
offset will take effect immediately and will cancel any current and/or pending
calibration.

Site Information
Data Center Rack Row Set these fields to define the rack row the SLC unit is located within a large data
center. The default for these fields is 1.
Data Center Rack Set these fields to define the rack cluster the SLC 8000 advanced console
Cluster manager is located within a large data center. The default for these fields is 1.
Data Center Rack Set these fields to define the rack the SLC unit is located within a large data
center. The default for these fields is 1.

SLC Firmware
Note: The non-active boot bank is updated during the firmware update, without requiring
a reboot. The configuration on the current boot bank may optionally be copied to the non-
active boot bank during the firmware update.

Current Version Displays the current firmware version.

Clear FW Update Log Clears the contents of the Firmware Update log file.
(checkbox)
Firmware Update Log To view a log of all prior firmware updates, click the Firmware Update Log link.
(link)
Update Firmware  To update the SLC firmware, select the checkbox. If you select this option, the
SLC unit reboots after you apply the update. The first time boot for each bank
may take up to 5 minutes. Subsequent boot times will be approximately 2
minutes.
 To view a log of all prior firmware updates, click the Firmware Update Log
link.
Firmware Filename The name of the firmware update file downloaded from the Lantronix web site.
Key A key for validating the firmware file. The key is provided with the firmware file
(32 hex characters).

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 274

 13: Maintenance

Load Firmware Via From the drop-down list, select the method of loading the firmware. Options are
FTP, TFTP, HTTPS, NFS, USB, and SD Card. FTP is the default.
 If you select HTTPS, the Upload File link becomes active. Select the link to
open a popup window that allows you to browse to a firmware update file to
upload.
 If you select NFS, the mount directory must be specified.
 The SD Card option must be selected if an SD card is to be used.

Note: Connections available depend on the model of the SLC unit.

Boot Banks
Bank 1 Displays the version of SLC firmware in bank 1.
Note: The word "current" displays next to the bank from which the SLC
booted.
Bank 2 Displays the version of SLC firmware in bank 2.
Next Boot Bank Displays the current setting for bank to boot from at next reboot.
Switch to Bank 2 If desired, select the alternate bank to boot from at next reboot.
Copy configuration If checked, will copy the configuration from the current bank to the bank being
from Bank 1 to Bank 2 updated. The two numbers are automatically generated so that the first
during firmware update number is the current bank.
Boot Count, Boot Delay, Parameters that control how the SLC boots and when it switches to the
Boot Limit alternate boot bank.
 Boot Delay - how many seconds the bootloader pauses before booting the
SLC. Default is 3 seconds, range is 3 - 1800 seconds.
 Boot Limit - how many times the SLC will fail to boot before switching to the
alternate boot bank. After the SLC fails to boot 2 times Boot limit (so it has
attempted to boot Boot Limit times on each bank), the SLC will go into
advanced recovery mode, which may require support from Technical
Support to resolve so that the SLC can be booted again. Default is 3 boots,
range is 3 - 20.
 Boot Count - how many times the SLC has failed to boot. If this value
reaches Boot Limit, the SLC will switch to the alternate boot bank. The SLC
will switch to the alternate boot bank only once. For example, if it fails to
boot Boot Limit times on bank 1, it will automatically switch to bank 2; if it
fails to boot Boot Limit times on bank 2, it will enter advanced recovery
mode. If Boot Count has reached Boot Limit, setting this value to 0 will
enable the SLC to boot again. Default is 0, range is 0 - 1.
Watchdog Timer Timer that will reboot the SLC if the boot fails to properly complete. If the timer
expires without a successful boot of the SLC, the timer will automatically reboot
the SLC. The default is 300 seconds. A value of zero will disable the watchdog
timer.

Load Firmware Via Options

Note: Prior to firmware update, the current configuration is saved to the Local Disk
location with the name "before_MMDDYY_HHMM".

HTTPS Click Upload File to update the SLC firmware.

NFS Mounted Dir Select the NFS mounted directory from the drop-down menu.
USB Port Click to select USB port.
FTP/SFTP/TFTP The IP address or host name of the server used for obtaining updates and saving
Server or restoring configurations. May have up to 64 alphanumeric characters; may
include hyphens and underscores.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 275

 13: Maintenance

Path The default path on the server for obtaining firmware update files and getting and
putting configuration save files.
Login The userid for accessing the FTP server. May be blank.
Password / The FTP user password.
Retype Password

Configuration Management
Configuration From the option list, select one of the following:
Management  No Save/Restore: Does not save or restore a configuration.
 Save Configuration: Saves all settings to file, which can be backed up to a
location that is not on the SLC 8000 advanced console manager. If Tarball
Format is checked, the configuration will be saved in the old (insecure)
compressed tar file format, instead of the password protected zip file format.
 Restore Factory Defaults: Restores factory defaults. If you select this
option, the SLC unit reboots after you apply the update.
 Restore Saved Configuration: Returns the SLC settings to a previously
saved configuration. If you select this option, the SLC console manager
reboots after you apply the update.
Save with Config or  Select the SSH Keys checkbox to save any imported or exported SSH keys.
Preserve with Restore  Select the SSL Certificate checkbox to save an imported certificate.
 Select the Scripts checkbox to save any interface or batch scripts. Disabled
by default.
Preserve Configuration Allows the user to keep a subset of the current configuration after restoring a
after Restore configuration or resetting to factory defaults.
Select the checkbox for each part of the current configuration you want to keep,
for example, Networking, Services, or Device Ports.
Configuration Name to If you selected to save or restore a configuration, enter a name for the
Save to or Restore From configuration file (up to 12 characters).
Location for Save, If you selected to save or restore a configuration, select one of the following
Restore, or Manage options:
 Manage: This link allows you to view and delete all configurations saved to
the selected location. This feature is available for the Local Disk, NFS
Mounts, CIFS Share, USB, and SD Card locations. See Manage Files on
page 277.
 Local Disk – Saved Configurations: If restoring, select a saved
configuration from the drop-down list.
 FTP Server: The FTP server specified in the FTP/SFTP/TFTP section. If you
select this option, select FTP or SFTP to transfer the configuration file.
 NFS Mounted Directory: Local directory of the NFS server for mounting
files.
 CIFS Share – Saved Configurations: If restoring, select a saved
configuration from the drop-down list.
 USB: If a USB device is loaded into one of the USB ports of the SLC 8000
advanced console manager, and properly mounted, the configuration can be
saved to or restored from this location.If you select this option, select the port
in which the USB thumb drive is mounted; then click a saved configuration
from the drop-down list.
 HTTPS: For saving, the browser will prompt the user to save the
configuration. For restoring, the configuration will be uploaded to the Local
Disk location.
 SD Card: If an SD card is loaded into a card slots of the SLC and properly
mounted, the configuration can be saved to or restored from this location.

3. To view a log of all prior firmware updates, click the Firmware Update Log (blue link near the

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 276

 13: Maintenance

center of the web page).

4. Click Apply.

Note: If you selected an option that forces a reboot (restore configuration, update
firmware, or reset factory defaults), the SLC unit automatically reboots at the end of the
process.

Figure 13-2 Network > Firmware/Config > Manage

Manage Files
The Manage Files web page allows you to view the firmware and configuration files saved to the
selected location and rename, download or delete any of the files. This feature is available for the
Local Disk, NFS Mounts, CIFS Share, USB, and SD card locations.

To manage files:

1. On the Maintenance > Firmware & Configurations page, click the Manage link. The Network >
Firmware/Config > Manage (on page 277) page appears and displays the name and the time
and date the file was saved.
2. To rename a file, select a file, enter the New File Name, and click the Rename File button.
3. To download a file, select a file and click the Download File button.
4. To delete files, select one, multiple files, or all files, and click the Delete File button. A
verification message showing files deleted will appear. Click Back to Manage Files to return
to the Network > Firmware/Config > Manage page.
Note: When deleting multiple files with a single command, the list of files that have
been deleted will only be shown if 10 or fewer files are deleted.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 277

 13: Maintenance

Administrative Commands
These commands for the command line interface correspond to the web page entries described
above.

To immediately terminate all connections and reboot the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager:

admin reboot

Note: The front panel LCD displays the "Rebooting the SLC" message, and the normal
boot sequence occurs.

To prepare the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to be powered off:

admin shutdown

Note: When you use this command to shut down the SLC unit, the LCD front panel
displays "Shutting down the SLC," followed by a pause, and then "Shutdown complete."
When "Shutdown complete" displays, it is safe to power off the SLC 8000 advanced
console manager.

To list current hardware and firmware information:

admin version

To update SLC firmware to a new revision:

Note: For updates via FTP, TFTP or SFTP, the firmware file should be accessible via
the settings displayed by admin ftp show. The SLC 8000 advanced console manager
automatically reboots after successful update.

admin firmware update <ftp|tftp|sftp|nfs|usb|sdcard> file <Firmware

File> key <Checksum Key> [nfsdir <NFS Mounted Directory>][usbport
<U1|U2>]

To list the current firmware revision:

admin firmware show [viewlog <enable|disable>]

Lists the current firmware revision and optionally displays the log containing details about
firmware updates.

To clear the firmware update log:

admin firmware clearlog

To configure parameters that control how the SLC boots and when it switches to the
alternate boot bank:

admin firmware bootcount <0|1>

admin firmware bootlimit <3-20>
admin firmware bootdelay <3-1800>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 278

 13: Maintenance

To configure how long the SLC waits for boot completion before forcing a reboot:

admin firmware watchdog <disable|180-1800 seconds>

Sets the boot bank to be used at the next SLC reboot (for dual-boot SLCs):

admin firmware bootbank <1|2>

Note: It is recommended that you wait at least two weeks before copying a newly
upgraded bank to the original boot bank. This allows you to roll back the upgrade in the
unlikely event that there is an issue.

To set the FTP/TFTP/SFTP server used for firmware updates and configuration save/
restore:

admin ftp server <IP Address or Hostname> [login <User Login>] [path
<Directory>]

To view FTP settings:

admin ftp show

To set the FTP server password and prevent it from being echoed:

admin ftp password

To restore the SLC unit to factory default settings:

admin config factorydefaults [savesshkeys <enable|disable>] [savesslcert

<enable|disable>][savescripts<enable|disable>][preserveconfig <Config
Params to Preserve>]
<Config Params to Preserve> is a comma-separated list of current configuration
parameters to retain after the config restore or factorydefaults:

nt – Networking lu – Local Users

sv – Services dp –Device Ports
dt – Date/Time ub –USB Port/SD Card
ra - Remote Authentication

To restore a saved configuration to the SLC 8000 advanced console manager:

admin config restore <Config Name> location

<local|ftp|sftp|nfs|cifs|usb|sdcard> [nfsdir <NFS Mounted Dir>]
[usbport <U1|U2>] [savescripts<enable|disable>] [savesshkeys
<enable|disable>] [savesslcert <enable|disable>]
[preserveconfig <Config Params to Prserve>]
<Config Params to Preserve> is a comma-separated list of current configuration
parameters to retain after the config restore or factory defaults:
nt – Networking lu – Local Users
sv – Services dp – Device Ports
dt – Date/Time ub – USB Port/SD Card
ra - Remote Authentication

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 279

 13: Maintenance

To save the current SLC configuration to a selected location:

admin config save <Config Name> location

<local|ftp|sftp|nfs|cifs|usb|sdcard> [nfsdir <NFS Mounted Dir>] [usbport
<U1|U2>]

To rename a saved configuration:

admin config rename <Config Name> location <local|nfs|cifs|usb|sdcard>

[nfsdir <NFS Mounted Dir>] [usbport <U1|U2>]

To delete a saved configuration:

admin config delete <Config Name> location <local|nfs|cifs|usb|sdcard>

[usbport <U1|U2>]

To list the configurations saved to a location:

admin config show <local|ftp|sftp|nfs|cifs|usb|sdcard> [nfsdir <NFS

Mounted Dir>] [usbport <U1|U2>]

Displays a checksum for the current configuration to determine if the configuration has
changed:

admin config checksum

Copies the current configuration (or optionally, a configuration from another location) to
the other bank (for dual-boot SLCs):

admin config copy <current|Config Name>

[location <local|nfs|cifs|usb|sdcard>
[nfsdir <NFS Mounted Directory>] [usbport <U1|U2>] ]

To set the acceptable range for the internal temperature sensor (an SNMP trap is sent if the
temperature is outside of this range):

set temperature <one or more parameters>

Parameters
low <Low Temperature in C. or F.>
high <High Temperature in C. or F.>
calibrate <Temperature Calibration in C. or F.|cancel>

Note: The calibration offset will be applied one hour after setting the value.

To display the acceptable range and current reading from the internal temperature sensor:

show temperature

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 280

 13: Maintenance

System Logs
The Maintenance > System Logs page allows you to view various system logs. (See Chapter 7:
Services on page 89 for more information about system logs.) You can also clear logs on this
page.

To view system logs:

1. Click the Maintenance tab and select the System Logs option. The following page displays:

Figure 13-3 Maintenance > System Logs

2. Enter the following to define the parameters of the log you would like to view:
Log Select the type(s) of log you want to view:
 All
 Network
 Services
 Authentication
 Device Ports
 Diagnostics
 General
 Software
Level Select the alert level you want to view for the selected log:
 Error
 Warning
 Info
 Debug
Starting at Select the starting point of the range you want to view:
 Beginning of Log: to view the log from the earliest available beginning time and
date.
 Date: to view the log starting from aspecific starting date and time.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 281

 13: Maintenance

Ending at Select the endpoint of the range you want to view:

 End of Log: to view the log from the latest available ending time and date.
 Date: to view the log up to the last available log ending date and time.
3. Click the View Log button. Your specified system log displays. For example, if you select the
type All and the level Error, the SLC unit displays a log similar to this:

Figure 13-4 System Logs

From a queried system log (e.g., Figure 13-4), you may email this information to a specific
individual or to Lantronix Technical Support. See Emailing Logs and Reports (on page 293).

To clear system logs:

1. From the Maintenance > System Logs page, select Maintenance - System Logs.
2. Click the Clear Log button to clear all log information.

System Log Command

The following command for the command line interface corresponds to the web page entries
described above.

To view the system logs containing information and error messages:

show syslog [<parameters>]

Parameters
[email <Email Address>]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 282

 13: Maintenance

level <error|warning|info|debug>
log <all|netlog|servlog|authlog|devlog|diaglog|genlog>
display <head|tail> [numlines <Number of Lines>]
startingtime <MMDDYYhhmm[ss]
endtime <MMDDYYhhmm[ss]

Note: The level and time parameters cannot be used simultaneously.

To clear one or all of the system logs:

show syslog clear

<all|netlog|servlog|authlog|devlog|diaglog|genlog>

Audit Log
The Maintenance > Audit Log page displays a log of all actions that have changed the
configuration of the SLC 8000 advanced console manager. The audit log is disabled by default.
Use the Services > SSH/Telnet/Logging page (Chapter 7: Services) to enable the audit log and to
configure its maximum size.
Each entry in the log file contains a date/time stamp, user login, and the action performed by the
user. The user may clear the log file and sort the log by date/time, user, and command. The audit
log is saved through SLC reboots.
1. Click the Maintenance tab and select the Audit Log option. The following page displays:

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 283

 13: Maintenance

Figure 13-5 Maintenance > Audit Log

2. To select a sort option, click the appropriate button:

- To sort by date and time, click the sort by Date/Time button (this is the default.)
- To sort by user, click the sort by User button.
- To sort by command/action, click the sort by Command button.
3. To email this log, follow the instructions in Emailing Logs and Reports (on page 293).
4. To clear the log, click the Clear Log button.
5. To freeze or stop automatic refreshing of the log, click the Stop Refresh button.

Email Log
The Maintenance > Email Log page displays a log of all attempted emails. The log file can be
cleared from here. The email log is saved through SLC reboots.
1. Click the Maintenance tab and select the Email Log option. The following page displays:

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 284

 13: Maintenance

Figure 13-6 Maintenance > Email Log

2. To email this log, follow the instructions in Emailing Logs and Reports (on page 293).
3. To clear the log, click the Clear Log button.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 285

 13: Maintenance

Diagnostics
The Maintenance > Diagnostics page provides methods for diagnosing problems such as network
connectivity and device port input/output problems. You can use equivalent commands on the
command line interface.
1. Click the Maintenance tab and select the Diagnostics option. The following page displays:

Figure 13-7 Maintenance > Diagnostics

2. Select Diagnostics from checklist (one or more diagnostic methods you want to run, or select
All to run them all):

IPv4 ARP Table The IPv4 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table used to view the IP address-to-
hardware address mapping.
IPv6 Neighbor The IPv6 Neighbor table is used to view a list of neighbor's IPv6 addresses on the same
Table network, and their corresponding MAC addresses.
Netstat Displays network connections. If you select the checkbox, select the TCP or UDP protocol,
or select All for both protocols to control the output of the Netstat report.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 286

 13: Maintenance

Host Lookup Select to verify that the SLC 8000 advanced console manager can resolve the host
name into an IP address (if DNS is enabled). If selected, also enter a host name in the
corresponding Hostname field,
Ping Select to verify that the host is up and running. If selected, also do the following:
 Enter a host name in the corresponding Hostname field
 Specify Ethernet Port (Both, Eth1 or Eth2)
 Check if the IPv6 version of ping should be used.
Send Packet This option sends an Ethernet packet out one of the Ethernet ports, mainly as a network
connectivity test. For UDP, the number of times the string is sent is equal to the number
of packets sent. For TCP, the number of times the string is sent may (or may not) be
equal to the number of packets sent, because TCP controls how data is packetized and
sent out. Enter the following:
 Protocol: Select the type of packet to send (TCP or UDP).
 Hostname: Specify a host name or IPaddress of the host to send the packet to.
 Port: Specify a TCP or UDP port number of the host to send the packet to.
 String: Enter a set of up to 64 characters. The string is encapsulated in the packet (so
you could use a network sniffer to track the packet and, by looking at its contents,
verify that it was sent).
 Count: The count is the number of times the string is sent.
Loopback Specify loopback information:
 Device Port
 Select either an Internal or External test
Note: The External test is currently not supported for USB device ports
SLC Internals Select to display information on the internal memory, storage and processes of the SLC
8000 advanced console manager.
USB Devices Select to display information about USB buses and the devices connected to them,
including a mapping between a USB device and the SLC ports.

3. Click the Run Diagnostics button. The Maintenance > Diagnostics page displays.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 287

 13: Maintenance

Figure 13-8 Maintenance > Diagnostics

4. To view a report, click the link for that report.

5. To email this report, follow the instructions in Emailing Logs and Reports (on page 293).

Diagnostic Commands
The following CLI commands correspond to the web page entries described above.

To display the Address Resolution Protocol table (for IPv4) or the Neighbor table (for IPv6)
for mapping IP Addresses to hardware addresses:

diag arp|arp6 [email <Email Address>]

Note: You can optionally email the displayed information.

To display a report of network connections:

diag netstat [protocol <all|tcp|udp>] [email <Email Address>]

Note: You can optionally email the displayed information.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 288

 13: Maintenance

To resolve a host name into an IP address:

diag lookup <Hostname> [email <Email Address>]

You can optionally email the displayed information.

To test a device port by transmitting data out the port and verifying that it is received
correctly:

diag loopback <Device Port Number or Name>[<parameters>]

Parameters
test <internal|external>
xferdatasize <Size In Kbytes to Transfer>
Default is 1 Kbyte.

Note: A special loopback cable comes with the SLC unit. To test a device port, plug the
cable into the device port and run this command. The command sends the specified
Kbytes to the device port and reports success or failure. The test is performed at 9600
baud. Only an external test requires a loopback cable. The External test is currently not
supported for USB device ports.

To display the route that packets take to get to a network host:

diag traceroute <IP Address or Hostname>

To verify that a host is up and running:

diag ping|ping6 <IP Address or Name> [<parameters>]

Parameters
ethport <1|2> count <Number of Times to Ping>
The default is 5.
packetsize <Size in Bytes>
The default is 64.

To display performance statistics for an Ethernet port or a device port (averaged over the
last 5 seconds):

diag perfstat [ethport <1|2>] [deviceport <Device Port # or Name>]

To generate and send Ethernet packets:

diag sendpacket host <IP Address or Name> port <TCP or UDP Port Number>
[string <Packet String>] [protocol <tcp|udp>] [count <Number of
Packets>]
The default protocol is tcp and the default count is 1.

To display all network traffic, applying optional filters:

Note: This command is not available on the web interface.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 289

 13: Maintenance

diag nettrace <one or more parameters>

Parameters

ethport <1|2>
host <IP Address or Name>
numpackets <Number of Packets>
protocol <tcp|udp|icmp|esp>
verbose <enable|low|medium|high|disable>

To display CPU usage, memory usage and tasks.

diag top [parameters]

Parameters

continuous <enable|disable>
count <Number of Iterations to Display>
delay <Delay in Seconds>
numlines <Number of Lines to Display>
Defaults: count=1, delay = 5 seconds

To display information on the internal memory, storage and processes of the SLC 8000
advanced console manager:

diag internals
Enable debug printing on the next SLC reboot:
diag internals [printapplication <enable|disable>
printconnection <enable|disable>
printmanagement <enable|disable>

Note: This command is available on the web interface as SLC Internals under
Maintenance > Diagnostics.

To display information about USB buses and the devices connected to them, including the
mapping between a USB device and the SLC port:

diag usb [<parameters>]

Parameters

treedisplay <enable|disable>
mapdevice <enable|disable>
email <Email Address>
Defaults: treedisplay=enable

Note: For "mapdevice enable", the port numbers will display at the end of the line in
square brackets.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 290

 13: Maintenance

Status/Reports
On this page, you can view the status of the SLC ports and power supplies and generate a
selection of reports.

Note: Status and statistics shown on the web interface represent a snapshot in time. To
see the most recent data, you must reload the web page.

1. Click the Maintenance tab and select the Status/Reports option. The following page
displays:

Figure 13-9 Maintenance > Status/Reports

The top half of the page displays the status of each port, power supply, and the internal modem:
- Green indicates that the port connection or power supply is active and functioning correctly.
- Red indicates an error or failure or that the device is off.
2. Select the desired reports to view under View Report:

View Report
All Displays all reports.
Port Status Displays the status of each device port: mode, user, any related connections,
and serial port settings.
Port Counters Displays statistics related to the flow of data through each device port.
IP Routes Displays the routing table.
Connections Displays all active connections for the SLC unit: Telnet, SSH, TCP, UDP,
device port, and modem.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 291

 13: Maintenance

System Configuration – Displays a complete snapshot of the SLC settings.

Complete
System Configuration – Displays a snapshot of the SLC unit's basic settings (for example, network,
Basic date/time, routing, services, console port).
System Configuration – Displays a snapshot of authentication settings only (including a list of all
Authentication localusers).
System Configuration - Displays a snapshot of settings for each device port, USB Port, Modem, and
Devices Host Lists.

3. Click the Generate Report button. In the upper left of the Generated Status/Reports page
displays a list of reports generated.

Figure 13-10 Generated Status/Reports

4. To email these report(s), follow the instructions in Emailing Logs and Reports (on page 293).

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 292

 13: Maintenance

Status Commands
These commands for the command line interface correspond to the web page entries described
above.

To display device port modes and states for one or more ports:

show portstatus [deviceport <Device Port List or Name>] [email <Email

Address>]
You can optionally email the displayed information.

To display a snapshot of configurable parameters:

show sysconfig [display <basic|auth|devices>] [email <Email Address]

You can optionally email the displayed information.
Displays a report of all configurable parameters or a shorter report with basic system settings,
authentication settings, or device settings.

To generate a report for one or more ports:You can optionally email the displayed
information.

show portcounters [deviceport <Device Port List or Name>] [email <Email

Address>]

To display the overall status of all SLC units:

show sysstatus [email <Email Address>]

You can optionally email the displayed information.

To display a list of all current connections:

show connections [email <Email Address>]

You can optionally email the displayed information.

To provide details, e.g., endpoint parameters and trigger, for a specific connection:

show connections connid <Connection ID> [email <Email Address>]

You can optionally email the displayed information.

Note: Use the basic show connections command to obtain the Connection ID.

Emailing Logs and Reports

The following logs and reports can be directly emailed to a specific individual or to Lantronix
Technical Support directly from the log page:
 System Log (Figure 13-4)
 Audit Log (Figure 13-5)
 Email Log (Figure 13-6)

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 293

 13: Maintenance

 Diagnostic Reports (Figure 13-8)

 Status/Reports (Figure 13-10)

To email a log to an individual:

1. In the Comment field of a particular log or report page, enter a comment (if desired).
2. Select the to field beside the empty field where you then enter the person's email address.
3. Press the Email Output button. An email is immediately sent out and a confirmation appears
on the screen.

Figure 13-11 Emailed Log or Report

To view information about the SLC unit and contact information for Lantronix:

1. Click the button on the upper right portion of any web page to access the About SLC page
(see Figure 13-12).

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 294

 13: Maintenance

Figure 13-12 About SLC

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 295

 13: Maintenance

Events
On this Maintenance > Events page, you can define what action you want to take for events that
may occur in the SLC unit.
1. Click the Maintenance tab and select the Events option. The following page displays:

Figure 13-13 Maintenance > Events

2. Enter the following:

Event Trigger From the drop-down list, select the type of incident that triggers an event. Currently,
the options are:
 Receive Trap
 Temperature Over/Under Limit (for Sensorsoft devices)
 Humidity Over/Under Limit (for Sensorsoft devices)
 Device Port Data Drop
 No Internal Modem Dial Tone
 Ping Host Fails
 RPM Load Over Threshold
Host to Ping When the trigger is set to Ping Host Fails, enter the hostname, IPv4 address or
IPv6 address of the host to ping. The host will be pinged every 2 minutes.
RPM When the trigger is set to RPM Load over Threshold, select the RPM that will be
monitored for a current that exceeds a defined threshold. The RPM needs to
support providing a current level as part of its status information. The RPM current
will be checked every 2 minutes.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 296

 13: Maintenance

Outlet When the trigger is set to RPM Load over Threshold, select the outlet that will be
monitored for a current that exceeds a defined threshold. The RPM needs to
support providing a current level for the selected outlet as part of its status
information. If an outlet is not specified, the current level for the entire device will be
monitored. The RPM current will be checked every 2 minutes.
Threshold When the trigger is set to RPM Load over Threshold, specify the maximum
allowable threshold for the current; any current readings over this threshold will
trigger the selected action. The threshold can be specified in Amps (e.g. 8.5) or as
a percentage (e.g. 90%).
Action From the drop-down list, select the action taken because of the trigger. For
example, the action can be writing an entry into the syslog with details of the event
or sending the trap(s) to the Ethernet or modem connection.
 Syslog
 Forward All Traps to Ethernet
 Forward Selected Trap to Ethernet
 Forward all Traps to a Modem Connection
 Forward Selected Trap to a Modem Connection
 Email Alert
 SNMP Trap
Ethernet For actions that require an Ethernet connection (for example, Forward All Traps to
Ethernet), select the Ethernet port to use.
Modem Connection For actions that require a modem connection (for example, Forward All Traps to a
on Modem Connection, select which modem connection to use (Device Port, USB
Port U1, USB Port U2, or the Internal Modem). Connections available depend on
the model of the SLC unit.
NMS/Host to forward For actions that forward a trap, enter the IP address of the computer to forward the
trap to trap to. The computer does not have to be an SNMP NMS; it just has to be capable
of receiving SNMP traps.
SNMP Community Forwarded traps are sent with this SNMP community value
There is no default.
SNMP Trap OID Enter a unique identifier for an SNMP object. (An SNMP object is anything that can
hold a value and can be read using an SNMP "get" action.) The OID consists of a
string of numbers separated by periods (for example, 1.1.3.2.1). Each number is
part of a group represented by the number on its left.
Email Addresses Enter an email address to receive email alerts.

3. You have the following options:

- To add the defined event, click the Add Event button. The event displays in the Events
table at the bottom of the page.
- To edit an event, select the event from the Events table and click the Edit Event button.
The Maintenance > Events page displays the event.
- To delete an event, select the event from the Events table and click the Delete Event
button. A message asks for confirmation. Click OK.
4. To save, click Apply.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 297

 13: Maintenance

Events Commands
To manage the response to events that occur in the SLC 8000 advanced console manager:

admin events add <trigger> <response>

<trigger> is one of: dpdatadrop, humidlimit, nomodemdial, pingfails,
receivetrap, rpmload or templimit
|receivetrap|templimit|humidlimit|overcurrent|dpdatadrop
<response> is one of:
action <syslog>
action <fwdalltrapseth|fwdseltrapeth> ethport <1|2> nms <SNMP NMS>
community <SNMP Community> [oid <SNMP OID>]
action <fwdalltrapsmodem|fwdseltrapmodem> deviceport <Device Port
# or Name> nms <SNMP NMS> community <SNMP Community> [oid <SNMP
Trap OID>]
action <fwdalltrapsmodem|fwdseltrapmodem> usbport <U1|U2>
nms <SNMP NMS> community <SNMP Community> [oid <SNMP Trap OID>]
action <fwdalltrapsmodem|fwdseltrapmodem> internal modem
nms <SNMP NMS> community <SNMP Community> [oid <SNMP Trap OID>]
action <emailalert> emailaddress <destination email address>

To update event definitions:

admin events edit <Event ID> <parameters>

Parameters
community <SNMP Community>
deviceport <Device Port # or Name>
ethport <1|2>
host <IP Address or Name>
internal modem
nms <SNMP NMS>
oid <SNMP Trap OID>
outlet <Outlet #>
rpm <RPM Id or Name>
threshold <Load Percentage|Current in Amps>
usbport <U1|U2>
emailaddress <destination email address>

To delete an event:

admin events delete <Event ID>

To view events:

admin events show

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 298

 13: Maintenance

LCD/Keypad
The LCD has a series of screens, consisting of 2 lines of 24 characters each. Specific screens and
the display order can be configured. The keypad associated with the LCD can also be configured.
The types of screens include: current time, network settings, console settings, date and time,
release version, location, and custom user strings.
Enabling the Auto-Scroll LCD Screens option enables scrolling through the screens and pausing
the number of seconds specified by the Scroll Delay between each screen. After any input to the
keypad, the LCD waits until the keypad has been idle for the number of seconds specified by the
Idle Delay before scrolling of the screens continues.

To configure the LCD and Keypad:

1. Click the Maintenance tab and select the LCD/Keypad option.

Figure 13-14 Maintenance > LCD/Keypad

To configure the LCD:

The screens that are currently enabled are displayed in order in the left Enabled screens list.

1. Select a screen to be removed from the Enabled Screens and click the button. The
screen moves to the Disabled Screens list to the right.

2. Select a screen to be added from the Disabled Screens list and click the button. The
screen is added to the Enabled Screens to the left.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 299

 13: Maintenance

3. Select a screen in the Enabled Screens list and click the or button to change the
order of the screens.

Note: The User Strings screen displays the 2 lines defined by the User Strings - Line 1
and Line 2 fields. By default, these user strings are blank.

4. Click Apply to save.

To configure the Keypad:

1. Enter the following fields.

Keypad Locked Select this to lock out any input to the keypad. The default is for
the keypad to be unlocked.
Restore Factory Defaults Password / Enter the 6 digit key sequence entered at the keypad to restore
Retype Password the SLC unit to factory defaults. The default is 999999.

2. Click Apply to save.

LCD/Keypad Commands
The following CLI commands correspond to the Maintenance > LCD/Keypad page. For more
information, see Chapter 15: Command Reference on page 308.
 admin keypad
 admin keypad password
 admin keypad show
 admin lcd reset
 admin lcd default
 admin lcd screens
 admin lcd line1
 admin lcd scrolling
 admin lcd show

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 300

 13: Maintenance

Banners
The Maintenance > Banners page allows the system administrator to customize text messages
that display to users.

To configure banner settings:

1. Click the Maintenance tab and select Banners option.

Figure 13-15 Maintenance > Banners

2. Enter the following fields.

Welcome Banner The text to display on the command line interface before the user logs in. May
contain up to 1024 characters. Single quote and double quote characters are not
supported. Welcome to the SLC is the default.
Note: To create more lines use the \n character sequence.
Login Banner The text to display on the command line interface after the user logs in. May
contain up to 1024 characters. Single quote and double quote characters are not
supported. Default is blank.
Note: To create more lines, use the \n character sequence.
Logout Banner The text to display on the command line interface after the user logs out. May
contain up to 1024 characters. Single quote and double quote characters are not
supported. Default is blank.
Note: To create more lines use, the \n character sequence.
SSH Banner The text to display when a user logs into the SLC via SSH, prior to authentication.
May contain up to 1024 characters. Single quote and double quote characters are
not supported. Blank by default.
Note: To create more lines use the \n character sequence.

3. Click Apply to save.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 301

 13: Maintenance

Banner Commands
The following CLI commands correspond to the Maintenance > Banners page. For more
information, see Chapter 15: Command Reference on page 308.
 admin banner login
 admin banner logout
 admin banner show
 admin banner ssh
 admin banner welcome

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 302

14: Application Examples
Each SLC advanced console manager has multiple serial ports and two network ports. Each serial
port can be connected to the console port of an IT device. Using a network port (in-band) or a
modem (out-of-band) for dial-up connection, an administrator can remotely access any of the
connected IT devices using Telnet or SSH.

Figure 14-1 SLC - Console Manager Configuration

SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager

This chapter includes three typical scenarios for using the SLC unit. The scenarios assume that
the SLC 8000 advanced console manager is connected to the network and has already been
assigned an IP address. In the examples, we use the command line interface. You can do the
same things using the web page interface except for directly interacting with the SLC unit (direct
command).

Telnet/SSH to a Remote Device

The following figure shows a Sun server connected to port 2 of the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager.

Figure 14-2 Remote User Connected to a SUN Server via the SLC unit
Sun Server

Remote User

Internet
SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager

In this example, the sysadmin would:

1. Display the current settings for device port 2:

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 303

 14: Application Examples

[SLC]> show deviceport port 2

___Current Device Port
Settings________________________________________________
Number: 2 Name: Port-2

Modem Settings-------------Data Settings----------IP Settings-------

Modem State: disabled Baud Rate: 9600 Telnet: disabled
Modem Mode: text Data Bits: 8 Telnet Port: 2002
Timeout Logins: disabled Stop Bits: 1 SSH: disabled
Local IP: negotiate Parity: none SSH Port: 3002
Remote IP: negotiate Flow Control: xon/xoff IP: <none>
Authentication: PAP Logins: disabled
CHAP Host: <none> Break Sequence: \x1bB
CHAP Secret: <none> Check DSR: disabled
NAT: disabled Close DSR: disabled
Dial-out Login: <none>
Dial-out Password: <none>
Dial-out Number: <none>
Dial-back Number: usernumber
Initialization Script: <none>

Logging Settings----------------------------------------------------
Local Logging: disabled USB Logging: disabled
Email Logging: disabled Log to: upper slot
Byte Threshold: 100 Max number of files: 10
Email Delay: 60 seconds Max size of files: 2048
Restart Delay: 60 seconds
Email To: <none>
Email Subject: Port %d Logging
Email String: <none>
NFS File Logging: disabled
Directory to log to: <none>
Max number of files: 10
Max size of files: 2048
2. Change the baud to 57600 and disable flow control:
[SLC]> set deviceport port 2 baud 57600 flowcontrol none
Device Port settings successfully updated.
3. Connect to the device port:
[SLC]> connect direct deviceport 2
4. View messages from the SUN server console:
Mar 15 09:09:44 tssf280r sendmail[292]: [ID 702911 mail.info] starting
daemon (8.12.2+Sun): SMTP+queueing@00:15:00
Mar 15 09:09:44 tssf280r sendmail[293]: [ID 702911 mail.info] starting
daemon (8.12.2+Sun): queueing@00:15:00
Mar 15 14:44:40 tssf280r sendmail[275]: [ID 702911 mail.info] starting
daemon (8.12.2+Sun): SMTP+queueing@00:15:00
Mar 15 14:44:40 tssf280r sendmail[276]: [ID 702911 mail.info] starting
daemon (8.12.2+Sun): queueing@00:15:00
5. Reboot the SUN server:
Reboot

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 304

 14: Application Examples

<shutdown messages from SUN>

6. Use the escape sequence to escape from direct mode back to the command line interface.

Dial-in (Text Mode) to a Remote Device

This example shows a phone line connection to the internal modem of the SLC, and a Sun server
connected to a device port. You can configure the modem for text mode dial-in, so a remote user
can dial into the modem using a terminal emulation program and access the Sun server.

Figure 14-3 Dial-in (Text Mode) to a Remote Device

Sun UNIX Server

Remote User
Serial Cable to Port 2
Phone System

Phone SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager

Line

In this example, the sysadmin would:

1. Configure the device port that the modem is connected to for dial-in:
[SLC]> set deviceport port 1 modemmode text
Device Port settings successfully updated.
[SLC]> set deviceport port 1 initscript "AT&F&K3&C1&D2%C0A"
Device Port settings successfully updated.
[SLC]> set deviceport port 1 auth pap
Device Port settings successfully updated.
[SLC]> set deviceport port 1 localsecret "password"
Device Port settings successfully updated.
[SLC]> set deviceport port 1 modemstate dialin
Device Port settings successfully updated.
[SLC]>
2. Configure the device port that is connected to the console port of the Sun UNIX server:
[SLC]> set deviceport port 2 baud 57600 flowcontrol none
Device Port settings successfully updated.
3. Dial into the SLC 8000 advanced console manager via the modem using a terminal emulation
program on a remote PC. A command line prompt displays.
4. Log into the SLC unit.
CONNECT 57600
Welcome to the SLC
login: sysadmin
Password:
Welcome to the SLC Console Manager
Model Number: SLC 8048
For a list of commands, type 'help'.
[SLC]>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 305

 14: Application Examples

5. Connect to the SUN Unix server using the direct command.

[SLC]> connect direct deviceport 2
SunOS 5.7
login: frank
Password:
Last login: Wed Jul 14 16:07:49 from computer
Sun Microsystems Inc.SunOS 5.7Generic October 1998
SunOS computer 5.7 Generic_123485-05 sun4m sparc SUNW,SPARCstation-20
$

6. Use the escape sequence to escape from direct mode back to the command line interface.

Local Serial Connection to Network Device via Telnet

This example shows a terminal device connected to an SLC device port, and a Sun server
connected over the network to the SLC device. When a connection is established between the
device port and an outbound Telnet session, users can access the Sun server as though they
were directly connected to it. (See Chapter 11: Connections on page 209).

Figure 14-4 Local Serial Connection to Network Device via Telnet

SLC 8000 Advanced Console Manager Sun UNIX Server

Internet
Serial Cable
to Device Port 2

In this example, the sysadmin would:

1. Display the current settings for device port 2:
[SLC]> show deviceport port 2
___Current Device Port
Settings________________________________________________
Number: 2 Name: Port-2
Modem Settings-------------Data Settings-----------IP Settings-------
Modem State: disabled Baud Rate: 9600 Telnet: disabled
Modem Mode: text Data Bits: 8 Telnet Port: 2002
Timeout Logins: disabled Stop Bits: 1 SSH: disabled
Local IP: negotiate Parity: none SSH Port: 3002
Remote IP: negotiate Flow Control: xon/xoff IP: <none>
Authentication: PAP Logins: disabled
CHAP Host: <none> Break Sequence: \x1bB
CHAP Secret: <none> Check DSR: disabled
NAT: disabled Close DSR: disabled
Dial-out Login: <none>
Dial-out Password: <none>
Dial-out Number: <none>
Dial-back Number: usernumber
Initialization Script: <none>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 306

 14: Application Examples

Logging Settings----------------------------------------------------
Local Logging: disabled USB Logging: disabled
Email Logging: disabled Log to: upper slot
Byte Threshold: 100 Max number of files: 10
Email Delay: 60 seconds Max size of files: 2048
Restart Delay: 60 seconds
Email To: <none>
Email Subject: Port %d Logging
Email String: <none>
NFS File Logging: disabled
Directory to log to: <none>
Max number of files: 10
Max size of files: 2048
2. Change the serial settings to match the serial settings for the vt100 terminal - changes baud to
57600 and disables flow control:
[SLC]> set deviceport port 2 baud 57600 flowcontrol none
Device Port settings successfully updated.
3. Create a connection between the vt100 terminal connected to device port 2 and an outbound
telnet session to the server. (The IP address of the server is 192.168.1.1):
[SLC]> connect bidirection 2 telnet 192.168.1.1
Connection settings successfully updated.
4. At the VT100 terminal, hit <return> a couple of times. The Telnet prompt from the server
displays:
Trying 192.168.1.1...
Connected to 192.168.1.1.
Escape character is '^]'.

Sun OS 8.0
login:

At this point, a user can log in and interact with the Sun server at the VT100 terminal as if directly
connected to the server.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 307

15: Command Reference
After an introduction to using commands, this chapter lists and describes all of the commands
available on the SLC command line interface accessed through Telnet, SSH, or a serial
connection. The commands are in alphabetical order by category.

Introduction to Commands
Following is some information about command syntax, command line help, and tips for using
commands.

Command Syntax
Commands have the following format:
<action> <category> <parameter(s)>
where
<action> is set, show, connect, admin, diag, or logout.
<category> is a group of related parameters whose settings you want to
configure or view. Examples are ntp, deviceport, and network.
<parameter(s)> is one or more name-value pairs in one of the following
formats:
<parameter name> <aa|bb> User must specify one of the values (aa or bb) separated by a
vertical line ( | ). The values are in all lowercase and must be
entered exactly as shown. Bold indicates a default value.
<parameter name> <Value> User must specify an appropriate value, for example, an IP
address. The parameter values are in mixed case. Square brackets
[ ] indicate optional parameters.

Table 15-1 Actions and Category Options

Action Category

set auth|cifs|cli|command|consoleport|datetime|deviceport|
groups|history|hostlist|intmodem|ipfilter|kerberos|ldap|
localusers|log|menu|network|nfs|nis|ntp|password|radius|
remoteusers|routing|rpm|script|sdcard|security|services|
site|slcnetwork|sshkey|tacacs+|temperature|usb|vpn
show auth|auditlog|cifs|cli|connections|consoleport|datetime|
deviceport|emaillog|groups|history|hostlist|intmodem|
ipfilter|kerberos|ldap|localusers|log|menu|network|nfs|nis|
ntp|portcounters|portstatus|radius|remoteusers|routing|rpm|
script|sdcard|security|services|site|slcnetwork|sshkey|
sysconfig|syslog|sysstatus|tacacs+|temperature|usb|user|vpn
connect bidirection|direct|global|listen|restart|script|terminate
|unidirection

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 308

 15: Command Reference

Action Category
(continued)
diag arp|arp6|internals|lookup|loopback|netstat|nettrace|perfstat
|ping|ping6|sendpacket|top|traceroute|usb
admin banner|chip|clear|config|events|firmware|ftp|keypad|lcd|
memory|quicksetup|reboot|shutdown|site|version|web
logout Terminates CLI session.

Command Line Help

For general Help and to display the commands to which you have rights, type:

help

For general command line Help, type:

help command line

For release notes for the current firmware release, type:

help release

For more information about a specific command, type help followed by the command, for
example:

help set network or help admin firmware

Tips
 Type enough characters to identify the action, category, or parameter name uniquely. For
parameter values, type the entire value. For example, you can shorten:
set network port 1 state static ipaddr 122.3.10.1 mask 255.255.0.0
to
se net po 1 st static ip 122.3.10.1 ma 255.255.0.0
 Use the Tab key to automatically complete action, category, or parameter names. Type a
partial name and press Tab either to complete the name if only one is possible, or to display
the possible names if more than one is possible. Following a space after the preceding name,
Tab displays all possible names.
 Should you make a mistake while typing, backspace by pressing the Backspace key and/or
the Delete key, depending on how you accessed the interface. Both keys work if you use
VT100 emulation in your terminal access program when connecting to the console port. Use
the left and right arrow keys to move within a command.
 Use the up and down arrows to scroll through previously entered commands. If desired,
select one and edit it. You can scroll through up to 100 previous commands entered in the
session.
 To clear an IP address, type 0.0.0.0, or to clear a non-IP address value, type CLEAR.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 309

 15: Command Reference

 When the number of lines displayed by a command exceeds the size of the window (the
default is 25), the command output is halted until the user is ready to continue. To display the
next line, press Enter, and to display the page, press the space bar. You can override the
number of lines (or disable the feature altogether) with the set cli command.
 Keyboard Shortcuts:
Control-a: move to the start of the line
Control-e: move to the end of the line
Control-b: move back to the start of the current word
Control-f: move forward to the end of the next word
Control-u: erase from cursor to the beginning of the line
Control-k: erase from cursor to end of the line

Administrative Commands

admin banner login

Syntax

admin banner login <Banner Text>

Description

Configures the banner displayed after the user logs in.

Note: To go to the next line, type \n and press Enter.

admin banner logout0

Syntax

admin banner logout <Banner Text>

Description

Configures the banner displayed after the user logs out.

Note: To go to the next line, type \n and press Enter.

admin banner show

Syntax

admin banner show

Description

Displays the welcome, SSH, login, and logout banners.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 310

 15: Command Reference

admin banner ssh

Syntax

admin banner ssh <Banner Text>

Description

Configures the banner that displays prior to SSH authorization.

admin banner welcome

Syntax

admin banner welcome <Banner Text>

Description

Configures the banner displayed before the user logs in.

Note: To go to the next line, type \n and press Enter.

admin config checksum

Syntax

admin config checksum

Description

Displays a checksum for the current configuration. Can be used to determine if the configuration
has changed.

admin config copy

Syntax

admin config copy <current|Config Name>

[location <local|nfs|cifs|usb|sdcard>
[nfsdir <NFS Mounted Directory>] [usbport <U1|U2>] ]

Description

Copies the current configuration (or optionally, a configuration from another location) to the other
bank (for dual-boot SLCs).

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 311

 15: Command Reference

admin config rename|delete

Syntax

admin config delete <Config Name> location <local|nfs|cifs|usb|sdcard>

[usbport <U1|U2>] [nfsdir <NFS Mounted Directory>]
admin config rename <Config Name> location <local|nfs|cifs|usb|sdcard>
[usbport <U1|U2>] [nfsdir <NFS Mounted Directory>]

Description

Deletes or renames a configuration.

admin config factorydefaults

Syntax

admin config factorydefaults [savesshkeys <enable|disable>] [savesslcert

<enable|disable>] [preserveconfig <Config Params to Preserve>]
[savescripts <enable|disable>]
<Config Params to Preserve> is a comma-separated list of current configuration
parameters to retain after the config restore or factorydefaults:

nt Networking
sv Services
dt Date/Time
lu Local Users
dp Device Ports
ra Remote Authentication
ub USB Port/SD Card

Description

Restores the SLC unit to factory default settings.

admin config restore

Syntax

admin config restore <Config Name> location

<local|ftp|sftp|nfs|cifs|usb|sdcard> [nfsdir <NFS Mounted Directory>]
[usbport <U1|U2>] [preserveconfig <Config Params to Preserve>]
[savesshkeys <enable|disable>]
[savesslcert <enable|disable>]
[savescripts <enable|disable>]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 312

 15: Command Reference

<Config Params to Preserve> is a comma-separated list of current configuration

parameters to retain after the config restore or factorydefaults:

nt Networking
sv Services
dt Date/Time
lu Local Users
ra Remote Authentication
dp Device Ports
ub USB Port/SD Card

Description

Restores a saved configuration to the SLC 8000 advanced console manager.

admin config save

Syntax

admin config save <Config Name> location

<local|ftp|sftp|nfs|cifs|usb|sdcard> [nfsdir <NFS Mounted Dir>] [usbport
<U1|U2>]
[savesshkeys <enable|disable>]
[savesslcert <enable|disable>]
[savescripts <enable|disable>]

Description

Saves the current SLC configuration to a selected location.

admin config show

Syntax

admin config show <local|ftp|sftp|nfs|cifs|usb|sdcard> [nfsdir <NFS

Mounted Dir>] [usbport <U1|U2>]

Description

Lists the configurations saved to a location.

admin firmware bootbank

Syntax

admin firmware bootbank <1|2>

Description

Sets the boot bank to be used at the next SLC reboot.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 313

 15: Command Reference

admin firmware bootcount

Syntax

admin firmware bootcount <0|1>

Description

Configures bootcount parameterse that control how many times the SLC has failed to boot. If this
value reaches Boot Limit, the SLC will switch to the alternate boot bank. The SLC will switch to the
alternate boot bank only once. For example, if it fails to boot Boot Limit times on bank 1, it will
automatically switch to bank 2; if it fails to boot Boot Limit times on bank 2, it will enter advanced
recovery mode. If Boot Count has reached Boot Limit, setting this value to 0 will enable the SLC to
boot again. Default is 0, range is 0 - 1.

admin firmware bootlimit

Syntax

admin firmware bootlimit <3-20>

Description

Configures bootlimit parameters that control how many times the SLC will fail to boot before
switching to the alternate boot bank. After the SLC fails to boot 2 times Boot limit (so it has
attempted to boot Boot Limit times on each bank), the SLC will go into advanced recovery mode,
which may require support from Technical Support to resolve so that the SLC can be booted
again. Default is 3 boots, range is 3 - 20.

admin firmware bootdelay

Syntax

admin firmware bootdelay <3-1800>

Description

Configures bootcount parameters that control how seconds the bootloader pauses before booting
the SLC. The default is 3 seconds and the range is between 3 and 1800 seconds.

admin firmware watchdog

Syntax

admin firmware watchdog <disable|180-1800 seconds>

Description

Configures how long the SLC waits for boot completion before forcing a reboot.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 314

 15: Command Reference

admin firmware show

Syntax

admin firmware show [viewlog <enable|disable>]

Description

Lists the current firmware revision, the boot bank status, and optionally
displays the log containing details about firmware updates.

admin firmware update

Syntax

admin firmware update <ftp|tftp|sftp|nfs|usb|sdcard> file <Firmware

File> key <Checksum Key> [nfsdir <NFS Mounted Dir>] [usbport <U1|U2>]

Description

Updates SLC firmware to a new revision.

You should be able to access the firmware file using the settings admin ftp show displays if
FTP, TFTP or SFTP are used to load the firmware file. The SLC 8000 advanced console manager
automatically reboots after successful update.

admin firmware clearlog

Syntax

admin firmware clearlog

Description

Clears the firmware update log.

admin ftp password

Syntax

admin ftp password

Description

Sets the FTP server password and prevent it from being echoed.

admin ftp server

Syntax

admin ftp server <IP Address or Hostname> [login <User Login>] [path
<Directory>]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 315

 15: Command Reference

Description

Sets the FTP/TFTP/SFTP server used for firmware updates and configuration save/restore.

admin ftp show

Syntax

admin ftp show

Description

Displays FTP settings.

admin keypad

Syntax

admin keypad <lock|unlock>

Description

Locks or unlocks the LCD keypad.

If the keypad is locked, you can scroll through settings but not change them.

admin keypad password

Syntax

admin keypad password

Must be 6 digits.

Description

Changes the Restore Factory Defaults password used at the LCD to return the SLC advanced
console server to the factory settings.

admin keypad show

Syntax

admin keypad show

Description

Displays keypad settings.

admin lcd reset

Syntax

admin lcd reset

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 316

 15: Command Reference

Description

Restarts the program that controls the LCD.

admin lcd default

Syntax

admin lcd default

Description

Restores the LCD screens to their factory default settings.

admin lcd screens

Syntax

admin lcd screens

<zero or more parameters>

Parameters

currtime <1-9>
network <1-9>
console <1-9>
datetime <1-9>
release <1-9>
devports <1-9>
location <1-9>
temp <1-9>
userstrings <1-9>

Description

Sets which screens will be displayed on the LCD, and their order.

admin lcd line1

Syntax

admin lcd line1

<1-24 Chars> line2 <1-24 Chars>

Description

Sets the strings displayed on the LCD user string screen.

admin lcd scrolling

Syntax

admin lcd scrolling <enable|disable>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 317

 15: Command Reference

[scrolldelay <Delay in Seconds>] [idledelay <Delay in Seconds>]

Description

Configures auto-scroll of the LCD screens, including the number of

seconds after keypad input before auto-scrolling restarts.

admin memory show

Syntax

admin memory show

Description

Displays information about SLC memory usage.

admin memory swap add

Syntax

admin memory swap add <Size of Swap in MB> usbport <U1|U2>

Description

Creates a swap space from an external storage device.

admin memory swap delete

Syntax

admin memory swap delete

Description

Deletes the swap space from an external storage device.

admin quicksetup

Syntax

admin quicksetup

Description

Runs the quick setup script.

admin reboot

Syntax

admin reboot

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 318

 15: Command Reference

Description

Immediately terminates all connections and reboots the SLC 8000 advanced console manager.
The front panel LCD displays the “Rebooting the SLC” message, and the normal boot sequence
occurs.

admin shutdown

Syntax

admin shutdown

Description

Prepares the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to be powered off.

When you use this command to shut down the SLC console manager, the LCD front panel
displays the “Shutting down the SLC” message, followed by a pause, and then “Shutdown
complete.” When “Shutdown complete” displays, it is safe to power off the SLC 8000 advanced
console manager.

admin site

Syntax

admin site row <Data Center Rack Row Number>

admin site cluster <Data Center Rack Group Number>
admin site rack <Data Center Rack Number>

Description

Configures information about the site where the SLC 8000 advanced console manager is located.

admin version

Syntax

admin version

Description

Displays current hardware and firmware information.

admin web certificate import

Syntax

admin web certificate import via <sftp|scp> certfile <Certificate File>

privfile <Private Key File> host <IP Address or Name>
login <User Login> [path <Path to Files>]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 319

 15: Command Reference

Description

Imports an SSL certificate.

admin web certificate reset

Syntax

admin web certificate reset

Description

Resets the web server to the default SSL certificate.

admin web certificate custom

Syntax

admin web certificate custom

Description

Generates a custom self-signed SSL certificate. The SHA256 hashing algorithm will be used to
generate the certificate.

admin web certificate show

Syntax

admin web certificate show

Description

Displays the web server SSL certificate.

admin web gadget

Syntax

admin web gadget <enable|disable>

Description

Enables or disables iGoogle Gadget web content.

admin web group

Syntax

admin web group <Local or Remote Group Name>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 320

 15: Command Reference

Description

Configures the group that can access the web.

admin web server

Syntax

admin web server <enable|disable>

Description

Enables or disables running the web server (TCP ports 80 and 443).
admin web server <enable|disable>

admin web timeout

Syntax

admin web timeout <disable|5-120>

Description

Configures the timeout for web sessions.

admin web terminate

Syntax

admin web terminate <Session ID>

Description

Terminates a web session.

admin web show

Syntax

admin web show [viewcipherlist <enable|disable>]

Description

Displays the current sessions, with optional extra sessions or current ciphers.

admin web banner

Syntax

admin web banner

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 321

 15: Command Reference

Description

Configures the banner displayed on the web home page.

admin web iface

Syntax

admin web iface <none,eth1,eth2,ppp>

Description

Defines a list of network interfaces the web is available on.

admin web cipher

Syntax

admin web cipher <high|himed|fips>

Description

Configures the strength of the cipher used by the web server (high is 256, 168 and some 128 bit,
medium is 128 bit)

admin web tlsv10

Syntax

admin web tlsv10 <enable|disable>

Description

Enables or disables TLS v1.0.

admin web tlsv11

Syntax

admin web tlsv11 <enable|disable>

Description

Enables or disables TLS v1.1.

admin web restart

Syntax

admin web restart

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 322

 15: Command Reference

Description

Restarts the web server.

Warning: The following admin chip commands should only be used under the
direction of Lantronix Technical Support.

admin chip resetmodem

Description

Resets the internal modem chip in key system chips.

Syntax

admin chip resetmodem

admin chip reseti2cmux

Description

Resets the I2C Mux chip in key system chips.

Syntax

admin chip reseti2cmux

admin chip resetsfp ethport <1|2>

Description

Resets the SFP chip in key system chips.

Syntax

admin chip resetsfp ethport <1|2>

Audit Log Commands

show auditlog

Syntax

show auditlog [command|user|clear]

Description

Displays audit log. By default, shows the audit log sorted by date/time. You can sort it by user or
command, or clear the audit log.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 323

 15: Command Reference

Authentication Commands

set auth

Syntax

set auth <one or more parameters>

Parameters

authusenextmethod <enable|disable>
kerberos <1-6>
ldap <1-6>
localusers <1-6>
nis <1-6>
radius <1-6>
tacacs+ <1-6>

Description

Sets ordering of authentication methods.

Local Users authentication is always the first method used. Any methods omitted from the
command are disabled.

show auth

Syntax

show auth

Description

Displays authentication methods and their order of precedence.

show user

Syntax

show user

Description

Displays attributes of the currently logged in user.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 324

 15: Command Reference

Kerberos Commands

set kerberos

Syntax

set kerberos <one or more parameters>

Parameters

allowdialback <enable|disable>
clearports <Port List>
custommenu <Menu Name>
dataports <Port List>
dialbacknumber <Phone Number>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>
group <default|power|admin>
ipaddr <Key Distribution Center IP Address>
kdc <Key Distribution Center>
listenports <Port List>
permissions <Permission List>

Note: See User Permissions Commands (on page 334) for information on groups and user
rights.

port <Key Distribution Center TCP Port>

realm <Kerberos Realm>
state <enable|disable>
useldapforlookup <enable|disable>

Description

Configures the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to use Kerberos to authenticate users who
log in via the Web, SSH, Telnet, or the console port.

show kerberos

Syntax

show kerberos

Description

Displays Kerberos settings.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 325

 15: Command Reference

LDAP Commands

set ldap

Syntax

set ldap <one or more parameters>

Parameters

state <enable|disable>
server1 <IP Address or Name>
server2 <IP Address or Name>
port <TCP Port>
base <LDAP Base>
bindname <Bind Name>
bindwithlogin <enable|disable>
useldapschema <enable|disable>
adsupport <enable|disable>
filteruser <User Login Attribute>
filtergroup <Group Objectclass>
grmemberattr <Group Membership Attribute>
grmembervalue <dn|name>
encrypt <starttls|ssl|disable>
dataports <Port List>
listenports <Port List>
clearports <Port List>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
custommenu <Menu Name>
allowdialback <enable|disable>
dialbacknumber <Phone Number>
group <default|power|admin>
permissions <Permission List>

Note: See User Permissions Commands (on page 334) for information on groups and
user rights.

Description

Configures the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to use LDAP to authenticate users who log
in via the Web, SSH, Telnet, or the console port.

set ldap bindpassword

Description

Set the LDAP bind password.

Syntax

set ldap bindpassword

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 326

 15: Command Reference

set ldap certificate import

Description

To upload X.509/PEM certificate for Start TLS encrypted connections:

Syntax

set ldap certificate import via <sftp|scp> rootfile <Cert Auth File>
certfile <Certificate File> keyfile <Key File>
host <IP Address or Name> login <User Login> [path <Path to Files>]

set ldap certificate delete

Description

To delete an LDAP certificate.

Syntax

set ldap certificate delete

show ldap

Syntax

show ldap

Description

Displays LDAP settings.

Local Users Commands

set localusers add|edit

Syntax

set localusers add|edit <User Login> <one or more parameters>

Parameters

allowdialback <enable|disable>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
changenextlogin <enable|disable>
changepassword <enable|disable>
clearports <Port List>
dataports <Port List>
dialbacknumber <Phone Number>
displaymenu <enable|disable>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 327

 15: Command Reference

listenports <Port List>

custommenu <Menu Name>
uid <User Identifier>
group <default|power|admin|Custom Group Name>
passwordexpires <enable|disable>
permissions <Permission List>

Note: See User Permissions Commands (on page 334) for information on groups and
user rights. Remove Escape & Break Sequences for users making raw binary connections
to Device Ports.

Description

Configures local accounts (including sysadmin) who log in to the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager by means of the Web, SSH, Telnet, or the console port.

set localusers allowreuse

Syntax

set localusers allowreuse <enable|disable>

Description

Sets whether a login password can be reused.

set local users complexpasswords

Syntax

set localusers complexpasswords <enable|disable>

Description

Sets whether a complex login password is required. Complex passwords require at least one
uppercase character, one lowercase character, one digit, and one non-alphanumeric character.

set localusers state

Syntax

set localusers state <enable|disable>

Description

Enables or disables authentication of local users.

set localusers delete

Syntax

set localusers delete <User Login>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 328

 15: Command Reference

Description

Deletes a local user.

set localusers lifetime

Syntax

set localusers lifetime <Number of Days>

Description

Sets the number of days the login password may be used. The default is 90 days.

set localusers maxloginattempts

Syntax

set localusers maxloginattempts <Number of Logins>

Description

Sets the maximum number of login attempts before the account is locked. Disabled by default.

set localusers password

Syntax

set localusers password <User Login>

Description

Sets a login password for the local user.

set localusers periodlockout

Syntax

set localusers periodlockout <Number of Minutes>

Description

Sets the number of minutes after a lockout before the user can try to log in again. Disabled by
default.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 329

 15: Command Reference

set localusers periodwarning

Syntax

set localusers periodwarning <Number of Days>

Description

Sets the number of days the system warns the user that the password will be expiring. The default
is 7 days.

set localusers reusehistory

Syntax

set localusers reusehistory <Number of Passwords>

Description

Sets the number of passwords the user must use before reusing an old password. The default is 4.

set localusers multipleadminlogins

Syntax

set localusers multipleadminlogins <enable|disable>

Description

Allows multiple admin logins among local users to the web server.

set localusers consoleonlyadmin

Syntax

set localusers consoleonlyadmin <enable|disable>

Description

Sets local users. to console only admin setting. If enabled, the admin user can only log into the
SLC via the console, and will be prevented from logging in via the web, SSH or Telnet.

show localusers

Syntax

show localusers [display <brief|extended>] [user <User Login>]

Description

Displays local users.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 330

 15: Command Reference

set localusers lock

Syntax

set localusers lock <User Login>

Description

Blocks (locks) a user's ability to login.

set localusers unlock

Syntax

set localusers unlock <User Login>

Description

Allows (unlocks) a user's ability to login.

set localusers permissions

Syntax

set localusers add|edit <user> permissions <Permission List>

where
<Permission List> is one or more of nt, sv, dt, lu, ra, sk, um, dp, do,
ub, rp, rs, rc, dr, wb, sn, ad, md, sd
To remove a permission, type a minus sign before the two-letter abbreviation for a user
permission.

Description

Sets a local user's permissions (not defined by the user group).

NIS Commands

set nis

Syntax

set nis <one or more parameters>

Parameters

allowdialback <enable|disable>
broadcast <enable|disable>
clearports <Port List>
custommenu <Menu Name>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 331

 15: Command Reference

dialbacknumber <Phone Number>

dataports <Port List>
domain <NIS Domain Name>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>
group <default|power|admin>
listenports <Port List>
master <IP Address or Hostname>
permissions <Permission List>

Note: See User Permissions Commands on page 334 for information on groups and
user rights.

slave1 <IP Address or Hostname>

slave2 <IP Address or Hostname>
slave3 <IP Address or Hostname>
slave4 <IP Address or Hostname>
slave5 <IP Address or Hostname>
state <enable|disable>

Description

Configures the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to use NIS to authenticate users who log in
via the Web, SSH, Telnet, or the console port.

show nis

Syntax

show nis

Description

Displays NIS settings.

RADIUS Commands

set radius

Syntax

set radius <one or more parameters>

Parameters

state <enable|disable>
allowdialback <enable|disable>
clearports <Port List>
custommenu <Menu Name>
dataports <Port List>
dialbacknumber <Phone Number>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 332

 15: Command Reference

breakseq <1-10 Chars>

escapeseq <1-10 Chars>
group <default|power|admin>
listenports <Port List>
permissions <Permission List>

Note: See User Permissions Commands on page 334 for information on groups and
user rights.

timeout <enable|1-30>

Note: Sets the number of seconds after which the connection attempt times out. It may
be 1-30 seconds.

Description

Configures the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to use RADIUS to authenticate users who
log in via the Web, SSH, Telnet, or the console port.

set radius server

Syntax

set radius server <1|2> host <IP Address or Hostname> secret <Secret>
[port <TCP Port>]

Description

Identifies the RADIUS server(s), the text secret, and the number of the TCP port on the RADIUS
server.

Note: The default port is 1812.

show radius

Syntax

show radius

Description

Displays RADIUS settings.

TACACS+ Commands

set tacacs+

Syntax

set tacacs+ <one or more parameters>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 333

 15: Command Reference

Parameters

state <enable|disable>
server1 <IP Address or Name>
server2 <IP Address or Name>
server3 <IP Address or Name>
secret <TACACS+ Secret>
encrypt <enable|disable>
authservice <login|pap|chap>
timeout <1-10 seconds>
dataports <Port List>
listenports <Port List>
clearports <Port List>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
custommenu <Menu Name>
allowdialback <enable|disable>
dialbacknumber <Phone Number>
group <default|power|admin>
permissions <Permission List>

Note: See User Permissions Commands (on page 334) for information on groups and
user rights.

Description

Configures the SLC 8000 advanced console manager to use TACACS+ to authenticate users who
log in via the Web, SSH, Telnet, or the console port.

show tacacs+

Syntax

show tacacs+

Description

Displays TACACS+ settings.

User Permissions Commands

set localusers group

Syntax

set localusers add|edit <user> group <default|power|admin|custom group

name>

Description

Adds a local user to a user group or changes the group the user belongs to.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 334

 15: Command Reference

set localusers lock

Syntax

set localusers lock <User Login>

Description

Blocks (locks) a user's ability to login.

set localusers unlock

Syntax

set local users unlock <User Login>

Description

Allows (unlocks) a user's ability to login.

set localusers permissions

Syntax

set localusers add|edit <user> permissions <Permission List>

where
<Permission List> is one or more of nt, sv, dt, lu, ra, sk, um, dp, do,
ub, rp, rs, rc, dr, wb, sn, ad, md, sd
To remove a permission, type a minus sign before the two-letter abbreviation for a user
permission.

Description

Sets a local user's permissions (not defined by the user group).

set <nis|ldap|radius|kerberos|tacacs+> permissions

Syntax

set <nis|ldap|radius|kerberos|tacacs> permissions <Permission List>

where
<Permission List> is one or more of nt, sv, dt, lu, ra, sk, um, dp, do,
ub, rp, rs, rc, dr, wb, sn, ad, md, sd

Description

Sets permissions not already defined by the assigned permissions group.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 335

 15: Command Reference

show user

Syntax

show user

Description

Displays the rights of the currently logged-in user.

Remote User Commands

set remoteusers add|edit

Syntax

set remoteusers add|edit <User Login> [<parameters>]

Parameters

dataports <Port List>

breakseq <1-10 Chars>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>
listenports <Port List>
clearports <Port List>
custommenu <Menu Name>
displaymenu <enable|disable>
allowdialback <enable|disable>
dialbacknumber <Phone Number>
group <default|power|admin|Custom Group Name>
permissions <Permissions List>
where
<Permission List> is one or more of nt, sv, dt, lu, ra, sk, um, dp, do,
ub, rp, rs, rc, dr, wb, sn, ad, md, sd
To remove a permission, type a minus sign before the two-letter abbreviation for a user right.

Description

Sets attributes for users who log in by a remote authentication method.

set remoteusers listonlyauth

Syntax

set remoteusers listonlyauth <enable|disable>

Description

Sets whether remote users who are not part of the remote user list will be authenticated.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 336

 15: Command Reference

set remoteusers lock|unlock

Syntax

set remoteusers lock|unlock <User Login>

Description

Allow (unlock) or block (lock) a user's ability to login.

set remoteusers delete

Syntax

set remoteusers delete <User Login>

Description

Removes a remote user.

show remoteusers

Syntax

show remoteusers

Description

Displays settings for all remote users

set <nis|ldap|radius|kerberos|tacacs+> group

Syntax

set <nis|ldap|radius|kerberos|tacacs> group <default|power|admin>

Description

Sets a permission group for remotely authorized users.

CLI Commands

set cli

Syntax

set cli scscommands <enable|disable>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 337

 15: Command Reference

Parameters

set cli scscommands <enable|disable>

set cli terminallines <disable|Number of Lines>
set cli menu <start|Menu Name>
show cli

Description
Allows you to use SCS-compatible commands as shortcuts for executing commands. It is
disabled by default.

Note: Settings are retained between CLI sessions for local users and users listed in the
remote users list.

set cli menu

Description

If a menu is associated with the current user and the menu was not displayed at login, 'start' will
run the menu. Users with full administrative or menu user rights can also specify the name of any
menu to run.

Syntax

set cli menu <start|Menu Name>

set cli terminallines
set cli terminallines <disable|Number of lines>

Description

Sets the number of lines in the terminal emulation (screen) for paging through text one screenful at
a time, if the SLC 8000 advanced console manager cannot detect the size of the terminal
automatically.

Note: Settings are retained between CLI sessions for local users and users listed in the
remote users list.

show cli

Syntax

show cli

Description

Displays current CLI settings.

show user

Syntax

show user

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 338

 15: Command Reference

Description

Displays attributes of the currently logged in user.

set history

Syntax

set history clear

Description

Clears the commands that have been entered during the command line interface session.

show history

Syntax

show history

Description

Displays the last 100 commands entered during the session.

Connection Commands

connect bidirection

Syntax

connect bidirection <Port # or Name> <endpoint> <one or more Parameters>

Parameters

Endpoint is one of:

charcount <# of Chars>
charseq <Char Sequence>
charxfer <toendpoint|fromendpoint>
date <MMDDYYhhmm[ss]>
deviceport <Device Port # or Name>
exclusive <enable|disable>
ssh <IP Address or Name> [port <TCP Port>][<SSH flags>]
where <SSH flags> is one or more of:
user <Login Name>
version <1|2>
command <Command to Execute>
tcp <IP Address> [port <TCP Port>]
telnet <IP Address or Name> [port <TCP Port>]
trigger <now|datetime|chars>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 339

 15: Command Reference

If the trigger is datetime (establish connection at a specified date/time), enter the date
parameter. If the trigger is chars (establish connection on receipt of a specified number or
characters or a character sequence), enter the charxfer parameter and either the charcount
or the charseq parameter.
udp <IP Address> [port <UDP Port>]

Description

Connects a device port to another device port or an outbound network connection (data flows in
both directions).

connect direct

Syntax

connect direct <endpoint>

Parameters

Endpoint is one of:

deviceport <Device Port # or Name>
ssh <IP Address or Name> [port <TCP Port>][<SSH flags>]
where <SSH flags> is one or more of:
user <Login Name>
version <1|2>
command <Command to Execute>
tcp <IP Address> [port <TCP Port>]
telnet <IP Address or Name> [port <TCP Port>]
udp <IP Address> [port <UDP Port>

Description

Connects to a device port to monitor and/or interact with it, or establishes an outbound network
connection.

connect global outgoingtimeout

Syntax

connect global outgoingtimeout <disable|1-9999 seconds>

Description

Sets the amount of time the SLC 8000 advanced console manager will wait for a response (sign of
life) from an SSH/Telnet server that it is trying to connect to.

Note: This is not a TCP timeout.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 340

 15: Command Reference

connect listen deviceport

Syntax

connect listen deviceport <Device Port # or Name>

Description

Monitors a device port.

connect terminate

Syntax

connect terminate <Connection ID>

Description

Terminates a connection.

connect unidirection

Syntax

connect unidirection <Device Port # or Name> dataflow

<toendpointfromendpoint> <endpoint>

Parameters

Endpoint is one of:

charcount <# of Chars>
charseq <Char Sequence>
datetime <MMDDYYhhmm[ss]>
deviceport <Port # or Name>
exclusive <enable|disable>
ssh <IP Address or Name> [port <TCP Port][<SSH flags>]
where <SSH flags> is one or more of:
user <Login Name>
version <1|2>
command <Command to Execute>
tcp <IP Address> [port <TCP Port>]
telnet <IP Address or Name> [port <TCP Port]
trigger <now|datetime|chars>
If the trigger is datetime (establish connection at a specified date/time), enter the date
parameter. If the trigger is chars (establish connection on receipt of a specified number or
characters or a character sequence), enter either the charcount or the charseq parameter.
udp <IP Address> [port <UDP Port>]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 341

 15: Command Reference

Description

Connects a device port to another device port or an outbound network connection (data flows in
one direction).

show connections

Syntax

show connections [email <Email Address>]

Description

Displays connections and their IDs. You can optionally email the displayed information.
The connection IDs are in the left column of the resulting table. The connection ID associated with
a particular connection may change if the connection times out and is restarted.

show connections connid

Syntax

show connections connid <Connection ID> [email <Email Address>]

Description

Displays details for a single connection. You can optionally email the displayed information.

Console Port Commands

set consoleport

Syntax

set consoleport <one or more parameters>

Parameters

baud <300-230400>
databits <7|8>
flowcontrol <none|xon/xoff|rts/cts>
group <Local or Remote Group Name>
parity <none|odd|even>
showlines <disable|1-50 lines>
stopbits <1|2>
timeout <disable|1-30>

Description

Configures console port settings.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 342

 15: Command Reference

show consoleport

Syntax

show consoleport

Description

Displays console port settings.

Custom User Menu Commands

When creating a custom user menu, note the following limitations:
 Maximum of 20 custom user menus.
 Maximum of 50 commands per custom user menu (logout is always the last command).
 Maximum of 15 characters for menu names.
 Maximum of five nested menus can be called.
 No syntax checking. (Enter each command correctly.)

set localusers

Syntax

set localusers add|edit <User Login> custom menu <Menu Name>

Description

Assigns a custom user menu to a local user.

set menu add

Syntax

set menu add <Menu Name> [command <Command Number>]

Description

Creates a new custom user menu or adds a command to an existing custom user menu.
set menu edit

Syntax

set menu edit <Menu Name> <parameter>

Parameters

command <Command Number>

nickname <Command Number>
redisplaymenu <enable|disable>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 343

 15: Command Reference

shownicknames <enable|disable>
title <Menu Title>

Description

Changes a command within an existing custom user menu. Changes a nickname within an
existing custom user menu. Enables or disables the redisplay of the menu before each prompt.
Enables or disables the display of command nicknames instead of commands. Sets the optional
title for a menu.

set menu delete

Syntax

set menu delete <Menu Name> [command <Command Number>]

Description

Deletes a custom user menu or one command within a custom user menu.

set <nis|ldap|radius|kerberos|tacacs+> custommenu

Syntax

set <nis|ldap|radius|kerberos|tacacs> custommenu <Menu Name>

Description

Assigns a custom menu to users who authenticate via NIS, LDAP, Radius, Kerberos, or
TACACS+.

set remoteusers add|edit

Syntax

set remoteusers add|edit <User Login> custommenu <Menu Name>

Description

Sets a default custom menu for remotely authorized users.

show menu

Syntax

show menu <all|Menu Name>

Description

Displays a list of all menu names or all commands for a specific menu.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 344

 15: Command Reference

Date and Time Commands

set datetime

Syntax

set datetime <one parameter>

Parameters

date <MMDDYYhhmm[ss]>
timezone <Time Zone>

Note: If you do not know a valid <Time Zone>, enter 'timezone <invalid time zone>' and
you will be guided through selecting one from the available time zones.

Description

Sets the local date, time, and local time zone (one parameter at a time).

show datetime

Syntax

show datetime

Description

Displays the local date, time, and time zone.

set ntp

Syntax

set ntp <one or more ntp parameters>

Parameters

localserver1 <IP Address or Hostname>

localserver2 <IP Address or Hostname>
localserver3 <IP Address or Hostname>
poll <local|public>
publicserver <IP Address or Hostname>
state <enable|disable>
sync <broadcast|poll>

Description

Synchronizes the SLC 8000 advanced console manager with a remote time server using NTP.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 345

 15: Command Reference

show ntp

Syntax

show ntp

Description

Displays NTP settings.

Device Commands

set command

Syntax

set command <Device Port # or Name or List> <one or more parameters>

Parameters

sensorsoft lowtemp <Low Temperature>

Sets the lowest temperature permitted for the port.
sensorsoft hightemp <High Temperature>
Sets the hightest temperature permitted for the port.
sensorsoft lowhumidity <Low Humidity %>
Sets the lowest humidity pemitted for the port.
sensorsoft highhumidity <High Humidity %>
Sets the lowest humidity permitted for the port.
sensorsoft degrees <celsius|fahrenheit>
Enables or disables temperature settings as celcius or fahrenheit.
sensorsoft traps <enable|disable>
Enables or disables traps when specified conditions are met.
sensorsoft status
Displays the status of the port.
sensorsoft showall
Displays the status for all connected Sensorsoft devices and ignores the device port\nlist.

Note: The Sensorsoft lowtemp and hightemp settings are given in the scale specified by
the degrees setting.

Description

Sends commands to (or control) a device connected to an SLC device port over the serial port.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 346

 15: Command Reference

Note: Currently the only devices supported for this type of interaction are Sensorsoft
devices.

Device Port Commands

set deviceport port

Description

Sets the dialout password.

Syntax

set deviceport port <Device Port # or List or Name> <one or more device
port parameters>
Example: set deviceport port 2-5,6,12,15-16 baud 2400

Parameters

actiondelay <Action Delay>

actionrestart <Restart Delay>
assertdtr <enable|disable>
auth <pap|chap>
banner <Banner Text>
baud <300-230400>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
bytethreshold <# of Characters>
calleridcmd <Modem Command String>
calleridlogging <enable| disable>
cbcptype <admin|user>
cbcpnocallback <enable|disable>
chapauth <chaphost|localusers>
chaphost <CHAP Host or User Name>
checkdsr <enable|disable>
closedsr <enable|disable>
connectedmsg <enable|disable>
databits <7|8>
device <none|sensorsoft|rpm> dialbackdelay <PPP Dial-back Delay>
dialbacknumber <usernumber|Phone Number>
dialbackretries <1-10>
dialinlist <Host List for Dial-in>
dialoutlogin <Remote User Login>
dialoutnumber <Phone Number>
dodauth <pap|chap>
dodchaphost <CHAP Host or User Name>
emailsubj <Email Subject>
emailto <Email Address>
flowcontrol <none|xon/xoff|rts/cts>
group <Local or Remote Group Name>
idletimeoutmsg <enable|disable>
initscript <Modem Initialization Script>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 347

 15: Command Reference

ipaddr <IP Address[/Mask Bits]>

locallogging <enable|disable>
maxdirect <1-15>

Note: We recommend preceding the initscript with AT and include E1 V1 x4 Q0 so that

the SLC 8000 advanced console manager may properly control the modem.

localipaddr <negotiate|IP Address>

logins <enable|disable>
minimizelatency <enable|disable>
modemmode <text|ppp>
modemstate <disable|dialin|dialout|dialback|dialinhostlist|dialondemand|
dialin+ondemand|dialback+ondemand|cbcpclient|cbcpserver>
modemtimeout <disable|1-9999 seconds>
name <Device Port Name>
nat <enable|disable>
nfsdir <Logging Directory>
nfslogging <enable|disable>
nfsmaxfiles <Max # of Files>
nfsmaxsize <Size in Bytes>
numsessionsmsg <enable|disable>
parity <none|odd|even>
portlogseq <1-10 Chars>
poweraction <on|off|cycle>
powermgmtseq <1-10 Chars>
powersupply <Managed Power Supply Name>
remoteipaddr <negotiate|IP Address>
restartdelay <PPP Restart Delay>
reversepinout<enable|disable>
sendstring <String to Send|QUOTEDSTRING>
sendtermstr <enable|disable>
showlines <disable|1-50 lines>
slmlogging <enable|disable>
slmnms <NMS IP Address>
slmthreshold <Threshold>
slmtime <Time Frame>
sshauth <enable|disable>
sshdatadir <netin|netout|both>
sshin <enable|disable>
sshport <TCP Port>
sshtimeout <disable|1-1800 seconds>
stopbits <1|2>
sysloglogging <enable|disable>
tcpauth <enable|disable>
tcpdatadir <netin|netout|both>
tcpin <enable|disable>
tcpport <TCP Port>
tcptimeout <disable|1-1800>
telnetauth <enable|disable>
telnetdatadir <netin|netout|both>
telnetin <enable|disable>
telnetport <TCP Port>
telnetsoftiac <enable|disable>
telnettimeout <disable|1-1800 sec>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 348

 15: Command Reference

termstr <Termination String>

timeoutlogins <disable or 1-30 minutes>
toggledtr <enable|disable>
tokenaction <List of none,log,trap,email,string,power>
tokendatadetect <enable|disable>
tokenstring <Regex String>
tokentrigger <bytecnt|charstr>
usblogging <enable|disable>
usbmaxfiles <Max # of Files>
usbmaxsize <Size in Bytes>
usbport <U1|U2|SD>
usbvbus <enable|disable>
usesites <enable|disable>
viewportlog <enable|disable>

Description

Configures a single port or a group of ports.

Set the modem password and CHAP secrets (any extra parameters will be ignored):
set deviceport port <Device Port # or List or Name> dialoutpassword
set deviceport port <Device Port # or List or Name> chapsecret
set deviceport port <Device Port # or List or Name> dodchapsecret
Reset a device port, terminating and restarting all relevant connections:
set deviceport port <Device Port # or List or Name> reset
Configure up to 4 managed power supplies for device connected to a device port:
set deviceport port <Device Port # or Name> managepower
Reset a device port, terminating and restarting all relevant connections:
set deviceport port <Device Port # or List or Name> reset

Note: A group of device ports can be configured by specifying a comma-separated list of

ports (i.e., '1-4,8,10-12') or 'ALL'. Remove breakseq for Device Ports connected to raw
binary connections.The logging level for the Device Ports log must be set to 'Info' to view
Syslog entries for Device Port logging. It is recommended that the 'initscript' be
prepended with 'AT' and include 'E1 V1 x4 Q0' so that the SLC may properly control
the modem.

set deviceport global

Syntax

set deviceport global <one or more parameters>

Parameters

sshport <TCP Port>

telnetport <TCP Port>
tcpport <TCP Port>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 349

 15: Command Reference

Description

Configures settings for all or a group of device ports.

show deviceport global

Syntax

show deviceport global

Description

Displays global settings for device ports.

show deviceport names

Syntax

show deviceport names

Description

Displays a list of all device port names.

show deviceport port

Syntax

show deviceport port <Device Port List or Name>

[display <ip|data|modem|logging|device>]

Description

Displays the settings for one or more device ports.

show deviceport types

Syntax

show deviceport types

Description

Displays the list of port types (RJ45 or USB) for all device ports.

show portcounters

Syntax

show portcounters [deviceport <Device Port List or Name>] [email <Email

Address>]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 350

 15: Command Reference

Description

Displays device port statistics and errors for one or more ports. You can optionally email the
displayed information.

show portcounters zerocounters

Syntax

show portcounters zerocounters <Device Port List or Name>

Description

Zeros the port counters for one or more device ports.

show portstatus

Syntax

show portstatus [deviceport <Device Port List or Name>] [email <Email

Address>]

Description

Displays the modes and states of one or more device port(s). You can optionally email the
displayed information.

Diagnostic Commands

diag arp

Syntax

diag arp|arp6 [email <Email Address>]

Description

Displays the Address Resolution Protocol table (for IPv4) or the Neighbor table (for IPv6) for
mapping IP Addresses to hardware addresses.

diag internals

Syntax

diag internals [email <Email Address>]

Enable debug printing on the next SLC reboot:
diag internals [printapplication <enable|disable>
printconnection <enable|disable>
printmanagement <enable|disable>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 351

 15: Command Reference

Description

Displays information on the internal memory, storage and processes of the SLC 8000 advanced
console manager. You can optionally email the displayed information.

diag lookup

Syntax

diag lookup <Name> [email <Email Address>]

Description

Resolves a host name into an IP address. You can optionally email the displayed information.

diag loopback

Syntax

diag loopback <Device Port Number or Name>[<parameters>]

Parameters

test <internal|external>
xferdatasize <Size In Kbytes to Transfer>
Defaults: test=external, xferdatasize=1K

Description

Tests a device port by transmitting data out the port and verifying that it is received correctly.
A special loopback cable comes with the SLC 8000 advanced console manager. To test a device
port, plug the cable into the device port and run this command. The command sends the specified
Kbytes to the device port and reports success or failure. The test is performed at 9600 baud. Only
an external test requires a loopback cable. The External test is currently not supported for USB
device ports.

diag netstat

Syntax

diag netstat [protocol <all|tcp|udp>] [email <Email Address>]

Defaults: protocol=all

Description

To display a report of network connections. You can optionally email the displayed information.

diag nettrace

Syntax

diag nettrace <one or more parameters>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 352

 15: Command Reference

Parameters

ethport <1|2>
protocol <tcp|udp|icmp|esp>
host <IP Address or Name>
numpackets <Number of Packets>
verbose <low|medium|high|disable>

Description

Displays all network traffic, applying optional filters. This command is available in the CLI but not
the web.

diag perfstat

Description

Display performance statistics for an Ethernet Port or Device Port, averaged over the last 5
seconds. Must specify an Ethernet Port or Device Port.

Syntax

diag perfstat [ethport <1|2>] [deviceport <Device Port # or Name>]

diag ping|ping6

Description

Verifies if the SLC can reach a host over the network.

diag ping|ping6 <IP Address or Name> [<parameters>]

Parameters

count <Number Of Times To Ping>

packetsize <Size In Bytes>
ethport <1|2>
Defaults: count=5, packetsize=64

diag sendpacket host

Description

Generate and send Ethernet packets.

Syntax

diag sendpacket host <IP Address or Name> port <TCP or UDP Port Number>
[string <Packet String>] [protocol <tcp|udp>]
[count <Number of Packets>]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 353

 15: Command Reference

diag top

Syntax

diag top [parameters]

Description

Displays CPU usage, memory usage and tasks.

Parameters

continuous <enable|disable>
count <Number of Iterations to Display>
delay <Delay in Seconds>
numlines <Number of Lines to Display>
Defaults:
count=1, delay = 5 seconds

diag traceroute

Syntax

diag traceroute <IP Address or Hostname>

Description

Displays the route that packets take to get to a network host.

diag usb

Syntax

diag usb [<parameters>]

Description

To display information about USB buses and the devices connected to them, including the
mapping between a USB device and the SLC port. For "mapdevice enable", the port numbers will
displayed at the end of the line in square brackets.

Parameters

treedisplay <enable|disable>
mapdevice <enable|disable>
email <Email Address>
Defaults: treedisplay=enable

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 354

 15: Command Reference

Events Commands

admin events add

Syntax

admin events add <trigger> <response>

<trigger> is one of:
dpdatadrop, humidlimit, pingfails, receivetrap, rpmload,
nomodemdialor templimit.
<response> is one of:
action syslog
action emailalert emailaddress <destination email address>
action snmptrap nms <SNMP NMS> community <SNMP Community>
action <fwdalltrapseth|fwdseltrapeth> ethport <1|2> nms <SNMP NMS>
community <SNMP Community> [oid <SNMP OID>]
action <fwdalltrapsmodem|fwdseltrapmodem> deviceport <Device Port #
or Name> nms <SNMP NMS> community <SNMP Community> [oid <SNMP Trap
OID>]
action <fwdalltrapsmodem|fwdseltrapmodem> usbport <U1|U2>
nms <SNMP NMS> community <SNMP Community> [oid <SNMP Trap OID>]
action <fwdalltrapsmodem|fwdseltrapmodem> internal modem
nms <SNMP NMS> community <SNMP Community> [oid <SNMP Trap OID>]

Description

Defines events.

admin events delete

Syntax

admin events delete <Event ID>

Description

Deletes an event definition.

admin events edit

Syntax

admin events edit <Event ID> <parameters>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 355

 15: Command Reference

Parameters

community <SNMP Community>

deviceport <Device Port # or Name>
ethport <1|2>
nms <SNMP NMS>
host <IP Address or Name>
oid <SNMP Trap OID>
outlet <Outlet #>
rpm <RPM Id or Name>
threshold <Load Percentage|Current in Amps>usbport <u1|u2>
internal modem
emailaddress <destination email address>

Description

Edits event definitions.

admin events show

Syntax

admin events show

Description

Displays event definitions.

Group Commands

set groups add|edit <Group Name> [<parameters>]

Syntax

set groups add|edit <Group Name> [<parameters>]

Parameters

dataports <Port List>

listenports <Port List>
clearports <Port List>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>
breakseq <1-10 Chars>
custommenu <Menu Name>
displaymenu <enable|disable>
allowdialback <enable|disable>
dialbacknumber <Phone Number>
permissions <Permission List>

Note: See 'help user permissions' for information on user rights.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 356

 15: Command Reference

Rename a group:
set groups rename <Group Name> newname <New Group Name>
Delete a group:
set groups delete <Group Name>
Show one or more groups:
show groups [name <Group Name>] members <enable|disable>

Host List Commands

set hostlist add|edit <Host List Name>

Syntax

set hostlist add|edit <Host List Name> [<parameters>]

Parameters
name <Host List Name> (edit only)
retrycount <1-10>
Default: retrycount=3, auth=enable.
auth <enable|disable>

Description

Configures a prioritized list of hosts to be used for modem dial-in connections.

set hostlist add|edit <Host List Name> entry

Syntax

set hostlist add|edit <Host List Name> entry <Host Number>

[<parameters>]
Parameters
host <IP Address or Name>
protocol <ssh|telnet|tcp>
port <TCP Port>
escapeseq <1-10 Chars>

Description

Adds a new host entry to a list or edit an existing entry.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 357

 15: Command Reference

set hostlist edit <Host List Name> move

Syntax

set hostlist edit <Host List Name> move <Host Number> position <Host
Number>

Description

Moves a host entry to a new position in the host list.

set hostlist delete

Syntax

set hostlist delete <Host List> [entry <Host Number>]

Description

Deletes a host list, or a single host entry from a host list.

show hostlist

Syntax

show hostlist <all|names|Host List Name>

Description

Displays the members of a host list.

Internal Modem Commands

Configure the internal modem:
set intmodem <parameters>

Parameters

auth <pap|chap>
calleridcmd <Modem Command String>
calleridlogging <enable|disable>
modemstate <disable|dialin|dialout|dialback>
usesites <enable|disable>
modemmode <text|ppp>
group <Local or Remote Group Name>
timeoutlogins <disable|1-30 minutes>
modemtimeout <disable|1-9999 sec>
localipaddr <negotiate|IP Address>
restartdelay <PPP Restart Delay>
remoteipaddr <negotiate|IP Address>
chaphost <CHAP Host or User Name>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 358

 15: Command Reference

initscript <Modem Init Script>

nat <enable|disable>
chapauth <chaphost|localusers>
checkdialtone <disable|5-600 min>
dialbacknumber <usernumber|Phone Number>
dialoutnumber <Phone Number>
dialbackdelay <PPP Dialback Delay>
dialoutlogin <Remote User Login>
dialbackretries <1-10>
Set the modem password and CHAP secret (any extra parameters will be ignored):
set intmodem dialoutpassword
set intmodem chapsecret

Note: It is recommended that the initscript be prepended with 'AT' and include
'E1 V1 x4 Q0' so that the SLC may properly control the modem.

Display settings for the internal modem:

show intmodem

IP Filter Commands

set ipfilter state

Syntax

set ipfilter state <enable|disable> [testtimer <disable|1-120 minutes>]

Description

Enables or disables IP filtering for incoming network traffic.

set ipfilter mapping

Syntax

set ipfilter mapping <parameters>

Parameters

ethernet <1|2|bond0> state <disable>

ethernet <1|2|bond0> state <enable> ruleset <Ruleset Name>
deviceport <1..48> state <disable>
deviceport <1..48> state <enable> ruleset <Ruleset Name>
usbport <U1|U2> state <disable>
usbport <U1|U2> state <enable> ruleset <Ruleset Name>
internal modem state <disable>
internal modem state <enable> ruleset <Ruleset Name>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 359

 15: Command Reference

Description

Maps an IP filter to an interface.

set ip filter rules

Syntax

set ipfilter rules <parameters>

Parameters

add <Ruleset Name>

delete <Ruleset Name>
edit <Ruleset Name> <Edit Parameters>
Edit Parameters
append
insert <Rule Number>
replace <Rule Number>
delete <Rule Number>

Description

Sets IP filter rules.

Logging Commands

set deviceport port

Syntax

set deviceport port <Device Port List or Name> <one or more deviceport
parameters>

Parameters

actiondelay <Action Delay>

actionrestart <Restart Delay>
bytethreshold <# of Characters>
emailsubj <Email Subject>
emailto <Email Address>
locallogging <enable|disable>
nfsdir <Logging Directory>
nfslogging <enable|disable>
nfsmaxfiles <Max # of Files>
nfsmaxsize <Size in Bytes>
poweraction <on|off|cycle>
powersupply <Managed Power Supply Name>
sendstring <String to Send|QUOTEDSTRING>
tokenaction <List of none,log,trap,email,string,power>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 360

 15: Command Reference

tokendatadetect <enable|disable>
tokenstring <Regex String>
tokentrigger <bytecnt|charstr>
usblogging <enable|disable>
usbmaxfiles <Max # of Files>
usbmaxsize <Size in Bytes>
usbport <u1|u2|sd>
sysloglogging <enable|disable>

Description

Configures logging settings for one or more device ports.

Local logging must be enabled for a device port for the locallog commands to be executed. To
use the set locallog clear command, the user must have permission to clear port buffers
(see Chapter 12: User Authentication.)

Example

set deviceport port 2-5,6,12,15-16 locallogging enable

show locallog

Syntax

show locallog <Device Port # or Name> [bytes <Bytes To Display>]

[startbyte <Byte Index>]

Description

Displays a specific number of bytes of data for a device port. 1K is the default.

set locallog clear

Syntax

set locallog clear <Device Port # or Name>

Description

Clears the local log for a device port.

The locallog commands can only be executed for a device port if local logging is enabled for
the port. The set locallog clear command can only be executed if the user has permission
to clear port buffers (see Chapter 12: User Authentication).

set log clear modem

Syntax

set log clear modem

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 361

 15: Command Reference

Description

Clear the modem log (the modem log is automatically pruned when it reaches 50K):

set log modem ppplog

Syntax

set log modem ppplog <enable|disable>

Description

Enables PPP activity messages in the modem log.

set log modem ppplog <enable|disable>

Syntax

set log modem pppdebug

Description

Enables PPP debugging messages in the modem log:

set log modem pppdebug <enable|disable>

Syntax

show log modem

Description

View the modem activity log for external modems and USB modems:
show log modem [display <head|tail>][numlines <Number of Lines>]

show log local

Syntax

show log local

Description

View the log for local, NFS, or USB logging (NFS and USB use the current logging settings for the
Device Port). Default is to show the log tail:
show log local|nfs|usb|sdcard <Device Port # or Name> [<parameters>]

Parameters

display <head|tail>
numlines <Number of Lines>
bytes <Bytes to Display>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 362

 15: Command Reference

startbyte <Byte Index>

logfile <NFS, USB or SD card Log File>
Defaults: bytes=1000, startbyte=1, numlines=40
Lists the NFS, USB, or SD card log files, either for a specific device port, or all log files in a USB,
NFS, or SD card location:
show log files nfs|usb|sdcard [localdir <NFS Mount Local Directory>]
[usbport <U1|U2>]
[deviceport <Device Port # or name>]

Network Commands

set network

Syntax

set network <parameters>

Parameters

interval <1-99999 Seconds>

ipforwarding <enable|disable>
probes <Number of Probes>
startprobes <1-99999 Seconds>

Description

Sets TCP Keepalive and IP Forwarding network parameters.

set network bonding

Syntax

set network bonding <disabled|active-backup|802.3ad|load-balancing>

Description

Configure Ethernet Bonding.

set network dns

Syntax

set network dns <1|2|3> ipaddr <IP Address>

Description

Configures up to three DNS servers.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 363

 15: Command Reference

set network dnsipv4prec

Syntax

set network dnsipv4prec <enable|disable>

Description

Configures IPv4/IPv6 lookup precedence.

set network gateway

Syntax

set network gateway <parameters>

Parameters

default <IP Address>

ipv6default <IPv6 Address>
precedence <dhcp|default>
alternate <IP Address>
pingip <IP Address>
ethport <1 or 2>
pingdelay <1-250 seconds>
failedpings <1-250>

Description

Sets default and alternate gateways. The alternate gateway is used if an IP address usually
accessible through the default gateway fails to return one or more pings.

set network host

Syntax

set network host <Hostname> [domain <Domain Name>]

Description

Sets the SLC host name and domain name.

set network port

Syntax

set network port <1|2> <parameters>

Parameters

state <dhcp|bootp|static|disable> [ipaddr <IP Address> mask <Mask>]

ipv6addr <IPv6 Address/Prefix>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 364

 15: Command Reference

mode <auto|10mbit-half|100mbit-half|10mbit-full|100mbit-full|
1000mbit-full>
mtu <Maximum Transmission Unit>
set network ipv6 <enable|disable>

Description

Displays DNS settings.

show network dns

Syntax

show network dns

Description

Displays DNS settings.

show network gateway

Syntax

show network gateway

Description

Displays gateway settings.

show network host

Syntax

show network host

Description

Displays the network host name of the SLC 8000 advanced console manager.

show network port

Syntax

show network port <1|2>

Description

Displays Ethernet port settings and counters.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 365

 15: Command Reference

show network ipv6

Syntax

show network ipv6

Description

Displays all ipv6 settings.

show network sfp

Syntax

show network sfp

Description

Displays network port 1 and port 2 SFP diagnostics.

show network all

Syntax

show network all

Description

Displays all network settings.

NFS and SMB/CIFS Commands

set nfs mount

Syntax

set nfs mount <one or more parameters>

Parameters

locdir <Directory>
mount <enable|disable>
remdir <Remote NFS Directory>
rw <enable|disable>
Enables or disables read/write access to remote directory.

Description

Mounts a remote NFS share.

The remdir and locdir parameters are required, but if they have been specified previously, you
do not need to provide them again.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 366

 15: Command Reference

set nfs unmount

Syntax

set nfs unmount <1|2|3>

Description

Unmounts a remote NFS share.

set cifs

Syntax

set cifs <one or more parameters>

Parameters

eth1 <enable|disable>
eth2 <enable|disable>
state <enable|disable>
workgroup <Windows workgroup>

Description

Configures the SMB/CIFS share, which contains the system and device port logs.
The admin config command saves SLC configurations on the SMB/CIFS share.

set cifs password

Syntax

set cifs password

Description

Changes the password for the SMB/CIFS share login (default is cifsuser).

show cifs

Syntax

show cifs

Description

Displays SMB/CIFS settings.

show nfs

Syntax

show nfs

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 367

 15: Command Reference

Description

Displays NFS share settings.

Routing Commands

set routing

Syntax

set routing [parameters]

Parameters

rip <enable|disable>
route <1-64> ipaddr <IP Address> mask <Netmask> gateway <IP Address>
static <enable|disable>
version <1|2|both>

Description

Configures static or dynamic routing.

To delete a static route, set the IP address, mask, and gateway parameters to 0.0.0.0.

show routing

Syntax

show routing [resolveip <enable|disable>] [email <Email Address>]

Description

Sets the routing table to display IP addresses (disable) or the corresponding host names (enable).
You can optionally email the displayed information.

RPM Commands

set rpm add

Syntax

set rpm add <RPM Name>

Description

Adds an RPM to be managed (prompts will guide selection of RPM vendor and model).

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 368

 15: Command Reference

set RPM command

Syntax

set rpm command <RPM Id or Name>

outlet <all|Outlet # or List> state <on|off|cyclepower>

Description

Sends a command to control one or more outlets on an RPM.

Syntax

set rpm command <RPM Id or Name> device <reboot|shutdown>

Description

Sends a command to control an RPM device.

Syntax

set rpm command <RPM Id or Name> beeper <mute|enable|disable>

Description

Sends a command to control an RPM beeper.

set rpm delete

Syntax

set rpm delete <RPM Id or Name>

Description

Deletes an RPM.

set rpm driver

Syntax

set rpm driver <RPM Id or Name> action restart

set rpm driver <RPM Id or Name> action debug [level <1|2|3>]
set rpm driver <RPM Id or Name> action show
set rpm driver <RPM Id or Name> action viewoutput [email <Email Address>]
[display <head|tail>] [numlines <Number of Lines>]

Description

Control and debug the RPM driver if the driver is not properly communicating with the PDU or
UPS: restart the driver; restart the driver with debug output to a file; show the running driver; view
and email the driver debug output.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 369

 15: Command Reference

Note: Drivers running in debug mode will generate copious output and for disk space
reasons should not be left running in debug mode for long periods of time.

set rpm edit

Syntax

set rpm edit <RPM Id or Name> <one or more parameters>

Parameters

name <New RPM Name>

outlets <# of Outlets>
ipaddr <IP Address>
port <TCP or Device Port>
login <RPM Admin Login>
rocommunity <SNMP Read-Only Community>
rwcommunity <SNMP Read-Write Community>
logstatus <disable|1-60 minutes>
snmptraps <enable|disable>
emailaddress <Email Address>
upslowbattery <shutdown|shutdownall|shutdownboth|allowfailure>
sdorder <disable|1-49>
powertoslc <enable|disable>
driveropts <Driver Options Override>

Description

Configure and control Remote Power Managers (RPMs), including PDUs and UPSes.

set rpm password

Syntax

set rpm password <RPM Id or Name>

Description

Set RPM administrative password.

show RPM

Syntax

show rpm [type <ups|pdu>]

[config <sdorder|notify>]
[device <RPM Name or Id> [data <raw|logs|envmon>]]

Note: The show rpm envmon command for RPM-configured ServerTech Serial/Network
Mode is not supported by NUT/Powerman.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 370

 15: Command Reference

Description

Display a list of all RPMs, RPMs of a specific type, UPS shutdown and notification configuration, or
details and outlets for a single RPM device.

SD Card Commands
Enables or disables access to SD Card devices:
set sdcard access <enable|disable>
Mounts a SD Card for use as a storage device. The SD Card can be used for saving
configurations, firmware updates and device logging.
set sdcard mount
Unmounts a SD Card:
set sdcard unmount
Formats a SD Card:
set sdcard format [filesystem <ext2|fat16|fat32>]
Defaults: filesystem=ext2
Runs a filesystem check on a SD Card (recommended if it does not mount):
set sdcard fsck
Displays a directory listing of a SD Card:
set sdcard dir
Renames a file on a SD Card:
set sdcard rename <Filename> newfile <New Filename>
Copies a file on a SD Card:
set sdcard copy <Filename> newfile <New Filename>
Removes a file on a SD Card:
set sdcard delete <Current Filename>
Displays information about the SD Card device:
show sdcard

Security Commands

set security

Description

Configures SLC security and FIPS settings.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 371

 15: Command Reference

Parameters

set security <parameters>

fipsmode

Parameters

fipsmode <enable|disable>

show security

Description

Displays security settings and current status.

Parameters

show security

Services Commands

set services

Syntax

set services <one or more services parameters>

Parameters

netlog <off|error|warning|info|debug> auditlog <enable|disable>

authlog <off|error|warning|info|debug> auditsize <1-500 Kbytes>
diaglog <off|error|warning|info|debug> clicommands <enable|disable>
servlog <off|error|warning|info|debug> includesyslog <enable|disable>
devlog <off|error|warning|info|debug> snmp <enable|disable>
genlog <off|error|warning|info|debug> v1v2 <enable|disable>
syslogserver1 <IP Address or Name> traps <enable|disable>
syslogserver2 <IP Address or Name> trapversion <1|2|3>
rpmlogsize <5-40 Kbytes> nms1 <IP Address or Name>
otherlogsize <5-400 Kbytes> nms2 <IP Address or Name>
telnet <enable|disable> alarmdelay <1-6000 Seconds>
timeouttelnet <disable|1-30 minutes> location <Physical Location>
telnetdatadir <netin|netout|both> contact <Admin Contact Info>
webtelnet <enable|disable> rocommunity <Read-Only
Community>
escapeseqtelnet <1-10 Chars> rwcommunity <Read-Write
Community>
outgoingtelnet <enable|disable> trapcommunity <Trap Community>
ssh <enable|disable> v3user <v3 RO User>
portssh <TCP Port> v3rwuser <v3 RW User>
v1ssh <enable|disable> v3trapuser <v3 Trap User>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 372

 15: Command Reference

timeoutssh <disable|1-30 minutes> v3security

<noauth|auth|authencrypt>
sshdatadir <netin|netout|both> v3auth <md5|sha>
dsakeys <enable|disable> v3encrypt <des|aes>
webssh <enable|disable> phonehome <enable|disable>
smtpserver <IP Address or Name> phoneip <IP Address>
smtpsender <Email Address> termbufsize <Number of Lines>

Description

Configures services (system logging, SSH and Telnet access, SSH and Telnet timeout, SNMP
agent, email [SMTP] server, and audit log.)

set services v3password

Description

Set SNMP v3 read-only, read-write and trap password/passphrase.

Syntax

set services v3password|v3phrase|v3rwpassword|v3rwphrase|v3trappassword

|v3trapphrase

show services

Syntax

show services

Description

Displays current service settings.

SLC Network Commands

set slcnetwork

Syntax

set slcnetwork <one or more parameters>

Parameters

add <IP Address>

delete <IP Address>
search <localsubnet|ipaddrlist|both>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 373

 15: Command Reference

Description

Detects and displays all SLC 8000 advanced console manager or user-defined IP addresses on
the local network.

show slcnetwork

Syntax

show slcnetwork [ipaddrlist <all|Address Mask>]

Description

Detects and displays all SLC 8000 advanced console managers on the local network.
Without the ipaddrlist parameter, the command searches the SLC network. With the
ipaddrlist parameter, the command displays a sorted list of all IP addresses or displays the IP
addresses that match the mask (for example, 172.19.255.255 would display all IP addresses that
start with 172.19).

SSH Key Commands

set sshkey all export

Syntax

set sshkey allexport <ftp|sftp|scp|copypaste> [pubfile <Public Key

File>][host <IP Address or Name>] [login <User Login>][path <Path to Copy
Keys>]

Description

Exports the public keys all of the previously created SSH keys.

set sshkey delete

Syntax

set sshkey delete <one or more parameters>

Parameters

keyhost <SSH Key Host>

keyname <SSH Key Name>
keyuser <SSH Key User>

Description

Deletes an ssh key.

Specify the keyuser and keyhost to delete an imported key; specify the keyuser and keyname
to delete exported key.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 374

 15: Command Reference

set sshkey export

Syntax

set sshkey export <ftp|sftp|scp|copypaste> <one or more parameters>

Parameters

[format <openssh|secsh>]
[host <IP Address or Name>]
[login <User Login>]
[path <Path to Copy Key>]
[bits <1024|2048|3072|4096>]
keyname <SSH Key Name>
keyuser <SSH Key User>
type <rsa|dsa>

Description

Exports an sshkey.

set sshkey import

Syntax

set sshkey import

Description

set sshkey import <ftp|sftp|scp|copypaste> <one or more parameters>

Parameters

[keyhost <SSH Key IP Address or Name>]

[keyuser <SSH Key User>]
[path <Path to Public Key File>]
file <Public Key File>
host <IP Address or Name>
login <User Login>

Description

Imports an SSH key.

set sshkey server import type

Syntax

set sshkey server import type <rsa1|rsa|dsa> via <sftp|scp>

pubfile <Public Key File> privfile <Private Key File>
host <IP Address or Name> login <User Login> [path <Path to Key File>]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 375

 15: Command Reference

Description

Imports an SLC host key.

set sshkey server reset

Syntax

set sshkey server reset [type <all|rsa1|rsa|dsa>]

Description

Resets defaults for all or selected host keys.

show sshkey export

Syntax

show sshkey export <one or more parameters>

Parameters

[keyhost <SSH Key IP Address or Name>]

[keyname <SSH Key Name>]
[keyuser <SSH Key User>]
[viewkey <enable|disable>]

Description

Displays all exported keys or keys for a specific user, IP address, or name.

show sshkey import

Syntax

show sshkey import <one or more parameters>]

Parameters

[keyhost <SSH Key IP Address or Name>]

[keyuser <SSH Key User>]
[viewkey <enable|disable>]

Description

Displays all keys that have been imported or keys for a specific user, IP address, or name.

show sshkey server

Syntax

show sshkey server [type <all|rsa1|rsa|dsa>]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 376

 15: Command Reference

Description

Displays host keys (public key only).

Status Commands

show connections

Syntax

show connections [email <Email Address>]

Description

Displays a list of current connections. Optionally emails the displayed information. The connection
IDs are in the left column of the resulting table. The connection ID associated with a particular
connection may change if the connection times out and is restarted.

show connections connid

Syntax

show connections connid <Connection ID> [email <Email Address>]

Description

Provides details, for example, endpoint parameters and trigger, for a specific connection.
Optionally emails the displayed information.

Note: Use the basic show connections command to obtain the Connection ID.

show portcounters

Syntax

show portcounters [deviceport <Device Port List or Name>]

[email <Email Address>]

Description

Generates a device port statistics report for one or more ports. Optionally emails the displayed
information.

show portstatus

Syntax

show portstatus [deviceport <Device Port List or Name>] [email <Email

Address>]

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 377

 15: Command Reference

Description

Displays device port modes and states for one or more ports. Optionally emails the displayed
information.

show sysconfig

Syntax

show sysconfig [display <basic|auth|devices>] [email <Email Address>]

Description

Displays a snapshot of all configurable parameters. Optionally emails the displayed information.

show sysstatus

Syntax

show sysstatus [email <Email Address>]

Description

To display the overall status of all SLC units. Optionally emails the displayed information.

System Log Commands

show syslog

Syntax

show syslog [<parameters>]

Parameters

[email <Email Address>]

level <error|warning|info|debug>
log <all|netlog|servlog|authlog|devlog|diaglog|genlog>
display <head|tail> [numlines <Number of Lines>]
starttime <MMDDYYhhmm[ss]>
endtime <MMDDYYhhmm[ss]>

Description

Displays the system logs containing information and error messages.

Note: The level, display, and time parameters cannot be used simultaneously.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 378

 15: Command Reference

show syslog clear

Syntax

show syslog clear <all|netlog|servlog|authlog|devlog|diaglog|genlog>

Description

Clears one or all of the system logs.

USB Access Commands

set usb access

Syntax

set usb access <enable|disable>

Description

Enables or disables access to USB devices.

USB Device Commands

show usb devices

Syntax

show usb devices

Description

Displays all usb devices with the port each device is connected to.

diag usb

Syntax

diag usb [<parameters>]

Parameters

treedisplay <enable|disable>
mapdevice <enable|disable>
email <Email Address>
Defaults: treedisplay=enable

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 379

 15: Command Reference

Description

Displays information about USB buses and the devices connected to them, including the mapping
between a USB device and the SLC port.

Note: For "mapdevice enable", the port names will displayed at the end of the line in
square brackets. To see a list of USB devices with vendor id and product id, use
'treedisplay disable'.

USB Storage Commands

set usb storage dir

Syntax

set usb storage dir <U1|U2>

Description

Views a directory listing of a USB flash drive.

set usb storage fsck

Syntax

set usb storage fsck <U1|U2>

Description

Runs a file system check on a thumb drive (recommended if it does not mount).

set usb storage format

Syntax

set usb storage format <U1|U2> [filesystem <ext2|fat16|fat32>]

Description

Formats a USB flash drive.

set usb storage mount

Syntax

set usb storage mount <U1|U2>

Description

Mounts a USB flash drive in the SLC 8000 advanced console manager for use as a storage
device.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 380

 15: Command Reference

The USB flash drive must be formatted with an ext2 or FAT file system before you mount it.

set usb storage unmount

Syntax

set usb storage unmount <U1|U2>

Description

Unmounts a USB flash drive. Enter this command before removing the USB device.

set usb storage rename

Description

Renames a file on a thumb drive.

Syntax

set usb storage rename <U1|U2> file <Filename> newfile <New Filename>

set usb storage copy

Description

Copies a file on a thumb drive.

Syntax

set usb storage copy <U1|U2> file <Filename> newfile <New Filename>

set usb storage delete

Description

Removes a file on a thumb drive.

Syntax

set usb storage delete <U1|U2> file <Current Filename>

show usb storage

Description

Display product information and settings for any USB thumb drive.

Syntax

show usb storage

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 381

 15: Command Reference

show usb

Description

Display currently attached USB devices with product information and settings.

Syntax

show usb
show usb modem

Description

Display product information and settings for any USB modem:

Syntax

show usb modem

USB Modem Commands

set usb modem

Syntax

set usb modem <u1|u2> <parameters>

Parameters

auth <pap|chap>
baud <300-115200>
9600 is the default.
calleridcmd <Modem Command String>
calleridlogging <enable|disable>
cbcpnocallback <enable|disable>
cbcptype <admin|user>
chapauth <chaphost|localusers>
chaphost <CHAP Host or User Name>
checkdialtone <disable|5-600 minutes>
databits <7|8>
dialbackdelay <PPP Dialback Delay>
dialbacknumber <usernumber|Phone Number>
dialbackretries <1-10>
dialinlist <Host List for Dial-in>
dialoutlogin <Remote User Login>
dialoutnumber <Phone Number>
dodauth <pap|chap>
dodchaphost <CHAP Host or User Name>
flowcontrol <none|xon/xoff|rts/cts>
group <Local or Remote Group Name>

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 382

 15: Command Reference

initscript <Modem Init Script>

localipaddr <negotiate|IP Address>
modemmode <text|ppp>
modemstate
<disable|dialin|dialout|dialback|cbcpserver|cbcpclient|dialondemand|
dialin+ondemand|dialback+ondemand|dialinhostlist>
modemtimeout <disable|1-9999 sec>
nat <enable|disable>
parity <none|odd|even>
remoteipaddr <negotiate|IP Address>
restartdelay <PPP Restart Delay>
service <none|telnet|ssh|tcp>
sshauth <enable|disable>
sshport <TCP Port>
stopbits <1|2>
tcpauth <enable|disable>
tcpport <TCP Port>
telnetauth <enable|disable>
telnetport <TCP Port>
timeoutlogins <disable|1-30 minutes>
usesites <enable|disable>

Description

Configures a currently loaded USB Modem.

Note: It is recommended that the initscript be prepended with 'AT' and include
'E1 V1 x4 Q0' so that the SLC may properly control the modem.

Set the dialout password and CHAP secrets:

set usb modem <U1|U2> dialoutpassword
set usb modem <U1|U2> chapsecret
set usb modem <U1|U2> dodchapsecret

show usb modem

Description

Display product information and settings for any USB modem:

Syntax

show usb modem

VPN Commands

set vpn

Syntax

set vpn

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 383

 15: Command Reference

Description

Configures setting for an IPsec VPN tunnel.

Parameters

set vpn <parameters>

name <VPN Tunnel Name>
ethport <1|2>
auth <rsa|psk>
auth <rsa|psk|x509>
remotehost <Remote Host IP Address or Name>
remoteid <Authentication Name>
remotehop <IP Address>
remotesubnet <one or more subnets in CIDR notation>
localid <Authentication name>
localhop <IP Address>
localsubnet <one or more subnets in CIDR notation>
ikenegotation <main|aggressive>
ikeenc <any|3des|aes>
ikeauth <any|sha1|md5|sha2_256|sha2_512>
ikedhgroup <any|dh2|dh5|dh14|dh15>
espec <any|3des|aes>
espauth <any|sha1|md5|sha2_256|sha2_512>
espdhgroup <any|dh2|dh5|dh14|dh15>
pfs <enable|disable>
lifetime <SA Lifetime in Seconds>
modeconfig <enable|disable>
xauthclient <enable|disable>
xauthlogin <User Login>
remotepeertype <ietf|cisco>
forceencaps <enable|disable>
deadpeerdelay <disable|1-300 seconds>
deadpeertimeout <5-1200 seconds>
deadpeeraction <restart|hold|clear>
Enter RSA public key or Pre-Shared Key of remote host:
set vpn key
Configure X.509 certificate for remote peer or local peer.
set vpn certificate local via <sftp|scp> rootfile <Cert Authority File>
certfile <Certificate File> keyfile <Private Key File>
host <IP Address or Name> login <User Login> [path <Path to Files>
set vpn certificate remote via <sftp|scp> [rootfile
<Cert Authority File>
certfile <Certificate File> host <IP Address or Name>
login <User Login> [path <Path to Files>
Delete X.509 certificate for local and/or remote peer.
set vpn certificate delete
Enter XAUTH password:
set vpn xauthpassword

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 384

 15: Command Reference

show vpn

Syntax

show vpn

Description

Shows the settings for the IPsec VPN tunnel.

Parameters

Display all VPN settings and current status:

show vpn [email <Email Address>]
Display detailed VPN status:
show vpn status [email <Email Address>]
Display VPN logs:
show vpn viewlog [numlines <Number of Lines] [email <Email Address>]
Display RSA public key of the SLC:
show vpn rsakey

set temperature

Syntax

set temperature

Description

Sets the acceptable range for the internal temperature sensor (an SNMP trap is sent if the
temperature is outside of this range). Temperatures can be entered in either Celsius or
Fahrenheit; to indicate a temperature is Fahrenheit, append the degrees with an ‘F’, i.e., “75F”.

Parameter

set temperature <one or more parameters>

Parameters: low <Low Temperature in C. or F.>
high <High Temperature in C. or F.>
calibrate <Temperature Calibration in C. or F.|cancel>

Note: The calibration offset will be applied one hour after setting the value.

Description

Displays the acceptable range and the current reading from the internal temperature sensor.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 385

 15: Command Reference

show temperature

Syntax

show temperature

Description

Shows the temperature.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 386

Appendix A: Security Considerations
The SLC advanced console manager provides data path security by means of SSH or Web/SSL.
Even with the use of SSH/SSL, however, do not assume you have complete security. Securing the
data path is only one measure needed to ensure security. This appendix briefly discusses some
important security considerations.

Security Practice
Develop and document a Security Practice. The Security Practice should state:
 The dos and don'ts of maintaining security. For example, the power of SSH and SSL is
compromised if users leave sessions open or advertise their password.
 The assumptions that users can make about the facility and network infrastructure, for
example, how vulnerable the CAT 5 wiring is to tapping.

Factors Affecting Security

External factors affect the security provided by the SLC unit, for example:
 Telnet sends the login exchange as clear text across Ethernet. A person snooping on a subnet
may read your password.
 A terminal to the SLC may be secure, but the path from the SLC 8000 advanced console
manager to the end device may not be secure.
 With the right tools, a person with physical access to open the SLC unit may be able to read
the encryption keys.
 There is no true test for a denial-of-service attack. There is always a legitimate scenario for a
request storm. A denial-of-service filter locks out some high-performance automated/scripted
requests. The SLC 8000 advanced console manager will attempt to service all requests and
will not filter out potential denial-of-service attacks.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 387

Appendix B: Safety Information

Safety Precautions
Please follow the safety precautions described below when installing and operating the SLC
advanced console manager.

Caution: EQUIPMENT IS FOR INDOOR USE ONLY!

Fuse Caution Statement

For protection against fire, replace the power-input-module fuse with the same type and rating.
Pour préserver la protection contre l'incendie, remplacez toujours le fusible du module
d'alimentation électrique par un modèle du même type et de la même capacité.
Ersetzen Sie die Netzteilsicherung nur durch eine Sicherung desselben Typs und derselben
Nennstromstärke um die Gefahr eines Brandes zu vermeiden.
Para proteger la unidad contra el fuego, sustituya el fusible del módulo de entrada de alimentación
por otro del mismo tipo y capacidad.

주의 – 전원 입력 모듈 퓨즈를 교환할 때는 화재 예방을 위해 형식과 정격 전압 전류가 동일

한 퓨즈를 사용하십시오 .
Предупреждение : Для защиты от пoжapa заменяйтe предохранитель блoкa
питания нa предохранитель тaкого же типа и c такой же хaрактериcтикой.

Cover
 Do not remove the cover of the chassis. There are no user-serviceable parts inside. Opening
or removing the cover may expose you to dangerous voltage that could cause fire or electric
shock. The exception is access to the internal modem and RTC battery. For these you don't
have to remove the chassis cover, but just the battery/modem door.
 Refer all servicing to Lantronix.

Power Plug
 When disconnecting the power cable from the socket, pull on the plug, not the cord.
 Always connect the power cord to a properly wired and grounded power source. Do not use
adapter plugs or remove the grounding prong from the cord.
 Only use a power cord with a voltage and current rating greater than the voltage and current
rating marked on the SLC unit.
 The SLC 8000 unit must be connected to a branch circuit provided with 15A or 20A, single
pole circuit breaker.
 Install the SLC 8000 advanced console manager near an AC outlet that is easily accessible.
 Always connect any equipment used with the product to properly wired and grounded power
sources.
 To help protect the product from sudden, transient increases and decreases in electrical
power, use a surge suppressor, line conditioner, or uninterruptible power supply (UPS).

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 388

 Appendix B: Safety Information

 Do not connect or disconnect this product during an electrical storm.

Input Supply
Caution: Disconnect all power supply sources before servicing to avoid electric
shock.
 Check nameplate ratings to assure there is no overloading of supply circuits that could affect
over current protection and supply wiring.

Grounding
1. Maintain reliable grounding of this product.
2. Pay particular attention to supply connections when connecting to power strips, rather than
directly to the branch circuit.

Rack
If rack mounted SLC 8000 advanced console managers are installed in a closed or multi-unit rack
assembly, they may require further evaluation by Certification Agencies. The following items must
be considered:
 Do not install the SLC unit in a rack in such a way that a hazardous stability condition results
because of uneven loading. A drop or fall could cause injury.
 The ambient temperature (Tma) inside the rack may be greater than the room ambient
temperature. Make sure to install the SLC 8000 advanced console manager in an environment
with an ambient temperature less than the maximum operating temperature of the SLC unit.
See Technical Specifications (on page 34).
 Install the equipment in a rack in such a way that the amount of airflow required for safe
operation of the equipment is not compromised.
 Mount the equipment in the rack so that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven
mechanical loading.
 Maintain reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment. Give particular attention to supply
connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g. use of power strips).
 Before operating the SLC 8000 advanced console manager, make sure the SLC unit is
secured to the rack.

Port Connections
 Only connect the network port to an Ethernet network that supports 10/100/1000 Base-T.
 Only connect device ports to equipment with serial ports that support EIA-232 (formerly RS-
232C).
 Only connect the console port to equipment with serial ports that support EIA-232 (formerly
RS-232C).
 Only connect a telephone line to the MODEM port.

Caution: To reduce the risk of fire, use only number 26 AWG or larger (e.g., 24
AWG) UL-listed or CSA-certified telecommunication line cord.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 389

Appendix C: Adapters and Pinouts
The serial device ports of the SLC products match the RJ45 pinouts of the console ports of many
popular devices found in a network environment. The SLC advanced console manager uses
conventional straight-through Category 5 fully pinned network cables for all connections when
used with Lantronix adapters. The cables are available in various lengths.
In most cases, you will need an adapter for your serial devices. Lantronix offers a variety of RJ45-
to-serial connector adapters for many devices. These adapters convert the RJ45 connection on
the SLC unit to a 9-pin or 25-pin serial connector found on other manufacturers' serial devices or
re-route the serial signals for connections to other devices that use RJ45 serial connectors.
The console port is wired the same way as the device ports and has the same signal options.

Note: You can view or change the console port settings using the LCDs and keypads on
the front panel, the Devices > Console Port page, or the command line interface show
console port and set consoleport commands.

The adapters illustrated below are compatible with the Lantronix SLC models.

Figure C-1 RJ45. Receptacle to DB25M DCE Adapter for the SLC unit (PN 200.2066A)

Use PN 200.2066A adapter with a dumb terminal or with many SUN applications.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 390

 Appendix C: Adapters and Pinouts

Figure C-2 RJ45 Receptacle to DB25F DCE Adapter for the SLC unit (PN 200.2067A)

Figure C-3 RJ45 Receptacle to DB9M DCE Adapter for the SLC unit (PN 200.2069A)

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 391

 Appendix C: Adapters and Pinouts

Figure C-4 RJ45 Receptacle to DB9F DCE Adapter for the SLC unit (PN 200.2070A)

Use PN 200.2070A adapter with a PC's serial port.

Figure C-5 RJ45 Receptacle to DB25M DTE Adapter (PN 200.2073)

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 392

Appendix D: Protocol Glossary
BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol)

Similar to DHCP, but for smaller networks. Automatically assigns the IP address for a specific
duration of time.

CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol)

A secure protocol for connecting to a system; it is more secure than the PAP.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Internet protocol for automating the configuration of computers that use TCP/IP.

DNS (Domain Name Servers)

A system that allows a network nameserver to translate text host names into numeric IP addresses.

IPsec

A protocol suite for securing Internet Protocol (IP) communications by authenticating and
encrypting each IP packet of a communication session.

Kerberos

A network authentication protocol that provides strong authentication for client/server applications
by using secret-key cryptography.

LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)

A protocol for accessing directory information.

NAT (Network Address Translation)

An Internet standard that enables a LAN to use one set of IP addresses for internal traffic and a
second set of addresses for external traffic. This enables a company to shield internal addresses
from the public Internet.

NFS (Network File System)

A protocol that allows file sharing across a network. Users can view, store, and update files on a
remote computer. You can use NFS to mount all or a portion of a file system. Users can access
the portion mounted with the same privileges as the user's access to each file.

NIS (Network Information System)

System developed by Sun Microsystems for distributing system data such as user and host names
among computers on a network.

NMS (Network Management System)

NMS acts as a central server, requesting and receiving SNMP-type information from any computer
using SNMP.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 393

 Appendix D: Protocol Glossary

NTP (Network Time Protocol)

A protocol used to synchronize time on networked computers and equipment.

PAP (Password Authentication Protocol)

A method of user authentication in which the username and password are transmitted over a
network and compared to a table of name-password pairs.

PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol)

A protocol for creating and running IP and other network protocols over a serial link.

RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service)

An authentication and accounting protocol. Enables remote access servers to communicate with a
central server to authenticate dial-in users and their access permissions. A company stores user
profiles in a central database that all remote servers can share.

SMB/CIFS

(Server Message Block/Common Internet File System): Microsoft's protocol for allowing all
applications as well as Web browsers to share files across the Internet. CIFS runs on TCP/IP and
uses the SMB protocol in Microsoft Windows for accessing files. With CIFS, users with different
platforms and computers can share files without having to install new software.

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)

A protocol that system administrators use to monitor networks and connected devices and to
respond to queries from other network hosts.

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

TCP/IP protocol for sending email between servers.

SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)

A protocol that provides authentication and encryption services between a web server and a web
browser.

SSH (Secure Shell)

A secure transport protocol based on public-key cryptography.

TACACS+ (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System)

A method of authentication used in UNIX networks. It allows a remote access server to

communicate with an authentication server to determine whether the user has access to the
network.

Telnet

A terminal protocol that provides an easy-to-use method of creating terminal connections to a

network host.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 394

Appendix E: Compliance Information
Manufacturer’s Name & Address
Lantronix Inc., 7535 Irvine Center Drive, Suite100, Irvine, CA 92618 USA
Declares that the following product:
Product Name(s): SLC™ Advanced Console Manager
Conforms to the following standards or other normative documents:
Safety
 IEC 60950-1:2005 (2nd Edition); Am 1:2009 + A2:2013
 EN 60950-1:2006 + A11:2009 + A1:2010 + + A12:2011 + A2:2013
 UL 60950-1, 2nd Edition, 2014-10-14 (Information Technology Equipment - Safety - Part 1:
General Requirements)
 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-07, 2nd Edition, 2014-10 (Information Technology Equipment -
Safety - Part 1: General Requirements)
 GB4943.1: 2011 China Product Safety Compliance for ITE
Electromagnetic Emissions
 FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class A EN 55022: 2011 (IEC/CISPR 22: 2009), class A
 EN 55032: 2012 + AC: 2013 (IEC/CISPR 32: 2015), class A
 KN 22: 2008 and KN 32: 2015 Korea Radio Disturbance Characteristics Compliance for ITE
 GB9254: 2008 China Radio Disturbance Characteristics Compliance for ITE
Electromagnetic Immunity
 EN 55024: 2010 Information Technology Equipment-Immunity Characteristics
 EN 61000-4-2: 2008, KN 61000-4-2 Electro-Static Discharge Test
 EN 61000-4-3: 2010, KN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity Field Test
 EN 61000-4-4: 2012, KN 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient Test
 EN 61000-4-5: 2014, KN 61000-4-5 Power Supply Surge Test
 EN 61000-4-6: 2013, KN 61000-4-6 Conducted Immunity Test
 EN 61000-4-8: 2009, KN 61000-4-8 Magnetic Field Test
 EN 61000-4-11: 2004, KN 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips & Interrupts
 KN 24:2008 and KN 35: 2015 Korea Immunity Characteristics Compliance for ITE
Supplementary Information

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 (CSA) and has been verified as
being compliant within the Class A limits of the FCC Radio Frequency Device Rules (FCC Title 47,
Part 15, Subpart B CLASS A), measured to CISPR 22: 2008 limits and methods of measurement
of Radio Disturbance Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment. The product complies
with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC and the EMC Directive 89/336/
EEC.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 395

 Appendix E: Compliance Information

Additional Agency Approvals and Certifications

 VCCI
 UL/CUL
 C-Tick
 CB Scheme
 NIST-certified implementation of AES as specified by FIPS 197
 CCC
 KC
This product carries the CE mark since it has been tested and found compliant with the following
standards:
 Safety: EN 60950-1
 Emissions: EN 55022, EN 55032 Class A
 Immunity: EN 55024

RoHS, REACH and WEEE Compliance Statement

Please visit http://www.lantronix.com/legal/rohs/ for Lantronix’s statement about RoHS, REACH
and WEEE compliance.

SLC™ 8000 Advanced Console Manager User Guide 396